Home

User's Guide - JL Systems Group

1. To specify a rectangular window around the Results area you want to magnify select first one corner A and then select the opposite corner B Zoom in Real Time With the Realtime option you zoom dynamically by moving your pointing device up or down By right clicking you can display a shortcut menu with additional viewing options To zoom in real time 1Choose View gt Zoom gt Realtime 2 Hold the Ctrl and the left mouse button then drag the cursor 3 To zoom in move the cursor up the screen to zoom out move the cursor down the screen JL Systems Group G Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CONTROL THE DRAWING VIEW 4 To stop zooming release the mouse button Standard toolbar 2 Command line RTZOOM To zoom using a mouse with a wheel Rotate the wheel away from you to zoom in or toward you to zoom out Each rotation of the wheel away from you zooms out 8 times each rotation toward you zooms in 1 25 times Displaying the previous view of a drawing After you zoom in or pan to view a portion of your drawing in greater detail you may want to zoom back out to see the entire drawing On the Zoom menu the Zoom Previous tool lets you restore the previous view Selecting this tool repeatedly steps back through up to 25 successive zoomed or panned views Zooming to a specific scale You can increase or decrease the magnification of your view by a precise scale factor mea
2. 4 Click Add if you want to add the currently found word to a list of custom spelling words The Check Spelling dialog will recognize the added word as spelled correctly the next time the word is checked for spelling Text toolbar Command line SPELL Work With Spelling Dictionary JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 224 NOTES AND LABELS Most drawings contain text that is not recognized as spelled correctly even though it is spelled correctly For example if your company name Zaffer Inc appears in all of your drawings the company name will appear as misspelled every time you check the spelling of drawing text You can easily add words to a custom dictionary so that any word in the custom dictionary is recognized as spelled correctly The custom dictionary is independent of any spelling dictionary you have chosen to use You can check the spelling of text using one dictionary check the spelling of the same or other text using a different dictionary and in both cases your custom dictionary is used TIP You can also add custom words to the custom dictionary directly during spell checking of text In the Check Spelling dialog click Add to add the currently found word to the custom dictionary To download and install a new dictionary 1 Choose Tools gt Spelling select one or more text entities then in the Check Spelling dialog box click Change Dictionaries 2 Click
3. 4 Do one of the following To arrange the viewports to fill the current graphic area type fit to screen To fit the viewports within a bounding rectangle specify the corners of a rectangle TIP When you create a layout viewport the layout viewport border is created on the current layer You can make layout viewport borders invisible by creating a new layer before you create layout viewports and then turning off that layer after you create the layout viewports To select a layout viewport s borders you must turn that layer back on before you can rearrange or modify the layout viewport A B C D E F G H You can create a single layout viewport or you can divide the graphic area into two viewports arranged vertically A or horizontally B three viewports arranged left C right D above E below F vertically G or horizontally H or four viewports I Use layout viewports Create multiple viewports in layout tab to view objects created in model space move and scale the objects as well The multiple viewports created in layouts can be overlapped or separated User can toggle to model space and edit objects in layout viewports within layouts When ranking layouts in paper space you can t edit the model Methods to toggle to model space are shown as follows Enter Model space by selecting Model tab Double clicking layout viewport PAPER Status will be changed into MODEL JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad
4. Insert OLE object menu select Create from File without clicking on the Link option to embed objects Once you have embedded OLE objects into the drawing you can create applications of the object and edit the original OLE object keep unchanged while you editing information of the source document source document compound document Link Objects When inserting OLE objects if you select Create from File and click Link option as well you can insert the linked OLE object into ZWCAD drawing Linking objects is a type of reference to the information of other document To use a link object for the same information in multiple documents you just modify the source object and perform OLELINKS command to set automatic or manual update document containing OLE objects You should keep accessing the source document and linked document If move or rename the source object you should rebuild links in the link file Source document compound document JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 336 SHARE DATA BETWEEN DRAWINGS AND APPLICATIONS 14 2 2 Import OLE Objects Inserts information of other applications that support OLE objects ZWCAD provides two ways of inserting OLE objects embed and link With the different that a link can be updated whenever you want embedding is unable to update because in lack of links You can use the following method to control visibili
5. properties such as the start point and endpoint of lines the center point and radius of JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 circles and the vertices of polylines You can modify all the properties of all entities simultaneously For example using the select command and the Select by Properties option select all blue entities and change their color to green In the Properties dialog box changes that you make in the Layer Color Thickness Lineweight Linetype and Linetype Scale affect all selected entities To modify properties of objects 1 Choose Modify gt Properties 2 Select the objects 3 In the Properties dialog box changes the desired properties m Te Standard toolbar ve Command line PROPERTIES Note that the Properties dialog box settings that display when no objects are selected determine the properties of new objects when you draw them Copy Properties Between Objects Using Match Properties you can copy some or all properties of one object to other objects The types of properties that can be copied include but are not limited to color layer linetype linetype scale lineweight 3D thickness By default all applicant properties are copied along with the objects You can also specify the desired properties to copy at the Property settings dialog box by typing MATCHPROP N source object seleted destination objectis selected r
6. JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 13 Subject and Keyword can also be set on Custom options of PDF printer dialog Note The Adobe Reader R7 or higher version is needed on view the published PDF file The version 9 3 is needed on Microsoft Windows 7 Steps for PDF printing 1 Choose Plot from the File menu 2 Choose PDF pc5 for the Name option from the Printer plotter tab on the Plot dialog 3 Click OK 4 Specify the location and the name for the PDF file in Save As dialog 5 Click Save Standard Toolbar Command PLOT Steps for adding PDF plotter The drawing can be published as PDF file format if you adding PDF plotter though Add plotter wizard Steps for adding PDF plotter as follow 1 Select Plotter Manager from File menu to open the ploiter s folder 2 Double click Add A Plotter Wizard to open Add plotter dialog 3 Select Next after you read the introduction in Add Plotter Introduction Page 4 Select My Computer from the Add Plotter Begin page and click Next 5 In Add Plotter Plotter Model page select PDF File Format from Manufactures option and select PDF from Models option Click Next to continue 6 Activate the Plot to File check box from Add Plotter Ports page and click Next 7 In Add Plotter Plotter Name page input your configuration file name or use the default name and click Next 8 Click Finish in Add Plotter Finish page
7. Result JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 10 To create a linear continued dimension NOTE Before you can use this procedure you must first create a dimension 1 Choose Dimensions gt Continue 2 To select a starting dimension press Enter 3 Select the next extension line origin and then press Enter Or press Enter and then select an existing dimension to continue 4 To add continued dimensions continue selecting extension line origins 5 To end the command press Enter twice Dimension toolbar z Command line DIMCONTINUE iet To add a continued dimension to an existing linear dimension select the existing dimension A select the next extension line origin B and select another extension line origin C 1400 1350 Result Create Rotated Dimensions You can create rotated dimensions at a rotated angle you specify using DIMLINNEAR Rotated option An example of a rotated dimension is shown in the following illustration In this illustration the specified angle of the rotated dimension is equal to the angle of the slot JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 244 DIMENSION AND TOLERANCES Fs Create Dimensions with Oblique Extension Lines By default the extension lines are perpendicular to the dimension line However if the extension lines conflict with other obj
8. Specify U Undo option to abort last stretch Specify X eXit option to exit stretch manipulation Specify target location for stretching directly 4 Move the pointing device to specify target location the selected grip on entities will be stretched based on itself or the new base point JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 To stretch an object using grips Result select the object A select a grip B and drag the grip to its new location C Grip Move Mode With grip move mode you can move selected entities by moving its grips The entity with specified grips will be highlighted and moved according to the specified orientation and position Objects of various types need to be moved through different grips For example to move a line use the midpoint as grip to move curve objects like arc circle or ellipse select center point or grip Not all the entities are enabled grip moving If you press ENTER or SPACE key after selecting grips all the grip modes are displayed choose Move and then command line prompts as follows Specify move point or Base point Copy Undo exit Move one or more Entities Select entities to move Click on grips of the entity to highlight the selected grip and activate the grip mode as Stretch Press ENTER to iterate grip mode until Move appears in command line Dynamic input box displayed on screen show
9. Zooming in and out One of the easiest ways to change the magnification of the drawing is to zoom in or out by a preset increment On the Zoom toolbar the Zoom In tool doubles the current magnification of the drawing The Zoom Out tool reduces the magnification of the drawing by half The portion of the drawing located at the center of the current viewport remains centered on the screen as you zoom in and out a ee zoomed out zoomed in JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 4 Zooming methods To zoom you can use any of the following methods To define the portion of the drawing to zoom create a window To zoom in real time press Ctrl hold and drag the left mouse button or use the Real Time Zoom tool on the standard toolbar If you have a mouse with a wheel rotate the wheel to zoom in and out Zoom to Magnify a Specified Rectangular Area You can specify a rectangular area defined by two corners to display the objects within that area as large as possibly The lower left corner of the specified area becomes the lower left corner of the new view Zoom window original wiew Pet w E To zoom in to an area using a window 1 Choose View gt Zoom gt Window 2 Select one corner of the window around the area you want to magnify 3 Specify the opposite corner of the window around the area you want to magnify Standard toolbar Command line ZOOM A
10. within the pattern The pattern tolerance is less restrictive than the individual feature tolerance datum amp 4 In the illustration above the axis formed by the point where datums A and B intersect called the datum axis The position of the pattern is calculated from that axis Before you create a dimension and add a composite tolerance for a drawing you have to specify the first line of a feature control frame and then choose the same geometric characteristic symbol for the second line of the feature control frame The specified geometric symbol compartment is extended over both lines Then you can create a second line of tolerance symbols 14 6722 Adding geometric tolerances Geometric tolerances indicate the maximum allowable variations in the geometry defined by a drawing ZWCAD draws geometric tolerances using a feature control frame which is a rectangle divided into compartments To add a geometric tolerance 1 Choose Dimensions gt Tolerance 2 To display the geometric tolerance symbols on the first line click the Sym box 3 Click to select a geometric tolerance symbol 4 Under Tolerance 1 click the Diabox to add a diameter symbol 5 In the field type the first tolerance value 6 To display the material condition symbols click the other line box in Tolerance 1 7 Click to select a material condition 8 Under Tolerance 2 repeat steps 4 through 7 to add a secondary tolerance value if appropriate
11. 1 Activate an object modification command 2 On the command line type wpolygon 3 Specify the vertices of the polygon 4 To complete the selection polygon press Enter JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 Window Polygon by specifying the vertices of the Resulting selection polygon A B and C Specify a Selection Fence It could be much easier to select entities in a complex drawing by using a selection fence A selection fence appears like a polyline and chooses only the entities it passes through To select objects using Fence 1 Activate an object modification command 2 On the command line type fence 3 Specify the endpoints of the Fence segments 4 To complete the Fence press Enter o o LODO Fence by specifying the endpoints of the fence Resulting selection segments A B and Use Other Selection Options Typing SELECT and entering displays all selection options from which you can choose a proper one Remove Selection from Multiple Objects Under the prompt of Select entities you can type R and choose a selection to remove objects from the selection set You also can enter A to add objects to the selection set Holding down SHIFT and selecting objects again the selected objects would be removed from the selection set 8 1 3 Quick selection You can use QSELECT to create a selection set includable or exclusive of the obje
12. 1 Choose Draw gt Donut 2 Specify the inside diameter of the donut 3 Specify the outside diameter of the donut 4 Specify the center of the donut 5 Specify the center point to draw another donut or press enter to complete the command Command line DONUT Inside diameter A and outside diameter B ZWCAD provides additional options for drawing donuts For example you can specify the width of the donut and two points on the diameter of the donut if you type 2p or you can specify the width and three points on the donut if you type 3p You can also draw a donut tangent to existing objects if you type rit TIP A donut can be a completely filled circle by specifying an inside diameter of zero To draw a donut tangent to existing objects 1 Choose Draw gt Donut 2 On the command line type rtt 3 Specify the width of the donut 4 Specify the diameter of the donut 5 Select the first tangent object to which to draw the donut 6 Select the second tangent object to which to draw the donut Command line DONUT JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 120 CREATE OBJECTS Width A and diameter B of the donut and tangent objects C You can edit donuts using the Edit Polyline tool onthe Modify Il toolbar You can convert donuts into arc objects using the Explode tool on the Modify toolbar 7 3 Create 3D Objects With 3D models you can View entities in thr
13. 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 2 If you are working in the command bar there are special ways that you can modify a command as you work You can modify the active command using any of the following options Object snaps Type an object snap command such as nearest or midpoint to enable a one time object snap for a single selection You can also use a one time object snap to override a running object snap Extension snaps Type int after selecting a command such as Line or Circle to enable a one time snap to the logical location where two objects would intersect if they were of infinite length Type app to enable a similar one time snap if the extensions would not intersect in three dimensional space but would intersect in the current view Using the Prompt History window The Prompt History window displays a history of the commands and prompts issued since you started the current session of ZWCAD By default the program tracks up to 256 command lines There is no limit to the number of command lines you can track but program performance may be degraded if you choose to track an excessively high number of lines To display or close the Prompt History window Press F2 To view entries in the Prompt History window Do one of the following Use the scroll bars Use the Up and Down arrows to display previously used commands To copy or paste text in the Prompt History window 1 If you want to copy text from the te
14. A B spline curve or surface defined by a series of weighted control points and one or more knot vectors object One or more graphical elements such as text dimensions lines circles or polylines treated as a single element for creation manipulation and modification Formerly called entity Object Snap mode Methods for selecting commonly needed points on an object while you create or edit a drawing object snap override Turning off or changing a running Object Snap mode for input of a single point OLE For object linking and embedding An information sharing method in which data from a source document can be linked to or embedded in a destination document Selecting the data in the destination document opens the source application so that the data can be edited JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 362 GLOSSARY origin The point where coordinate axes intersect For example the origin of a Cartesian coordinate system is where the X Y and Z axes meet at 0 0 0 orthogonal Having perpendicular slopes or tangents at the point of intersection Ortho mode A setting that limits pointing device input to horizontal or vertical relative to the current Snap angle and the user coordinate system page setup A collection of plot device and other settings that affect the appearance and format of the final output These settings can be modified and applied to other la
15. Copy and Paste cece taccxacrocseaasadessearaataczacnsnadeasuonaustaataadsecbenaetes 207 8 8 COI eC LINAS Fel Ke S atic ance ten isceciee sate metas raraaecas aenuneance sah acaessanupe cannons eaomnanenceannsethestaes 208 9 Notes and Labels sessesoesocsccsecoecoecoccoecoecocsoesessessessee 2 LU 9 1 CEE TEK a a eee 210 ST SWE E E eea a a Oy at Pee ere 210 ON Mitte Tex Csscciceceetee ersten eens eat leases tit aries Glan tate eta 211 9 1 3 Eede aa e a sltiewcadieceneutedes Setcecent seis E eae eee 215 9 1 4 Mu ulnleadct senenn nE EN EN EEEO 216 9 2 Chans SVK rca cs nes aahs paces ct aa scan aactaneei A A 218 9 3 Work With Text SUIS na eon ceundasaeiagaa hacuemries emsdens anenea sete tinae 219 9 4 Cheekin tne spellane OLEX harness 224 10 Dimensions and Tolerances ccccccccscscsscscccccces 227 10 1 Overview OL DIMENSIONING iaie ei tec hci ca an A us eden aa each hae k 221 10 2 UED On I aarti lata a a aetencra eae ase 228 10 2 1 Overview of Dimension Styles ccccsssseeececececcceeeeeeesssesseeeeeceeeeeeeeaqaas 228 1022 Control Divicnsion Elemen sccm 230 t02 Gomrol Dimension lexis erste ae ae a 232 10 2 4 Control Dimension Values ccccccccsssssseececceeeesseeeccececaaeeseeccesssauaansseeees 236 1025 Set the Scale for Dimensions 42 4 e ence eis 240 10 3 Create DIMENSIONS 4 5c22255 3ssan ances n A n a 240 t1031 Create Linear Dimensions moreeni eE A A A E E i a 241 10
16. Create Wireframe Models A wireframe model is an edge or skeletal composition of lines and curves that are used to define 3D objects Tips for Using Wireframe Models For the objects that are used to construct wireframe are required to be individually created and located creating 3D wireframe models can be more difficult and time consuming than creating their 2D views The following tips are provided to help you work more effectively Plan and organize models on layers so as to reduce the visual complexity of the model Specifying different color for each layer can help with differentiate between objects in Various views Create construction geometry to define the basic shape of the model Use multiple views especially isometric views to facilitate visualizing the model and selecting objects To be adept at manipulating the UCS in 3D Use the XY plane of the current UCS as a workplane to orient planar objects such as circles and arcs The UCS is also used as the plane for trimming and extending offsetting and rotating objects Use object snaps and grid snap carefully to ensure the precision of models Use coordinate filters to drop perpendiculars and easily locate points in 3D based on the location of points on other objects Create Wireframe Models You can create wireframe models by positioning any 2D planar object anywhere in 3D space using the following methods JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35
17. DO e A det E sans aeabsea atnae nash aA OS 119 7 3 Crede o DOD CCS eenaa a a ee 121 7 3 1 set 3D thickness and elevati omiterea hacen conan 122 Vidal Create Wireirame Modehncrnienndci nen 123 JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 7 4 T 7 6 TSi 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 7 3 3 MCAS UE AC OS Scere aah eed nce E ne cacao oe amin ede 124 7 3 4 Create BID SOS eirean enere E EE E 131 O TRC E E AE E E A A E NE A E E 141 Create Revisiom Cloud Sn ee i eine ee 143 Create Break LINGS 23 ssstssssie E eas alate a a 143 Create WiIDCOUIG satena a a a aaa dates 144 Modity OD VOCUS vesicciscevsiciscscicccccavssccnccectetereecssesevsstevsxes LAO IODICE E eect nee nae ee ee 146 8 1 1 Select Objects Individually rnei a 146 8 1 2 Sele CMU ODICE aee a E REA 148 8 1 3 OUICK Selec e a laceneecatninane aacua acaanoaas 150 8 1 4 CrO oie ker ee rere re mene Mert rertrTe eee mr nner errr Te er nn tren te hr rsry ere 151 Modify ODEO S a E aterm a ei ease tees 152 8 2 1 FRG MOVE ODE I Ta E EN E E E TR 152 82 2 Copy OUleClS cantata inanimate aaa ee 153 8 2 3 MOOC OD O Se E nice antes setae tek nats eee 154 8 2 4 PISCE LAM ODJECE asnon a a A 156 8 2 5 Create ami ATAV Ol ODjeCtS ccna eet ei eee 157 8 2 6 Move ODJECE te ala asta hateeaiaee 160 8 2 7 RoE DIC CIS eaaa a a biden Modahidunetes 162 8 2 8 PNG th ODIE CIS a a topia a 164 8 2 9 SCAlS OBJECtS r
18. Dimension toolbar he Command line DIMSTYLE 10 2 2 Control Dimension Elements You can modify the appearance of dimension lines extension lines arrowheads and center marks Modify Dimension Lines On the Lines and Text tab of the Modify Dimension Style dialog box you can set the color of dimension lies lineweight ticks beyond extend line baseline spacing and visibility Only when the arrowheads are assigned oblique stroke arrowheads architectural tick Integral dot small or none arrowheads you can set the displacement explains how far the dimension line extends beyond the extend lines otherwise this setting is not available You can also set the baseline spacing to control the spacing between successive dimension lines If text splits a dimension line you can specify whether each part of the dimension line is visible or not Modify Extension Lines Extension lines have the following properties color lineweight distance beyond extension lines offset from start of extension lines and visibility You can set these properties on the Lines and Arrows tab of the Modify Dimension Style dialog box If extension lines are unnecessary or there is not enough space to display extension lines JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 230 DIMENSION AND TOLERANCES you can suppress one or both of them The distance beyond extension lines means that how far the extension l
19. Select File eTransmit menu option On the Create Transmittal dialog box Files Tree or Files Table area click Add File button Select file to add to transmittal package from Open folder click Open You can repeat this procedure to add more files into transmittal package as you need To deselect the file having been added into the transmittal package click the check mark beside the file listed in Files Tree or Files Table Click Transmittal Setups button select a setup and then click Modify button In Modify Transmittal Setup dialog box set the transmittal package type as ZIP zip or Self extracting executable exe Under Transmittal file folder click Browse to specify folder where the transmittal package is created And displays standard select file dialog box Select folder where the transmittal package will be created click OK On the Modify Transmittal Setup dialog box click OK to close dialog box On the Transmittal Setups dialog box click Close Optional Specify any additional comments to include with the report file from the text box for Enter notes to include with this transmittal in Create Transmittal dialog box Click OK to create the transmittal package in your specified folder Command line ETRANSMIT Unpack a self extracting executable transmittal package Double click the transmittal package file in Windows Explorer In Extractor dialog box Select Browse to specify the folder where you want to unpack the tra
20. Select the polyline A move the current vertex Result marker to the first vertex of the segment you want to taper B and then specify the new starting and ending widths for that segment FIT You can create an arc fit polyline a smooth curve joining each pair of vertices The curve passes through all vertices of the polyline To fit a curve to a polyline 1 Choose Modify gt Object gt Polyline 2 Select the polyline 3 On the command line type fit 4 On the command line type another option or press Enter to complete the command Modifyll toolbar Command line PEDIT SPLINE Converts a polyline into a spline Specifies the vertices of the selected polyline as the control points or frame of a curve approximating a B spline The curve passes through the first and last control points unless the polyline is closed Original polyline After applying Fit curve After applying Spline DECURVE Straights splines fit curves with Fit option or splines created with Spline option LINTTYPE MODE Changes the linetype of a polyline When this option is off linetypes are generated starting and ending with a dash line at each vetex 8 3 3 Modify Multilines The multiple lines are comprised of 1 to 16 parallel lines elements You can use the JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 186 MODIFY OBJECTS methods such as common editing commands a multiline editing c
21. The UCSICON can also change the size and color of the UCS icon JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 7 1 Draw Linear Objects 7 1 1 Lines A line consists of two points a start point and an endpoint You can connect a series of lines but each line segment is considered a separate line object To draw a line 1 Choose Draw gt Line 2 Specify the start point 3 Complete the first line segment by specifying the endpoint To undo the previous line segment during the Line command enter u and then press ENTER Specify the endpoints of any additional line segments 4 Press Enter to complete the command To start a new line at the endpoint of the last line drawn start the Line command again and press Enter at the Specified Start Point prompt Draw toolbar N Command line LINE Start point A and endpoint B If the last object you drew was an arc you can also draw a line connect to and starting from the endpoint of the arc To draw a line as a continuation from the end of an arc 1 Choose Draw gt Line 2 Take the end of an arc as the start point of line 3 Specify the length of the line Draw toolbar N Command line LINE JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 100 CREATE OBJECTS Endpoint of previous arc A and length of the line B 7 1 2 Rays A ray is a line in three dimensiona
22. Type render and then press Enter To create a fully rendered image use any of these methods Choose View gt Render gt Full Render On the Render toolbar click the Full Render tool Type fullrender and then press Enter 4 7 8 Creating custom rendered images ZWCAD allows you to create custom rendered images by applying materials backgrounds and lighting including shadows to your drawing Materials Specify materials for different surfaces and define how the materials map to those surfaces Predefined materials are available in the materials library which can be customized further using the built in editor You can choose to use procedural or bitmap materials The Material includes Material Library and Material Mapping Material Library allows you to select from among a variety of predefined materials Material Mapping controls how the material is mapped to the surfaces in the drawing Most of the procedural materials and bitmapped materials are 2D in nature while the surfaces in the drawing are 3D Therefore there must be some method of mapping the 3D coordinates of the surface to the 2D coordinates of the material The Plane Normal Vector defines the orientation of the projection plane and is perpendicular or normal to the plane itself For example if you would like the projection plane to be the X Y plane the normal vector would be the Z Axis For a Cylindrical projection this vector defines the axis of the cylinder For a
23. Understand the Working Set Objects contained in working set are components of selectec refernces Extracts selected objects from the selected xrefs to edit in current drawing these objects having been extracted form a set called working set Objects in working set can be changed and saved and the xrefs or block definitions can be updated When constructing working set all the excluded objects of the working set may be fading displayed Control the Fading of Objects When editing references in place the selected objects are normally displayed except for other unselected xrefs or block references The fading degree is controlled by system variable XFADECTL This value set the displaying tensity of objects outside the working set The greater the value the more fading of the objects outside the working set displayed reference objects in drawing selected for editing other objects in drawing Use the Refedit Toolbar Buttons on refedit toolbar are obly available when you use edit in place command which contains the following buttons Edit reference Add objects to working set Remove objects from working set Discard changes to reference Save back changes to reference Add or remove objects from the working set When editing attached references you can add or remove refernces by clicking at Add objects to working set ORemove objects from working set lf new objects are created when editing references the new object may be taken
24. and displays the angle from the last point when prompt for distance and angle this option is available only when you create lines or other objects that prompt for more than one point 6 1 1 Enter 2D Coordinates When working in two dimensions you specify points on the xy plane You can specify any point as an absolute coordinate or Cartesian coordinate using the exact x coordinate and y coordinate locations relative to the origin the 0 0 coordinate point at which the two axes intersect or as a relative coordinate in relation to the previous point You can also specify points using relative or absolute polar coordinates which locate a point using a JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 6 distance and an angle Entering absolute Cartesian coordinates The 2D plane is a XY plane also called construction plane The 2D plane is similar to a flat sheet of grid paper If you want to use Cartesian coordinate values to specify a point enter an X value and Y value separated by a comma X Y The X value of a Cartesian coordinate is the positive or negative distance in units along the X axis The Y value of a Cartesian coordinate is the positive or negative distance in units along the Y axis The origin 0 0 indicates where the X Y axes intersect To enter absolute Cartesian coordinates type the coordinate location of the point in the command bar For example to use
25. angle 0 at the three o clock or east position when the Draw Orthogonal option is enabled lines are restricted to 0 degrees 90 degrees 180 degrees or 270 degrees As you draw lines the rubber banding line follows either the horizontal or vertical axis depending on which axis is farthest from the cursor When you enable the isometric snap and grid cursor movement is restricted to orthogonal equivalents within the current isometric plane JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 60 COORDINATES AND COORDINATE SYSTEM Ortho mode and polar tracking cannot be on at the same time Turning on Ortho turns off polar tracking To enable orthogonal drawing Press F8 Status bar click GRIAO 5 7 Work with Linetypes ZWCAD provides simple and complex linetypes A simple linetype consists of a repeating pattern of dots dashes or blank spaces A complex linetype contains embedded shape and text objects along with dots dashes and spaces You can use different linetypes to represent specific kinds of information For example if you are drawing a site plan you can draw roads using a continuous linetype a fence using a linetype of dashes with square posts or a gas line using a complex linetype showing the text GAS By default every drawing has at least three linetyoes CONTINUOUS BYLAYER and BYBLOCK You cannot rename or delete these linetypes Your draw
26. click Add Select objects to select the objects you want to add a hatch Repeate the procedures following step 2 Inthe Boundaries click Add Pick points to select an area or boundary you want to add a hatch Repeate the procedures following step 2 Draw toolbar E Command line BHATCH To use a predefined library pattern 1 Choose Draw gt Hatch 2 From the Hatch dialog box click the Style Options Hatch tab 3 Select a predefined type 4 To select a predefined pattern do one of the following Inthe Patterns list click the pattern name Click the graphical representation of the hatch pattern 5 To continue add a hatch by doing one of the following Inthe Boundaries click Add Select objects to select the objects you want to add a hatch Repeate the procedures following step 2 Inthe Boundaries click Add Pick points to select an area or boundary you want to add a hatch Repeate the procedures following step 2 Draw toolbar E Command line BHATCH NOTE Hatch patterns are memory intensive and can take a considerable amount of time to draw and display To improve performance add hatching as one of the last steps when you create a drawing or insert hatches on a separate layer that you can freeze as you continue to work on your drawing 12 1 4 SOLID With the Plane tool you can draw rectangular triangular or quadrilateral areas filled with a solid color The default method is to specify the corners of the p
27. dialog box select plotter as ZWCAD Virtual EPS Plotter and click Plot to File option and then click OK to close Plot dialog box And next start PLT dialog box in which user can specify saving path and file name save the file with extensions eps Controllable Properties of PostScript When exporting drawing as EPS files in PostScript format some objects will be rendered Affects the following properties Text attribute definitions and attributes If replace the font supportive of PostScript with the font with specified conversion text object text will be plotted in specified PostScript font Or else render the text with frame character Bold font and text control code If the text with thickness over O or contain control code such as O or D But rendered text will not plotted as PostScript font International symbol and special symbol exported as PostScript font ISO 8859 Latin 1 character set if use character value among 127 to 255 for text explain this text according to ISO 8859 Latin 1 If this character appears in the text reflected to PostScript re mapping a version of generating code vector to display ISO character set The text generated from re mapping will be exported in PostScript compatible format Circle arc ellipse elliptic arc Arcs and circles will be converted into corresponding PostScript path object if they have thickness Fill solids Plot the Fill solids in PostScript path 2D polyline Exports the 2D plana
28. in layer name option and then click Invert Filter option to display all the information excluded from the site plan information Name Layer Filters lists default filters and other saved filters created in the current drawing The three default filters are shown as follows Show all layers Show all used layers Show all Xref_dependent layers The new created filters are displayed in the Name Layer Filters at the Layer Properties Manager These filters are saved with the drawing Sort Layers From the Layer Properties Manager you can click column heading to sort layers by their properties in that column The properties include layer name visibility color lineweight plotted style and linetype And layer names can be sorted in descending or ascending alphabetical order 5 8 5 Save and Restore Layer Settings You can save the current layer settings in a drawing and restore them later Save Layer Settings Layer settings include Layer states such as on frozen locked plot and freeze automatically in a new viewport Layer properties such as color linetype lineweight and plot style You can save layer settings alternatively For example you can choose to save only Frozen Thawed settings of the layers in a drawing ignoring all other settings When you restore the layer states all settings remain as they are currently set except whether each layer is frozen or thawed You can export named layer states to an LAS
29. it s also enabled for both trim and extend But different for that polylines can even be wrapped if only self intersected curves are selected For splines it s only enabled for trim operation while extend is disabled Theory of wrap processing is determined by the following circumstances of selected object the selection frame contains the whole entity being selected or only part of the selected entity Intersection for the entities by frame selection lf the whole entity is included in the selection frame the curve being selected by the frame is a part among the origins of source curve the intersection can be either on the curve or at the extension intersection lf the frame only covers a part of the entity the residual part exclusive of the part among intersections is eventually obtained after wrap processing Process some specific curves with particular methods such as circle ellipse polyline an so on If the entire closed circle or ellipse is selected within the frame such objects will be taken as boundaries but not processing objects Whereas arcs and ellipse arc have two ends which determine the wrapped curve with the relation between two points and the frame if the two ends are not included in the frame process them as trimming other than extending or in case that only one end point is included in the frame extend the curve to the far most extension intersection and then get the curve with the same theory a
30. rat puracisren ore et en Poe ee rin foe BA M i ana ar we ore ere top left middle center middle right left justified center justified right justitied birrain ete kako et eer eatin ne Tararo ire es boo A Bk Perce Ton hep mbir Fm Coon kap wub ect Pima Zaar eal cub ject ey ead Ear eat tu Grane etek LENAT i E ei ee par on ir p in ETF an eerter mri ugar ah ater has Eee eee EP aparir Erena te Eaten vaas or ore D Eep reaa fa eee E BALTE E aE E Eris Ene SE ENE eae bottom left bottom center bottom right left justified cernter justified right justitied ae eure oplats SAAT Ee eE imaka Goa ria Iva GE Hele eaha opr EEDEN pear DTA Bea a ee aaee E E spree eras Marehem hry P3 en rey haetin darf he nary EEL Crete tha Fl bap be rriti Haa the Fl bay lt Peck hh Qo bey amp bra ie F bp br r peri Pr ety Lined it ar Pome hae a ae tHe trian sehr e E eae Te a ob Ee t aaraa ENE NEN Jai a arra amak ngjan alr au r ani than aan middle center top center top right left justitied center justified right justified Format Characters Within Multiline Text During creating multiline text you can assign a new value to the selected objects to overlap the default setting But the changes only affect the selected texts leaving the current text style unchanged In addition to specifying an underlines bold color and fonts for a single or multiple characters you can also specify a different text height The text height displayed in the Multiline Text
31. windows each window is a separate viewport on the Model tab On a Layout tab you must create at least one layout viewport to see your model However you can create multiple layout viewports that display unique views of your model located in model space Each layout viewport is created as a separate entity that you can move copy or delete Click any layout viewport to make it the current viewport and then add or modify model Space objects in that viewport Any changes you make in one layout viewport are immediately visible in the other viewports if the other layout viewports are displaying that portion of the drawing Zooming or panning in the current viewport affects only that viewport Create layout viewports The first time you switch to a Layout tab all of your model space objects disappear You JL Systems Group oe Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk LAYOUT PLOT AND PUBLISH DRAWINGS must create at least one layout viewport on the Layout tab to see your work You can create layout viewports anywhere inside the drawing area You can control the number of viewports created and the arrangement of the viewports To create layout viewports 1 On the command line type mview 2 Type fit Fit To View Create 2 Viewports Create 3 Viewports or Create 4 Viewports or specify two opposing corners to create a custom viewport 3 Choose the viewport orientation type h horizontal or v vertical
32. you ll be prompted to assign a name for an existing block definition The overall dimension scale factor determines the arrowhead size If you assign the User Define Arrowhead to the arrowhead in the Dimension Style Manager dialog box the block is inserted where the arrowheads would normally go when you create a dimension The X and Y scale factors of the object are set to arrowhead size overall scale You can trim the dimension line with text gap x overall scale units at each end If you want to trim the dimension line insert the rightmost block with a zero rotation angle for horizontal dimensioning And rotate the leftmost block at 180 degrees about its insertion point If you use paper spacing scale the scale factor is calculated before you applied it to the arrowhead size value Center marks While you are creating dimensions for circle or arc entities you can setup type and size for the center mark Three types of marks are provided here None Mark and Line 10 2 3 Control Dimension Text JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 232 DIMENSION AND TOLERANCES You can control the settings affecting the appearance of dimension text Any changes you make affect the current dimension style The preview frame on the upper right corner of the Modify Dimension Style dialog box shows the appearance of the dimensions based on the current dimension style settings Fit Dimension
33. 16 face A triangular or quadrilateral portion of a surface object feature control frame The tolerance that applies to specific features or patterns of features Feature control frames always contain at least a geometric characteristic symbol to indicate the type of control and a tolerance value to indicate the amount of acceptable variation fence A multisegmented line specified to select objects it passes through fill A solid color covering an area bounded by lines or curves FILL fit points Locations that a B spline must pass through exactly or within a fit tolerance fit tolerance The setting for the maximum distance that a B spline can pass for each of the fit points that define it font A character set comprising letters numbers punctuation marks and symbols of a distinctive proportion and design freeze A setting that suppresses the display of objects on selected layers Objects on frozen layers are not displayed regenerated or plotted Freezing layers shortens regenerating time LAYER front faces Faces with their normals pointed outward geometry All graphical objects such as lines circles arcs polylines and dimensions Nongraphical objects such as linetypes lineweights text styles and layers are not considered geometry grid An area covered with regularly spaced dots to aid drawing The spacing between grid dots is adjustable Grid dots are not plotted GRID grid limits The user defined r
34. 2 Jength length starti centert s centers starts length JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 7 Draw Arcs by Specifying Start End Direction Radius Draw an arc through specifying start end radius Direction enter a length or click a line segment using any pointing device either clockwise or counterclockwise If use the second way move the cursor to direct the arc upwards or downwards As the following picture shows move the cursor downwards to draw an arc up concaved D directions 2 a JPA 2 Start ench radius Start end directions Draw Contiguous Arcs and Lines Immediately after you complete an arc you can start a line tangent to the arc at an endpoint by performing Follow option from the LINE command prompt and pressing ENTER at the Specified First Point prompt Conversely if you perform Follow option from the ARC command prompt after you completed a line you can start an arc tangent to the line at an endpoint are start point resulting line art endpoint You can connect sequentially drawn arcs in the same way To create connected arcs using a menu click Arc from the Draw menu and then click Continue In both cases the resulting object is tangent to the previous one You can use the shortcut menu to repeat the Continue option To draw an arc tangent to an arc or line 1 Choose Draw gt Arc gt Continue 2 Specify the e
35. 2 2 eek 47 4 7 9 Prntine a render dima S esis akira ia tea teria ete eats a emai 48 Precision Tools and the Properties of drawing 50 Sul Specify Units Ancles and Soale siccsuscsssasieandoaactenesastern E E E 50 5 2 Drawn LIMS cae A E 53 5 3 ardand Grd Sia enei o i card e E 53 5 4 WISE ODICCE SMADS osota aa e 56 5D Use Polar Tracking and Object Snap Tracking 0 0 0 ccccssssseeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaas 58 5 6 Use Orthogonal Locking Ortho Mode cccccccceccceeeeeceeeeeessseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaas 60 5 7 WORK WIL TI NERY Do Sus u a T a a 61 5 7 1 Load and use WAN Gly OCS eain A T 61 5 1 2 Change the Linety pe of am OB OC lw iaccounsarcerwteaassiaceaissendroatauownssnaavetessencaenadenes 61 5 7 3 Control Linetype Scali eunme a a aa 62 5 8 Work wiih Layer irse esan ie e a E Eh 63 5 8 1 CON CE VIC W OU LIY eaea a a 64 5 8 2 Create and Name Layers rennin a a E a a 64 5 8 3 Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties 0ssssooooeeeeeessssssssssssssseeerree 65 5 8 4 Filter and Sort the List of Layer s ccccccccssseccceecceeeeeeesseseeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaaas 69 5 8 5 Save and Restore Layer Settings aceiecsit cedetei aie Getta 70 5 9 Work WAC COLORS sessing osea S E EAN EEN ONN EE 71 5 9 1 Use mdex COlONS rearea e E dine can ibeindda niacin 71 59 2 Usm TS COS ai eeo e pt e da E A EN 72 59 3 TSIM COLOLIDOOKS sii ch cesta naiettsahaaen cateoledusia a a 12 5 10 Control LANE W C1 thts sac
36. 2 On the command line type a ada 3 Using one of the following methods identify the first area Specify points defining a polygon and then press Enter Type e entity select the entities you want to add and then press Enter to complete the calculations 4 On the command line type s Subtract 5 Using one of the following methods identify the area to be subtracted Specify points defining a polygon and then press Enter Type e entity select the entities you want to subtract and then press Enter to complete the calculations 6 To complete the command press Enter al Inquiry toolbar Command line AREA To calculate the area of the gasket using the Area command first add the area of the entire gasket A and then subtract the areas of the two circles B and C As you select objects the program displays the calculations If the command bar is displayed the information appears there If the command bar is not displayed the program opens the Prompt History window and displays the calculations 5 12 2 Calculating distances and angles You can calculate the distance between any two points you select The following information is displayed The distance between the points measured in drawing units Their angle in the xy plane Their angle measured from the xy plane The change delta in the x y and z distances between the two points To calculate the distance between two points and their an
37. 3 In the Block Name box select the name of the block you want to insert 4 Specify the insertion point scale factors and the rotation angle for the block 5 Click Insert Draw toolbar Fx Command line INSERT Insert a Drawing File as a Block You are required to specify insertion point scaling and rotation angle while inserting the drawing file into the drawing If external references are included in the block the xrefs may not be normally displayed unless it has been inserted or attached into target drawing You can redefine insertion point scale factor and rotation angle each time you insert the drawing as the following picture shows block block inserted into drawing To insert an entire drawing into the current drawing 1 Choose Insert gt Block 2 In the Insert Block dialog box under Insert click From File 3 Type the path and the drawing file name or click Browse to specify the file from the Insert Drawing dialog box and click Open 4 Specify the insertion point scale factors and the rotation angle for the block 5 Click Insert Draw toolbar Command line INSERT NOTE You can specify the insertion point scale factors and rotation angle in the Insert Block dialog box before inserting the block You can also control whether the block is exploded back into its original component objects after insertion If you want to explode the block immediately select the Explode Upon Insertion check box Insert Blocks at Intervals
38. 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 7 Specifying 3D coordinates Which is X Y and Z location of the object Setting the default workplane the XY plane of the UCS on which you will draw the object Positioning an object by moving or copying to its proper 3D location after you create it 7 3 3 Create Surfaces 3D meshes uses planar embedded surfaces as its surface Defined from the the vertex position of initial mesh network axis and secondary network axis the direction of M and N in which Vertex of initial mesh network axis points to the M direction and N direction points to secondary network axis Similar to the function of X and Y axis on XY plane M and N are designated individually to the vertex position of row and column Meshes are available both in 2D and 3D spaces mainly used in 3D spaces Meshes can help solving the problem of using features like hide shade and render other than physical properties weight quality center of gravity that is unavailable in using wireframe You can also create irregular geometric drawings with meshes such as a 3D topographical model of mountainous terrain Either closed or open meshes can be created the following pictures show each meshes open or closed individually in M and N direction ve I ee wee Ta i oh Pe 1 r 7 EF whi Fi mn eure en S wa Fg ET Pi i fe ne Sar Wi closed M closed Mclosed s M open Ml opens M closed
39. Angle draws the construction line parallel to a specified angle Bisect draws the construction line perpendicular to an existing object Parallel draws the construction line parallel to an existing object To draw an construction line 1 Choose Draw gt construction line 2 Specify a point along the line 3 Specify the direction 4 To complete the command press Enter JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 7 Draw toolbar Command line XLINE Point along the infinite line A and the direction B You can also draw construction line at a specific angle or at an angle relative to an existing object 7 1 4 Multiple Line Objects Multilines consist of between 1 and 16 parallel lines called elements You can determine the position of elements by specifying offset from the origin of each element By default multiline objects contain two elements you should create and save new multiline styles by yourself or modify existing mline styles four elements three es E elements A 3 five elements end Create Multiline Styles While creating new mlines you can specify names of the new style together with inherited properties and set the amount and properties such as color linetype offset and so on for each element directly Meanwhile take into account on whether to fill the background and endcaps Both lines and arcs are available for speci
40. Draw gt Arc gt Start Center End 2 Specify the start point 3 Specify the center point 4 Specify the endpoint Draw toolbar ei Command line ARC Start point A center point B and endpoint C Draw Arcs by Specifying Start Center Angle Under command line prompts for drawing arcs draw an arc by specifying start point and included angle JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 112 CREATE OBJECTS Included angle The included angle determines the endpoint of the arc Use the Start End Angle method when you know both endpoints but cannot snap to a center point 2 6 LS start center angle center stat angel star ench angle To draw an arc by specifying two points and an included angle 1 Choose Draw gt Arc gt Start End Angle 2 Specify the start point 3 Specify the end point 4 Specify included angle To draw an arc in a counterclockwise direction enter a positive value for the included angle To draw an arc in a clockwise direction enter a negative value for the included angle Draw toolbar Command line ARC Start point A endpoint B and included angle C Draw Arcs by Specifying Start Center Length Draw an arc through specifying the center of the arc after picking the start point of arc then specify the length of arc Or using center start Length either which is actually equal to specifying included angle
41. Editor is the one you specified the height of the actual characters is displayed with the new height as well The text high is measure in drawing unit Indent Multiline Text and Use Tabs On the multiline text editor you can control the appearance of text objects and create a list by specifying the tap stops and indenting text The setting of tap stops and indent made before typing text are applied to all the texts You can also assign the settings to the selected paragraphs The arrowheads on the ruler are used to define the indent of text The above one is designed to specify the first line indent while the other one is designed to specify the paragraph indent While you dragging the indent mark on the ruler the L mark is displayed to represent the tab stops You can delete custom tabs by moving the L mark away from the ruler Specify the Line Spacing JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 9 The line spacing of multiline texts is the distance between the baseline of one line of text and the baseline of the next line of text You can right click mouse and choose Width and Line Space to specify the desired line space when the cursor stays on the text frame The single line space is the 1 66 times the height of the text characters You can specify either At Least or Precious option to specify the line spacing At Least increases line spacing automatically when the characters ar
42. Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 14 Select File eTransmit menu option In the Create Transmittal Dialog Box Files Tree or Files Table area click Add file button In the Open folder select the file to be added to the transmittal package click Open User can optionally repeat this procedure to add more files into transmittal package To clear the selection for files being added into the transmittal package click the check box marks beside any files on the Files Tree or Files Table Click on Transmittal Setup button select a transmittal setup from the Transmittal Setups dialog box and then click Modify button On the Modify Transmittal Setup dialog box set the transmittal package type as Folder set of files Under Transmittal File Folder click Browse to specify the folder where the transmittal package to be created A standard file selection dialog box is displayed Select folder where the transmittal package will be created click OK On the Modify Transmittal Setup dialog box click OK to close dialog box On the Transmittal Setups dialog box click Close Optional Specify any additional comments to include with the report file from the text box for Enter notes to include with this transmittal in Create Transmittal dialog box Click OK to create the transmittal package in the folder you specified Command line ETRANSMIT Create transmittal package for self extracting executable or ZIP file
43. Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 1 q File Edit view Insert Format Tools Draw Dimension Modify Express Window Help 2P Z AHA LESAHJ LAAN er KPOP RERA N C AOR NVOKNCcCeEe BAVA E FAG a ON o E ByLayer ByLayer ByLayer S3 S go Ak amp OO C pl F E Drawinal C Sample 1B dwg 4 b X Calculator cp YOerR EAX 3 PA he arn ae Ti ii Hehea r HR io IEI H i ETETETT i cos tan 12d dar abs Ea trune l Variables gt gt Miall MODEL AAAI Anke Calculator Properties O Wiewports ON OFF Fit Lock Object Polygonal 2 3 4 lt First corner Opposite corner amp Command S Opposite corner amp Command _options v Command a m p 73 7805 1 0894 0 SNAP GRID ORTHO POLAR ESNAP OTRACK LWT PAPER TABLET DYN Ready When you re ready to print or plot your drawing you can switch to paper space on a Layout tab where you provide a layout of the drawing as you want it to appear on a sheet of paper Reusing CAD drawings and entities When you create a paper drawing manually you can draw repetitive symbols by tracing a plastic template After you draw a symbol in ZWCAD you can reuse that symbol without having to redraw it You simply save the symbol as a block You can then insert copies of that block anywhere in your draw
44. Scaling and Panning within Non rectangular Viewports Geometric drawings in model space will be clipped according to viewport boundaries when scaling and panning within non rectangular viewports However scaling or panning in rectangular viewports may not display objects outside the viewport boundaries If using Extents option in ZOOM command for the objects to be clipped within non rectangular viewports system scales the drawing according to the extents of clipping boundary not all the geometric drawings are visible in non rectangular viewport 13 2 Plot Drawings JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 13 13 2 1 Overview of Plotting To understand relevant concept to facilitate users setting properties for plooting Plotter Manager Plotter Manager is a window in which all the plotter configuration PC5 files of user installation are listed If you want to use ZWCAD default plotting properties other than that of Windows system configured you can also create a new plotter configuration files for Windows system plotter Plotter configuration settings contain port information quality of raster images and vector drawings drawing size and customized properties based on plotter type User can start an Add Plotter Introduction Page dialog box by selecting Add A Plotter Wizard option from the Name pulldown box in Printer Plotter area on plot dialog box which is available
45. Select the block 3 Press Enter Modify toolbar Ls Command line EXPLODE 11 2 Define and Use Block Attributes An attribute is a particular object that you can save as part of a block definition Attributes consist of textbased data You can use attributes to track such things as part numbers and prices Attributes have either fixed or variable values When you insert a block containing attributes the program adds the fixed values to the drawing along with the block and you JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 212 BLOCKS ATTRIBUTE AND XREFS are prompted to supply any variable values After you insert blocks containing attributes you can extract the attribute information to a separate file and then use that information in a spreadsheet or database to produce a parts list or bill of materials You can also use attribute information to track the number of times a particular block is inserted into a drawing Attributes can be visible or hidden Hidden attributes are neither displayed nor printed but the information is still stored in the drawing and written to a file when you extract it Define Attributes You add an attribute to a drawing by first defining it and then saving it as part of a block definition To define an attribute you specify the characteristics of the attribute including its tag prompt and default text insert coordinates and text formatting and attri
46. Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 13 Click PAPER on status bar switch to MODEL The layout viewport on which you double clicked will be set as current view and enter model space with its frame highlighted Once a viewport has been changed all the other viewports display the modifications simultaneously Additionally layout viewport owns the superiorities as optionally freeze the layer in each layout viewport Thus you can display different objects in current viewport Meanwhile you can pan and scale the objects in viewports to display different views With the grips displayed in the viewport frame layout viewport is also available for changing the scale that geometrical drawings of model space display in viewports so as to adjust the viewport size Each viewport can be scaled like other objects using SCALE command which is only affective to the size of the viewport rather than the scale of the views Place Layout Viewports User can select to create a viewport fit to the entire layout and also specify a rectangle area to create layout viewports In the Viewports dialog box viewports of various standards or named viewport configurations which determined by the pattern you view the drawing and the plotting results are inserted into layouts Viewport configuration that are saved and named in model tab can be positioned in layouts as well The viewport will be saved as soon as new viewports are ranked and named and t
47. Text Within Extension Lines When there is not enough space between extension lines to accept both of dimension text and arrowheads you have to adjust one or both of their placement By default the system fits them best depending on the available space You can also specify other method to place them on the Fit tab of the Modify Dimension Style dialog box If there is not room for placing text and arrowheads however you want to keep them together and then they are both placed outside If there is room for only text or arrowheads you can specify either text only or arrowheads only to be placed between the extension lines You can also choose the Place text manually when dimensioning option to place dimension text manually The following illustrations show how system applies a best fit for arrowheads and text FU text and arrowheads arrowheads inside inside text outside inl i Tr text inside text and arrowheads arrowheads outside outside lf there is no space for text between the extension lines the system creates a leader automatically to place text You can set the relationship between them on the Text tab of the Modify Dimension Style dialog box If you choose the Always draw dim line between ext lines option on the Fit tab of the Modify Dimension Style dialog box system creates a line between the extension lines as dimension line even if neither the arrow heads nor the text are outside of the extension lines S
48. To create an extruded surface mesh 1 Choose Draw gt Surfaces gt Tabulated Surface 2 Select the object to extrude 3 Select the extrusion path Surfaces toolbar S Command line TABSURF JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 128 CREATE OBJECTS Select the object to extrude A and The resulting extruded surface mesh the extrusion path B TIP 7o control the density of the mesh change the values for the Number of M Direction Surfaces Choose Tools gt Draft Settings and then click the 3D Settings tab Under Surface Settings change the Number Of M Direction Surfaces NOTE An extruded mesh is different from an extruded solid If you want to extrude an object and convert it to a three dimensional solid use the Extrude command Create Revolved Surfaces Use REVSURF command to create a surface of revolution by rotating a profile of the object about an axis The object to be revolved can be a line arc circle ellipse elliptical arc closed polyline polygon closed spline or torus REVSURF is useful for surfaces with rotational symmetry cl co profile specified axis of revolution result specified 2 You can create a surface of revolution which is a three dimensional polygon mesh that approximates the surface generated by rotating a two dimensional profile around an axis You select the two objects that define the profile and the axis You also specify the st
49. Total length 206 Sa YEETEH d 13 argy 1 so 14 Handle EBB LE 15 Location 163162 18 TZEE Be i433 F f i l E P 06 Stating width E Tf Ending wadih oi Pra EH TER acoria 1A Bulga 20 artar 2 27 Hande Fu BB 22 Location R 183616032 Yabo 09 Pat ji 23 Seating width 0 28 Ending width T 25 Bulge 023 25l Etat Anga H rd a A 2 End Argle H 2ode0 wae ao Roadij iol 22 Caner piiri a TESTE 15 T 2 100 d ETH Parasti lal elf You can extract information stored in the drawing as visible or invisible attributes and use that data for analysis in a database or spreadsheet ZWCAD provides in place editing of Microsoft objects such as those created in Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel software programs In place editing makes it easy to share data with other users and programs For example you can include ZWCAD JL Systems Group a Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk INTRODUCTION AND INSTALLATION drawings in files created using Microsoft Word and you can insert files created using Microsoft Word into your ZWCAD drawings 1 1 4 Using advanced CAD features In addition to being compatible with AutoCAD ZWCAD goes several steps further by providing you with innovative features to increase your productivity Editing multiple documents simultaneously With ZWCAD you can open and edit multiple drawings simultaneously You can also copy and paste elements among
50. VB The main difference between VBA and VB is that VBA runs together with ZWCAD in the same process space and provides intellective and frequent program environment VBA provides application integration for those application programs supportive of VBA That is to say ZWCAD using other applications database can be Automation controlling program such as Microsoft Word or Excel and other applications You should purchase independent developed version of Visual Basic 6 providing ZWCAD VBA with extra components such as external database engine and report forms compiling function Four advantages of realizing VBA in ZWCAD VBA and its environment are prone to study and apply VBA is capable of running together with ZWCAD in the same process space and facilitate the program operating Rapid and effective construction of dialog box which enables developers construct prototype applications and receive design feedback quickly The project is both independent and embedded supported Which provides developers with flexible ways to release their applications VBA applications are saved in Projects files ZWCAD VBA project is a combination of code module class module and window all these modules and windows run together to JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 352 GLOSSARY execute specified function The project can be stored in both ZWCAD drawings and also can
51. Various methods are used for creating mesh both using keyboard way to specify mesh parameter or operating 3D command to draw planar mesh The size of Mand N of a mesh determines the number of lines drawn on each direction Create 3D surfaces You can create a three dimensional face which consists of a section of a plane in three dimensional space You define a three dimensional face by specifying the x y z coordinates of three or more corners After you specify the fourth point the program continues to prompt you for additional faces by alternating prompts for the third point and fourth point to allow you to build a complex three dimensional object Each three or four sided plane is created as a separate three dimensional face object To create a three dimensional face 1 Choose Draw gt Surfaces gt 3D Face 2 Specify the first point of the three dimensional face 3 Specify the second third and fourth points 4 Specify the third and fourth points for additional faces 5 To complete the command press Enter Surfaces toolbar a Command line 3DFACE TIP Any or all edges of a three dimensional face can be invisible to allow you to more accurately model objects with holes in them As the program prompts you for the corner points in the prompt box choose Invisible Edge to make the next edge invisible JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 124 CREATE OBJECTS An exampl
52. WCS unless you modify the system variable WORLDVIEW The conventions for defining standard views are different among different industries In architectural ARC design the perpendicular plane of XY plane is the top view or plan JL Systems Group a Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CONTROL THE DRAWING VIEW view in mechanical design the perpendicular view is the front view DDVPOINT is designed to rotate views to specify a viewing direction The following illustration shows a view defined by two angles relative to the X axis and the XY plane of the WCS z viewpoint yiew direction x f Late toms plane wa angle from axis y 4 7 5 Change a 3D View Dynamically You can view objects from any viewing direction by holding down mouse or other pointing device and moving dynamically With dynamic viewing you can display the effects of changing viewpoint while you change the view You can execute move or zoom operations as the 3D Orbit is active When the 3D Orbit is active you are not allowed to modify objects To close 3D Orbit press Enter ESC or choose Exit from the shortcut menu 4 7 6 Hide Lines or Shade 3D Objects Hides or shapes for 3D objects in the current drawing suppresses the display of the objects partly or entirely that are located behind other objects or generates a simply shaded image displayed in the current view Hide Lines You can suppr
53. Web Format dwf files and drawing template dwt files You can also open and check drawings that you suspect are damaged To open an existing drawing 1 Choose File gt Open 2 In Files of Type choose the type of file you want to open 3 Choose the folder containing the desired file 4 Do one of the following Choose the drawing you want to open and then click Open Double click the drawing you want to open If the drawing requires a password enter the password click OK to verify the password and then click Open again Standard toolbar 4 Command line OPEN TIP You can also open drawings while browsing files on your computer using programs that came with your operating system such as Windows File Explorer or My Computer Just double click the file to get it open in ZWCAD Easily find the drawing you want by viewing thumbnail images of the drawing files as you browse them TIP To quickly open a drawing file that you recently used choose File gt lt file name gt The File menu tracks the latest four drawings by default 3 2 1 Find and open a Drawing File JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 24 CREATE AND SAVE A DRAWING You can search for a drawing using name location and date filters or properties such as keywords that you added to the drawing Open drawing Uses Open on the File menu or Quick Access toolbar to open Select File dialo
54. When the cursor stays at the current viewport it is displayed as crosshairs instead of an arrow You cannot change the current viewport when a view command is in progress Working with multiple views of a single drawing You can open and work with several views of the same drawing simultaneously After you divide a single window into multiple windows you can control each window separately For example you can zoom or pan in one window without affecting the display in any of the other windows You can control the grid snap and view orientation separately for each window You can restore named views in individual windows draw from one window to another and name window configurations individually so you can reuse them later As you draw any changes you make in one window are immediately visible in the others You can switch from one window to another at any time even in the middle of a command by clicking the window s title bar You can divide a single drawing window into multiple tiled windows called viewports on the Model tab You can control the number of windows created and the arrangement of the windows You can also save and restore named window configurations and display a list of the current and saved window configurations To create multiple views 1 Choose View gt Viewports 2 In viewports menu choose 1 2 3 or 4 viewports 3 Type h if you want the horizontal orientation or type v if you want the vertical orientation Co
55. X and Y ordinate values are determined by the absolute coordinate value of the current UCS Before creating ordinate dimensions it recommends you to reset the UCS origin to coincide with the datum JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 10 UCS origin In ordinate dimensions the dimension text is always aligned with the ordinate leader line ignoring the text orientation defined by the current dimension style You can also supply your own text or accept the default one To create an ordinate dimension 1 Choose Dimensions gt Ordinate 2 Select the point for ordinate dimension 3 Specify the ordinate leader endpoint Dimension toolbar ad Command line DIMORDINATE Select the ordinate point A and then specify the ordinate leader endpoint B TIP To select precise ordinate points use entity snaps 10 3 6 Create Quick Dimension Creates or edits a series of dimensions quickly by typing QDIM command To create a quick dimension 1 Choose Dimensions gt Quick Dimension 2 Select the entity to dimension then press Enter 3 On the command line it will display Specify dimension line position or Continuous Staggered Baseline Ordinate Radius Diameter datumPoint Edit lt Continuous gt You can type the command what you want The default command is continuous Dimension toolbar y Command line QDIM 10 3 7 Create Arc Length Dimension Arc length dime
56. a WCS UCS can be moved which helps you modify particular sections of your drawing easily At the same time you can rotate UCS to specify points in 3D or rotated views When you rotate UCS Snap Grid and Ortho modes all rotate in line with the new UCS Actually you enter coordinate value in the current UCS There are several methods for relocating UCS shown as follows Move the UCS by defining a new origin Align the UCS with an existing object or with the current viewing direction Rotate the current UCS around any of its axes Restore a saved UCS You can name a defined UCS and then restore it when needed The UCS Previous option can reverse up to last 10 coordinate systems in the current session You can delete a named UCS whenever you do not need it A UCS can also be restored to coincide with the WCS Use World and User Coordinate Systems in 3D It is helpful for creating 3D model by controlling the UCS Use World and User Coordinate Systems In 3D space there is both a fixed WCS and a movable UCS When you work in 3D the movable UCS can help you enter coordinate establish drawing planes and set views easily Neither moving nor rotating UCS changes your viewport The only changes are the orientation and tilt of the coordinate system When you work in 3D you can simplify the creation of 3D objects by relocating the UCS To relocate the UCS change the location of the origin point and the orientation of the XY plane an
57. a block When the block is inserted into a drawing it acquires the current lineweight setting To specify a lineweight for the current layer that is different from the current lineweight open the Layer Properties Manager and give a specific value By default the lineweight of an object is set to BYLAER and the lineweight of a layer is set to DEFAULT Lineweight that is assigned to objects is displayed as a solid fill drawn in the object s assigned color To set the current lineweight 1 Choose Format gt Lineweight L JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk COORDINATES AND COORDINATE SYSTEM 2 In the Lineweight list choose the lineweight that you want to make current 3 Click OK Command line LINEWEIGHT TIP On the status bar click the LWT button to toggle the display of lineweights on and off NOTE To see lineweights in your drawing you may need to turn on lineweights Change the Lineweight of an Object There are three choices for changing the lineweight of an object lf the lineweight of an object is set to BYLAYER and you reassign the object to a different layer the object acquires its lineweight from the new layer If the lineweight of an object is set to BYLAYER you can change the lineweight of the layer the object is on and all objects assigned to BYLAYER on that layer are updated automatically Specify a lineweight for an object to override the
58. absolute Cartesian coordinates to draw a line from the origin 0 0 to a point 3 units to the right and 1 unit above the origin start the Line command and respond to the prompts as follows Start of line 0 0 Angle Length lt End point gt 3 1 Drawing a line using the absolute Cartesian coordinate method Entering relative Cartesian coordinates Another simpler method is to use relative Cartesian coordinates you specify a location in the drawing by determining its position relative to the last coordinate you specified To use relative Cartesian coordinates type the coordinate values in the command bar preceded by the at symbol The coordinate pair following the symbol represents the distance along the xaxis and the y axis to the next point For example to draw an 8 5 unit square with its lower left corner at 4 5 using relative Cartesian coordinates start the Line command and then respond to the prompts as follows Start of line 4 5 Angle Length lt End point gt 8 5 0 Angle Length Follow Undo lt End point gt 0 8 5 Angle Length Follow Close Undo lt End point gt 8 5 0 Angle Length Follow Close Undo lt End point gt C JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 86 COORDINATES AND COORDINATE SYSTEM Drawing a square using the relative Cartesian coordinates method enter C to close The first relative coordinate 8 5 0 locates the new point 8 5 units
59. aligned or angular dimension If no dimension in the current session the system prompts for selecting linear aligned or angular dimension If there are dimensions in the current session you can create baseline or continued dimensions incrementally from the most recently created dimension Unless you specify another point as the origin both baseline JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 242 DIMENSION AND TOLERANCES and continued dimensions are always measured from the previous extension line The following illustration shows the baseline and continued dimensions 124 00 eip eda To create a linear baseline dimension NOTE Before you can use this procedure you must first create a dimension 1 Choose Dimensions gt Baseline 2 Select a dimension as baseline press Enter 3 Select the next extension line origin and then press Enter to create next baseline dimension Dimension toolbar H Command line DIMBASELINE The program automatically places the new baseline dimension above or below the previous dimension line The distance between the two dimension lines is determined by the Baseline Spacing value in the New Dimension Style or Modify Dimension Style dialog box To add a baseline dimension to an existing linear dimension select the existing dimension A select the next extension line origin B and select as many additional points as you want C
60. another point without specifying the entire coordinate Using a point filter you can enter partial JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 6 coordinates and then the program prompts you for the remaining coordinate information To use xyz point filters respond to the prompt for a coordinate with a filter in the following form coordinate where coordinate is one or more of the letters x y and z The program then prompts you for the filtered coordinate s For example if you type xy the program prompts you to select a point whose xy coordinate you want and then prompts you for the z coordinate The filters x y Z Xy XZ and yz are all valid filters Using point filters in two dimensions You can use point filters when you work in two dimensions to locate points in relation to existing entities For example to draw a circle centered in a rectangle start the Circle command and then respond to the prompts as follows 2Point 3Point Ttr tan tan radius Arc Multiple lt Center of circle gt y Select Y of mid of select the left side of the rectangle Still need XZ of mid of select top of the rectangle Diameter lt Radius gt specify radius of circle You can use point filters to center the circle by separately selecting the midpoints of two sides of the rectangle A and B and then specifying its radius Using point filters in three dimen
61. are saved Magnification center point and view direction The location of the view the Model tab or a specific layout tab Layer visibility in the drawing at the time the view is saved User coordinate system 3D perspective and clipping If you have divided the drawing window into multiple views you can save the current window arrangement so that you can recall it to the screen later The number and placement of the windows are saved exactly as they are currently displayed The settings for each window are also saved Restore a Named View JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 4 With the VIEW Restore you can restore a named view to the current view Named views can be used to do the following Restore views on the model space viewport or layout viewport Specify the area to plot Determined which model space view is displayed when opening the drawing You can specify a layout view when you open the drawing only if you save the drawing from that specified layout tab 4 7 Specify a 3D View You can set a 3D view to facilitate verifying the 3D effects of the drawing constructing and visualizing 3D models An isometric view is a typical viewpoint that helps you create a 3D view which reduces the number of visually overlapping objects You can specify a new viewpoint to create new objects or modify the existing objects 4 7 1 View a Parallel Projection in 3D Yo
62. as its first extension line origin breaking one long dimension into shorter segments that add up to the total measurement Also called chain dimension DIMCONTINUE control frame A series of point locations used as a mechanism to control the shape of a B spline These points are connected by a series of line segments for visual clarity and to distinguish the control frame from fit points The SPLFRAME system variable must be turned on to display control frames coordinate filters Functions that extract individual X Y and Z coordinate values from different points to create a new composite point Also called X Y Z point filters Coons patch In 3D surface meshes the bicubic surface one curved in the M direction and another in the N direction interpolated between four edges crosshairs A type of cursor consisting of two lines that intersect crossing selection A rectangular area drawn to select objects fully or partly within its borders CTB file SA color dependent plot style table default A predefined value for a program input or parameter Default values and options for ZWCAD commands are denoted by angle brackets lt gt definition points Points for creating a dimension ZWCAD refers to the points to modify the appearance and value of a nonassociative dimension when the dimensioned object is modified Also called defpoints and stored on the special layer DEFPOINTS dependent named objects in xrefs Named objects brou
63. be any size within the stated limits Datum Reference Frames A datum reference consists of values and modifying symbols A datum is a theoretically exact geometric reference that measures and verifies a theoretically exact point axis or plane The system provides up to three datum reference letters and relative symbols followed by the tolerance value Two or three mutually perpendicular planes perform best when you applying these datum references They are jointly called datum reference frame The following illustration shows a datum reference frame that consists of three perpendicular planes primare datum plane Projected Tolerance Zones Projected tolerance zones control the height of the fixed perpendicular part of the extension area and control tolerance accuracy by positional tolerances Before you set the symbol to projected tolerance zones you set a height value to specify the minimum projected tolerance zone The following illustration shows the projected tolerance zone height and symbol appearing in a frame Composite Tolerances A composite tolerance consists of two tolerances that applied to the same geometric characteristic of a feature or for features that have different datum requirements One tolerance is in relation to a pattern of features and the other tolerance to each feature JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 260 DIMENSION AND TOLERANCES
64. boundary of the drawing area covered by dots when the grid is turned on Also called drawing limits LIMITS DWF For Design Web Format A highly compressed file format that is created from a DWG file DWF files are easy to publish and view on the Web DWG Standard file format for saving vector graphics from within ZWCAD DXF For drawing interchange format edge The boundary of a face elevation The default Z value above or below the XY plane of the current user coordinate system which is used for entering coordinates and digitizing locations ELEV embed To use object linking and embedding OLE information from a source document in a destination document An embedded object is a copy of the information from a source document that is placed in the destination document and has no link to the source document environment variable A setting stored in the operating system that controls the operation of a program explode To disassemble a complex object such as a block dimension solid or polyline into simpler objects In the case of a block the block definition is unchanged The block reference is replaced by the componenis of the block EXPLODE external reference xref A drawing file referenced by another drawing XREF extrusion A 3D solid created by sweeping an object that encloses an area along a linear path JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER
65. can use predefined hatch pattern or solid hatch and create hatch pattern of your own Create Solid Filled Areas Methods of creating solid hatch Choose Solid option from BHATCH command line prompt hatch the selected entity with specified pattern Solid hatch Wide polyline or donut solid filled areas Create Gradient Filled Areas Fills the area with gradient appearance which is a type of solid hatch represents solid entity as well Gradient hatch refers to a kind of hatch pattern among different gradations within one or two colors Which can be used to increase the drawing demonstration effects or use as background Like creting other hatch patterns you can crete gradient hatch as well as associative gradient hatch in the same way But the color assigned in gradient hatch can t be JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 292 HATCHES AND REALISTIC IMAGES controlled by print style Use Predefined Hatch Patterns Fills the specified area with different material so as to distinguish project parts User can select hatch patterns to distinguish different parts of the object and represent the object materials during hatching process 14 ISO hatch patterns are provided ISO pen width can be specified while selecting ISO hatch patterns Pen width option is set to determine the pen width of the pattern Create User Defined Hatch Patterns When selecting hatch patte
66. complete the command Modify toolbar 7 JL Systems Group 170 Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk MODIFY OBJECTS Command line EXTEND To extend objects select the boundary edge A and then Result select the objects to extend B To extend an object to an implied boundary 1 Choose Modify gt Extend 2 Select one or more boundary edges and then press Enter 3 On the command line type edge mode 4 On the command line type extend 5 Select the object to extend 6 Select another object to extend or press Enter to complete the command Modify toolbar Fi Command line EXTEND Select the boundary edge A and then select the objects to Result extend B To extend several objects using the fence selection method 1 Choose Modify gt Extend 2 Select one or more boundary edges and then press Enter 3 On the command line type fence 4 Specify the first point of the fence 5 Specify the second point of the fence 6 Specify the next fence point or press Enter to complete the command Modify toolbar r Command line EXTEND JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 Select the boundary edge A and then specify the Result first point B and second point C of the fence TRIM can also be used to extend objects At the prompts of selecting entities holding down SHIFT and selecting objects t
67. drawing with ratio of 1 38 means one drawing space unit equals to three model space units Changing the plot scale of viewports is also available through ZOOM command or Viewport toolbar To change the layout viewport scale 1 Make sure you are on a layout tab in paper space 2 Double click the border of the viewport whose scale you want to modify 3 In the Properties palette select Standard Scale and then select a new scale from the list The scale you choose is applied to the viewport Scale Linetypes in Layout Viewports Scaling linetypes is enabled to be manipulated based on both drawing units and paper space System variable PSLTSCALE is used to setup linetype scaling factor for objects displayed in different proportion If PSLTSCALE is set to 1 current linetype is set to dash line and then draw lines in paper space Create viewport with proportion of 1x set this layout viewport as current and then draw lines using the dashes linetype These two dashes are of the same appearance If the viewport scaling factor is set to 2x then the linetype scaling factor of dashes are consistent both in layout and layout viewports Scaling drawing space units if the system variable PSLTSCALE is on linetype scale is determined by viewport scale If you set system variable TILEMODE to 0 dashes length of objects in model space is based on drawing units Linetypes keep the same even if various scaling factors are used for current views Dash lines shar
68. face 1 Choose Modify gt Solids Editing gt Extrude Faces 2 Select the face s to extrude and press Enter 3 Do one of the following Specify the height of extrusion Type p and press Enter to select a path for extrusion 4 If you specified a height specify a taper angle Solids Editing toolbar at JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 Select the entity to extrude and The resulting entity with the face then specify the face s to extrude extruded to position B A and the height of extrusion or path Move Faces Moves face of a 3D solid at the specified distance This command only changes the location of the face leaving the direction unchanged Using object snap help you specify the location exactly To move a solid face 1 Choose Modify gt Solids Editing gt Move Faces 2 Select the face s to move and press Enter 3 Specify a base point 4 Specify an end point i _ st Solids Editing toolbar Specify the face s to move A the The resulting object with the face base point B and the end point moved to the new position C Offset Faces You can scale faces of 3D solids with the specified offset Positive value enlarges objects negative value shrinks objects For example you can enlarge or shrinks an aperture using JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk
69. form a new polyline N polyline selected line selected result Fillet an Entire Polyline You can use Polyline option to create fillets for each corners of a polyline To fillet an entire polyline 1 Choose Modify gt Fillet 2 On the command line type polyline 3 Select the polyline Modify toolbar gt Command line FILLET Select the polyline A Result after filleting Before creating fillets you should ensure the distance between each vertex is long enough to accommodate the fillet radius in order to insert a fillet arc j polyline line segments long enough to fillet polline line segments too short to fillet polyline selected result for filleting The fillet arcs replace arc segments when the fillet radius is greater than the radius of the arc As shown in the illustration polyline arc segment fillet arc polyline line segment polyline selected result fillet arc replaces for filleting art segment When the fillet radius is set to 0 no fillet arcs are inserted If two polyline segments are separated by one arc segments system deletes this arc segment and extends the lines to intersect with each other To fillet selected vertices in a polyline 1 Choose Modify gt Fillet 2 Select the polyline along the segment where you want to begin the fillet 3 Select the polyline along the segment where you want to end the fillet JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7
70. high on the printed drawing For example if you plan to print your drawing at 1 8 1 0 and you want your text to be 1 8 inch high in the final drawing create that text 1 foot high in your realworld drawing units so that when you print it it appears 1 8 inch high on the paper You must create text 4 feet high that you want to print 1 2 inch high To set the text height 1 Choose Format gt Text Style 2 Type a value in the Text Height text under Text Measurements 3 Press OK to save the current settings NOTE The default text height applies only if the current text style height is 0 0 Otherwise the text height for the current style takes precedence 5 2 Drawing Limits You can specify the drawing limits that form an invisible boundary around your drawing You can use the drawing limits to make sure that you do not create a drawing larger than can fit on a specific sheet of paper when printed at a specific scale For example if you plan to print your drawing at 1 8 1 0 in other words using a scale factor of 96 on a sheet of paper measuring 36 inches x 24 inches you can set drawing limits to 3 264 units wide that is 34 x 96 and 2 112 units high 22 x 96 which allows a 1 inch margin around the edges of the printed image To set the drawing limits 1 Choose Fomat gt Drawing Limits 2 Specify the x coordinate and y coordinate of the upper right drawing limit and the lower left drawing limit You can also clic
71. in in Pattern option 7 To copy the pattern properties from an existing hatch choose Inherit Properties 8 To associate the hatch pattern to its boundary objects under Other options select the Associative check box An associative hatch updates automatically if you move any of its boundaries 9 To continue add a hatch by doing one of the following Inthe Boundaries click Add Select objects to select the objects you want to add a hatch Repeate the procedures following step 2 Inthe Boundaries click Add Pick points to select an area or boundary you want to add a hatch Repeate the procedures following step 2 Draw toolbar E JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 12 Command line BHATCH To specify a user defined hatch pattern 1 Choose Draw gt Hatch 2 From the Hatch dialog box click the Style Options tab 3 Under the Hatch Type and pattern in the Type list click User Defined 4 For Spacing enter the line spacing for the pattern 5 To copy the pattern properties from an existing hatch choose Inherit Properties and select a hatch pattern from a hatched object in the drawing 6 To associate the hatch pattern to its boundary objects under Other options select the Associative check box An associative hatch updates automatically if you move any of its boundaries 7 To continue add a hatch by doing one of the following Inthe Boundaries
72. input command options according to command prompt displayed in the Dynamic input box to execute drawing command With DYN mode on you can temporarily ignore command window so as to make you concentrate on drawing area when drawing pictures Press F2 to view prompt history of command window Tooltips show as follows when DYN mode off status take circle drawing for example 2Point 3Point Ttritan tan radius 4rc Multiples Center of circle gt DYN OFF When executing command with the DYN mode off there isn t any dynamic prompt near the cross cursor you have to view the relevant prompts from command line or command window 2 5 Customize the Drawing Environment 2 5 1 Set Interface Options JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 2 In the Options dialog box you can change many of the settings that affect the ZWCAD interface and drawing environment Settings of modifying interface Automatic Save Open and Save tab Saves your drawing at specified time intervals To use this option in the Options dialog box Open and Save tab select Automatic Save and enter the interval in minutes Color Display tab Specifies the background colors used in the layout and Model tabs and the color used for prompts and crosshairs Font Display tab Changes the fonts used in the ZWCAD window and in the text window This setting does not affect the text in your d
73. into ZWCAD When you link or embed OLE objects that are supportive of other applications into ZWCAD ZWCAD applications are used as container applications If you select objects of ZWCAD using frame selection the inserted OLE object overlapped with ZWCAD objects But the objects to be selected are only provided in ZWCAD not OLE objects Additionally the edit and snap mode take no effect on OLE objects To adjust and scale the size of the OLE objects you should edit these objects using grips displayed on them When you right click on the OLE object a shortcut menu will be displayed with some editing properties such as Cut Copy Delete object and On Embedding drawings When you embed an ZWCAD drawing it becomes part of the other program s document file When you edit the drawing you edit only the version that is embedded in the other document Embedding is useful when you don t want to maintain a link to the ZWCAD drawing for the data you include in the other document Edits made to the new drawing do not affect the original drawing To transfer the file to other computers you can transfer all the data in one file but embedded objects increase the file size From within a document in a program that supports ActiveX such as Microsoft Word you can either create a new embedded ZWCAD drawing or embed an existing ZWCAD drawing To create an ZWCAD drawing in another document 1 In the document choose Insert gt OLE Object 2 In the d
74. is sufficient for viewing and editing To see more than one line of command history you can scroll through the history or resize the command window by dragging its border upwards or you can press F2 to use the text window The text window is a window similar to the command window in which you can enter commands and view prompts and messages With a complete command history for the current ZWCAD session displayed the text window can be used to view lengthy output of commands such as LIST which displays detailed information about objects you select To copy all the text in the text window to the Clipboard use the COPYHIST command Dock and Resize the Command Window By default the command window is docked The docked command window is the same width as the ZWCAD window You can resize the window vertically by dragging the splitter bar which is located on the top edge of the window when it is docked on the bottom and at the bottom edge of the window when it is docked at the top Undock the command window by dragging it away from the docking region When you undock the window the floating window is the size it was before you undocked it You can move the floating command window anywhere on the screen and resize its width and height with the pointing device Dock the command window by dragging it until it is over the top or bottom docking region of the ZWCAD window Modifying a command JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel
75. jl systems dk CHAPTER 10 Dimension toolbar he Command line DIMSTYLE Choose Dimension Arrowheads You can control the appearance and size of arrowheads or hook marks placed at the ends of dimension lines Any changes you make affect the current dimension style The appearance of selected arrowhead is display in the preview frame placed at the upper right corner of the Modify Dimension Style or New Dimension Style dialog box You can specify different arrowheads for both ends of a dimension line and for leader lines The First arrow is toward the first extension line The Second arrow is toward the second extension line Blocks defined in the drawing also display in the three Arrowhead lists as user defined arrows You can use these blocks to create and assign your own arrowheads The Arrow Size value determines the size of the arrowhead measured in drawing units You can also use tick marks instead of arrowheads To choose an arrowhead 1 Choose Dimensions gt Dimension Style 2 In the Dimension Style Manager select the style you want to change and click Modify button 3 Click the Lines and Arrows tab 4 Make your selections under the Arrowheads 5 Click OK 6 Choose Close to exit Dimension toolbar nh Command line DIMSTYLE NOTE You can also specify leader arrow types using the DIMLDRBLK system variable Customize Arrowheads The default arrowheads are stored as block definitions If you select User Defined as your arrowhead type
76. layer s lineweight If you want to specify a lineweight to override the layer determined lineweight of an object change an existing object s lineweight from BYLAYER to a specific lineweight In order to create subsequent objects using a new lineweight you have to change the lineweight setting on the Properties toolbar from BYLAER to the specific one 5 11 Control the Display of Overlapped Objects Control how overlapped objects and some other objects are displayed and plotted Polylines Hatches Gradient Fills Lineweights and Text You can simplify the display of certain kinds of objects such as wide polylines donuts solid filled polygons 2D solids hatches gradient fills and text to improve the display performance and speed up of creating test plots Turning Fill on and off You can reduce the time it takes to display or print a drawing by turning off the display of solid fill When Fill is turned off all filled entities such as wide polylines and planes display and print as outlines When you turn Fill on or off you must redraw the drawing before the change is displayed To turn Fill on or off 1 Choose Tools gt Options 2 Click the Display tab 3 Under Display performance select or clear the Apply solid fill check box 4 Choose View gt Redraw Command line FILL JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 5 O O fill mode on fill mode off Us
77. made current The UCS in the isometric viewport is updated to reflect the UCS of the front viewport front viewport is current UCSYP 0 ICS icon reflects UCS of current viewport Control the Display of the User Coordinate System Icon By default the UCS icon is displayed in the lower left corner of the current viewport which indicates the location and orientation of the current UCS You can also control whether the UCS icon is displayed at the origin point There are two types of UCS icons 2D icon and 3D icon a a gt gt kia 2D CS icon 3D JCS icon JL Systems Group A Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CREATE OBJECTS Displaying 2D or 3D UCS icon is controlled by the UCSICON command You can display the UCS icon at the UCS origin point to indicate the origin and orientation of the current UCS using the UCSICON command A cross is displayed in the icon if the UCS icon is displayed at the corner of the current UCS otherwise there is no cross in the icon lf the drawing area has multiple viewports each viewport displays its own UCS icon There are various ways for displaying the UCS icon shown as follows which help you visualize the orientation of the drawing plane 20 UCS at Wes isoviewor2DUCs 2D UCS viewed right side view of 2D UCS cs from below To A A a EA _ od ID WES at WCS i 30 UCS viewed right side wiew i iso view of SD UCS fom below of 3D UES w
78. maximum gap which is controlled by system variable HPGAPTOL when using the object as pattern boundary any gap within this value range will be taken as closed boundary But this gap is only available for lines and arcs they ll be joined if extended When creating hatch patterns you can specify the draw order of the patterns to decide hatching before or after the boundaries or set it in front or at back of all objects Add Hatch Patterns and Solid Fills You can use BHATCH command to add hatch pattern to the drawing When defining hatch patterns you can specify the options in hatch dialog box scale angle space ISO pen width associativity and double hatch Create Associative Hatches lf you select associative hatch properties when hatching the area the hatched pattern updates automatically with the boundaries By default the hatch pattern created by BHATCH is associative The associativity of a hatch pattern can be removed whenever you want The objects that are outside the specified boundary will be ignored when creating hatches lf the text properties or solid entities are connected to hatch patterns only hatches the boundaries of these objects with the center retained as blank in order to form islands Choose a Hatch Pattern User can select hatch patterns to distinguish different parts of the object and represent the object materials during hatching process 14 ISO hatch patterns are provided ISO pen width can be specified while
79. most information was used when pasting the objects on the clipboard into the current drawing To paste objects from the Clipboard JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 Choose Edit gt Paste Standard toolbar Command line PASTECLIP To change format to paste you can select the desired format from the Edit menu The WME format contains the screen vector information which can scale or plot the pasted objects without decreasing resolution It can be applied to the application that supports WMF format The color of objects Keeps unchanged when pasting However you can use the system variable WMFBKGND and WMFFORGND to control whether the background or foreground is transparent or not where the pasted objects lie on When the objects to be pasted contain links or nest other objects you can use PASTESPEC command to insert them from the clipboard into the ZWCAD drawing When selecting ZWCAD Block the objects are processed as a block And you have to explore them before editing Converting WMF format into ZWCAD Drawing format may lead to the scale factor changed To avoid of this situation you can convert the selected objects to a block and then insert it into the ZWCAD drawing using INSERT 8 8 Correct Mistakes Various methods can be used to cancel errors until the latest correct operation if perform error manipulations Undo a Single Action You can reverse to
80. needed to zoom or pan in a single view Also errors you might miss in one view may be apparent in the others Viewports created on the Model tab completely fill the drawing area and do not overlap As you make changes in one viewport the others are updated simultaneously Three model space viewports are shown in the illustration olga B D E A O A E E a TI T AL WT UT Wt m Ll fill ii a TL a il rr L mi ed eee He ti l Use Model Space Viewports You can do the following operations at the model space viewport Set Snap Grid and UCS icon modes Pan Zoom and restore named views Save orientations of UCS with individual viewports When executing a command you can draw from one viewport to another Name a viewport arrangement in order to you can reuse it on the Model tab or insert it on a layout tab When you work on 3D models it is much helpful that setting up different UCS in individual viewports Split and Join Model Space Viewports From the separated viewport you can continue to split or join them The illustrations below show several default model space viewport configurations JL Systems Group 2p Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CONTROL THE DRAWING VIEW horizontal spka FE vertical above below Select and Use the Current Viewport To make the desired viewport the current viewport you click inside it through the existing viewports
81. negative determined by measuring the distance between the page edge and plot information To specify the print area origin 1 If necessary click the desired Layout tab or the Model tab 2 Choose File gt Plot 3 Click the Origin of Print Area tab Do one of the following To center the specified print area on the printed page select the Center on Page check box To specify an origin for the print area type the x and y coordinates 4 Select Save Changes to Layout and then click Apply to Layout ir Standard toolbar Command line PLOT Set Drawing Orientation The drawing orientation determines whether to plot a drawing portrait or landscape If you select Landscape plots the drawing using the length edge as horizontal While selecting Portrait to plot the drawing using its minor edge as horizontal Changing the drawing orientation just like rotating the paper under the drawing Meanwhile selecting Plot upsize down to control whether to locate the drawing upsize down on paper Set Plot Scale Plot scale of the drawing can be specified directly from the scale pulldown list and also customize plot scale of your desire or choose Fit to Paper to scale the drawing to fit onto JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 322 LAYOUT PLOT AND PUBLISH DRAWINGS the selected paper size Generally you draw objects at their actual size That is you decide which unit to be app
82. object appears in the center of the view but you can select and move it by moving the cursor The OLE objects that are surpportive to other applications will not be updated along with the objects in source document when embedding into ZWCAD drawings ZWCAD provides various methods to embed drawings such as copy the object to clipboard paste it to ZWCAD drawing files and then embed it to ZWCAD drawing You can embed a company icon created by other applications into ZWCAD drawings With the embedding feature you can also embed OLE objects into ZWCAD drawings without specifying links A txt file will be changed into mtext once embedded into the drawing with its file name displayed together Once embedded into current drawing you can adjust the object s size according to the proportion of drawing unit And also scaling text that is included in OLE objects by specifying point size Drag Objects into a Drawing If you want to link data and drawings to ZWCAD drawings from other applications besides inserting OLE objects you can drag the selected data or drawings into ZWCAD Both applications must be running and visible on your screen To drag information between applications the other applications must support ActiveX Objects dragged into a drawing are embedded not linked As manipulating for cutting and pasting you do the dragging in the same way The information is removed from one document and pasted into the other document when you do t
83. of the Modify Dimension Style dialog box you can set the primary units for linear and angular dimensions including unit format numeric precision and so on These settings control the display of dimension values For linear dimension you can also specify the prefix or suffix The specified prefix replaces the prefixes used for diameter and radius dimensions and R respectively Fatic 15 To round off dimensions 1 Choose Dimension gt Dimension Style 2 In the Dimension Style Manager select the style you wish to change and choose Modify 3 Click the Primary Units tab 4 In the Linear Dimension field type or select the nearest value to which you want to round off dimensions 5 Click OK 6 Choose Close to exit Dimension toolbar ha Command line DIMSTYLE NOTE You can also specify units for linear dimensions using the DIMLUNIT system variable You can specify fraction formats using the DIMFRAC system variable Alternate Units You can create a dimension in two systems of measurement simultaneously in a drawing This feature is helpful when you want to add feet and inches dimensions in a drawing created using metric units The alternative units appear in a square brackets in the dimension text Alternative units can be applied to linear dimensions only lf you turn alternative units dimensioning on when editing a linear dimension the measurement is multiplied by a specified alternate scale value This value indicates the n
84. onthe dimension line the right and outside the extension lines To rotate dimension text 1 On the command line type aimedit 2 Type r Rotate text 3 Type the new dimension text angle and then press Enter 4 Select the dimension to be rotated and then press Enter A Dimension toolbar 4 Select the dimension to be rotated A and then Result type the rotaiion angle NOTE The dimension text angle is relative to the dimension line If the dimension text rotation is set to zero the text angle is defined by the dimension type and the dimension Style To move dimension text JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 10 1 On the command line type dimtedit 2 Select the dimension to reposition text 3 Select the new text position Dimension toolbar a Select the dimension to be moved A Result and then select the new text position B To restore dimension text to its home position 1 On the command line type aimedit 2 Type H Home 3 Select the dimension text to restore and then press Enter n A Dimension toolbar To replace existing dimension text with new text 1 On the command line type dimedit 2 Type N New 3 Type the new dimension text and then press Enter 4 Select the dimension to be replaced and then press Enter y A Dimension toolbar 10 4 4 Dimension Jogged The DIMJOGLINE command is available for adding
85. opened drawings Editing multiple entities ZWCAD allows you to change most of the properties of all selected entities using a single tabbed dialog box Using the Customize dialog box ZWCAD has a single tabbed dialog box for changing toolbars menus keyboard shortcuts and command aliases The simple point and click action lets you easily create new menu items and keyboard shortcuts no programming or manual text editing required Performing unlimited undo and redo ZWCAD increases your power undo and redo of editing actions 1 1 5 Getting more information In addition to the ZWCAD documentation much of the assistance you need as you use ZWCAD is specific to the commands you work with on the screen To obtain immediate information as you work use these additional sources of information Status bar To find out more detailed information about a tool when you pause the cursor over it look on the status bar at the bottom of the screen Online help ZWCAD online help is available on the screen when you press F1 choose a command from the Help menu or click the question mark in a dialog box 1 2 Installation This section helps you get started using ZWCAD software by explaining how to install it and providing basic information about how to use it NOTE This guide assumes that you have used other Windows based programs and are familiar with Windows terminology and techniques 1 2 1 System requirements You need the following so
86. or polyline object to an existing open polyline forming one continuous polyline object To join an object to a polyline that object must already share an endpoint with an end vertex of the selected polyline When you join an object to a polyline the width of the new polyline segment depends on the width of the original polyline and the type of object you are joining to it A line or an arc assumes the same width as the polyline segment for the end vertex to which it is joined JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 A polyline joined to a tapered polyline retains its own width values A polyline joined to a uniform width polyline assumes the width of the polyline to which it is joined To join an arc line or polyline to an existing polyline 1 Choose Modify gt Object gt Polyline 2 Select the polyline 3 On the command line type join 4 Select the arc line or polyline to join 5 On the command line type another option or press Enter to complete the command Modifyll toolbar J Command line PEDIT WIDTH Specifies the uniform width for all segments of selected polylines Using Width option while performing Edit vertex you can specify the width of start point and end point polyline selected segments with diferent start and end widths You can change the width of an entire polyline applying a uniform width to the polyline or assigning tapering w
87. original image attached to the drawing is not exist in the saving path or any defined searching path the status of the image is displayed as Not found and the Image found at box is blank The Drawing File Search Path can be set or modified at the Files tab in Options dialog box so that the raster image of the drawing file can be located If the raster image having been attached to the drawing is moved to another folder its relative path or absolute path information will be removed from its file name for example to turn images tree tga or c my project images tree tga into tree tga and search for the path defined at Drawing File Search Path the Files tab in Options dialog box If the specified extension name of the drawing is not found at the saving path system searches for all the image file extension names The path of the image can be removed or directly edit the path in Image found at box and then select Save path to specify its relative path This may be different from the path in Image found at box Changing the path in Image Manager does not affect settings in Drawing File Search Path To change the path for a raster image 1 Choose Insert gt Image Manage 2 Select the desired file 3 Click the Browse button 4 Select the file with its new name or in its new location and then click Open 5 Click Save Path Insert toolbar Command line IMAGE Load and Unload Raster Images If excessive raster images exist in curr
88. outline To revolve the objects that are lines or arcs intersect with polylines you can use Join JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 138 CREATE OBJECTS option of PEDIT command to convert them into multiple single polyline objects and then perform REVOLVE command Objects can be revolved are closed polylines polygons rectangles circles ellipses regions and so on On contrary the objects can t be revolved are 3D objects objects that are included in a block polylines with intersections and transections or unclosed polylines eS E a ae a a a a E original polyline revolved about axis revolved about i axis T T objectto revolve axis selected result selected To create a revolved solid 1 Choose Draw gt Solids gt Revolve 2 Select the object to revolve 3 Do one of the following to define the axis of revolution Specify a start point and an end point Type o and press Enter to select an object that determines the axis Type x and press Enter to select the x axis Type y and press Enter to select the y axis 4 Specify the angle of revolution Solids toolbar Command line REVOLVE Select the object to revolve A and the axis B about The resulting revolved solid which to revolve it followed by the angle of revolution Creating composite solids You can create composite three dimensional solids by combining subtracting and fin
89. polylines radials splines or construction lines as well as 3D solids A fillet is an arc that connects two objects smoothly and has a specified radius An inside corner is called a fillet an outside corner is called a round To fillet two objects 1 Choose Modify gt Fillet 2 On the command line type s 3 In the Drawing Settings dialog box specify the fillet radius 4 Click OK 5 Select the first object 6 Select the second object Modify toolbar A Command line FILLET Select the first A and second B objects Result after filleting Using FILLET command can help you create an arc that is tangent to the selected objects easily You can also use Polyline option to create fillets for each corners of a polyline When the objects to fillet are on the same layer the fillet arc is created on that layer otherwise the fillet arc is created on the current layer that affects the properties of objects such as color and linetype The Multiple option can create fillets for more than one set of objects until you exit the command Set the Fillet Radius You can specify the radius of a fillet arc connecting two objects The latest value is always the current radius value This setting is only available when you create a new fillet arc When the radius is set to 0 the objects to fillet are trim or extend to get intersecting but not create a fillet arc JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www j
90. properties may or may not be possible on a proxy object depending on the application that created it A Proxy Information dialog box will be displayed when you open a drawing Which shows the total number of proxy objects in the drawing both graphical and nongraphical and the name of the missing application and provides additional information about the proxy object type and display state You can control the display of proxy objects with the dialog box Edit Proxy Objects Proxy objects are enabled to be access display and also to perform the following manipulations Erase proxy objects Quick select proxy objects Define block reference with proxy objects insert drawings and block references with proxy objects and explode Export plot preview proxy objects Edit operations such as MOVE COPY MIRROR etc 14 3 Package a Set of Files for Internet Transmission With the application of etransmit you can accomplish transmitting drawing files together with their associative files through Internet in forms of transmittal packages The associative files included in the transmittal package are xrefs fonts raster images etc Generally all of the included files such as xrefs raster images and fonts will be ignored when you sending drawings to others The receiver may not be able to display the transmitted drawing because of lacking these associative files Using etransmit can help preventing such circumstances and decrease the error probab
91. rectangles are created by RECTANG command rather than POLYGON Variety of ways can be used for creating a polygon for example specify the center point or one of its edges to define a polygon after you have determined the edges of polygon If you want to draw a polygon based on another object the following methods are provided with some given qualifications Specifying the radius of inscribed circle if the distance between the center of the polygon and the endpoint of each side is known Specifying the radius of circumscribed circle if the distance between the center of the polygon and the midpoint of each side is Known Specifying the length of an edge and where you want to place it To draw a polygon by vertex 1 Choose Draw gt Polygon 2 Type 5 to specify five sides for the polygon 3 Specify the center of the polygon 4 Specify the vertex of the polygon JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 7 Draw toolbar O Command line POLYGON The center A and Resulting polygon vertex B 7 1 8 Rectangles With ZWCAD rectangles are closed polylines with four sides You draw a rectangle by specifying its opposite corners The rectangle is normally aligned parallel to the current snap and grid alignment but you can use the Rotated option to align the rectangle to any angle To draw a rectangle 1 Choose Draw gt Rectangle 2 Specify one corner of the rectangl
92. removing the original objects To intersect solids 1 Choose Modify gt Solids Editing gt Intersect 2 Select the objects to intersect Solids Editing toolbar Command line INTERSECT Select the objects to The resulting combined solid combine A and B 7 4 Create Regions You can convert a closed object into a two dimensional region After you create a region you can modify it using the various three dimensional tools For example you can create a region from a square and then extrude the square to create a three dimensional cube You can create regions from closed objects such as polylines polygons circles ellipses closed splines and donuts Creating regions typically has no visible effect on a drawing However if the original object JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 7 had a width or lineweight that information is lost when you create the region Regions can be used for applying hatching and shading and extracting design information such as the centroid and using MASSPROP to analyze properties such as area Oss shapes that can form regions Besides using closed 2D objects you also have various options to create a region such as connecting multiple loops or endpoints of open curves However the closed area inside the unclosed objects will not form regions For example crossed arcs or intersected Curves BOUNDARY creates regi
93. represented more than one pixels increase regeneration time Turning off the display of lineweight optimizes performance of the program In model space press LWT button on the status toolbar to turn lineweight display on and off Display Lineweights in Layouts In paper space layout tab lineweights are displayed in exact plotting width In plot preview and paper space lineweights are displayed in real world units and lineweight changes with the scale factor From the Plotting Scale tab of Plot dialog box you can control the lineweight plotting and scaling in a drawing In paper space press LWT button on the status toolbar to turn lineweight display on and off This change does not affect the lineweight plotting 5 10 3 Change the Lineweight of an Object You can change the current lineweight of an object by reassigning the object to another layer by changing the lineweight of the layer the object is on or by specifying a lineweight for the object explicitly Set the Current Lineweight All objects are created in a drawing using the current lineweight You can change the lineweight in the Lineweight control on the Properties toolbar or in the Lineweight Settings dialog box lf the current lineweight is set to BYLAYER objects are created in a drawing using the lineweight assigned to the current layer lf the current lineweight is set to BYBLOCK objects are created using the default lineweight until the objects are grouped into
94. selecting ISO hatch patterns Pen width option is set to determine the pen width of the pattern JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 12 In Hatch dialog box the Pattern area contains all the pattern names defined in icad pat file You can define new hatch patterns in icad pat and apply them by restarting ZWCAD platform Assign a Draw Order to a Hatch The draw order of hatching and boundaries can be controlled so as to view and select more easily When creating hatch patterns you can specify the draw order of the patterns to decide hatching before or after the boundaries or set it in front or at back of all objects The value will be stored in system variable HPDRAWORDER Other settings of hatch pattern may not be influenced regardless of changing the draw order of hatch pattern Limit Hatch Pattern Density System generates large amounts of dashes and dots to form hatch patterns Although all these dashes and dots are stored as smaller hatch patterns the more disk space it occupies and longer generating time it spent than storing normal objects You can limit the entity number created by HATCH or BHATCH to avoid this problem If the required amount of objects for specified hatch patterns over the preset boundaries system displays prompts automatically querying on refusing the hatch for too small hatch scale factor or too short dash length In case of refusing hatc
95. selection window STRETCH moves only endpoints within the selection window leaving those outside unchanged The polyline is treated as the composition of line straight and arc when being stretched STRETCH does not affect 3D solids polyline width tangent or curve titting information When stretching objects you have to specify a base point and displacement point You should use crossing selection to select the desired objects With using grip edition you can also stretch objects 1 a 5 Ea e a a _ 1 objects selected with points specified for stretch result crossing selection To stretch an object 1 Choose Modify gt Stretch 2 Select the objects using either a crossing window or a crossing polygon and then press Enter 3 Specify the base point 4 Specify the second point of displacement Modify toolbar Lil Command line STRETCH To stretch objects select them using a crossing window A or crossing polygon and then specify the base point B and displacement point C To stretch an object using grips you select it to display its grips and then select a grip to make it the active grip This becomes the base point Then you move the active grip to a new location The grip you select depends on the type of object you re modifying For example to stretch one corner of a rectangle select the corner point grip To stretch a line select an endpoint grip Not all objects can be stretched using grips To stre
96. settings Paper space is provided in each layout options allow to create viewports and specify page setup such as paper size orientation and location that can be saved together with the layout You can save and name the page setup and apply it to other layouts when setting pages You can also create new layouts using existing layout template file DWT or DWG Click on the Model tab you can view and edit objects in model space Cross hairs is activated in the whole drawing Shown as follows aa SODEL LAYOUTI LAYOUT View and edit objects in model space from the MODEL tab P RS MODEL LATOUTI A LAYOUT OO To view and edit objects of model space in viewport created in layout tab you can double click layout viewport The cross hairs and mark will be highlighted in current viewport JL Systems Group ue Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk LAYOUT PLOT AND PUBLISH DRAWINGS pl MODEL LATOUTI 4 LAYOUTS To change the current viewport for another one click on the desired viewport and press CTRL R to iterate all viewports Create a model of your subject on the Model tab Click a layout tab Specify layout page settings such as plotting device paper size plot area plot scale and drawing orientation Create a new layer to be used for layout viewports Create layout viewports and position them on the layout Set the orientation scale and layer visibility of the vie
97. snap setting forces the selected points to adhere to the grid increment or to any other increment you set Entity snaps let you snap to precise geometric points on existing entities for example the endpoint of a line or the center of a circle Another setting orthogonal constrains lines so that they are drawn parallel to the vertical and horizontal axes Polar tracking and object snap tracking help you draw objects at specific angles or in specific relationships to other objects When you turn on polar tracking and object snap tracking temporary alignment paths help you create objects at precise positions and angles You will discover techniques that make specific design tasks easier Paper based drawings lack the high degree of accuracy possible when using CAD Lines JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 4 INTRODUCTION AND INSTALLATION often overlap or fail to meet adjacent lines Snap and entity snap force the cursor to adhere to a specified increment or attach to key geometric points on existing entities You can also constrain lines to vertical and horizontal axes Drawing efficiently In paper based manual drafting you often have to redraw the same entity several times at different scales or from different vantage points You may also need to redraw the border and title block on each new sheet One of the most powerful features of ZWCAD is that when you create a
98. spans the angle between the two lines As you specify the dimension line arc location if the dimension line arc does not intersect one or two extension lines being dimensioned the system JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 10 automatically draws them The dimension line arc is always less than 180 degrees However for the circles and arcs the dimension line arc can be up to 360 degrees To dimension an angle between two lines 1 Choose Dimensions gt Angular 2 Select one line 3 Select the other line 4 Specify the dimension line location Dimension toolbar i Command line DIMANGULAR Select one line A select the other line B Result and then specify the dimension line location C Dimension Circles and Arcs lf the object to be dimensioned is circle or arc the dimension line arc is placed between the extensions The dimension line arc is also drawn between the extension lines when you use three points to create an angular dimension The quadrant of the dimensioned angle depends on the location that you specify for the dimension line arc circle lines lines specify vertex To dimension an angle encompassed by an arc 1 Choose Dimensions gt Angular 2 Select the arc 3 Specify the dimension arc location Dimension toolbar Command line DIMANGULAR JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www
99. style table that you specify If you specify a print style for a specific entity that print style overrides any print style assigned to the layer on which the entity resides Sometimes a named print style assigned to an entity or layer is not located in the print style table that is assigned to a layout or drawing This can happen if the print style has been deleted from the named print style table or if you assign a different named print style table to the drawing that does not contain the named print style In this case the entity is printed using its default properties If you plan on interchanging named print style tables within the same drawing its a good idea to coordinate the tables to use the same print style names lf a new drawing is based on a template the new drawing uses the same type of print style table as the template If a new drawing is created without a template the type of print style table is specified in the New Drawing Wizard Every drawing is designed to use print Style tables but you decide whether to implement them Setup plot styles to determine how a drawing is plotted Like color and linetype plot style is also a kind of object property that reflected on the plotted objects or layer once you plot the object with the plot style assigned A plot style controls an object s plotted properties including color grayscale screening lineweight lf the plot styles conflict with the settings created for objects use the plo
100. surface You can append tolerances to the dimension text directly These dimension tolerances indicate the largest and smallest permissible size You can also apply geometric tolerances to indicate deviations of form profile location orientation and runout You can specify exact measurements to lateral tolerances theoretically They are called basic dimensions and have a box drawn around them Deviation tolerances represent with the plus and minus values that are appended to the dimension values If the deviation tolerances are equal the signs precede them and they are known as symmetrical Otherwise the plus value locates above the minus value Shown as the following figures deviation tolerance symmetrical deviation tolerance If you create a limit tolerance the system displays a maximum and minimum value These values replace the original dimension values The upper limit locates above the lower if you specify limits in ae The vertical placement of tolerance values that is relative to the main dimension text can be specified For example you can align the tolerances with the top middle or bottom of the dimension text JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 10 446 00 405 445 q2t03 0 5 JEO middle bottom You can also control how to suppress zero for tolerance values as you can with the primary and alternate units The effect of suppressing
101. system use SCALE to scale the model geometry by the appropriate conversion factor to obtain correct distances and dimensions The conversion JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 50 COORDINATES AND COORDINATE SYSTEM is shown as follows For example to convert inches to centimeters you scale the drawing by a factor of 3 25 To convert from centimeters to inches the scale factor is 1 3 25 or about 0 3077 Set Angle Conventions You can specify the location for angle 0 and the positive direction for the angle measurement clockwise or counterclockwise You can also specify the format and the number of decimal fraction Shown as the following illustrations Specify the measurement unit and precision The units include grad radian surveyor s unit and degree minute and second Specify where the angle measurement starts from east west south north or others For example to enter a coordinate relative to the current coordinate for a property line that is 54 feet 7 inches long with a bearing of 60 degrees north 12 minutes 6 seconds east enter 54 7 lt n60d1 2 6 e Specify the positive direction counterclockwise or clockwise The angle 0 can be set to any location Setting scale factors Instead of drawing to a particular scale you draw everything full size in the program Although it s a good idea to keep your scale factor in mind when setting up a draw
102. systems dk CHAPTER 7 30 wireframe mesh solid You should notice that different editing manipulations result in different visual effects because of various model and creating methods You should avoid mixing the models of different type when creating 3D objects Limits are also applied to the conversion of model types only solid curve and curve wireframe conversion are available 7 3 1 Set 3D thickness and elevation By default the program creates new two dimensional objects with a zero elevation and thickness The easiest way to create a three dimensional object is to change the elevation or thickness property of an existing two dimensional object The elevation of an object is its z coordinate position in relation to the xy plane in which the object is drawn An elevation of 0 indicates that the object is drawn on the xy plane of the current UCS Positive elevations are above this plane negative elevations are below it The thickness of an object is the distance it is extruded above or below its elevation A positive thickness extrudes the object upward in the positive z direction of the object a negative thickness extrudes it downward in the negative z direction The thickness is applied uniformly to the entire object You can extrude any two dimensional object into a three dimensional object by changing the thickness of the object to a nonzero value For example a circle becomes a cylinder a line becomes a three dimensional plane
103. that Model tab can t be copied or moved lf multiple layouts are created in the drawing or too long a layout name to be displayed at the bottom of the drawing area you can display the tab according to the arrowhead The arrowhead with a vertical line represents the first and last tab individually The current tab may not be displayed when moving the tabs Save time by reusing layouts that you have already created Within the same drawing you may want to make a copy of a layout that contains most of the settings you want and then make changes to the new copy If you created layouts that you want to use again when you create new drawings you can save the layouts as a drawing template To make a copy of a layout 1 Type ayout and then press Enter 2 On the command line type Copy 3 Type the name of the layout you want to copy and then press Enter 4 Type a name for the new layout and then press Enter Creating a new layout In ZWCAD you can create multiple layouts for a single drawing Each layout represents a sheet of paper For each layout you can specify the print area print styles print scale lineweight scale pen mappings and add viewports dimensions a title block and other geometry specific to the layout The objects you add to a layout in paper space do not appear in model space When you create a new drawing the drawing automatically contains two default layouts Layout1 and Layout2 You can start by using one of the defaul
104. the base A radius of the base B and the height C To create a cylinder as a three dimensional surface 1 Choose Draw gt Surfaces gt 3D Surface 2 On the command line type cylinder 3 Specify the center radius and height as described previously Command line ai_cylinder Spheres You can create spheres The latitude lines of a sphere are always parallel with the xy plane of the current UCS the central axis is always parallel with the z axis You position a sphere by specifying its center point You determine the size of a sphere by specifying either its radius or its diameter To create a dome or dish combine a sphere with a box and use SUBTRACT If you want to create a spherical object with additional details create a 2D profile and use REVOLVE to define a rotation angle about the Z axis 3D command creates a spherical shape defined by surfaces only To create a sphere JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 134 CREATE OBJECTS 1 Choose Draw gt Solids gt Sphere 2 Specify the center of the sphere 3 Specify the radius or diameter Solids toolbar Command line SPHERE Center A and radius B of the sphere The resulting sphere To create a sphere as a three dimensional surface 1 Choose Draw gt Surfaces gt 3D Surface 2 On the command line type sphere 3 Specify the center of the sphere 4 Specify the radius or diameter 5 Specify
105. the drawing Tree View Sorts the raster images in tree view and display the hierarchy of the images nested in xrefs and blocks View Image File Details Click DETAIL button to preview a selected image and view image file details including image name saved path active path where the image is found file creation date file size file type color color depth image size pixel width and height resolution and default size Assign Descriptive Names to Raster Images You can change the name of an image by double click the file listed on the image manager You can assign the image name different from the its file name the image is attached into the drawing without extension name JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 300 HATCHES AND REALISTIC IMAGES To rename an image any name within 255 characters including letters numbers spaces and all the special characters Microsoft Windows or ZWCAD can be used lf two raster images of the same name originated from different paths are attached to the drawing system automatically distinguish them by adding numbers after the image name Change File Paths of Raster Images The raster images already attached to the drawing are displayed in Image manager and its saving path is displayed in Image found at option at the bottom of Image manager Where the saving path is the virtual path for searching the image file lf the
106. the drawing Rather they are links to an externally referenced file To provide a copy of a drawing containing external references to someone else you must also provide all the external reference files In addition the user receiving the drawings must either recreate the same paths you used when linking the external references or change the paths for the external references To provide a copy of a drawing that contains external references it is often easier to first bind the external references to the drawing Binding the external references makes them a permanent part of the drawing which is similar to inserting a separate drawing as a block You can bind external references that are attached directly to the current drawing you cannot bind nested external references Xrefs rely on the naming sentence of named objects from Block name Definition name to Block name n Definition name Thus you can create unique named objects for relative definition tables that are bind to all the xref in current drawing If select Insert the xref will be inserted to the drawing after converted to blocks as inserting reference drawings Xref relys on named object using the xref name removed from the names but not using the Block name Definition name sentence If internal named objects have the same name with binded xref names in the drawing to be inserted new names will not be added in symbol table and the binded xrefs rely on named objects adopts
107. the left lower corner of the paper once you assigned positive or negative value to the plot offset While a negative JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 308 LAYOUT PLOT AND PUBLISH DRAWINGS offset assigns the drawing plotted under the left lower corner of the paper and results in the plot area being clipped Select Center on Paper if the specified plot area is part of the drawing rather than the whole layout which changes the position of plot origin home position Plot with origin U 0 a Plat with origini z Lower left corner of paper Set the Plot Area of a Layout You can set the area to be plotted in Plot dialog box When creating new layouts default plot option is drawing limits that is to plot all the objects within the drawing paper With the plot origin of 0 0 located at the left lower corner of the page ZWCAD provides the following methods to select plot area Current View Plots the contents in current view Save View Plots a view saved previously with the VIEW command You can select a named view from the list provided This option is unavailable if there are no saved views in the drawing Extents Plots the portion of the current space of the drawing that contains objects Limits When plotting a layout plots everything within the printable area Window Plots any portion of the drawing you specify within the rectangle window Click the Window but
108. the methods you use to select objects To restore the deleted objects use UNDO command OOPS command can restore objects deleted with the ERASE BLOCK or WBLOCK command To delete mark of plus sign point mark perform REDRAW command to refresh screen To delete unused named objects such as block definition dimension style layer linetype and text style perform PURGE command 8 2 2 Copy Objects You can copy one or more entities making one copy or multiple copies within the current drawing You can also copy entities between drawings You can duplicate objects within the current drawing The default method is to create a selection set and then specify a base point and a displacement point for the copy While specifying two point you can enter two coordinates to copy objects with the relative distance The location of copies is determined by the relative coordinate You do not have to enter coordinate with the as the relative coordinate is assumed To copy objects at the specified distance you can specify the distance directly when the ORTHO or POLAR is on Create only one copy of object one time 1 Choose Modify gt Copy 2 Select the objects and then press Enter 3 On the command line type MODE 4 On the command line type Single 5 Specify the base point 6 Specify the displacement point Modify toolbar 6 Command line COPY Object to copy A base point B and Result displacement point C You can
109. this button to undo last manipulation performed previously There is a pull down list beside the undo button click here to pop up a list in which all of the possible operations JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 208 MODIFY OBJECTS are displayed containing up to 6 commands within one list page if more than 6 operations have been manipulated you can drag the scroll bar on the right side of the list page to browse the commands The Redo button is available once you have manipulated undo Like performing Undo operation click the Redo button to perform the last Undo operation while click the pull down arrow to pop up a list in which all of the manipulations available to perform Redo are displayed Move the mouse to select manipulations from the pull down list of Undo and Redo button highlight the items on which the mouse stays to illustrate how many items are selected among the manipulations from the top of the list page and display a message at the bottom of the list to explain the number of items being selected And then click the mouse or press ENTER directly to perform Undo or Redo command Move the mouse to the top or button of the pull down list box to enable it scrolling by itself additionally you can press the direction key to select commands upwards or downwards Once you select BEgin set option when performing UNDO command the manipulations displayed in the pull dow
110. to a spline 1 Specify the starting tangent point 2 Specify the ending tangent point Spline Spline with starting tangent point A and ending tangent point B Specifying fit tolerance By default a spline passes through all of the control points When you draw a spline you can change this by specifying the fit tolerance The fit tolerance value determines how closely the spline fits the set of points you specify For example a spline fit tolerance value of 0 causes the spline to pass through the control points A value of 0 01 creates a spline that passes through the start and endpoints and within 0 01 units of the JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 118 CREATE OBJECTS intermediate control points To specify the fit tolerance 1 Choose Draw gt Spline 2 Specify the first point of the spline 3 Specify the second point of the spline 4 To accept the default of 0 0000 press Enter To specify a different fit tolerance enter F and type the number and then press Enter 5 Specify the additional points you need to draw a spline or a closed spline Draw toolbar ai Command line SPLINE Drawing a closed spline You can draw a closed spline which is a spline for which the start point and endpoint are the same Because the spline is closed you specify only one tangent To draw a closed spline 1 Choose Draw gt Spline 2 Specify the first point of the sp
111. to be plotted and then return to the Plot dialog box To specify a portion of the drawing to print 1 If necessary click the desired Layout tab or the Model tab 2 Choose File gt Plot 3 Under Print Area click one of the following Current View prints the view on the screen JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 324 LAYOUT PLOT AND PUBLISH DRAWINGS Saved View prints the selected saved view Extents prints the displaying area for all of the drawings Limits prints to the limits defined for the layout or drawing Window prints the portion of the drawing contained in the specified window maintaining the aspect ratio of the windowed area to the drawing If you clicked Window you must specify the window Under Windowed Print Area specify the area on the screen by picking corners of the window 4 Select Save Changes to Layout and then click Apply to Layout Standard toolbar Command line PLOT Preview a Plot Viewing a drawing before printing gives you a preview of what your drawing will look like when it is printed This helps you see if there are any changes you want to make before actually printing the drawing lf you are using print style tables the preview shows how your drawing will print with the assigned print styles System automatically generates preview results as soon as you setup relevant plotting properties To preview a drawing
112. to edit The Edit Block Attributes dialog box displays all the attributes attached to the block you select 3 Edit the attribute values as necessary 4 Click OK Extract Block Attribute Data Enter EATTEXT to start Extract Attributes wizard if the blocks in the drawing contain attributes You can extract block information according to the wizard prompt and generate list so as to overview the attributes information of the blocks You can get guide information from the wizard until you accomplish selecting drawings blocks and block attributes With the extract block attribute data function You can easily create list using drawing data through extrating attribute information and export to external files Export to exterior files When you want to save the extracted information to exterior files you can save the exterior file as CSV TXT XLS and MDB format Unicode replaces characters such as period comma or pound if written into Excel or Access files 11 3 Reference Other Drawing Files Xrefs You can link entire drawings to the current drawing as external references Unlike inserting a drawing as a block in which you add all the objects from the separate drawing into the current drawing external references attach a pointer to the external file The objects in the external reference appear in the current drawing but the entities themselves are not added to the drawing Thus attaching an external reference does not significantly incre
113. to finish your adding The new Plot Configuration file PC5 is setup Command PLOTTERMANAGER Customize the PDF Printer Specify the selected Adobe PDF file options Maximal output DPI Set the resolution of the output PDF file by the unit DPI The lager the DPI is the more precise the files but slower the print speed is and the lager memory and file size is needed The Maximal output resolution is between 72 to 4800 DPI and default to 72 DPI You can set this value according to your needs There re 8 selections in the Maximal output DPI drop down list and this value can also be customized by select Custom from the drop down list Instruction to PDF printer configuration file The options of the PDF printer can be customized from Custom option of PDF printer called from Plotter Configuration Editor Properties for PDF printer are Title Author Subject and Keyword JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 332 LAYOUT PLOT AND PUBLISH DRAWINGS Custom options of PDF printer DPI Maximal output DPT Customize output DPI Properties Tital Author Subject Keyword cancel DPI Set the resolution for the PDF printer Maximal output DPI Set the maximal resolution for the PDF printer and the value is among 72 to 4800 default to 72 DPI Customize output DPI Customize the maximal resolution The value can be set to 72 4800 DPI Properties
114. to the right along the xX axis from the previous point of 4 5 the second relative coordinate 0 8 5 locates the next point 8 5 units above along the y axis the previous point and so on Entering C for Close draws the final line segment back to the first point specified when you started the Line command Entering polar coordinates Using relative polar coordinates makes drawing a square tilted at a 45 degree angle a simple task Polar coordinates base the location of a point on a distance and angle from either the origin absolute coordinate or from the previous point relative coordinate To specify polar coordinates type a distance and an angle separated by the open angle bracket lt For example to use relative polar coordinates to specify a point 1 unit away from the previous point and at an angle of 45 degrees type 1 lt 45 To draw the square from the example in the previous section Entering relative Cartesian coordinates this time tilted at a 45 degree angle start the Line command and then respond to the prompts as follows Start of line 4 5 Angle Length lt End point gt 8 5 lt 45 Angle Length Follow Undo lt End point gt 8 5 lt 315 Angle Length Follow Close Und lt End point gt 8 5 lt 225 Angle Length Follow Close Undo lt End point gt C Y 8 5 lt 315 8 5 lt 225 x Drawing a tilted square using the relative polar coordinates method enter C to close NOTE This example like all exampl
115. transparent acetate overlays on a drawing You can view layers individually or in combination LAYER layer index A list showing the objects on each layer Uses a layer index to locate what portion of the drawing is read when you partially open a drawing Saving a layer index with a drawing also enhances performance when you work with external references The INDEXCTL system variable controls whether layer and spatial indexes are saved with a drawing layer translation mappings Assignments of a set of layers to another set of layers that defines standards These standards include layer names and layer properties Also called layer mappings layout The tabbed environment in which you create and design paper space layout viewports to be plotted Multiple layouts can be created for each drawing layout viewports Objects that are created in paper space that display views VPORTS linetype How a line or type of curve is displayed For example a continuous line has a different linetype than a dashed line Also called line font LINETYPE lineweight A width value that can be assigned to all graphical objects except TrueType fonts and raster images link To use object linking and embedding OLE to reference data in another file When data is linked any changes to it in the source document are automatically updated in any destination document mirror To create a new version of an existing object by reflecting it symmetrically with respe
116. use snaps to pick two points on the entity 10 4 3 Modify Dimension Text You can change the existing dimension text including text content location and JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 232 DIMENSION AND TOLERANCES orientation The existing text in a drawing can be rotated moved to a new location or replaced with new text You can also move the text back to its home position using Dimension Align Text Home option This default location is defined in the current dimension style In the following figures the home position is specified above and centered on the dimension line ZA dimension text rotated dimension text mowed back to home position You can rotate the specified text at an angle using the Dimension Align Text Angle option or change the angle and content in the Properties panel When you move text you have to select a single dimension to move first You can move the dimension text anywhere along the dimension line You can use grips to move text up or down which does not change the current vertical alignment of the text placement relative to the dimension line However the dimension and extension lines are modified accordingly The following figure shows the effect of moving text up and to the right The text placement relative to the dimension still remains centered and vertical E o m L olan 5 text centered vertical result of moving text to
117. you switch to a Layout tab your drawing seems to disappear This is normal You must create at least one layout viewport to see your model To view a drawing in model space on a Layout tab Do one of the following Click the desired Layout tab and then create and view a layout viewport Click the Model Paper Space toggle in the status bar While using a Layout tab double click inside of the layout viewport 13 1 3 Specify Layout Settings Once created a drawing in Model tab you can toggle to Layout tab and setup the layout for plotting such as paper size drawing orientation You can right click on the Layout tab to create new layouts or import from template files and then click Modify button on the Page Setup dialog box to set the page Select a Paper Size for a Layout The paper size here refers to the size of the drawing When you start Plot dialog box in Layout tab you can assign the paper type from pull down list of the Paper text box The Paper size is directly previewed from the sketch with its size and units The available paper types provided in the pull down list are decided by current configuration If you want to configure plotters to export raster images you must specify output size by pixels The paper size can be customized in the Virtual EPs Driver 1 0 Advanced Document Settings If you specified a system plotter the paper size is decided by the default paper settings provided in the Windows control panel If any changes h
118. 12 3 16 1 0 64 8 1 4 1 0 48 6 3 8 1 0 32 4 1 2 1 0 24 3 JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 5 3 4 1 0 16 A reio 12 1 5 11 2 1 0 8 r Fato 4 0 5 1 10 120 15 1 20 240 30 1 30 360 45 1 40 480 60 1 50 600 75 1 60 720 90 1 100 1200 150 You can use these scale factors to predetermine the size of your drawing to make sure that it fits on a specific size paper when you print it You control the size of your drawing by the drawing limits To calculate the drawing limits to match the size of your paper multiply the dimensions of your paper size by your scale factor For example if the paper you use to print measures 36 inches x 24 inches and you print your drawing at 1 8 1 0 in other words using a scale factor of 96 the size of your drawing measured in drawing units is 36 x 96 or 3 456 units wide and 24 x 96 or 2 304 units high Keep in mind that you can print the finished drawing at any scale regardless of the scale factor you calculate You can also print on paper of a different size and use the Layout tabs to create different views of your drawing and to position and scale those views differently The scaling factor is not related to the size of the entities you draw it simply provides a preliminary guide to help you esta
119. 200 MODIFY OBJECTS offset In addition to entering distance you can also drag the cursor to determine the distance To offset a solid face 1 Choose Modify gt Solids Editing gt Offset Faces 2 Select the face s to offset and press Enter 3 Specify an offset distance Solids Editing toolbar m Specify the face s to The resulting object with the face offset to position B offset A and the distance to offset Delete Faces You can use SOLIDEDIT to delete the selected faces or fillets of 3D solids To delete a solid face 1 Choose Modify gt Solids Editing gt Delete Face 2 Select the face s to delete and press Enter Solids Editing toolbar zi Specify the face s to delete A The resulting entity with the face deleted Rotate Faces You can use SOLIDEDIT to rotate the selected face of the specified 3D solid around a JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 rotation axis You can specify two points on the drawing or select a existing line as the rotation axis X Y or Z axis as well as the Z direction of the current view could be used as the rotation axis too The system rotates faces at the specified angle on the current UCS which the angle direction is stored in the system variable ANGDIR To rotate a solid face 1 Choose Modify gt Solids Editing gt Rotate Faces 2 Select the face s to rotate and press Enter 3 Specify a bas
120. 2D coordinate as either Cartesian X Y or polar coordinates You can also locate points with Cartesian cylindrical or spherical coordinates A Cartesian coordinate system has three axes of X Y and Z Different coordinate systems 2D or 3D determine different coordinate representation x y or x y Z A coordinate value indicates the point s distance in units and its direction along the X Y and Z axes relative to the coordinate system origin 0 0 or 0 0 0 In addition you can type a relative coordinate by moving the cursor to specify a direction and then entering a distance directly With both polar and Cartesian coordinates you can type absolute coordinates based on the origin or relative coordinates based on the last point specified The coordinate can be measured in scientific decimal engineering architectural or fractional notation And the angle can be measured in grads radians surveyor s units or degrees minutes and seconds You can control these unit formats in Drawing Units dialog box Display Coordinates on the Status Bar ZWCAD displays the current cursor location as a coordinate on the status bar at the bottom of the ZWCAD window System variable COORDS controls the types of coordinate display When COORDS is set to 0 updates only when you specify a point When COORDS is set to 1 updates as you move the cursor When COORDS is set to 2 updates absolute coordinate as you move the cursor
121. 3 2 Create Angular Dimensions eessessseeeccccccecccceeeeesssssseeeeeceeeeeeeeeqaas 245 10 3 3 Create Radial Dimensions ccccccecesssseseeceeceaeeeeseccceeeeaaeeseeecceeesaaaaeeeeeees 247 10 34 Create Diameter DIMENSIONS cnuieceeiinceriercen i a EN E ES 248 10 3 5 Create Ordinate Dimensions cece ceeeeececcecceeeeeeeccceeeceaeeseecceeessaaaeeeeeees 249 10 3 6 Create Quick DitnensiOn i ic 4cinicsiscncddcsdunsischaneoatedadwwradesiucabncsdeasndsalasatecedenands 250 10 3 7 Create Arc Length Dimension ssssssssssseoeeeererssssssssseecerrrersssssssssssseeeeeereeo 250 10 4 Modify Existine Dimensions smssssiresoss asuaan ane aneia 251 10412 Modify Dimension Stylesearch a a avai ae 251 10 4 2 Making dimensions oblique ccc csseseseeseeeeeceeceecececeeseeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 252 104 3 Modify Dimension TEXT srren nerenin rna a e tc ounaaaeats 252 LO44 Dimension Josged seseina a a e EEE 254 104 5 Dimension Inspection csoki a aa a ana 255 10 4 6 Adjust Dimension Space eseeeeeesssssssssssssererssssssssssssseereteeerssssssssssssseeeeeeeeo 256 104 7 Dimension Break sissen a E E seek 257 10 5 Add Geometrie TOE AN CS Socera ne e aAa A EA i 258 10 6 1e AEE EE E E E OE E E T EEE A eee 262 11 Blocks Attribute and Xrefs cccccsscssccssccsscsccees 207 11 1 Createzand Insert Bloks rininanuneanner g E A E E E U 267 EAEI Create Blokon een E ee 267 JL Sy
122. 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 5 Block not aligned with object Block aligned wath object ZWCAD begins measuring or dividing based on the point at which you select the object and the type of object with which you are working For most objects measuring starts from the endpoint closest to the point you used to select the object The starting point for measurements or divisions depends on the selected object type Generally it includes the following cases For lines or open polylines the starting point is the endpoint that is closest to the selection point For closed polylines the starting point is the polyline start point For circles it is at the angle from the center point which is equivalent to the current Snap angle For example if the snap angle is set to 0 the circle starts at the three o clock position and continues counterclockwise By default the point marker is displayed as a single dot and you may not be able to the measure intervals You can change the appearance of point markers using system variable PDMODE In addition you can change the style of point markers in the Point Style dialog box with the DDPTYPE command And the system variable PDSIZE controls the size of point markers Divide an Object into Equal Segments Places point markers on selected objects The markers divide the selected objects into a specified number of equal lengths The objects that can
123. 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 76 COORDINATES AND COORDINATE SYSTEM display thicker lines For example a scale factor of 0 5 would display a 80 millimeter lineweight as 40 millimeter a scale factor of 2 would increase the same lineweight to display at 1 6 millimeters This can help you differentiate various lineweights that display in a drawing Adjusting the lineweight display scale affects how the lineweights appear on your screen not how they appear when printed NOTE Seiting the lineweight scale too high may result in slower system performance You can also adjust the units for measuring lineweights and the default lineweight To control the display of lineweights 1 Choose Format gt Lineweight 2 In Units for Listing choose Millimeters or Inches 3 In Default select the lineweight assigned to layers and entities that use the Default lineweight 4 In Adjust Display Scale move the slider to the scale you want By default the slider begins at 1 00 5 Click OK Command line LINEWEIGHT TIP On the status bar left click the word LWT to turn the display of lineweights on or off Update the Display New objects automatically apply the current settings to displays of solid fill and text Except for lineweights you must use the REGEN command to update the display of existing objects Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed By default newly created objects are in front of existing objects all objects are displayed in
124. 777030 www jl systems dk 180 MODIFY OBJECTS Modify toolbar a Command line FILLET Select the polyline Result after filleting along the A and B segments Fillet Parallel Lines You can fillet parallel lines rays and infinite lines The first entity must be a line or ray the second entity can be a line ray or infinite line The diameter of the fillet arc is always equal to the distance between the parallel entities The current fillet radius is ignored Original entities Result after filleting 8 3 Modify Compound Objects 8 3 1 Disassociate Compound Objects You can convert a complex entity such as a block or polyline from a single entity into its component parts Exploding a polyline rectangle donut polygon dimension or leader reduces it to a collection of individual line and arc entities that you can then modify individually Blocks are converted to the individual entities possibly including other nested blocks that composed the original entity With the following exceptions exploding an entity usually has no visible effect on a drawing If the original polyline had a width the width information is lost when you explode it The resulting lines and arcs follow the centerline of the original polyline If you explode a donut its width becomes 0 If you explode a block containing attributes the attributes are lost but the original attribute definitions are retained The colors and linetypes of objects in exploded b
125. 7777030 www jl systems dk 48 CONTROL THE DRAWING VIEW ialog box The Render to File tab will allow you to produce a rendered image directly to a file on disk rather than to the ZWCAD screen To save a rendered image of your drawing Create a rendered image of the drawing 1 Do one of the following Choose View gt Render gt Preferences On the Render toolbar click the Render Preferences tool 2 On the Rendering tab click Save Last Image 3 Enter a file name and path 4 In Save As Type choose the file format 5 Click Save JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk m recision Tools and the Properties of drawing 5 1 Specify Units Angles and Scale Specify the units of measurement you want to use their format and other conventions Determine Units of Measurement When you start drawing you specify the units of measurement their formats as well as the number of decimal fraction Set the Units Format You can set the display format of the unit These formats include scientific decimal engineering architectural and fractional notation To enter architectural feet and inches format you can indicate feet using the prime symbol for example 72 3 You do not need to specify inches by entering quotation marks You can set the unit type and precision in the Quick Setup wizard the Advanced Setup wizard or the Units Control dialog box These s
126. 9 Under Datum 1 type the primary datum reference letter 10 To display the material condition symbols click the other line box in Datum 1 JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 10 11 Click to select a material condition 12 Repeat steps 9 through 11 to add secondary and tertiary datum if appropriate 13 In the second row repeat steps 2 through 12 to add composite tolerances if appropriate 14 In the Height box type a projected tolerance zone height value if appropriate 15 To insert a projected tolerance zone symbol click the Projected Tolerance Zone box if appropriate 16 Click OK 17 In the drawing specify the location of the feature frame Dimension toolbar Command line TOLERANCE Controlling dimension tolerance You can create dimensions as either tolerance or limits dimensions When creating a tolerance dimension you can control the upper and lower tolerance limits as well as the number of decimal places of the dimension text The image tile on the right side of the Dimension Settings dialog box shows the appearance of tolerance and limits dimensions based on the current dimension style settings 0015 2 474 cong Tolerance dimension Limits dimension To create a tolerance dimension 1 Choose Dimensions gt Style 2 In the Dimension Style Manager select the style you wish to change and choose Modify 3 Click the Tolerances tab 4 Mak
127. A coordinate system used as the basis for defining all objects and other coordinate systems zoom To reduce or increase the apparent magnification of the drawing area ZOOM JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk
128. A view orientation from a point on the positive Z axis toward the origin 0 0 0 PLAN PMP file Plot Model Parameter File containing custom plotter calibration and custom paper size information associated with plotter configuration file point 1 A location in three dimensional space specified by X Y and Z coordinate values 2 A ZWCAD object consisting of a single coordinate location POINT JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 16 pointer A cursor on a video display screen that can be moved around to place textual or graphical information polar array Objects copied around a specified center point a specified number of times ARRAY Polar Snap A precision drawing tool used to snap to incremental distances along the polar tracking alignment path polar tracking A precision drawing tool that displays temporary alignment paths defined by user specified polar angles polygon window selection A multisided area specified to select objects in groups polyline An object composed of one or more connected line segments or circular arcs treated as a single object Also called pline PLINE PEDIT plot style An object property that specifies a set of overrides for color dithering gray scale pen assignments screening linetype lineweight endstyles joinstyles and fill styles Plot styles are applied at plot time plot style table A set of plot styles Pl
129. AME image with boundaries on Image with boundaries off Clip Raster Images You can get the desired part of the image displayed through imageclip and also improve the redraw speed so as to define the display and plot area of the image Two types of clipping boundary are provided as rectangle composed by lines and polyline The vertex within an image boundary even if self intersected vertex should be specified when you define new boundaries Here rectangle boundary is the default pattern of clipping boundary Only one clipping boundary is assigned for each image instance but multiple instances of the same image can be assigned with different boundaries The clipped image can be displayed within clipping boundary and also displayed inside its original boundary You can remove the clipping boundary of an image and use the original frame of the image to display the clipped image instead But the boundary of the image to be clipped must be visible JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 298 HATCHES AND REALISTIC IMAGES rectangular clipping boundaries off result To clip an image in the shape of a rectangle 1 Choose Modify gt Clip gt Image 2 Select the edge of the image you want to clip 3 If prompted type new to create a new clipping boundary 4 Choose Rectangle 5 Define the first corner of the clipping rectangle 6 Define the second corner of the clipping rec
130. ARGA True Vision Raster Based Data Format _ tga TIFF Tagged Image File Format tif or tiff GIF Graphic Interchange Format gif Attach Raster Images Use IMAGEATTACH to select and attach raster images or bitonal 8 bit gray 8 bit color or 24 bit color image files to a drawing Attaching an image creates an image definition loads the image into memory and displays the image Similar to the attach xrefs attching a path of the raster image that is not virtual part of the drawing file the path linked to the image files can be changed or removed any time you want The image file can be inserted as blocks as many times as you like once attached to the current drawing you can clip the attached raster image and setup its lightness contrast fading and transparency To attach a raster image 1 Choose Insert gt Raster Image 2 Specify a file to attach and then click OK 3 In the Image dialog box in the Inserttion point and scale click Specify on screen Specify rotation and then click OK 4 Specify an insertion point 5 Specify a scale Reference toolbar Command line IMAGEATTACH JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 296 HATCHES AND REALISTIC IMAGES Positioning File Tfw file is a txt about TIFF image coordinates information this file defines the affine relation between image pixel coordinates and actual geographical coordinates its basic theory are shown as follow
131. B objects C and second D chamfer distances Trim and Extend Chamfered Objects If the objects to chamfer are two intersecting lines and you select Trim option to chamfer objects system automatically trims lines to the endpoint of chamfered line If the selected lines are not intersecting with each other system extends them to get intersectant If you select No Trim system creates chamfer directly and not to trim Chamfer by Specify Length and Angle You can chamfer objects by specifying a start point and an angle To chamfer two objects using the distance angle method 1 Choose Modify gt Chamfer 2 On the command line type s 3 In the Drawing Settings dialog box click the Entity Modification tab 4 Under Chamfer Distances And Angles click Distance Angle 5 Under Chamfer Distances And Angles specify the chamfer distance and angle 6 Click OK 7 Select the first object 8 Select the second object Modify toolbar N Command line CHAMFER Select the first A and The chamfer is drawn based on the distance second B objects C and the angle D Chamfer Polylines and Polyline Segments You can create a chamfer line for two segments of a polyline that are adjacent or JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 176 MODIFY OBJECTS separated by no more than one arc segment As shown in the illustration if they separated by a arc segment the arc is deleted an
132. Blocks can help you better organize your work quickly create and revise drawings and reduce drawing file size After you create a block from multiple objects you save it once which also saves disk space You can change the block definition to quickly revise a drawing and then update all instances of the block If you insert a block that contains objects originally drawn on layer 0 and assigned color and linetype BYLAYER it is placed on the current layer and assumes the color and linetype of that layer If you insert a block that contains objects originally drawn on other layers or with explicitly specified colors or linetypes the block retains the original settings If you insert a block that contains objects originally assigned color and linetype BYBLOCK and the block itself has the color and linetype BYLAYER those objects adopt the color and linetype of the layer onto which they are inserted If the block is assigned an explicit color or linetype such as red or dashed those objects adopt those qualities A procedure called nesting occurs when you include other blocks in a new block that you are creating Nesting is useful when you want to combine and include small components such as nuts and bolts into a larger assembly and you need to insert multiple instances of that assembly into an even larger drawing 11 1 1 Create Blocks ZWCAD provides various methods to create blocks and insert the block into a drawing more times as you need Wi
133. CAD engine ZWCAD provides unparalleled compatibility with AutoCAD using most of the same file formats including those for drawings dwg files commands linetypes hatch patterns and text styles You can also use AutoCAD menu files and run Autodesk AutoLISP programs ZWCAD is more compatible with the AutoCAD program than any other CAD product delivers additional tools with advanced CAD features and has a seamless Microsoft Windows integration This powerful program provides a superb combination of features for CAD users like architects engineers and designers ZWCAD incorporates standard features found in other CAD programs along with features and capabilities you wont find anywhere else Its multiple document interface MDI lets you open and work with several drawings at the same time You can easily copy drawing entities between drawings Using AutoCAD legacy drawings ZWCAD fully supports AutoCAD legacy drawings ZWCAD reads and writes DWG files in their native format without any loss of data from AutoCAD 2009 back to Version 11 including AutoCAD LT Because ZWCAD uses DWG as its native file format no translation is required ZWCAD supports three dimensional wireframes and surfaces Three dimensional drawings can be displayed in wireframe hidden line view and surface shading ZWCAD supports displaying and working with raster images in your drawings When a drawing containing proxy entities is loaded into ZWCAD a message
134. CHAPTER 7 With the Draw Arcs option you can continually draw arc segments until you select the Draw Lines option to go back to drawing line segments When you draw arc segments the first point of the arc is the endpoint of the previous segment By default you draw arc segments by specifying the endpoint of each segment Each successive arc segment is drawn tangent to the previous arc or line segment If you type close while in the Draw Arcs option the closing segment is created as an arc You can also specify the arc using any of the following methods Start point center point included angle Start point center point chord length Start point center point endpoint Start point endpoint included angle Start point endpoint Direction Start point endpoint radius center point Start point endpoint center point Start point included angle center point Start point chord length With more unique functions editing the polyline is different from that of single lines such as adjusting width and curvature of polylines the additional fuctions are shown as follows Edit it with PEDIT command Use EXPLODE to convert it to individual line and arc segments Use SPLINE to convert a spline fit polyline into a true spline Use closed polylines to create a polygon Create a polyline from the boundaries of overlapping objects Draw a line and arc combination polyline Polylines are consist of multiple lines and arcs when drawing a polyline
135. Configure PDF File Title Specify the title for PDF file Author Specify the author for PDF file Subject Specify the subject for the PDF file Keyword Specify the keyword for the PDF file 13 2 5 Batch plot Specify a printer to print the multiple PLT PRN and list file TXT files at one time You should set the file to be plotted by selecting desired plt files or prn files from the Open button on Pltplot dialog box It s also available to save the files listed on current plot file list as a I XT file using the Save list button on Pltplot dialog box and then add all the files included in the list into current list whenever you use this file at your desire The plot list displays name and path of the file the plt file or prn file will be displayed together with its saving path While the TXT file will be displayed with file path Before batch plotting you can set all the files in the plot list and also selective plot part of the files from the plot list 13 3 Publish Drawings Publish multiple files to a single multipage DWF file or a printer in order to save and plot files The paper name and page setup will be displayed as soon as you select files to the JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 13 file list Here paper name refers to the name of the drawing to be plotted with a dash joining the drawing name and layout name page setup column displ
136. D solids Imprint You can create a new face of a solid face by executing imprinting operation The following objects can be imprinted arc circle line 2D 3D polyline ellipse spline region 3D solid To ensure the imprinting successfully the objects to be imprinted must be intersected with one or more faces For example when a rectangular intersects with a 3D solid you can imprint the intersecting curve Then determine whether the original objects are removed or not To imprint a solid objects 1 Choose Modify gt Solids Editing gt Imprint 2 Select the solid object you want to imprint 3 Select the object you want to imprint on the solid Solids Editing toolbar Separate You can separate the selected composed 3D solid into the several 3D solids with the JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 unconnected objects The composed 3D solid cannot share the common areas or cubage The separated solids still lies on the original layer and keeps the color unchanged All nested objects are separated into the simplest objects To separate solids 1 Choose Modify gt Solids Editing gt Separate 2 Select the solid you want to separate Solids Editing toolbar 0 Shell You can create a shell at the specified thickness One 3D solid only create a shell and the system have to move away the existing face before creating a new face The tangent faces are seen as a f
137. Download 3 From the web page that displays or from a different web page download the desired dictionary 4 Unzip the contents of the downloaded file to MyDocuments HunSpell or the location where you installed spelling dictionaries for ZWCAD 5 Click Change Dictionaries again which will load the newly installed dictionary 6 In Main Dictionary select the desired dictionary 7 Click OK Text toolbar Command line SPELL To use a dictionary already installed on your computer 1 Copy the existing dictionary DIC file to MyDocuments HunSpell or to the location where you install spelling dictionaries for ZWCAD Or add the folder of the existing dictionary to the list of folders where ZWCAD searches for dictionaries Choose Tools gt Options click Paths Files and add the folder location to the Dictionary paths 2 Choose Tools gt Spelling select one or more text entities then in the Check Spelling dialog box click Change Dictionaries 3 In Main Dictionary select the desired dictionary 4 Click OK Create custom spelling dictionary The Spell command compares text found in the drawing with correctly spelled words in an installed dictionary DIC file There are many different dictionaries that can be used with ZWCAD including dictionaries in many different languages You can download and install a new dictionary or use a dictionary already installed on your computer To create and manage a custom dictionary 1 Choose Tools g
138. Entities to have all objects in the drawing considered when creating the boundary polyline Custom selection Define only specific areas to be considered when creating the boundary polyline which can improve system performance if you are working with a complex drawing Click Select Boundary Set In the drawing select the objects individually or by choosing a selection method from the prompt box and then press Enter The Current Selection Set option becomes selected automatically which indicates that the objects you selected with the Select Boundary Set button will be considered when creating the boundary polyline NOTE You can alternate between All Visible Entities and Current Selection Set without having to select objects again using the Select Boundary Set button The Current Selection Set option uses the last set of objects you selected with the Select Boundary Set button 3 Choose an island detection option 4 Click Select Area 5 In the drawing click inside the area whose closed perimeter forms the boundary not on the polyline itself If desired continue clicking inside additional closed perimeters 6 To complete the selection press Enter 7 In the Boundary dialog box click OK Command line BOUNDARY 7 1 7 Polygons Creating polygons is a simple way to draw squares equilateral triangles octagons and so on Polygons are closed polylines with between 3 and 1 024 equal length sides However you should keep one thing in mind that
139. Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk COORDINATES AND COORDINATE SYSTEM A ae For polylines you can use system variable PLINEGEN to control whether a linetype pattern is centered on each segment or is continuous across vertices throughout the entire length of the polyline PLINEGEN 0 m eee linetype centered on each linetype continuous throughout 20 polyline segment the 20 polyline The Global Scale Factor and Current Object Scale are displayed in the Linetype Manager The Global Scale Factor and Current Object Scale are displayed in the Linetype Manager The Global Scale Factor value is stored in the system variable LTSCALE which changes the linetype scale globally for new and existing objects The Current Object Scale is stored in the system variable CELTSCALE which specifies the linetype scale for new objects You can get the displayed linetype scale by multiplying the CELTSCALE value with the LTSCALE value The linetype scales in the drawing can be changed easily either individually or globally In a layout you can use system variable PSLTSCALE to adjust the linetype scale in different viewports NOTE Seiting the linetype scale too large or too small may result in a line pattern looking like a solid line depending on what the scale view is or at what scale the drawing is printed You can control a new entity s individual linetype scale factor as well as th
140. Group button If a group member is included in a deleted block the object is removed from the drawing and also from the group The group maintains defined JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 even all the group members are removed To modify a group and its objects 1 On the command line type group 2 Select the group you want to modify 3 Under Modify Selected Group do one or more of the following Enter a new name and then click Rename Group Enter a new description and then click Change Group Description Select whether you want the group to be selectable in the drawing Click Add Entities to Group select the objects to add to the group and then press Enter Click Remove Entities from Group select the objects to remove from the group and then press Enter 4 In the Group dialog box click OK You can delete group definition by clicking Un group entities button The group is also removed from the drawing however the group members remain in the drawing To ungroup objects 1 On the command line type group 2 Select the group to delete 3 Under Modify Selected Group click Ungroup Entities 4 Click OK Exploding a group deletes it from a drawing however objects that were part of the group remain in the drawing The group s member order can be changed the order in which the objects were selected There are two ways to reorder group members Ch
141. Instead this may overlay b dwg but mot make it included when a dwg is referenced by master dwg c dwg Relative Saved Paths and Nested Xrefs JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 11 You can specify saving path individually for the xrefs that are attached to the drawing in Xref Manager dialog box You can select the saving path as full path relative path or no path lf the xref to be attached is a nested xref its relative saving path means the position relative to the host computer 11 3 3 Update Attached External References lf the xref drawings are changed you can update the xref to the latest version whenever you want To update a xref start Xref Manager using XREF command the updated xrefs displayed in the list need to reload you can update these xrefs by clicking the Reload button Once the xrefs are reloaded system automatically updates each xref when you open the attached drawing file directly to show the latest xrefs Opening external references From the Xref Manager you can quickly open the source drawing for any external reference This is especially helpful if you are working with nested external references which you cannot bind or detach From the Xref Manager open the source drawing make changes and then save and close the source drawing When the Xref Manager displays again simply reload the external reference To open an external refe
142. NOTIFYTIME value must be entered by ignorecase Update Xrefs with Demand Loading Turned On If system variable XLOADCTL is set to 0 turn off Xrefs with Demand Loading load the whole drawing if click the load button If system variable XLOADCTL is set to 1 turn on Xrefs with Demand Loading all other users can t access the xref file when reloading the file with Demand Loading If system variable XLOADCTL is set to 2 load a temporary copy of the latest vertion of the xref file to be loaded Reloading external references When you open or print a drawing any external references in the drawing are updated automatically If a drawing is already open and a referenced drawing is modified you can update the current drawing manually to display the latest version of the referenced drawing You may also want to reload an external reference that has been unloaded temporarily To reload an external reference 1 Choose Insert gt Xref Manager 2 Select the external reference to reload 3 Click Reload J Insert toolbar Command line XREF 11 3 4 Edit External References Edit xrefs that are attached to the drawing such as clipping bingding or detach as well as specifying full path or relative path for xrefs Clip External References and Blocks You can define a clipping boundary through XCLIP command once a xref has been attached to the drawing the clipping boundary defined by users are allowed to display only a part of the xrefs and compress the
143. P Selects entities contained entirely within a polygon selection window Crossing polygon CP Selects entities contained within or crossing the boundary of a polygon selection window Outside polygon OP Selects entities falling completely outside a polygon selection window Window circle WC Selects entities contained entirely within a circular selection window Crossing circle CC Selects entities contained within or crossing the boundary of a circular selection window Outside circle OC Selects entities falling completely outside a circular selection window Box B Selects all entities completely inside a box Point PO Selects any closed entities that surround the selected point Fence F Selects all entities crossing a selection box Select by Properties PRO Selects all entities by properties 8 1 2 Select Multiple Objects You can select multiple objects at one time using rectangular area or fence Specify a Rectangular Selection Area You can select all objects inside the rectangular selection area When specifying the first corner there are two methods to define a rectangular selection window Drags the cursor from left to right to create a enclosed window selection The objects entirely contained in the rectangular selection area are selected only Drags the cursor from right to left to create a crossing selection The objects contained or passing through the rectangular selection area are selected The selected ob
144. PLY objects created insertion point objects selected blocks written selected to block table To create a block for use within a current drawing 1 Choose Draw gt Block gt Make 2 In the Name input box on Block Definition dialog type a name for the block 3 Specify the insertion point for the block 4 Select the objects that you want in the block and then press Enter 5 To restore the original objects to the drawing while retaining the new block click retain Draw toolbar Command line BLOCK Create Nested Blocks You can define blocks and other blocks as nested blocks so as to simplify the organization of complicated blocks With nested blocks you can build a single block out of several components But you should notice that blocks that reference themselves cannot be inserted WOX nested block blocks that are components of the neated block 11 1 2 Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks You can create a block as a separate drawing file that you can insert into other drawings To save a block as a separate drawing file 1 On the command line type wblock 2 In the source tab choose one of the following Block This option saves existing block object to a separate drawing file When prompted select an existing block name from the pull down menu of this option JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 268 BLOCKS ATTRIBUTE AND XREFS Entity drawing This op
145. Reliable CAD for 2D amp 3D Design he q Powered by IntelliCAD Technology Consortium www zwcad org JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk mi Ses ne ills oe ag Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk Contents USer S GUIGO ourc can exouscacodseceecsusessscssecssecnseesssGereneeaeel 1 Introduction and Installation ccccccssssscsssceces L 1 1 ZWCAD TitrOducnOn assisas aici ect tects dvatas he distae datas iles 1 1 1 About ZWCAD and other CAD software ssseeseeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeerereeseeeeeeseeeeeees 1 1 2 Comparing ZWCAD drawing with manual drafting ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 1 1 3 Working with other data and programs cccccccccccccecceceeeesesseseeececceeeeeeeeeeaaas 8 1 1 4 Usin advanced AD Teal ues e ss yadaneaunecaats 9 Lhe Ge Mi MOTE ANT OL MALOU en a teaver anema utes A 9 12 stalai on a eaves tan ie nave tae uve tae aioe 9 1 2 1 SV SECM POGUES ICIS as cea ati Mar aaa Ns Paden wend ane neces aa T 9 122 Ins talline ZW CAD a ied eran a eect esa ie ae a iat ead 10 2 The User Inte rfacce cccccccscsccccccccccccsccccccccccscccccee L 2 1 MENUS and Shortcut Menus 1ccedidiie te aie eee 11 2ks MENUS aranin a a O O 11 2D SHORC Me MaS aaa a a a a 11 2 2 TOODA S ea a a aa 12 23 The Command Window sxcccwssnsuscaosssla
146. STEM Setting a reference grid A reference grid displays as a pattern of regularly spaced dots You can turn the display on and off and you can specify how far apart the dots are spaced The reference grid extends only to the limits of the drawing helping you to visualize the boundary of your drawing and to align entities and visualize distances between entities You can turn the grid on and off as needed You can also change the spacing of the grid at any time To turn the grid on and set the grid spacing 1 Choose Tools gt Drafting Settings 2 Click the Snap and Grid tab 3 Click the Grid on box 4 Under Grid tab input value in the Grid X Spacing field and Grid Y Spacing field separately 5 Click OK Status bar right click on the Snap tab on Status bar choose settings TIP To toggle the grid display on and off at any time click on the GRID button on the status bar or press F7 Setting snap spacing Another way to ensure drawing accuracy is to turn on and set snap spacing When snap is turned on the program restricts the selection points to predetermined snap intervals Although it is often helpful for snapping by means of matching the snap spacing with grid spacing the setting is not required To turn snap settings on and set snap spacing 1 Choose Tools gt Drafting Settings 2 Click the Snap and Grid tab 3 Click the Snap on box 4 Under Snap in the Snap X Spacing field choose the horizontal Snap spacing 5 Under Sn
147. Spherical projection the vector points to the north pole of the sphere Materials can be assigned to either individual drawing entities to drawing layers or to drawing colors When rendering an entity first material properties are retrieved for that entity if they exist If no material assignment has been made for that entity then material properties are retrieved for the layer on which that entity resides If no material assignment has been made for the layer then material properties associated with the drawing color are used Finally if no material properties have been assigned to that color then the entity is rendered using the DEFAULT material properties and the drawing color that it has been assigned The quickest way to get started with materials is to select from among the predefined materials available on the Material Library tab The available predefined materials are shown in a file selection box on the left hand side of the window Folders in the file selection box can be opened or closed by clicking on the plus or minus sign to the left of the folder name Individual materials can be selected by clicking on the name ending in JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 4 tex Once you click on the material name a preview image will be shown in the right hand side area and the properties for that material will be loaded You can then click on the OK button to a
148. Stretch Mode Select multiple grips of different entities to stretch separately depend on the entity types JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 192 MODIFY OBJECTS Stretch Lines Polylines and Dimensions Using Multiple Grips Select line polyline and dimension entities to stretch Press SHIFT while selecting grips on entities the selected grips will be highlighted Release SHIFT and click on one of the selected grips to use it as base grip and activate the default grip mode as Stretch Dynamic input box displayed on screen showing the following manipulations Specify B Base point option to locate the grip for stretching Specify C Copy option to create a copy of the entity being stretched Specify U Undo option to abort last stretch Specify X eXit option to exit stretch manipulation Specify target location for stretching directly Move the pointing device to specify target grips the selected grips on entities will be stretched or moved towards the direction pointing from the base grip to the target location single text point insertion point of block reference midpoint of line center of circle and grips on point object Multi Grips Move Mode Move entities with multiple grips mode use the last grip base grip or reselected base point as base point Move Lines Polylines and Dimensions Using Multiple Grips Select line polyline and dim
149. Style Manager dialog for further modification about each dimstyle settings You can change the following settings in the Dimension Style Manager Extension lines dimension lines arrowheads center marks or lines and the offsets between them The positioning of the parts of the dimension in relation to one another and the orientation of the dimension text The content and appearance of the dimension text The units of the dimension value With the Compare button of the Dimension Style Manager you can list the difference between any two named dimension styles If there is a dimension contained in the xref being inserted then dimension style applied in this dimension is also existing in current drawing You can compare externally referenced dimension styles with other styles but not allowed to modify them or make them current An externally referenced dimension style can be used as a template to create a new dimension style in the current drawing To create a dimension style 1 Choose Dimensions gt Dimension Style 2 In the Dimension Style Manager dialog box click New 3 Type the name of the new dimension style and choose which style started with and what kind of dimension used for 4 Click Continue 5 In the Dimension Style dialog box click one of the other tabs and then change the dimension settings as necessary Repeat this step for each tab as needed 6 To end the command click OK Dimension toolbar ia Comma
150. Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 4 Specify center point of new wiew Center scaling retain proportion Center scaling of ratio 2 1 To change the center of the current view 1 Choose View gt Zoom gt Center 2 Select the point you want located at the center of the new view 3 Specify the zoom scale factor or the height of the drawing in drawing units A Zoom toolbar ye Command line ZOOM Current view left showing the point to be centered in the new view A and the new view right Zoomed using a scale factor of 2x Displaying the entire drawing ZOOM Extents displays a view that includes all of the objects in the drawing as large as possible The view can display the objects on layers that are turned off but does not include objects on frozen layers ZOOM All displays all of objects within either the user defined limits or the drawing extents whichever view is larger JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 34 CONTROL THE DRAWING VIEW current view zogmed to extends zoomed to show entire drawing tall You can use the Zoom All tool on the zoom toolbar to display an entire drawing If you have drawn any entities outside the defined limits of the drawing the extents of the drawing are displayed If you drew all entities within the limits of the drawing the drawing is display
151. T command line prompt To create text 1 Choose Draw gt Text gt Single Line Text 2 Specify the start point for the text 3 Specify the height of the text 4 Specify the text rotation angle 5 Type the text and then press Enter at the end of each new line 6 To complete the command press Enter again Text toolbar JA Command line TEXT TIP If you ve already created text and want new text to appear immediately below the previous text Choose Draw gt Text gt Single Line Text When prompted for start point press Enter The new text will keep the same height and rotation angle as the previous text Align Single Line Text When you create text you can set the text alignment before you specify the start point You set the alignment by choosing Justify in the command line prompt By default text is left justified JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 210 NOTES AND LABELS middle centerihi c oo centeriT cA top left TL L o rightiT Ra n e left 4 middlel rightihd Ro leftidefaulti right bottom left en fic bottom BL center right BR i o center A center justified text middle justified _ text You can also align text so that it fits or aligns between two points The Align option creates text that scales up or down while maintaining a constant height width ratio the Fit option expands or compresses the text to fi
152. Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 40 CONTROL THE DRAWING VIEW You can see two or more drawings side by side You can easily copy entities from one drawing to another DB EAr house Ldwg SSeS E Etar stairdwg AEE SE j Model A Layoutl d 4 gt P Pl Model A Layoutl E EA brkinedwg mS EEA house Ady Id 4 gt bl Model A Layoutl d 4 gt P bl Model A Layoutl One session of ZWCAD with four drawings open When you work with more than one drawing open in its own window you can easily cut copy and paste in between drawings If you copy an entity from one window to another and then want to undo that action you must undo it from the drawing into which you copied the entity If you cut and paste an entity and then want to undo that action you must undo it in both drawings 4 6 Save and Restore Views You can save views by name and restore them for plotting or when you need to refer to specific details A named view is comprised of specific magnification location and orientation You can also restore up to 10 previous views When you end drawing the previous views cannot be restored If you want to restore views among sessions you have to save the drawing along with views by name When you restore views you can view all saved views along with their information You can delete views when you do not need them A drawing can be saved along with unlimited views Save a View When you name and save a view the following settings
153. The number of overlays you can combine to print a manually drafted drawing is limited by the printing process There is no such limitation in CAD With ZWCAD you can define an unlimited number of layers any of which can be visible or invisible at any time You can name each layer and assign each its own color linetype lineweight and print style You can also lock individual layers to ensure that information on those layers isn t altered accidentally JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 1 Use layers to organize drawing information Drawing accurately When you create a manual drawing ensuring accuracy typically requires a lot of manual calculations and rechecking By contrast ZWCAD offers a number of drawing aids that ensure accuracy from the start For example you create and modify entities based on an underlying Cartesian coordinate system Every location in the drawing has its own x y z coordinates You can also display a grid as a visual reference to your coordinate system n Mi Ra i i Aa Each position in the CAD drawing has its corresponding x y z coordinates within Cartesian Coordinate System Point 5 2 0 is 5 units to the right along the x axis 2 units up along the y axis and 0 units alongthe z axis from the origin the 0 0 0 point Settings such as snap and entity snap allow you to draw accurately without specifying coordinates The
154. The results are similar to extending and trimming This command does not affect the closed entities Use any of the following methods to change the length of an entity Dynamically drag the endpoint or angle Specify an incremental length or angle measured from an endpoint Specify the new length as a percentage of the total length or angle Specify a new length or included angle You can change the length of arcs lines open polylines ellipse arc and open spline To change the length of an object by dragging 1 Choose Modify gt Lengthen 2 On the command line type dynamic 3 Select the object you want to change 4 Specify the new endpoint or included angle E Modify toolbar Command line LENGTHEN Select the object A and then select the new endpoint B Result 8 2 11 Stretch Objects You can change the size of objects by stretching them When you stretch objects you must select the objects using either a crossing window or a crossing polygon You then JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 166 MODIFY OBJECTS specify a displacement distance or select a base point and a displacement point Objects that cross the window or polygon boundary are stretched those completely within the crossing window or crossing polygon are simply moved STRETCH stretches arcs elliptical arcs lines polyline segments 2D solids rays traces and splines that cross the
155. WCS You can create as many user coordinate systems as you want and then save and recall them as you need them to simplify construction of three dimensional entities For example you can create a separate UCS for each side of a building Then by switching to the UCS for the east side of the building you can draw the windows on that side by specifying only their x and y coordinates When you create one or more user coordinate systems the coordinate entry is based on the current UCS JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 92 COORDINATES AND COORDINATE SYSTEM UCS aligned with the front wall of the house To define a UCS you can use any of the following methods Specify a new origin and points on the positive x and y axes Specify a new origin and point on the positive z axis Align the UCS with an existing entity Rotate the current UCS around any of its axes Align the UCS with its z axis parallel to the current viewing direction Align the UCS xy plane perpendicular to the current view When you define a new UCS the UCS icon changes to indicate the origin and orientation of the new UCS To define a UCS by specifying a new origin and points on the positive x and y axes 1 Choose Tools gt New UCS gt 3 Point 2 Specify a new original point 3 Specify a point on the positive x axis 4 Specify a point on the positive y axis B Define the new UCS by selectin
156. X and JPEG are supported by the non system raster driver The raster driver is most commonly used when plot to files for desktop publishing Nearly all the formats supported by this driver produce dimensionless raster files with size in pixels other than size in inches or millimeters Plotters that can accept CALS files use the Dimensional CALS format If your plotter accepts CALS files a real paper size and resolution is required The type size and color depth of the raster file determine its final file size Raster files are capable of enlarging within the specified pixel dimensions and color depth Configure the background color for raster plots in the custom Properties dialog box in the Plotter Configuration Editor If you change the background color any objects plotted in that color are invisible Plot Adobe PDF File Adobe PDF file can be created from drawing using PDF driver Portable Document Format PDF is a standard of electronic file change PDF file can be used on any system operation like Windows Unix and so on More and more document are using PDF now such as e books product introduction network information e mails PDF has become a standard for digitized information The maximum output resolution should be set on PDF printing The Maximal output DPI can be set on Custom options of PDF printer which is called from Plotter Configuration Editor Meanwhile the properties for PC5 configuration file including the Title Author
157. You can insert blocks at intervals along a selected geometric object Use MEASURE to insert a block at measured intervals Use DIVIDE to insert a block at proportional evenly Spaced intervals Insert Blocks with DesignCenter The block definition created in drawing file are displayed in DesignCener Use Design Center to insert blocks from the current drawing right click the block and select insert block by specifying its location scale and rotation You cannot add blocks to a drawing in process of another command and you can only insert or attach one block at a time 11 1 4 Control the Color and Linetype Properties in BIQEKS Group 270 Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk BLOCKS ATTRIBUTE AND XREFS Through controlling properties like color and linetype for objects on the block the objects in an inserted block can retain their original properties can inherit properties from the layer on which they are inserted or can inherit the properties set as current in the drawing When you insert a block the color linetype and lineweight of objects in the block retain their original settings regardless of the current settings in the drawing The following three choices are provided for you to determine how the color linetype and lineweight properties of objects are treated when a block reference is inserted Objects in the block inherit their original color linetype and lineweight properties once
158. You can remove these elements by refreshing or redrawing the display To redraw refresh the current window display Choose View gt Redraw Command line REDRAW Information about drawing entities is stored in a database as floating point values ensuring a high level of precision Sometimes a drawing must be recalculated or regenerated from the floating point database to convert those values to the appropriate screen coordinates This occurs automatically You can also manually initiate a regeneration When the drawing is regenerated it is also redrawn To regenerate the current window type regen in the command line If more than one window is displayed type regenall to regenerate all the windows 4 2 Magnify a View Zoom You can use ZOOM command to zoom in or zoom out the drawing view to meet your need ZOOM does not change the absolute size of objects in the drawing it changes only the magnification of the view With this zooming feature you can change the magnification of your drawing at any time The cursor changes to a magnifying glass when a zoom tool is active Zoom out to reduce the magnification so you can see more of the drawing or zoom in to increase the magnification so you can see a portion of the drawing in greater detail NOTE If you are working in a layout viewport and cannot zoom the layout viewport may be locked The scale and view do not change in model space while panning or zooming in a locked layout viewport
159. a specific color to an object which overrides the layer s color setting When you create a new object use the Format gt Color command to change the current color For an existing object select the object right click for the shortcut menu and choose Properties You can then change the object s color in the Properties dialog box Setting a layer s linetype Each layer uses a default linetype a repeating pattern of dashes dots or blank spaces Linetype determines the appearance of objects both on the screen and when printed Its a good idea to assign the BYLAYER linetype to any objects that you draw on that layer ZWCAD uses the BYLAYER linetype as the default linetype setting for Object Creation NOTE Only those linetypes already set in the drawing can be assigned to layers To change the linetype assigned to one or more layers 1 Choose Format gt Layer 2 Clicks the Linetype name in the layer list to open Linetype dialog box from which you can specify the desired Linetype 3 Clicks OK button Properties toolbar Bet Command line LAYER NOTE You can also assign a specific linetype to an object which overrides the layer s linetype setting When you create a new object use the Format gt Linetype command to change the current linetype For an existing object select the object right click for the shortcut menu and choose Properties You can then modify the object s linetype in the Properties dialog box Setting a la
160. a three dimensional donut or ring shaped object known as a torus The diameter of a ring is always parallel with the xy plane of the current UCS A torus is constructed by revolving a circle about a line drawn in the plane of the circle and parallel with the z axis of the current UCS You position a torus by specifying its center point You determine the size of a torus by specifying its overall diameter or radius and the diameter or radius of the tube the circle being revolved You can draw a torus with no center hole called self intersecting torus because the radius of the tube is greater than the radius of the torus To create a bipolar depression solid specify a positive tube radius greater than the radius of torus 3D command creates a toroidal shape defined by surfaces only To create a torus 1 Choose Draw gt Solids gt Torus 2 Specify the center of the whole torus 3 Specify the radius or diameter of the whole torus 4 Specify the radius or diameter of the body of the torus Solids toolbar 5 Command line TORUS Center A and radius of the whole torus B and the radius of the body C To create a torus as a three dimensional surface 1 Choose Draw gt Surfaces gt 3D Surface JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 136 CREATE OBJECTS 2 On the command line type torus 3 Specify the center of the whole torus 4 Specify the radius or diameter of the w
161. able DIMDLI but the variable is only applied to control dimension space for the subsequent dimension space If you adjust dimension space by changing the size of dimension text is changed only or adjusting the dimension scale other than changing the position of dimension line then the dimension line is likely to be overlapped with text DIMSPACE command is also available for adjusting the space among paralleled linear or angular dimensions or overlapped dimensions automatically in case that the original space is not equal values It should be noticed when adjusting dimension space the dimensions you select must be of the same type for example either all of linear dimensions or angular dimensions Additionally these dimensions must be paralleled or share the same origin and placed at the extension line of one another If you set the space value to 0 when adjusting space among dimensions you can align selected dimensions at the dimension line If specify the space as Auto dimension space among them is default to twice of the text height To modify the text height you can set from Text tab on Modify dimension style dialog box JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 256 DIMENSION AND TOLERANCES a ll 4 62 5 12 10 4 7 Dimension Break Break the dimension or extension line as it disappeared at the intersect point The break size can be set automatically or manually an
162. ace while moving To shell a solid 1 Choose Modify gt Solids Editing gt Shell 2 Select the object you want to shell 3 Remove any faces you don t want to include 4 Specify an offset distance Solids Editing toolbar Select the entity and then select faces to The resulting shelled entity remove A and B then specify an offset distance Check You can check whether a selected object is a valid three dimensional ACIS solid If it is a valid 3D solid you can modify the object using the 3D solid editing commands if not you cannot edit the object using these commands To check a solid 1 Choose Modify gt Solids Editing gt Check 2 Select the objects to check Solids Editing toolbar Ww Clean You can remove redundant edges or vertices from solids when they are not needed JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 206 MODIFY OBJECTS To clean a solid 1 Choose Modify gt Solids Editing gt Clean 2 Select the object you want to clean a Solids Editing toolbar 8 7 Use Windows Cut Copy and Paste You can use the Clipboard to cut or copy objects from one drawing to another Cutting removes the selected objects from a drawing and stores them on the Clipboard Copying duplicates the selected objects from a drawing and places them on the Clipboard Cut Objects You can use Window commands such as Cut Copy and Paste to move or copy objects Wi
163. aceaattes a a sale ouladsaies 337 14 2 3 Export OLE Objects from Drawings cccccccccccccccecceeeeseeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaas 340 14242 Work with Proxy Objects sicidaiiiatertiaride nieo a aa 345 JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 14 3 Package a Set of Files for Internet Transmission cccccsssseesesesseeeeeceeeeeeeeeaaas 346 15 Compile and Work with Customize applications 350 15 1 Eo eae eee ge ENS ee ee eee reer reas eer 350 15 2 VEA ceres nowsas tet op desea beens Settee tases S ae loaner acsasataees 352 15 3 D pn ae er rt ater RT re sae NT erage Un RNC eT EE ae renee errr 354 15 4 D E Dee E ROOT E Tree OEE COREE ROR EEE N APT Tey er tren Sera rer eer 354 BG Glossary secsseseceesvecsseisceseducsvesscesetescdensvecseoiocssscuessesseenss OOD JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 1 1 ZWCAD Introduction 1 1 1 About ZWCAD and other CAD software ZWCAD is designed for anyone who wants a fast and efficient CAD program with all the power and versatility of standard programs such as AutoCAD by Autodesk Inc or MicroStation by Bentley Systems Inc at an affordable price Using today s advanced technology ZWCAD integrates the Microsoft Windows interface with a powerful
164. aces toolbar iS Command line Al WEDGE Solids Extrude EXTRUDE extrudes the profiles of the selected object along the chosen path to create solids The entities you can extrude are planar 3D faces closed polylines polygons circles ellipses closed splines donuts and regions You cannot extrude objects contained within a block or polylines that have crossing or self intersecting segments To extrude the objects that are lines or arcs intersect with polylines you can use Join option of PEDIT command to convert them into multiple single polyline objects or convert them into regions before using PEDIT command When an arc is part of a tapered extrusion you need to set a small value to the angle of the arc because larger angle may cause the outline to become a point before it attaches to the specified height oO fail original object extruded abject To create an extruded solid 1 Choose Draw gt Solids gt Extrude 2 Select the object to extrude 3 Select the extrusion path or specify the height Solids toolbar or Command line EXTRUDE Select the object to extrude A andthe The resulting extruded surface mesh extrusion Path B Solids Revolve REVOLVE command revolves a 2D object to the specified certain angle to form solids The revolving axis can be X Y axis of current UCS as well as lines polylines Similar to EXTRUDE REVOLVE command easily help drawing the details of a drawing that is hard to implement by common
165. ages within the drawing area Aerial View window with multiple viewports If multiple viewports are contained in current drawing only the views of current drawing are displayed in Aerial View window You can select Auto viewport option from the right click menu on the Aerial View window and then the views in Aerial View window changes while you toggle among multiple viewports The same circumstance happens if you select Dynamic Update option However when you draw or modify some complex drawings it s recommended to deselect dynamic update function in view of improve the capability of program In case of the dynamic update is turned off you can activate the latest view by clicking at the aerial view window when you want it displayed in aerial view window 4 5 Display Multiple Views in Model Space JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 4 Model space viewport is the drawing area that you can divide them into one or more adjacent rectangular views on the Model tap Among multiple viewports you have to make one view current for executing view commands When you begin a new drawing it is displayed in a single window You can view the drawing in a second window or you can divide one window into multiple windows You can also open and display multiple drawings 4 5 1 Set Model Space Viewports In large or complex drawings displaying different views reduces the time
166. al objects to the drawing while retaining the new block click Retain Update a Block Definition That Originated from a Drawing File To modify the original drawing directly before inserted into the drawing blocks inserted into current drawing are not updated automatically unless the block definition from the drawing file is updated using INSERT command Remove Block Definitions Too many block definitions in a drawing file may affect the drawing size To reduce the size of a drawing you can remove unused block definitions Erasing a block reference from a drawing may delete the block reference but retain the block definitions in the block definition table Using PURGE command can help removing unused block references from your drawing in order to reduce the drawing size You should erase all references from a block before you can purge the block definition Disassemble a Block Reference Explode To modify one or more objects within a block separately you can use explode tool from Modify toolbar and restore this block after you have modified these objects using one of the following method Create a new block definition Redefine the existing block definition You can automatically explode block references as you insert them by selecting the Explode option in the Insert dialog box Thus the block reference will be automatically exploded with each object inserted into the drawing separately To explode a block 1 Choose Modify gt Explode 2
167. ally choose to remove or retain the source entity as you need once the mirror objects are created Like the picture shown below Additionally you should notice that mirror is only effective to the plan parallel to XY plan of current UCS 3 morrar gt gt line CA 1 zZ 4 object selected mirror line defined result with original with win cd o with two points object retained JL Systems Group 154 Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk MODIFY OBJECTS system variable MIRRTEXT affects texts created with MIRROR command When MIRRTEXT is on the copy of text object is displayed in mirroring way as other objects do When MIRRTEXT is off the direction of text objects remains unchanged Displaying as follows ees ee text oe N ae at EEEE EEE ae before MIRROR after MIRROR after MIRROR i MIRRATEXT 0 3 i MIRATEXT 1 3 By default the MIRRTEXT is on It affects text objects created with TEXT ATTDER METEXT command as well as attribute definition and variable attribute Text as well as constant attributes that are included in an insert block are mirrored together with the block while mirroring To mirror objects 1 Choose Modify gt Mirror 2 Select the object and then press Enter 3 Specify the first point of the mirror line 4 Specify the second point of the mirror line 5 On the command line if you want to retain the original objects type N if you want to delete the or
168. ame sv for temporarily saved files filename here refers to current drawing name The temporary files are removed automatically when a drawing closes normally However these files are not deleted if there is a program failure or power failure You can recover the drawing by reverting to a previous version of your drawing from the automatically saved file In order to do that you have to rename the file using a dwg extension Use Backup Files ZWCAD creates a backup file with the current drawing name and a bak extension to save the previous version of the current drawing when launching backup automatically option You can revert to the previous version of your drawing anytime using a dwg extension in place of the sv extension Save Part of a Drawing File You can use BLOCK command or WBLOCK command to create a new drawing from part of an existing drawing You can select entities or a block definition in your current drawing and save them in a new drawing file The description also can be saved in the new drawing Save to a Different Type of Drawing File Choose the format from Files of Type in the Save Drawing As dialog box you can save a drawing to an earlier version of the drawing format DWG or drawing interchange format DXF or save a drawing as a template file You can save a drawing with a new name and in any of the following file formats Standard drawing files with a dwg extension You can choose a dwg file form
169. amed print style information from objects and layers However the named print style tables are not deleted from your computer Converting print style tables You can convert a color dependent print style table to a named print style table You cannot convert a named print style table to a color dependent print style table because color dependent tables contain only print styles that are named after the 255 colors to which they map Converting a color dependent print style table to a named print style table can be helpful in the following situations You don t want to create a named print style table from scratch You want to create a named print style table that has the same settings as a color dependent print style table but with some new print styles or other custom settings You want to convert a drawing to use named print style tables and you want to reuse most of print styles already defined in a color dependent print style table To convert a color dependent print style table to a named print style table 1 Type convertctb and then press Enter 2 Select the color dependent print style table ctb file that you want to convert 3 Click Open 4 Enter a name for the new named print style table stb file 5 Click Save The print styles in the new table are named Style 1 Style 2 and so on If want to use different print style names rename the print styles before you assign them to objects and layers in your drawing If you rename t
170. an 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk MODIFY OBJECTS 4 On the command line type Reference 5 Specify the reference angle 6 Specify the new angle Modify toolbar CG Command line ROTATE To rotate an entity in reference to a base angle select the entity A specify base point B select the reference angle and pick point B again or type the symbol specify the second point C and then specify the point representing the new angle D Rotate an Object in 3D With the ROTATE command you can rotate 2D objects The rotation direction is determined by the current UCS The ROTATE3D command is used to rotate objects in the 3D space With use of ROTATESD you can define the rotation axis by specifying two points X Y Z axis or the Z direction of the current view The 3D objects can be rotated with either the ROTATE command or ROTATE3D command To rotate an object about an axis in three dimensions 1 Choose Modify gt 3D Operation gt Rotate 3D 2 Select the objects to rotate and then press Enter 3 Choose from one of the following options Entity Last View Xaxis Yaxis Zaxis 2 Points 4 Specify the rotation angle Command line ROTATE3D Select the objects to rotate A Result after rotating the objects specify the endpoints of the axis of rotation B and C and then JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 spe
171. an ZWCAD file to another document does not increase the file size the way embedding an ZWCAD object does However links require more maintenance To transport the data you must make sure to transfer all linked files to the other computer To link an ZWCAD file to another document 1 Open the drawing you want to link NOTE Because a link is a reference to a file you can link only files that are saved to a location on a disk 2 In the other program open the document in which you want to include the ZWCAD drawing 3 Choose that program s command for inserting objects In Microsoft Office programs choose Insert gt Object In the Object dialog box click the Create From File tab Specify the name of the drawing file you want to link Select the Link To File check box and then click OK The drawing appears in the document with a link to the original ZWCAD file Work with Data in Other Formats Import Files Created in Other Formats To open and use drawings or graphics generated with other applications in specified format ZWCAD supports mutual conversion between DXF and WMF format Use the commands relative to each file types to convert formats among them You can also convert formats by opening or importing files ZWCAD surports the output file format containing WMF DXF BMP DWG DWT EMF SVG PDF EPS DWF SAT In which DWG DXF DWT DWF are imported using Open command DXF refers to drawing exchange format DWG refers to standard d
172. anae r E E 164 S210 Lencthen OD CCS eee a A AA 166 ST CCU CIC CUS ertir Seth car dare a e a e ETEN 166 S 212 Fomor Erted ODJEC serpentan aia aea ir deede 168 8213 Wrap Process INS nenun a E ous E E E 173 S220 Create Broak Sosna eu T a G EA 174 Seed Cree CaO Syn tee tee cece a e a teue ceidenctialicdabaunnce seunhosaseentes 175 galos Erate rE MMe ls eaaa caret tar e e E E EE 178 Modify Compound ODICCIS sssrin anaE 181 8 3 1 Disassociate Compound Objects cccccsssseeeececeecceaeeeseesssseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 181 8 3 2 Modify Poly HNES edie e eia aa th aaa n EEAS G a 182 8 3 3 Modify IMGT S Pee custody a E a 186 Use Grips 10 Edit ODECtS rnn e a a TA 187 8 4 1 Control Status and Displaying of Grips eeseesessesssssssssssserrssssssssssssseeeeereee 188 8 4 2 GUP CU IOC C eenaa a a a a a a Moaaktemes 189 8 4 3 Nii Grnps Edit Modessa eas hamtint sect ea sushaasaesameatustameses 192 Modifying the properties Of entities 2 cccccyisiavcesciscusesseseardasandaanescedasee a iaa 195 Modify STD SOl dsrscs a oleate Nadia r 196 8 6 1 Fob a1 Chant OR essnee ei EEE NEN 196 8 6 2 SC CULO A SICE nosat a E s 198 8 6 3 Modify Faces of 3D SOS iiciiniacccsctanicisoueiaciasaiccn a N 199 8 6 4 Modify Edees of 3D Solds ea a 204 JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 8 6 5 Imprint Separate Shell Check and Clean 3D Solids eens 205 8 7 Use Windows Cut
173. and a rectangle becomes a box Two dimensional entities Two dimensional entities with thickness added You can create three dimensional objects using any of the following methods Draw two dimensional objects in three dimensional space Convert two dimensional planar objects into three dimensional objects by applying elevation and thickness Convert two dimensional planar objects into three dimensional objects by revolving or extruding JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 122 CREATE OBJECTS Create three dimensional objects such as boxes cylinders cones domes spheres and wedges You can change the default elevation and thickness values to create new objects with an elevation and thickness already applied To set the current elevation 1 Type elev and then press Enter 2 Specify the New Current Elevation and then press Enter Command line ELEV To set the current thickness 1 Choose Fomat gt Thickness 2 Specify the New Current Value For Thickness and then press Enter Command line THICKNESS To set the current elevation and thickness using a dialog box 1Choose Tools gt Draft Settings 2 Click the 3D Settings tab 3 To change the current thickness in the Current 3D Thickness box type a new thickness value 4 To change the current elevation in the Current 3D Elevation box type a new elevation value 5 Click OK Command line SETTINGS 7 3 2
174. and and also retain its original state JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 288 HATCHES AND REALISTIC IMAGES Objects can be hatched only if they are in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS For the internal area of polylines with width and solid hatching hatches can t be applied because of its unacceptable profiles Control the Hatching in Islands You can specify methods of hatching objects in outermost boundary as normal outer and ignore Normal is the default hatch pattern besides you can view hatching results of different types in the Island detection option on Boundaries tab Normal Hatch the pattern from the outer boundary to inside Hatching process will be stopped when encounter inner crossing points and continue hatching until second inner crossing point appears So if counter from outer boundary of hatch area the area separated by odd number crossing points will be hatched on contrary the area separated by even crossing points will not be hatched internal point Internal point selected boundaries detected Outer Hatch the pattern from the outer boundary to inside For the hatching starts from two points of each hatch line system will hatch from the outer most layer of configuration and keep the internal blank Hatching process will be stopped when encounter inner crossing points Ignore Ignore internal objects only hatches outer ob
175. ange the serial number of individual members or arranges of group members Reverse the ranking of all members The number of first object in each group starts from 0 rather than 1 To change the order of objects in a group 1 On the command line type group 2 Under Modify Selected Group click Reorder Entities 3 In the Reorder Grouped Entities dialog box select the group you want to reorder 4 To see the order of objects in the group click Highlight Follow the prompts that display to view the objects one by one 5 To reverse the order of all objects in the group click Reverse Order 6 To change the order of specific objects or a range of objects In Remove from Position enter the current position of the object In Place to Position enter the new position of the object In Number of Objects enter the number of objects or range of objects to reorder For example if you are changing the order of only one object enter 1 Click Reorder NOTE The objects in a group are numbered 0 1 2 3 and so on 7 Click OK and then click OK again 8 2 Modify Objects 8 2 1 Remove Objects JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 152 MODIFY OBJECTS Removes objects using one of the following methods Delete objects with ERASE command Cut the selected objects to the clipboard Press DELETE to remove the selected objects You can use ERASE command to delete objects whatever
176. angle or closed polyline from which you can create a box using EXTRUDE The 3D command creates a box shape defined by surfaces only To create a box 1 Choose Draw gt Solids gt Box 2 Specify the first corner of the base 3 Specify the opposite corner of the base 4 Specify the height Solids toolbar d Command line BOX First corner of the base A the opposite corner of the base B and the height C To create a box as a three dimensional surface 1 Choose Draw gt Surfaces gt 3D Surface 2 On the command line type box 3 Specify the first corner of the base 4 Specify the opposite corner of the base 5 Specify the height Surfaces toolbar 2 Command line ai_box Create a Solid Cone Draws a solid cone in current drawing using CONE command By default the cone s bottom lies on the XY plane of the current UCS With its height parallel to the Z axis The apex determines the height and orientation of the cone JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 132 CREATE OBJECTS You can draw a 2D circle and then use EXTRUDE to taper the circle at an angle along the Z axis to create a solid cone To complete the truncation you can subtract a box from the tip of the cone with the SUBTRACT command The 3D command creates a conical shape defined by surfaces only To create a cone 1 Choose Draw gt Solids gt Cone 2 Specify the center of the base of the c
177. anipulations Specify B Base point option to locate the grip for rotating JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 Specify C Copy option to create a copy of the entity being rotated Specify U Undo option to abort last rotation Specify X eXit option to exit rotate manipulation Specify R Reference option to assign reference angle for rotation Final rotation angle reference angle subtract from input angle For example reference angle 20 input angle 80 final rotation angle 80 20 60 Specify rotation angle for grips directly Move the pointing device to specify rotation angle the entities will be rotated based on the selected grip or create a copy of the entity after rotation Multi Grips Scale Mode Scale entities with multiple grips mode use the last grip base grip or reselected base point as base point Scale Lines Polylines and Dimensions Using Multiple Grips Select line polyline and dimension entities to scale Press SHIFT while selecting grips on entities the selected grips will be highlighted Release SHIFT and click on one of the selected grips to use it as base grip Press ENTER to activate the default grip mode as Stretch Iterate grip mode until Scale appears in command line Dynamic input box displayed on screen showing the following manipulations Specify B Base point option to locate the grip f
178. anscsameanncdaciuans E E i 13 2 3 1 Enter Commands or System variables ccccccccccccccccceeeseeseeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaas 13 2 3 2 Edit Within the Command Window cccssccccccccecceeseesssesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 15 Pie ee Switch between Dialog Boxes and the Command line ccceceeeeeeeeeees 16 2 4 Dy ATIC ANNU ossen A E E A N 17 ZS Customize the Drawing Environment cccceeeeeccceececeeeeeeeesseseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaas 17 2 5 1 St MGC rACS COU ONS e a a E a E 17 25 2 Sa Ve AiG Restore Proms cist tos cia vassa ae a Vans aeeeaaminndes 20 2 6 Tool Palettes cicescousensstseuncersanentansushannca EEE tana muardedetamncaenadenes 20 3 Create and Save a Drawing scccccsssccssssccssssccsssses 22 3 1 Crede AS WIE Wy IMS och es catalase Sh e a a a la 22 3 1 1 Start a Drawins TrOm SCratcn ooann e E ie aaadewenenceaces 22 5 AZ Usca SCC WIZE seed esa shasdesidadidesiel ides ie desaabsidesihedibnaalaidens a 22 3 1 3 Use a Template File to Start a Drawing cccccccssseessseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 23 DA PEM diy ERIS S Drawing rosis E 24 3 2 1 Find and opemsa Drawine Pilesiossi israse Meamaaieantncditaaanes 24 3 2 2 Work with Multiple Open Drawings ccccccccccccecececeseeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 26 I2 Recovera Damas ed Fiesa eiseni ia E E 26 3 3 AVS AIG osaa a a leiaalnctassedtds dibsseubaduaseat 21 3 4 Error REPO eosa E E 29 JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halm
179. ap in the Snap Y Spacing field choose the vertical Snap spacing 6 Click OK Status bar right click on the Snap tab on Status bar choose settings TIP To toggle snap settings on and off at any time click on the SNAP button on the status bar or press F9 In addition to setting the snap spacing you can change the snap and grid orientation You can also rotate the alignment of the grid or set it to create isometric drawings Using isometric snap You can use the Isometric Snap option to create two dimensional isometric drawings With the isometric option you are simply drawing a simulated three dimensional view ona twodimensional plane much the same as you might draw on a piece of paper Do not confuse isometric drawings with three dimensional drawings You create three dimensional drawings in three dimensional space The isometric option always uses three preset planes which are denoted as left right and top JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 5 You cannot alter the arrangement of these planes If the snap angle is O the three isometric axes are 30 degrees 90 degrees and 150 degrees When you check the Isometric Snap option and select an isometric plane the snap intervals grid and crosshairs align with the current plane The grid is always shown as isometric and uses y coordinates to calculate the grid spacing If you click the Draw Orthogonal check box the p
180. ar Command line 3DMesh TIP Although creating rectangular meshes manually can be exacting they are useful for representing complex surfaces such as three dimensional terrain models The 3D Mesh tool is most useful when combined with scripts or LISP programs that mathematically calculate the coordinates of the vertices An example of a three dimensional terrain model created using rectangular meshes The following picture shows the polygon mesh with coordinates specified for each vertex 46 13 0 Mi direction 43 12 0 39 9 0 Ss 8 0 60 65 0 63s 3 0 60 1 0 N direction Create Polygon Meshes You can create a polygon mesh consisting of faces connecting three or more vertices You first determine the coordinates of each vertex and then define each face by entering the vertex numbers for all the vertices of that face As you create each face you can control the visibility and color of each edge and assign each edge to specific layers When creating meshes a positive vertex means an invisible edge System variable SPLFRAME controlles whether to show the invisible edges or not If set SPLFRAME on any assumed surfaces and invisible edges are displayed as those visible meshes To create a polyface mesh 1 Type pface and then press Enter JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 126 CREATE OBJECTS 2 Specify the coordinates of each vertex After each vertex t
181. ar tracking and specify the polar angle increment 1 Do one of the following Choose Tools gt Drafting Setting On the Object Snap toolbar click the Object Snap Settings tool Type settings and then press Enter 2 Click the Polar Tracking tab 3 Select Polar Tracking On 4 Do one of the following to specify the polar angle increments In Increment select an angle Mark the Additional Angles check box and click New to define a custom angle increment 5 Click OK TIP To toggle polar tracking on and off at any time click the POLAR button on the status bar or press F10 To draw objects using polar tracking 1 Turn on polar tracking and start a drawing command such as ARC CIRCLE or LINE You can also use polar tracking with editing commands such as COPY and MOVE 2 As you move your cursor to specify points notice the dotted polar tracking line that appears at the tracking angles you specified Points you specify while the line is displayed conform to the polar tracking angle Specify Polar Angles You can set a polar increment angle to polar tracking The default angle includes 90 45 30 22 5 18 15 10 and 5 degrees You can also type a desired angle at the textbox The value is stored in the system variable POLARANG The orientation of angle 0 and the JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 58 COORDINATES AND COORDINATE SYSTEM direction of obj
182. aracteristic to which the tolerance is applied such as location orientation or form For example a form tolerance may indicate the flatness or roundness of a surface The geometric tolerance symbols and their characteristics are shown in the following F Lr ain Position Location Ps oy Concentricity or coaxiality Location Symmetry Location if 1 7 Parallelism Orientation Perpendicularity Orientation Angularity lt Orientation JL Systems Group 258 Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk DIMENSION AND TOLERANCES mf Cylindricity Form Flatness Form Circularity or roundness Form Straightness Form Profile of a surface Profile Profile ofa line Profile Circular runout Runout FAA Totalrunout Runout The tolerance value can then be followed by primary secondary and tertiary datum reference letters along with the material conditions of each datum Datum reference letters are generally used as reference tolerances to one of up to three perpendicular planes from which a measurement is made although datum reference letters can also indicate an exact point or axis A feature control frame contains symbols that represent location orientation form profile and runout that apply to a tolerance Form tolerances control straightness circularity flatness and cylindricit
183. arting angle and the number of degrees to revolve the profile Revolving the profile 360 degrees creates a closed three dimensional mesh The Number Of M Direction Surfaces value determines the mesh density the number of mesh segments in the M direction around the axis of revolution The N Direction Mesh Density value determines the mesh density the number of mesh segments in the N direction along the axis of revolution To create a revolved surface mesh 1 Choose Draw gt Surfaces gt Revolved Surface 2 Select the object to revolve 3 Select the object to be used as the axis of revolution 4 Specify the starting angle 5 Specify the number of degrees to revolve the object Surface toolbar E Command line REVSURF JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 7 Select the object to be revolved A andthe The resulting revolved surface mesh axis of revolution B TIP 7o control the density of the mesh change the values for the Number of M Direction Surfaces Choose Tools gt Draft Settings and then click the 3D Settings tab Under Surface Settings change the Number Of M Direction Surfaces Create Edge Defined Surface Meshes You can create a surface called a Coons surface patch a mesh connecting four edges You select the entities that define the edges Edge entities can be arcs lines or polylines The four edge entities must form a closed loop and share e
184. as a means of communicating information between the person who created the drawing and the person viewing the drawing The drawings contain no more information than what is visually imparted by the creator and seen by the viewer ZWCAD offers rich possibilities for analyzing drawings and attaching additional data to them For instance although it may be impractical to count entities in a complex paper drawing this task is simple in CAD ZWCAD can calculate the number of entities in a drawing and compute area and distance CAD drawings can also contain information in addition to visible entities You can attach invisible database information to visible drawing entities and extract the information for analysis in a database or spreadsheet Working with information in a data base requires a program from a third party vendor or you can create your own means of exporting the data in LISP or SDS Or you can also use VBA Bolylise Fandles EISD SUETZAG space Paper Lavyec X OOHTOUR L ISHT To LOE EG Liramt ypm AYLATER Folyline Flags SCaELIAg Bidckh Erding wider Huser of vertices jo Palyling Tote Length 2 Hando FIRES a Curran space Pap or Veena i j ta 4 Layer HOORTOURUGHT oo E Color 255 Handle 6 Linetype BYLAYER Location f T Polyine Fise Open a 24 00 A Starting width T Stecting vidth f gy Ending vadik Emding idib 10 dumber ofertis 6 Falae 147
185. as one of the objects in selected reference and automatically add to working set the objects outside the working set may be fading displayed The objects to be edit in place created in layer that the reference are locked are also editable Before editing the references you should unlock the layer on which the objects are located and then modify this object After modification you can save the changes JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 11 back to references But the status of layer keeps unchanged regardless of lock When saving the changes for the references all the objects in working set are saved to references Objects that are removed from the working set never contained in the reference subsequently become other parts of the drawing Objects that are added to the working set will be removed from its original position from the drawing The objects being created or removed will be added or removed into the working set automatically Save Back Edited Xrefs and Blocks Changes to the references are optionally saved to the current drawing lf you choose saving the changes system automatically regenerate the drawing in addition block definitions are redefined and all the blocks are regenerated as well Thus changes to the xrefs can be saved also if the objects in working set inherit its original properties defined in external references these objects retain new proper
186. ase the size of the current drawing file External references provide additional capabilities not available when you insert a drawing as a block When you insert a drawing as a block the objects are stored in the drawing Any changes you make to the original drawing are not reflected in the drawing in which JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 274 BLOCKS ATTRIBUTE AND XREFS you inserted it When you attach an external reference however any changes you make to the original drawing file are reflected in the drawings that reference it These changes appear automatically each time you open the drawing containing the external reference If you know that the original drawing was modified you can reload the external reference anytime you re working on the drawing External references are useful for assembling master drawings from component drawings Use external references to coordinate your work with others in a group External references help reduce drawing file size and ensure that you are always working with the most recent version of a drawing 11 3 1 Attach External References When a drawing is attached to current drawing as external reference it will be linked to the drawing any changes to the referenced drawing may affect the external reference in current drawing External references are inserted into the drawing as block definitions and used as single objects But you s
187. at that is compatible with various versions of AutoCAD Drawing Exchange Format files with a dxf file extension You can choose a dxf file format that is compatible with various versions of AutoCAD Drawing templates with a dwt file extension Drawing templates allow you to easily create new drawings that reuse your drawing settings and entities To save a drawing with a new name or file format 1 Choose File gt Save As 2 In the Save Drawing As dialog box under Save As Type choose the file format 3 Specify the name of the file you want to create 4 Click Save JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CREATE AND SAVE A DRAWING Command line SAVEAS TIP You can also export drawing files to various file formats Reduce the Time Required to Save a Drawing File In order to reduce the time of saving a drawing file you can specify the incremental save percentage on the Open and Save tap of Options dialog box or from the ISAVEPERCENT system variable The incremental save updates only the portions of the saved drawing file you changed Drawing files will contain a percentage of potentially wasted space when you use incremental saves This percentage increases after each incremental save until it reaches the specified maximum value and then a full save is perform When the ISAVEPERCENT system variable is set to 0 all saves are full saves This option required more time to
188. at the paper size will be updated automatically to default paper size that plotters provide JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 13 To select the paper size and orientation 1 Choose File gt Plot 2 Select the paper size and paper orientation by specifying paper type and then click OK Standard toolbar Command line PLOT You can also adjust the orientation by printing a drawing upside down on the paper Each layout in your drawing can specify whether to print upside down Use a Custom Paper Size You can also add customized paper size to non system plotters through plotter configuration editor Usually customized paper size is not able to add to Windows system plotter but you can modify the plotted area according to the paper size associated to system plotters Position the Drawing on the Paper You can adjust the position of the drawing to be plotted on a paper before plotting Specify the Printable Area The selected plotter and paper size determines the paper size Set the Origin of Print Area You can specify the position of the drawing to be plotted on a paper by entering a positive or negative value in the X and Y Offset boxes Select Center on Paper to locate the drawing at the center of the paper The offset value makes a compensation to the page pitch by aligning the left lower corner of the title bar with that of the drawing paper The offset are usually
189. ate a copy of the entity being rotated Specify U Undo option to abort last rotating Specify X eXit option to exit Rotate manipulation Specify R Reference option to assign reference angle for rotation Final rotation angle reference angle subtract from input angle For example reference angle 20 input angle 80 final rotation angle 80 20 60 Specify rotation angle for grips directly Move the pointing device and specify rotation angle the entities rotate centered by the selected grip or create a copy of the entity after rotation Grip Scale Mode With grip scale mode you can scale selected entities relative to base point Drag the entity outwards the base grip to enlarge its size and drag inwards to decrease the size You can also specify a scale factor to scale selected entities Grips are selected depend on the type of entity For example to scale a circle use the quadrant point as grip If you press ENTER or SPACE key after selecting grips all the grip modes are displayed choose Scale and then command line prompts as follows Specify scale factor or Base point Copy Undo Reference exit Scale Entities Using Grips Select entities to scale Click on grips of the entity to highlight the selected grip and activate the default grip mode as Stretch Press ENTER to iterate grip mode until Scale appears in command line Dynamic input box displayed on screen showing the following manipulations Spec
190. ave been set to the paper size in Plot dialog box the new size will be saved in the layout to be used instead of the size in PCP Determine the Drawing Orientation of a Layout The drawing orientation is sorted into Landscape and Portrait which decide the plotting orientation of the drawing to be seen on a paper If you select Landscape plots the drawing using the length edge as horizontal While selecting Portrait to plot the drawing using its minor edge as horizontal Changing the drawing orientation just like rotating the paper under the drawing Once specified the drawing orientation you can control whether to plot the top or the bottom of the drawing by selecting Plot Upsize down option The changes setup in Page Setup dialog box are still saved in layouts A certain page settings can be replaced by customized plot settings but the settings will not be saved in the layout Unless you click Apply to layout check box Additionally changing the drawing orientation will not affect the position of plot origin which is located at left lower corner on the page once rotated Adjust the Plot Offset of a Layout You can offset the geometry on the paper by entering a positive or negative value in the X and Y Offset boxes Changing the plotting origin may change the position of drawing on papers The plot origin locates at the left lower corner of plotting area with offset value of 0 relative to X and Y direction The drawing will be moved relative to
191. aved when program fails DWG Auto saved file so called auto save file SV Backup file BAK Source drawing file DWG 3 3 Save a Drawing You save drawing files for later use just as you do with other Microsoft Windows applications You can also set up automatic saving and backup files and save only selected objects The file extension for drawing files is dwg and unless you change the default file format in which drawings are saved drawings are saved in the latest drawing file format After you have saved your drawing for the first time you can save it with a new name In addition to drawing dwg files you can also save a drawing in a Drawing Exchange Format dxf file or a drawing template dwt file If you created your drawing using a template saving the drawing does not alter the JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 3 original template To save a drawing Choose File gt Save Command line SAVE TIP When you save a drawing the first time the program displays the Save Drawing As dialog box so that you can choose a directory and type a name for the drawing Save Your Drawing Automatically You can specify to save drawing files automatically in order to minimize the lost data once a problem occurs lf you start the automatic save option your drawing is saved at specified time intervals By default system assigned the name filen
192. ayed No Do Not Rotate to retain the original orientation of each copy as it is arrayed 7 Specify the center point of the array 8 Specify a second point along the central axis of the array Command line 3DARRAY To create a three dimensional polar array select the object to copy A type the number of items to array specify the angle the array is to fill B and then specify the center point of the array C and a second point along the central axis of the array D Limit the Size of Arrays lf there are a large number of rows and columns for a rectangular array the system takes a long time to create the copies By default the number of array elements generate by one command is not over 100 000 The value is stored in the system variable MaxArray It is ranges from 100 to 10000000 If you want to change the value of MaxArray you must type MaxArray with the capitalization shown 8 2 6 Move Objects You can move objects to a new place without changing the objects You can type a coordinate value for the new position in the Properties panel JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 160 MODIFY OBJECTS The following image shows how to move an object Perform MOVE command and then select object 1 to move specify a base point 2 and Displacement point 3 The object is moved from point 2 to the point 3 J __M2 oe in oo a _ In add
193. ays the named page setup of layouts You can click the page setup to select other page setup from the dropdown list The model tab and layout tab are only applied to the corresponding tab You can optionally click on model tab and layout tab in Add drawings include option in the course of importing files into the drawing list And assemble a collection of drawings to publish and save the list as a Drawing Set Descriptions DSD file A DSD file is created for illustrating these drawing files list and selected layout list In the Publish dialog box user define the way to publish file list You can choose to publish to Printer or DWF Publish to Printer Plots all the drawing files on the pblish list you can set plot copies after publishing drawings to specified plotter Publish to DWF Generates the drawing files that are published to the file list and save them as a single multisheet DWF file or multiple single sheet DWF files and specify the saving path for the output DWF file JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 334 Data Between Drawings and Applications 14 1 Saving and viewing snapshots You can save snapshots of a drawing to view later A snapshot saves the current drawing in either emf wmf or sld format exactly as it appears on the screen A snapshot is not a drawing file You cannot edit or print the snapshot you can only view it You can use snapshot
194. bar JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 13 Command line PLOT Changing a drawing s print style table type When your drawing was created it was set up to use color dependent print style tables ctb files or named print style tables stb files A drawing can use one type of print style table at a time If necessary after a drawing is created you can convert the drawing to use the other type of print style table If you can t remember what type of print style table is assigned to your drawing use the PSTYLEMODE system variable to determine the print style table type To change a drawing to use named print style tables 1 Open the drawing that uses color dependent print style tables ctb files 2 Type convertpstyles and then press Enter 3 If you have already converted your individual color dependent print style tables to named tables click OK in the prompt that displays 4 Select a named print style table stb file that you want to use with the drawing 5 Click Open To change a drawing to use color dependent print style tables 1 Open the drawing that uses named print style tables stb files 2 Type convertpstyles and then press Enter 3 If you are Sure you want to convert the drawing and lose all print style assignments click OK in the prompt that displays NOTE Converting a drawing to use color dependent print style tables will remove all of the n
195. be separated include lines arcs circles ellipses splines and polylines Actually this operation does not separate the object it only identifies the location of divisions so that you can use them as geometric reference points object selected blocks indicating object selected blocks indicating fwe division divisions To divide an object into segments and mark them using point objects 1 Choose Draw gt Point gt Divide 2 Select the object 3 Specify the number of segments and then press Enter Command line DIVIDE JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 82 COORDINATES AND COORDINATE SYSTEM When you select the object by pointing Blocks or point objects B are placed along divisions are marked beginning from the the object to mark it in equal intervals end closest to the point at which you select the object A To divide an object into segments and mark them using blocks 1 Choose Draw gt Point gt divide 2 Select the object 3 On the command line type block 4 Type the name of the block you want to insert as the marker 5 Enter y to align the blocks with the measured object Enter n to use a rotation angle of 0 degrees 6 Specify the number of segments and then press Enter Command line DIVIDE Specify Measured Intervals on Objects Use MEASURE to mark an object at specified intervals with either points or blocks The last segment of a measured objec
196. be stored as independent file You can open VBA manager through ZWCAD menu Tools Macro VBA Manager to view VBA project in which you are allowed to create load and close projects ZWCAD VBA project is incompatible with independent Visual Basic 6 project binary system However you can use IMPORT File and EXPORT File from File menu option to import and export forms modules and classes while working in VBA IDE Open VBA environment VBA has its own interface environment execute from Tools Macro VisualBasic editor to open Visual Basic program and display VBA environment window which is short for IDE i e Integrated Development Environment ZWCAD VBA project is a collection of code modules classes and forms here module is self include program code segment a project is capable of containing multiple modules These modules and forms run together to perform given functions You can add new modules by selecting Insert Module menu option from the Visual Basic project window And next to open module file editor window in which you can write codes Meanwhile a new module icon will be added in the module list in Project window with default name as Modual1 ZWCAD is running while opening VBA environment you can toggle to ZWCAD platform from the last option on View menu in VBA IDE VBA program samples The following VBA program draws a donut with inside diameter as 10 and outside diameter as 15 Sub DrawDonut Dim Cent
197. before printing 1 If necessary click the desired Layout tab or the Model tab 2 Choose File gt Plot Preview 3 Do one of the following To print the drawing click Plot To return to the drawing click Exit Standard toolbar Command line PREVIEW Printing a drawing The print setting options available under each tab on the Print dialog box were described in the previous sections NOTE You cannot print a rendered image directly to a printer To print a rendered image you must first save the drawing to a different format and then print it from another graphics program To print a drawing 1 If necessary click the desired Layout tab or the Model tab 2 Choose File gt Plot 3 From the Print dialog box make any adjustments to the settings 4 Click OK Standard toolbar Command line PLOT NOTE Instead of using the print settings you saved with your layout you can select Previous form the Page setup pull down list 13 2 3 Use Plot Styles JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 13 ZWCAD uses print styles to change the appearance of your printed drawing without modifying the actual objects in your drawing Assigning print styles allows you to customize the Color GrayScale Screening and Lineweight that are used to print your drawing Print styles help you control what your drawing looks like when it is printed Because print styles are saved in print s
198. blish the text height and drawing limits when you begin your drawing You can change the text height and drawing limits at any time Apply scale factors You can set the following factor to determined whether the drawing is plotted on the model space or paper space Text Sets text height in the text style STYLE or in the process of creating text The text plotted height should be set in proportion to scale factor in model space The text created on the layout should be set at 1 1 Dimension Sets dimension scale in the dimension style DIMSTYLE or through system variable DIMSCALE Linetype To plot objects from the Model tap use system variables CELTSCALE and LTSCALE to set scale for noncontinuous lines To plot objects from a layout paper Space use system variable PSLTCALE Hatch Sets hatch scale in the Boundary Hatch dialog box or through system variable HPSCALE View When you plot a drawing from a layout you may need to use ZOOM xp command where xp is a ratio that is relative to the paper size scale factor of reciprocal Setting the text height The text height setting controls the height of text measured in drawing units Set this value initially so that text used for your most common annotations when scaled to the size JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 52 COORDINATES AND COORDINATE SYSTEM at which you will print a drawing measures 1 8 inch
199. bute flags hidden fixed validate and defined To define an attribute 1 Choose Draw gt Block gt Define Attribute 2 In the Define Attribute dialog box type the tag prompt and default text 3 Under Insert Coordinates specify the location of the attribute or click Select to select a point in the drawing 4 Under Attribute Flags select the optional attribute modes 5 Under Text specify the text characteristics 6 To add the attribute to the drawing do one of the following Click Define to add the attribute and keep the dialog box active so you can define another attribute Click Define And Exit to add the attribute and end the command Command line ATTDEF Modify Attributes You can edit an attribute definition before you associate it with a block and before it is saved as part of a block definition To edit an attribute definition 1 On the command line type ddedit 2 Select the attribute definition text to edit 3 Modify the attribute tag prompt string default text 4 Click OK Define Block Attributes Attributes can be attached to a block When selecting objects to be included in the block you can select all the attributes and then choose the block to be attached The order you select attributes determines the prompts displaying when inserting blocks lf you select attributes by crossing selection or window selection the prompts for attributes are displayed by the order of creating attributes Modify Block Attr
200. cally on the screen with the movement of the cursor One endpoint of the line is attached to a point in your drawing and the other is attached to the moving cursor running object snap Setting an Object Snap mode so it continues for subsequent selections OSNAP save back To update the objects in the original reference external or block reference with changes made to objects in a working set during in place reference editing script file A set of ZWCAD commands executed sequentially with a single SCRIPT command Script files are created outside ZWCAD using a text editor saved in text format and stored in an external file with the file extension scr selection set One or more selected objects that a command can act upon at the same time ShapeManager The technology used to produce 3D solids in ZWCAD shortcut keys Keys and key combinations that start commands for example CTRL S saves a file The function keys F1 F2 and so on are also shortcut keys Also Known as accelerator keys shortcut menu The menu displayed at your cursor location when you right click your pointing device The shortcut menu and the options it provides depend on the pointer location and other conditions such as whether an object is selected or a command is in progress slide file A file that contains a raster image or snapshot of the objects displayed in the drawing area Slide files have the file extension sld MSLIDE VSLIDE smooth shading Smooth
201. cannot be removed 5 7 2 Change the Linetype of an Object JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 5 You can change the linetype of a objects by changing the linetype of the layer the object is on reassigning the object to another layer or by specifying a linetype for the object directly Set the Current Linetype By default all objects are created using the current linetype which is displayed in the Linetype control on the Properties toolbar To modify linetypes use linetyoe manager or linetype control on the Properties toolbar lf the current linetype is BYLARER objects are created using the linetype assigned to the current layer lf the current linetype is BYBLOCK objects are created using CONTINOUS linetype until they are grouped into a block When you insert the block it acquires the current linetype setting lf you do not want to use the linetype assigned to the layer you can specify a different linetype explicitly ZWCAD does not display the linetype of certain objects text points viewports hatches and blocks To make the linetype current Selects the linetype from the down pull list of linetype from the Properties toolbar which one is set to the current one Change the Linetype of an Object To change the linetype of an object you can use following methods If the linetype of an object is set to BYLARE and the object is assigned to another
202. ccccccccccecesssseesseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 297 13 Layout Plot and Publish Drawings 304 13 1 Create Multiple View Drawing Layout ccccccccccccceeeceseesesseseeeeeeceeeeseeeeaaas 304 Ekk VCE VIC WW Ole Lay OUI assis beet acrt beat anced Been kre dsb son diene Geib chee EDS 304 13 1 2 Viewing drawings in paper space and model space ccsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 307 13 6 3 Specify Layout SettiNeS raa E 308 13 1 4 Create and Modify Layout Viewports ccccccccccccccceceeessseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 312 13 1 5 Create Nonrectangular Layout Viewports eesssesssssssooeeeeenesssssssssssssseeeereee 318 13 2 Plot Drawn is secant a hee Mee cers et eters sehen te ese ce Sheen nia a E N 319 32s Overview of PIOUS acson EE aE 320 13224 WPCC SETI SS ora E a a 321 DML ii Use Pot S ES a a e EEN 325 132 4 Plot Piles to Other Formats sesnccsnio ona a t 331 1323 BACE POU minr a A E E 333 353 Pubhsh DAW in S seach ecicedidorisbaiderilcnniciabsidenttadetesas aa 333 14 Share Data Between Drawings and Applications 335 14 1 Savins and viewing snapshots wriwsssrsscsosessacasaascsanaenwuarumeereniciacaasheniv neues 335 14 2 Linkand Embed Data sist cadereidecceinalcachaidee RB adcadutes Seacitadsatemidexinsn Coetten dice tta neon 335 14 2 1 Overview of Object Linking and Embedding ccc ceeeeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeenees 336 W422 Impa OLE ODI CCS ics ncsainasessachcansattaenerd
203. ccept the properties or you can click on the Material Mapping tab to adjust the way the material is mapped to the surface Backgrounds Specify the background or backdrop for a rendered image Several predefined backgrounds are available By default no background is used and it appears black The background is an infinite planar surface and reflects off of any reflective surfaces in your model The background is not affected by lighting however so no shadows or highlights are seen on the background You can select or edit a variety of predefined materials from the materials library for the background You also can specify how the material is mapped to the surface in the Materials Mapping dialog box Lighting Specify the placement of lights light color and light intensity to determine how your drawing or scene is lit including shadows and reflections in the scene Lights can be placed either outside the field of view or inside to illuminate different areas of the scene Three types of lights are available to use in your drawing Ambient light Point lights and Distant lights Ambient light An Ambient light illuminates the entire scene evenly depending on the Ambient component of the Material finish It does not cast shadows or change with viewing angle Point light A Point light represents light emitting from a single point in the drawing Shadows will be cast by surfaces in the drawing and you will see highlights where the light reflect
204. ce specific instructions from Help Developer s help 15 4 DCL DCL is an acronym for Dialog Control Language a separate programming language that you can use with ZWCAD to create custom dialog boxes In creating dialog boxes with DCL you work with elements called tiles cluster tiles or clusters and attributes Remarks User can reference DCL Programming Reference in Developer s help it s recommended to reference specific instructions from Help Developer s help JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 354 an 16 Glossary as absolute coordinates Coordinate values measured from a coordinate system s origin point acquired point In the tracking or object snap tracking method of locating a point an intermediate location used as a reference acquisition marker During tracking or object snap tracking the temporary plus sign displayed at the location of an acquired point aliasing The effect of discrete picture elements or pixels aligned as a straight or curved edge ona fixed grid appearing to be jagged or stepped aligned dimension A dimension that measures the distance between two points at any angle The dimension line is parallel to the line connecting the dimension s definition points DIMALIGNED ambient color A color produced only by ambient light ambient light Light that illuminates all surface
205. ce whose path you want to change 3 In Xref Path do one of the following Enter a new filename or location Click Browse to locate and select the referenced drawing ZWCAD reloads the specified external reference automatically aad Insert toolbar Command line XREF NOTE You cannot recursively reference a drawing from the same original drawing 11 3 5 Edit External References in Place Edit xrefs of current drawing without opening the xref drawings Edit Selected Objects in Xrefs and Blocks You can edit or modify the visible text of xrefs attached to the drawing through edit in place Because block references and xrefs are different types of reference files editing and modifying the block references will be illustrated here Generally one or more xrefs and block references are contained in each drawing the JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 284 BLOCKS ATTRIBUTE AND XREFS objects assigned to be edit must be block references so as to redefine When you work with xrefs you can modified the included objkects and save the modifications back to xrefs This may be proper to use when making small changes to the current drawing But for complex modifications you should modify the xref drawing directly then update the attached xrefs in current drawing Using edit in place for the xrefs may increase the size of the drawing and lower the capability of the computer
206. cify the endpoint 4 Press Enter to complete the command Command line MLINE 7 1 5 Polylines With ZWCAD a polyline is a connected sequence of arcs and lines that is treated as a single object You can draw a polyline with any linetype and using a width that either remains constant or tapers over the length of any segment When editing a polyline you can modify the entire polyline or change individual segments After you specify the start point of a polyline the command line prompt several options as you draw such as Arc Distance Halfwidth and Width You can specify different starting and ending widths to create a tapered polyline segment After you draw at least one polyline segment you can use the undo tool in right click menu to remove the previous segment After you draw two or more polyline segments you can type close in the command line to complete the command by drawing a segment that ends at the start point of the first polyline segment you drew Curved polyline with Polyline with straight Closed polyline tapered width segments To draw a polyline with straight segments 1 Choose Draw gt Polyline 2 Specify the start point 3 Specify the endpoint of each segment 4 Press Enter to end or enter c to close the polyline Draw toolbar Command line PLINE Polyline start point A and segment endpoints B JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk
207. cify the rotation angle D 8 2 8 Align Objects You can align objects with another through move or rotation The following picture shows how to align the piping using Align command fa L 2 i es E gt object selected with source and result with the scale Window selection destination paints option used Aligning in three dimensions You can align selected objects with other objects in three dimensional space You select the objects you want to align and specify one two or three pairs of points to align the selected objects To align an object an object with another 1 Choose Modify gt 3D Operation gt Align 2 Select the objects and then press Enter 3 Specify the first source point 4 Specify the first destination point 5 Specify additional source and destination points if desired up to three pairs Command line ALIGN Select the objects to align and then specify the The resulting mirrored object first source point A the first destination point B the second destination point C and the second destination point D You can specify up to three pairs of source destination points 8 2 9 Scale Objects 164 JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk MODIFY OBJECTS You can use SCALE command to zoom the selected objects You can type a scale factor or specify a base point and distance to zoom objects A scale factor that is greater than 1 enlarge
208. color books By default this is the same folder where you installed ZWCAD To select a color book color 1 Click Select Color in the desired dialog box such as Layers Properties or Multiline Text The Color dialog box opens 2 Click the Color Books tab 3 Select a color book from the list 4 Click the desired color 5 Click OK 5 10 Control Lineweights 5 10 1 Overview of Lineweights Lineweights help differentiate the purpose of one line from another Lineweights determine how thick or thin entities appear both on the screen and when printed By default each drawing has three main lineweights DEFAULT BYLAYER BYBLOCK and many additional lineweights in millimeters or you can use inches When you create an entity it is created using the current lineweight By default the current lineweight for a new entity is BYLAYER This means that the entity lineweight is determined by the current layer When you assign BYLAYER changing a layer s lineweight changes the lineweight of all the entities assigned that layer if they were created using the lineweight BYLAYER You can also select a specific lineweight or DEFAULT as the current lineweight which overrides the layer s lineweight setting Entities are then created using that lineweight or the DEFAULT lineweight and changing the layer lineweight has no effect on them As a third option you can use the lineweight BYBLOCK property in which case new entities are drawn using t
209. copy objects more than one time until you press ENTER to exit COPY operation Create multiple copies for selected object one time JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 1 Choose Modify gt Copy 2 Select the objects and then press Enter 3 On the command line tyoe MODE 4 On the command line type multiple 5 Specify the base point 6 Specify the displacement point of the first copy 7 Specify the displacement point of the next copy 8 Continue specifying displacement points to place additional copies 9 To complete the command press Enter Modify toolbar 6 Command line COPY To make multiple copies of an object select the Result object to copy A specify the base point B and then specify the displacement points C D and E 8 2 3 Mirror Objects You can specify a baseline to create a mirror image using MIRROR command The mirror image is symmetrical with the original one So if you want to create a symmetrical objects you only need to draw a half one then create a full one using MIRROR command When creating mirror objects using MIRROR command you should specify a mirror line around which the mirror object is created In the 3D space this mirror line must be perpendicular to the XY plane in which the mirror line is included The mirror line can be determined through specifying two points while you creating mirror objects you can option
210. cribe what you were doing when the error occurred whereas it is an optional requirement View Contents of Error Report Files Generally the software generates three error reporting files individually named as TXT DMP and the crashed drawing file itself In this error report dialog box you can see the contents of error reports by clicking on Click here links following the prompts To see what this report contains You can optionally select a file in the Error Report Contents dialog box or double click a file to view its contents Send Error Report Clicks on Send Error Report button on the Error Reporting dialog box then you can send the information of assigned error reports to CrashReport ZWCAD com as well as its JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 4 problem descriptions If the network isn t connecting a prompt box pops up telling you that The error report wasn t sent please send the file to CrashReport ZWCAD com From this prompt box you can see the name of error report file together its saving path Don t send Additionally user can choose not to send error report JL Systems Group a9 Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk m _ _ 4 1 Redrawing and regenerating a drawing As you work on a drawing visual elements may remain after the completion of a command
211. ct to a prescribed line or plane MIRROR mode JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 16 A software setting or operating state model A two or three dimensional representation of an object model viewports A type of display that splits the drawing area into one or more adjacent rectangular viewing areas VPORTS model space One of the two primary spaces in which CAD objects reside Typically a geometric model is placed in a three dimensional coordinate space called model space A final layout of specific views and annotations of this model is placed in paper space MSPACE multi sheet DWF A DWF file that contains multiple sheets named object Describes the various types of nongraphical information such as styles and definitions stored with an ZWCAD drawing Named objects include linetypes layers dimension styles text styles block definitions layouts views and viewport configurations Named objects are stored in definition Symbol tables named view A view saved for restoration later VIEW node An object snap specification to locate points dimension definition points and dimension text origins normal A vector that is perpendicular to a face noun verb selection Selecting an object first and then performing an operation on it rather than entering a command first and then selecting the object NURBS For nonuniform rational B spline curve
212. ction Lisp function can perform the following actions Load other LISP DCL SDS application or ZWCAD files Prompt user to do relevant operations in the certain situation Execute standard command in ZWCAD Handle character string with arbitrary length Do mathematic calculation Store variable value used lately Read write file Test and respond to the given condition JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk GLOSSARY e Select entity in drawing session e Modify the selected entity in drawing session e Export relevant information into screen or a file You can produce customize resolution with application comprised of compound variant LISP functions You can automate your job by extending CAD tools in ZWCAD or apply other applications into ZWCAD LISP can be used to produce any application you need in the special industries to intensify the CAD platform Application of LISP expressions LISP has its particular functions and syntax LISP codes are capable of tested directly without preparing extra procedure Two syntaxes are provided in LISP the first one putting the operator in front of the operating number in which operators can be taken as functions with specific features the operating number is process by functions Each statement is separated by a blank The second syntax divides the statement into two items within each bracket function name as the first item and the
213. cts which are accord with the filtering criterion The selection set created by the QOELECT command can be applied to the entire drawing and replaces or appends to the current selection set JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 150 MODIFY OBJECTS You can enter QSELECT on the command line or choose Quick Select from the Tools menu to open Quick Select dialog box With the specified the filtering condition you can quickly define the selection set 8 1 4 Group Objects A group is a saved set of objects which you can choose and modify together or separately as needed Groups provide an easy way to edit the drawing units as a unit You can add or remove objects to or from the groups as needed The objects within a group can be edited as a unit which resembles blocks However the groups are saved from session to session And you can easily edit individual objects in groups but in blocks you have to explode blocks before you edit them Groups cannot be shared with other drawings Create Groups Entering GROUP command opens the Group dialog box from which you can give a name and description to create a group If you copy a group the default name is Ax and it is considered unnamed When you select Display unnamed Groups the list displays all the unnamed groups When you select an object from a group the other objects of this group are also selected at the same time The obj
214. current drawing but the nested xrefs can t be treated like this You should distinguash with detach and remove which are totally different concepts removing a xref will not remove its relative layer definitions Using Detach option to remove all the associated information of the xref To detach an external reference 1 Choose Insert gt Xref Manager 2 Select the external reference to detach 3 Click Detach P Insert toolbar Command line XREF NOTE Only the external references that are attached directly to the current drawing can be detached nested external references cannot be detached Set Paths to Externally Referenced Drawings You can set saving path for the xrefs that are changed after attached to the drawing when you selecting saving path for the xrefs three types are provided for you Full path Relative path and No path Full Path Full path refers to the path that marked by locak disk or network server driver By default the path for saving the xref files are Relative path but this path lacks flexibility once the file is changed the path becomes invalid Relative Path JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 11 Relative path refers to path assigned by folders including current driver or original drawing file User can move the original files among multiple drivers within the folder at the same hiberarchy without affecting updating xrefs Y
215. current manipulation is not relative to any of the recent input Recent Input option will not displayed on right click menu 2 2 Toolbars Toolbars partially contain buttons that start commands When you move your mouse or pointing device over a toolbar button the tooltip displays the name of the button Buttons with a small black triangle in the lower right corner are flyout icons of related commands Hold down the left button on your mouse over the small black triangle icon until the flyout toolbar is displayed The Standard toolbar at the top of the drawing area is similar to those found in Microsoft Office programs Which contains commonly used ZWCAD commands such as COPY PAN and ZOOM as well as Microsoft Office standard commands such as New Open and Save ZWCAD initially displays several toolbars by default JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 12 THE USER INTERFACE Standard toolbar Styles toolbar Layers toolbar Properties toolbar Draw toolbar Modify toolbar You can display or hide these toolbars and additional ones Use CUSTOMIZE command you can also create your own toolbars You can move the floating command window anywhere on the screen and resize its width and height with the pointing device Dock the command window by dragging it until it is over the top or bottom docking region of the ZWCAD window but you can t change its size Displaying and hi
216. d columns Y direction you have to give the number of layer Z direction To create a three dimensional rectangular array 1 Choose Modify gt 3D Operation gt 3D Array 2 Select the objects and then press Enter 3 In the command line prompt choose Rectangular 4 Type the number of rows in the array 5 Type the number of columns 6 Type the number of levels 7 Specify the vertical distance between the rows 8 Specify the horizontal distance between the columns 9 Specify the depth between the levels Command line 3DARRAY JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 To create a three dimensional rectangular array select the object to copy A type the number of rows columns and levels and then specify the distance between each row B column C and level D To create a three dimensional polar array 1 Choose Modify gt 3D Operation gt 3D Array 2 Select the objects and then press Enter 3 In command line prompt choose Polar 4 Type the number of copies to make including the original selection set 5 Specify the angle the array is to fill from O to 360 degrees The default setting for the angle is 360 degrees Positive values create the array in a counterclockwise direction negative values create the array in a clockwise direction 6 In command line prompt choose one of the following Yes Rotate Objects to rotate objects as they are arr
217. d press Enter again Text toolbar JA Command line TEXT To specify a multiline text style 1 Choose Draw gt Text gt Multiline Line Text 2 Specify the first point of the Multiline Text box 3 On the command line type s Style and press ENTER 4 Type the name of a previously defined text style and then press Enter 5 Specify the opposite corner of the Multiline Text box 6 Type the text 7 Click Ok Text toolbar A Command line MTEXT Check Spelling You can use the Spell command to check the spelling of text in your drawings use various spelling dictionaries and create custom spelling dictionary It is comprised of the following items 9 4 Checking the spelling of text You can use the Spell command to check the spelling of single line text multiline text paragraph text attributes attribute definitions and dimension text Checking the spelling of text 1 Choose Tools gt Spelling 2 Select one or more text entities 3 In the Check Spelling dialog box misspelled words display one at a time Do one of the following for each found word Keep text unchanged Click Ignore to keep the found word unchanged in the drawing or click Ignore All to keep all instances of the found word unchanged in the drawing Change text Select or type a word in the Suggestions box then click Change to change the found word in the drawing to the new text or click Change All to change all instances of the found word in the drawing
218. d in a drawing are plotted the same way Named plot style tables use plot styles that are assigned directly to objects and layers With an extension of ctb these plot style table files enable each object in a drawing to be plotted differently independent of its color Additional Information Addition here refers to the page header and footer that appended to the plot settings You can specify information about page header and footer in the Addition area on Plot dialog box e g your name company name drawing name as well as date and time You can also assign text contents to the drawing to be plotted by any devices through the Header JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 320 LAYOUT PLOT AND PUBLISH DRAWINGS and Footer text box 13 2 2 Plot settings When you create a drawing you do most of your work on the Model tab At any time you can print your drawing to see how it looks on paper It s easy to startup printing and then later create layouts and custom print settings to enhance your printed output To start printing 1 Choose File gt Plot 2 Click OK Standard toolbar Command line PLOT There are many options that you can set before printing such as the scale of the drawing print area print style tables and more Before you print you can set up many aspects of printing Select and configure plotting device Specify paper size and orientation Speci
219. d in programs it can be performed just like executing commands in ZWCAD Most of the LISP functions are provided with prompts instructing how to use them You can load LISP program to ZWCAD before executing this program as performing APPLOAD command In addition to input from command line JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 15 ZWCAD provides another direct way of performing commands customize menu which is used for running LISP program No more descriptions for the specific procedures here Sample of LISP program The following LISP program explains how to create a green TEST layer and draw a closed polyline on that layer defun C testlisp setvar cmdecho 0 command layer t test m test c green test m test continuous test Iw 0 5 test command pline 2 3 0 6 4 O 1 10 O 11 9 O 12 1 0 6 2 O 1 7 0 o command regen command zoom e setvar cmdecho 1 princ Remarks User can reference LISP document from Developer s help to view LISP functions as well as relative tutorials that ZWCAD supports 15 2 VBA VBA is a kind of programming language including variety of Microsoft applications program environment such as WORD EXCEL etc Microsoft VBA is a type of program environment for objects capable of providing developing function as Visual Basic 6
220. d replaced with a chamfer line polline arc segment first polyline second polyline resultchanfer line segment selected segment selected replaces polyline arc To chamfer selected vertices in a polyline 1 Choose Modify gt Chamfer 2 Select the polyline along the segment where you want to begin the chamfer 3 Select the polyline along the segment where you want to end the chamfer Modify toolbar N Command line CHAMFER TAN Select the polyline Result after chamfering along the A and B segments Chamfer an Entire Polyline You can use Polyline option to create chamfer lines for each intersection of an entire polyline To get the best results keeps the first and second chamfer distance equal To chamfer all vertices in a polyline 1 Choose Modify gt Chamfer 2 On the command line type polyline 3 Select the polyline Modify toolbar 5 Command line CHAMFER Original polyline Result after chamfering When chamfering an entire polyline only accommodated chamfer distance can create a chamfer line As shown in the illustration some segments are too short to create a chamfer line JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 segments too short to charmer J jenar er segments polyline selected result 8 2 16 Create Fillets You can create a fillet using FILLIT command This command can apply to the objects such as arcs circles ellipses lines
221. d specify their spacing on the Snap and Grid tab at the Draft Settings dialog box Grid spacing does not have to match snap spacing A wide grid spacing can be used as a reference while a closer grid spacing helps you specify points accurately Change the Snap Angle and Base Point If you need to draw along a specific alignment or angle you can specify the desired snap angle The rotation realigns the crosshairs on the screen to match the new angle After specifying the snap angle the grid rotation also changes In the following example the snap angle is adjusted to match the angle of the anchor bracket default snap rotated snap angle Udegrees anghebO degrees The snap base point is the offset from a specific X Y value on the current UCS The default snap base point is 0 0 but you can change it to any X Y coordinate value to adjust snap points Changing snap base point does not affect grids To change the snap angle and base point 1 Choose Tools gt Drafting Settings 2 Click the Snap and Grid tab 3 Click the Snap on box 4 In the X base field type the x coordinate of the new snap origin 5 In the Y base field type the y coordinate of the new snap origin 6 In the Angle field type the grid rotation angle 7 Click OK Default gid and snap alignment Rotated grd and snap alignment JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 54 COORDINATES AND COORDINATE SY
222. d the Z axis In 3D space you can locate and orient a UCS anywhere Only one UCS can be made the current coordinate system at any given time and all coordinate input and display is relative to the current UCS If you open multiple viewports the current UCS applies to all of them If the system variable UCSVP is on you can save a UCS along with a viewport and automatically restoring the UCS each time when you make the viewport current To draw in 3D space you need to specify X Y and Z coordinate value in either the WCS or UCS The following figure displays the X Y and Z axes of the WCS JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 6 Generally the WCS and the UCS are coincident with each other which means that their axes and origin points are overlapped exactly No matter how many times you relocate the UCS you can always use the World option of the UCS command to make it coincident with the WCS Control the User Coordinate System in 3D You can relocate the UCS by changing the location of the origin point and the orientation of the XY plane and the Z axis In 3D space you can locate and orient a UCS anywhere In addition you can define save and recall as many UCSs as you like Both entering coordinate and drawing are processed in the current UCS With the UCS s relocation you can acquire the exact placement of a 3D point by aligning the coordinate system with exis
223. d the and the options for adding breaks can be set according to the number of intersecting object crossed the dimension and the extension line Dimensions for adding dimension breaks Linear including align dimension and jogged dimension Angular 2 point or 3 point dimension Diameter and Radius Ordinate Arc Length NOTE Unsupported dimension including Exceptions in Dimension Break Dimension break in block is not supported That means the object in the block can not be treated as dimension break ones Dimension breaks on arrowhead and text are not supported that means the dimension break can not place on dimension arrowhead or text Auto dimension breaks on trans spatial dimension or object are unsupported but the manual ones are supported The following object can be treated as break object on adding dimension breaks Dimension Leader Line Circle Ellipse Spline Polyline Text Multiline Text Block Limited to the above mentioned object Dimension toolbar 4 Command line DIMBREAK Auto dimension break To create an auto dimension break please select a dimension and use Auto in DIMBREAK JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 10 command The dimension break will be updated automatically when the dimension or the intersecting object is modified Adding dimension break by picking object Specified the intersecting object without specify
224. de edges generated by a nested face of an object When the current view is shaded hiding lines on solid objects also suppresses drawing the mesh image and instead displays the objects using wireframe representation with the back lines hidden Add Simple Shading to 3D Objects Although hiding lines can enhance the drawing and clarifie the design shading produces a more realistic image of your model You can modify shaded objects as you normally would When a shaded object is selected the wireframe and grips appear on top of the shading 4 7 7 Creating rendered images Creating a rendered image of your drawing removes hidden lines and then shades the surface as though it were illuminated from multiple light sources The rendered image is displayed overtop the drawing window and is displayed incrementally while it is processed At any time during the rendering process you can cancel the rendering by typing the escape Esc key Once the image has been displayed it will be overwritten if you zoom or pan the display or if another window is popped up in front of the ZWCAD window The image can be redrawn without the rendering delay by using the Redisplay Last Image command on the Render Settings window The rendered image can also be saved to a file from the Render Settings window Render The Render command starts the rendering process and generates a rendered image of the current drawing The Render command generates a lower quality image
225. defined by looking along the x y z axes align the UCS with the top left front bottom right or back based on either the WCS or the current UCS in effect when you select the tool You can also select the previous UCS align the UCS to the current view or select the WCS When you select a UCS the cursor orientation and UCS icon change to reflect the new UCS The display does not change however unless you select the Change View To Plan View Of The Selected UCS check box After you align the UCS to a preset UCS you can use Named UCS from the Tools menu to save the current UCS To select a preset UCS 1 Choose Tools gt Named UCS 2 Choose Orthographic UCS tab and select the desired UCS then click Set Current button 3 Click OK button UCS toolbar S Command line DDUCS 6 2 6 Control the User Coordinate System JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 94 COORDINATES AND COORDINATE SYSTEM You can use the user coordinate system for convenient coordinate entry and to establish drawing planes Control the User Coordinate System UCS in 2D In ZWCAD there are two coordinate systems world coordinate system WCS and user coordinate system UCS WCS is a fixed coordinate system where the X axis is horizontal and the Y axis is vertical The origin 0 0 is the intersection of the X and Y axes in the lower left corner of the drawing You can define a UCS based on
226. del space can t be imported while creating layout from template System provides template file with extension name as dwt Layout templates from any drawing templates can be imported into the current drawing To create a new layout from an existing file 1 Choose Insert gt Layout gt Layout from Template 2 Select the desired template drawing or drawing interchange file that contains the layout you want and then click Open 3 Select the layout s from the template file and then click OK You can choose multiple layouts by holding down Ctrl while selecting layout names Layouttoolbar Command line LAYOUT Save layouts Any drawing created in ZWCAD can be saved as template drawing file dwt together with all the objects and layout settings Using save option of LAYOUT command to save the layout as new DWT file By default template files are saved in the template file searching path located under the corresponding position in Files tab of Options dialog box Like drawing template file Layout template file go with the same extension name that contain some irrelevant information to the layouts When saving a drawing containing new layouts as template file all the named objects used in the layout such as blocks layers and dimension styles will be saved as well The defined table options are imported as part of the layout settings together with template file Once a template file is saved using Save option of LAYOUT command the d
227. des an additional work area called paper space The contents of paper Space represent the paper layout of your drawing In this work area you cancreate and arrange different views of your model similar to the way you arrange detail drawings or orthogonal views of a model on a sheet of paper You view and work in paper space while using a Layout tab Each view or layout viewport that you create in paper space provides a window of your drawing in model space You can create one layout viewport or several You can place layout viewports anywhere on the screen their edges can be touching or not and you can print them all at the same time You do not need to use paper space to print your drawing but it offers several advantages Print the same drawing with different print settings that you save with each layout for example printer configuration files print style tables lineweight settings drawing scale JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 13 and more For a single layout create multiple layout viewports that print the model at different views and scales You can toggle the Model space and Paper space by clicking on the tabs and create viewports on current layout tab to obtain model space for further manipulations If the drawing is not required to plot multiple viewports you can plot the drawing directly from Model space Layout tab is enabled to make relevant plot
228. dialog box will be saved to the layout if you click OK To set lineweight options 1 If necessary click the desired Layout tab or the Model tab 2 Choose File gt Plot 3 Choose Plot Object Lineweights Plot Object Lineweights Specifies whether the lineweights assigned to objects and layers are plotted Scale Lineweights prints lineweights in proportion to the scale you set on the Plot scale If not selected lineweights print at their assigned size without adjustments for the print scale A Layout tab must be active to scale lineweights 4 Select Save Changes to Layout and then click Apply to Layout Standard toolbar Command line PLOT NOTE Print styles can also affect how lineweights print Specify the Area to Plot To determine where to plot the drawing you must specify an area for the drawing The following options under Plot Area are provided in The Plot dialog box Current View Plots the contents in current view Save View Plots a view saved previously with the VIEW command You can select a named view from the list provided This option is unavailable if there are no saved views in the drawing Extents Plots current space together with all the objects of the drawing Limits When plotting a layout plots everything within the printable area Window Plots any portion of the drawing you specify within the rectangle window Click the Window button to use a pointing device to specify opposite corners of the area
229. ding the intersection of two or more solids With UNION command you can combine the total volume of two or more solids or two or JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 7 more regions into a composite object objects to be combined result To combine solids 1 Choose Modify gt Solids Editing gt Union 2 Select the objects to combine Solids Editing toolbar T Command line UNION Select the objects to combine A and B The resulting combined solid Use SUBTRACT to remove the common area of one set of solids from another p objects to subtract from objects to subtract selected select objects To subtract solids 1 Choose Modify gt Solids Editing gt Subtract 2 Select the objects to subtract from one another Solids Editing toolbar Command line SUBTRACT JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 140 CREATE OBJECTS Select the objects to subtract A and B The resulting solid INTERSECT command creates a composite solid from the common volume of two or more overlapping solids The common volumn is used to create composite solid and the nonoverlapping portions will be removed objects to intersect selected result Unlike INTERSECT command INTERFERE compares the objects among two selected sets and creates composite entity with common volumn of two or more solids without
230. ding toolbars When you start ZWCAD the first time multiple toolbars are displayed ZWCAD provides more than a dozen toolbars which you can customize by adding and deleting tools You can also move and resize toolbars and you can create new toolbars You can use a shortcut menu to display or hide toolbars You can also choose whether toolbars are displayed large or small and in color You can choose to display or hide ToolTips which provide descriptions of tools that display when you pause the cursor over them Go to View gt Toolbars to make these selections Toolbars are either docked or floating A floating toolbar has a title bar and a Close box can be located anywhere on the screen and can be resized A docked toolbar does not display a title or Close box cannot be resized and is attached along one of the edges of the drawing window To choose which toolbars to display 1 Choose View gt Toolbars 2 In the Select Toolbars dialog box choose the toolbars you want displayed and then click OK TIP Right click anywhere on a docked toolbar to display the toolbar shortcut menu and then choose Toolbars Starting commands using toolbars To start a command from a toolbar click a tool and respond to the prompts NOTE The available toolbars depend on the experience level that is set To change the current experience level choose Tools gt Options and then click the Open and Save tab 2 3 The Command Window The command bar is a doc
231. direction and length but without specific location vertex A location where edges or polyline segments meet view A graphical representation of a model from a specific location viewpoint in space VPOINT DVIEW VIEW viewpoint The location in 3D model space from which you are viewing a model DVIEW VPOINT viewport A bounded area that displays some portion of the model space of a drawing The TILEMODE system variable determines the type of viewport created 1 When TILEMODE is off 0 viewports are objects that can be moved and resized on a layout MVIEW 2 When TILEMODE is on 1 the entire drawing area is divided into nonoverlapping model viewports VPORTS viewport configuration A named collection of model viewports that can be saved and restored VPORTS window selection A rectangular area specified in the drawing area to select multiple objects at the same time wipeout object A polygonal area that masks underlying objects with the current background color This area is bounded by the wipeout frame which you can turn on for editing and turn off for plotting wireframe model The representation of an object using lines and curves to represent its boundaries working drawing A drawing for manufacturing or building purposes working set A group of objects selected for in place reference editing world coordinates Coordinates expressed in relation to the world coordinate system WCS world coordinate system WCS
232. display the command bar choose View gt Display gt Command Bar You can move the command bar by way of dragging When the command bar is floating you can drag the top or bottom of the window to change the number of lines of text it displays You can dock the command bar at the top or bottom of the drawing Using the status bar If you elect not to use the command bar the status bar displays information about the selected command or tool It also displays the current cursor coordinates mode settings and other information about current settings In addition to displaying information the status bar is a quick way to access many features You can click status bar items to make changes and right click items to display short cut menus that allow you more choices 17 6053 0 7900 0 0000 SWAF GRID ORTHO POLAR ESNAP OTRACK LWT MODEL TABLET DYN C E G kK A Cursor coordinates x y z B Snap setting Left click to toggle on or off toggle on or off C Grid setting Left click to toggle on or off D Orthogonal setting Left click to toggle on or off E Polar tracking Left click to change colors F Object snap setting Left click to select object snaps on or off G Object snap tracking Left click to toggle on or off H Lineweight display Left click to toggle on or off Model space or paper space Left click to toggle between model space and paper space J Digitizer mode Left click to toggle on or off K Dynamic in
233. displayed al Inquiry toolbar Command line AREA Select the points A B C that form a polygon The area and perimeter of the region are then calculated Calculating areas of closed objects You can find the area of any closed object In addition the program calculates either the circumference or the perimeter of the object depending on the type of object you select To calculate the area of a closed object 1 Choose Tools gt Inquiry gt Area 2 On the command line type e entity 3 Select the closed entity M Inquiry toolbar Command line AREA Calculating combined areas You can find the total area of several combined regions by specifying points or by selecting objects You can also subtract the areas of objects or polygons from a running total To add areas to calculate a combined area 1 Choose Tools gt Inquiry gt Area 2 On the command line type a ada 3 Using one of the following methods identify the first area Specify points defining a polygon and then press Enter Type e entity select the entities you want to add and then press Enter to complete the calculations 4 To complete the command press Enter al Inquiry toolbar Command line AREA JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 78 COORDINATES AND COORDINATE SYSTEM To subtract areas when calculating a combined area 1 Choose Tools gt Inquiry gt Area
234. displaying of the external geometric objects The clipping boundary is composed of coplanar lines and polyline as well But self intersecting polylines are not available for creating clipping boundary XCLIP can be used for generating or removing clipping boundaries generating polylines from clipping boundary or undisplay the part being clipped for one or more xrefs or blocks JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 11 XCLIP only affects the single object of xref retain the xref definitions unchanged The part of xref or block inside the clipping boundary is still visible while the remaining part are invisible The geometric drawing being referenced itself is unchanged only its displaying way is edited You can use XCLIP to do the following Create new clipping boundary Remove existing boundary Generate polyline objects that are concurrent with vertex of clipping boundary Turn on or off xref Clipping If xclip is turned on all the clipping boundaries will be started to display the clipped part of a xref If the xclip is turned off the clipping boundaries will not displayed only display the drawings in xrefs containing contents both inside or outside the clipping boundary The clipping boundary can t be restored once removed The xref having been clipped can be modified moved or copied as those unclipped xrefs While modifying the xrefs the clipping boundary moves t
235. displays indicating that some entities will not display It s easy to customize ZWCAD You can modify menus and toolbars create custom menus dialog boxes command aliases and scripts and add custom programs written in any of several programming languages including LISP and SDS Solutions Development System the program s Autodesk ADScompatible language There is also Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications VBA You can run existing LISP applications in ZWCAD with little or no modification ZWCAD uses the Appload command so you can easily load LISP programs ZWCAD reads files that contain dialog control language DCL statements as well which JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 1 makes ZWCAD compatible with dialog boxes created for AutoCAD Using AutoCAD commands with ZWCAD Because ZWCAD supports hundreds of AutoCAD commands you use the commands you already know For example to draw a circle use the Circle command To copy a circle use the Copy command When you press Enter or the spacebar you activate the command just like in AutoCAD ZWCAD accepts the special characters used by AutoCAD such as point filters for example xy relative coordinates the symbol and the apostrophe the prefix for transparent commands ZWCAD function keys are also similar to those used in AutoCAD Because you do not need to learn a new set of commands you ar
236. drag and embed drawings into another document Select the icon for the drawing file and then drag the drawing into the document Edit OLE Objects in Drawings You can modify an embedded or linked object in its original program from within ZWCAD When you modify an embedded object you change the object only in ZWCAD not its original file if you pasted the object from an existing file When you modify a linked file however you open and change the original file Double click the OLE object to start server applications in which you can edit the OLE objects ZWCAD provides two ways to edit OLE objects one is to link or embed OLE objects JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 340 SHARE DATA BETWEEN DRAWINGS AND APPLICATIONS which are supportive of other applications into ZWCAD drawings or you can embed ZWCAD drawings into other applications Embed ZWCAD drawings into Other Applications When you want to embed ZWCAD drawings into other applications you use ZWCAD objects as the OLE objects while ZWCAD applications are taken as server applications In the target application which is so called container applications double clicking the inserted OLE objects to start ZWCAD application and modify OLE objects Once you have changed OLE object only the target application displays its change the source OLE object is not changed Link or Embed OLE Objects supportive of other Applications
237. drawing 8 3 2 Modify Polylines You can modify any type of two dimensional or three dimensional polyline Objects such as rectangles polygons and donuts as well as three dimensional objects such as pyramids cylinders and spheres are all editable polylines You can edit a polyline by opening or closing it by changing its overall width or the widths of individual segments and by converting a polyline with straight line segments into a flowing curve or an approximation of a spline In addition you can use the Edit Polyline tool to edit individual vertices adding removing or moving vertices You can also add new segments to an existing polyline change the linetypes of a polyline and reverse the direction or order of the vertices To modify a polyline you first select the polyline and then select a polyline editing option The available options vary depending on whether the selected polyline is a two dimensional or three dimensional object If the selected object is not a polyline the Edit Polyline tool provides the option of turning it into one You can convert only arcs and lines into polylines If several arcs or lines are joined endpoint to endpoint they can all be selected and turned into one polyline To convert an object into a polyline 1 Choose Modify gt Object gt Polyline 2 Select the object 3 On the command line type yes 4 On the command line type another option or press Enter to complete the command JL Sys
238. drawing you can reuse individual entities borders and title blocks as often as you want You need draw an entity only once the final printed drawing can show the entity at several different scales and viewpoints You usually begin drawing in model space on the Model tab creating the drawing a floor plan a map or a three dimensional part without regard to the final layout on paper When you are ready to print your drawing you have the option to switch to paper space ona Layout tab where you lay out the drawing as you want it to appear on a sheet of paper File Edit View Insert Format Tools Draw Dimension Modify Express Window Help x O A SAJ LAAN er APH P SBR AA NNGCAORDNOHCCee BAVA zg Ter o 7 E ByLayer A ByLayer a ByLayer 7 S3 go Al A tala Oli N F3 Drawing EB C Sample l 1B dwg 4 b X Calculator C Jaya uBisag Scientific lt lt sin cos tan dogo 105 asin j acos atan In e x r2d d2r abs rnd trunc Variables gt gt a 4 gt Pi MODEL 4 MATA MA2 Calculator Properties Command Opposite corner Command options Jeg puewwog Command a 110755 67 33959 366 0 SNAP GRID ORTHO POLAR ESNAP OTRACK LWT MODEL TABLET DYN You create the basic drawing in model space on the Model tab JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31
239. e 2 Choose the directory containing the SAT file 3 Choose the SAT file you want to open 4 Click Open Command line ACISIN Import WMF Files As a Windows metafile format WMF files are frequently used to produce clip art and other nontechnical images that you need for drawings Use WMFIN or IMPORT command to insert a WMF file into a drawing file as a block To be different from bitmaps WMF files contain vector information that can be resized and printed without losing resolution If 2D solids or wide lines are contained in the WMF file turn off their display so as to increase drawing speed Both vector and raster information can be contained in WMF files However ZWCAD uses only the vector information from a WMF file ZWCAD ignores the raster information if using a WMF file containing raster information Export Drawings to Other File Formats Export and convert ZWCAD drawings as other file formats ZWCAD surports the output file format containing WMF DXF BMP DWG DWT EMF SVG PDF EPS DWF SAT WMF Exports drawing files as element files wmf using WMFOUT or EXPORT command As a Windows metafile format WMF file includes lots of vector drawings or raster images Generally ZWCAD creates WMF files in vector drawings which are easy to pan or scale DXF As a drawing exchange file DXF file contains text file of drawing information that are accessible for all the other CAD systems If someone else is using CAD applications capable o
240. e 3 Specify the opposite corner of the rectangle Draw toolbar e Command line RECTANG Opposite corners A and B Resulting rectangle You can edit each side of a rectangle individually using the Edit Polyline tool on the Modifyll toolbar You can convert the sides into individual line objects using the Explode tool on the Modify toolbar TIP To control the line width of the rectangle type w in the command line then type the desired value of line width After you change the width of the line the new width setting remains in effect for subsequent rectangles until you change it again 7 1 9 Points You can draw a point object formatted as either a single dot or as one of 19 other possible display styles To draw a point 1 Choose Draw gt Point gt Single Point 2 Specify the location of the point JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 108 CREATE OBJECTS Draw toolbar Command line POINT To draw several points 1 Choose Draw gt Point gt Multiple Point 2 Specify the location of each point Draw toolbar Command line POINT Changing the size and appearance of point objects Changing the size and appearance of point objects affects all point objects already in the drawing as well as all points that you subsequently draw Positive values represent the absolute size of the point object measured in drawing units Negative values represent a percentage
241. e you can input the following contents in font mapping file to replace timesnr pfb font file with times ttf font file timesnr times tt If you can t find specified font file when opening a drawing system determines how to find the replace font specific to the font type single text Mtext If the text is single text system processes it with the following procedures 1 Search for replace font file in ZWCAD fmp file 2 iterate font style table search for the font file in the same format 3 Use default font ZWCAD fnt 4 Pop up font file dialog box in which user can specify replace font file otherwise uses ZWCAD fnt as default font 5 If big fonts are being used search for corresponding font files in font mapping table zwead alt 6 Search for corresponding codepage in font mapping table zwcad ini and then search for replace font file in font mapping table through this codepage 7 If the corresponding text can t be found no matter which font is applied use the mapping font file found in zwcad ini if still unfound use zwcad fnt If text object is mtext system handles it by subsection through language set so as to judge whether the font file corresponding to this font file is capable of displaying this text object If the font file corresponding to this text object isn t existed in current system the text style corresponding to this text will be used for displaying this text Even if the text style correspondin
242. e Quick Text lf a drawing contains a lot of text using complex fonts only a rectangular frame defining the text is displayed or plotted when you turn on Quick Text mode ZLI auick Text mode off Ciuick Text mode on Text entities require a considerable amount of time to display and print You can reduce the time it takes to display or print a drawing by enabling Quick Text For example if you re doing a preliminary check print of a drawing you may want to turn Quick Text on to speed up printing When Quick Text is enabled text entities are replaced by rectangular boxes that indicate the outline of the area occupied by the text When you turn Quick Text on or off you must regenerate the drawing before the change is displayed To turn Quick Text on and off 1 Choose Tools gt Options 2 Click the Display tab 3 Under Display performance select or clear the Show text boundary frame only check box 4 Click OK 5 To regenerate your drawing do one of the following Choose View gt Regen Type regen and then press Enter Command line QTEXT Controlling the display of lineweights You can reduce the time it takes to display a drawing by turning off the display of lineweights When you turn off lineweights all entities display as outlines You can also specify a lineweight scale Specify a smaller scale to display thinner lines specify a larger scale to JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46
243. e View Drawing Layouts You can print your drawing directly from the Model tab where you created it or you can create custom layouts for printing on Layout tabs When printing from the Model tab you can print your drawing exactly the way it appears or you can modify the drawing before printing by adding dimensions a legend or a title block You typically use the Layout tabs for printing if you require multiple print layouts You may also want to use a Layout tab for printing even if you want your drawing printed only one way For example if you want to include large amounts of text on your printed drawing you can add the text to a Layout tab so it does not clutter your drawing while you work on the Model tab 13 1 1 Overview of Layout A layout represents a plotted page on which one or more model views are displayed ZWCAD provides two collateral working environments as Model tab and Layout tab You can create thematic models on Model tab Multiple snapshots of the model can be set in Layout tab Enable unlimited drawing area on Model tab You can draw a picture at the scale of 1 1 and define which unit to be used as the measurement units of the drawing here Inch is for brackets and metric is for bridges Virtual drawing paper is accessible in Layout tab When setting layouts the drawing can be displayed as the paper size A layout represents a plotted page which is so called paper space You can get the objects created in mode
244. e applied to the normal direction of its plane To define a rectangular clipping boundary 1 Choose Modify gt Clip gt Xref JL Systems Group 280 Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk BLOCKS ATTRIBUTE AND XREFS 2 Select the external references to clip If desired you can also select blocks 3 Press Enter 4 Press Enter to create a new clipping boundary 5 If prompted press Enter to delete any existing boundaries 6 Choose Rectangular 7 Define the first corner of the clipping rectangle 8 Define the second corner of the clipping rectangle The selected external references are clipped by the rectangle Reference toolbar lt Command line XCLIP TIP You can first select all external references right click the selection and then select Xref Clip from the shortcut menu When using polyline to define clipping boundary the clipping boundary is in accordance with the polyline If the selected clipping boundary is polyline it can t be self intersected System takes the open polyline as closed polyline if the arcs contained in the polyline have been smoothed The clipping boundary created this way is located on the plane parallel to the UCS that puts the polyline To define a clipping boundary using a polyline 1 Draw a polyline where you want to clip external references 2 Choose Modify gt Clip gt Xref 3 Select the external references to clip If desired you can also select block
245. e blocks borders and logos Layer names Snap Grid and Ortho settings Grid limits Dimension styles Text styles EY Pee JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 3 Recover the default drawing template file lf you have changed the settings in the template file ZWCAD dwt or ZWCADiso dwt you can reset them by creating a new drawing with no template and then saving the drawing as a drawing template file in order to replace ZWCAD dwt or ZWCADiso dwt When the STARTUP is set to 0 you can also create a new drawing with the original defaults by clicking the arrowhead next to Open button to select one of the No Template options from the Open Template dialog box To start a drawing by selecting a template file 1 On the File menu click New 2 In the Select Template dialog box select a template from the list and click Open ZWCAD opens the drawing as drawing1 dwg The default drawing name changes to reflect the number of new drawings that have been opened For example if you open another drawing from a template the default drawing name is drawing2 dwg If you want to start a new drawing with no template file click the arrow next to the Open button and then click one of the no template options from the list Standard toolbar c Command line NEW 3 2 Open an Existing Drawing You can open drawing dwg files Drawing Exchange Format dxf files Design
246. e drawing window You can use CUSTOMIZE command to customize the menus from the Customize dialog box Recent Input Recent Input option is used for recording the recent manipulations from the Recent Input list on right click menu you can view the latest manipulations as well as the previous command options and also manipulate commands by directly selecting from the recent input list System variable INPUTHISTORYMODE is used for controlling its content value from 0 to 15 If INPUTHISTORYMODE is set to 0 you cannot see the Recent Input option on right click menu thus you can t view the latest input if you set the INPUTHISTORYMODE to a value within 0 15 latest input records are displayed orderly System variable CMDINPUTHISTORYMAX is used for controlling how many items to be displayed in the Recent Input menu option You can set the value from 0 to 20 generally use the maximum as 20 Any value that is smaller than the maximum determines the number of items to be displayed on the right click menu The contents displayed in the Recent Inout menu option differs under various circumstances For example right click on the screen if there is no manipulation currently used the latest commands ever manipulated will be displayed by the latest precedence orders When right click in the process of a certain command Recent Input displays items specific to the current manipulation such as coordinates angle length or relevant keyword In case that
247. e grips depend on the type of object selected For example grips appear at the endpoints and midpoint of a line at the quadrant points and center point of a circle and at the endpoints midpoint and center of an arc JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 Examples of grip locations To use grips for editing you select an object to display the grips and then click a grip to make it active The grip you select depends on the type of object you re modifying and the editing operation you re performing For example to move a line object drag it by its midpoint grip To stretch the line drag one of the endpoint grips You do not need to enter a command when using grips 8 4 1 Control Status and Displaying of Grips You can turn the use of grips on and off and control the size and color of grips under different status To change grip settings 1 Choose Tools gt Options 2 In the Options dialog box click the Selction tab 3 In the Grip Size specify the size 4 In the Grips click Enable grips 5 Click on the color button separately behind the Unselected grip color Selected grip color and Hover grip color to assign colors for grips under different status 6 Click OK You can use grips to modify objects such as move stretch scale and copy With the Grips on the location of grips depending on the type of objects are displayed as follows w VV VA li
248. e immediately productive with ZWCAD 1 1 2 Comparing ZWCAD drawing with manual drafting ZWCAD greatly reduces the time and effort it takes to create and revise drawings Not only can you produce accurate drawings faster you can also reuse the information in your drawings These are the primary reasons for making the transition to CAD from traditional manual drafting on paper As with any tool however to use it effectively you need to be familiar with some of the special features functions and concepts of CAD If you are familiar with manual drafting you ll find some conceptual similarities in CAD as well as some differences Drawing to scale In traditional manual drafting you usually determine the scale of the drawing before you even start to draw because you are working with a sheet of paper of a fixed size You may have to reduce or enlarge the entity you are drawing to fit within the confines of the paper When you create a drawing in ZWCAD you draw everything full size You determine the type of units in which your drawing is measured If you are drawing a building 1 drawing unit might equal 1 inch If you are drawing a map 1 drawing unit might equal 1 mile Your drawing environment and the CAD drawing file itself are not limited to the size of a particular sheet of paper 1 drawing unit equals 1 inch 1 drawing unit equals 1 foot JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl
249. e is a smooth curve that pass through a series of control points You can control the fit tolerance among the curve and points and apply the fitness to drawing irregular curves A NURBS curve produces a smooth curve between control points A NURBS curve produces a smooth curve between control points JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 7 Multiple points are required for drawing irregular splines And you can close the spline so that the start and endpoints are coincident and tangent Tolerance in command line prompts describes how precisely the spline fits the set of fit points you specify The lower the tolerance the more closely the spline fits the points If the value is set to 0 the spline curve passes through the fit point If you set the tolerance value greater than 0 the spline will go through fit point within the specified tolerance range Usually two ways of creating splines are provided Create a spline converted from a polyline using Spline option of PEDIT command Create a spline using SPLINE command that is NURBS curves To draw a spline 1 Choose Draw gt Spline 2 Specify the first point of the spline 3 Specify the second point of the spline 4 Specify as many more points as you want 5 When you have finished press Enter Draw toolbar 4 Command line SPLINE You can add tangents to the spline which are lines that give it shape To add tangents
250. e of a three dimensional model created using three dimensional faces Create 3D Meshes 3D command is widely used for creating objects as boxes cones dishes meshes pyramids spheres donuts and wedges Before hiding 3D entities all the meshes are displayed in wireframe Use DVIEW or VPOINT to view the entitiy once you have created a 3D entity or performed View 3D Orbit from View menu options to view the 3D entity in full perspective The following picture displays entities as meshes with specified vertexes length width 44 apex height height width length cirque radius JE aT a the T WM aay Ae a Fie 4 ee AT a eb Ts tT ae radius Creating rectangular meshes You can create a three dimensional rectangular mesh consisting of four sided polygons You determine the size of the mesh by specifying the number of vertices along the primary Mdirection and secondary N direction mesh axes and then specifying the coordinates for each vertex To create a rectangular mesh 1 Choose Draw gt Sufaces gt 3D Mesh JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 7 2 Specify the number of vertices along the primary mesh axis 3 Specify the number of vertices along the secondary mesh axis 4 Specify the coordinates for each vertex 5 Specifying the coordinates for the last vertex completes the mesh and ends the command Surfaces toolb
251. e of the current UCS by establishing the current elevation which can be applied to individual viewports in conjunction with the system variable UCSVP Whether a UCS is saved or restored in each viewport are determined by this variable When UCSVP is set to 1 the different UCS settings are saved in individual viewports and the elevation settings are saved along with each viewport both in model space and in paper space layouts Generally the elevation is set to 0 and you can control the XY plane of the current UCS using UCS command Change the UCS in Paper Space Just as you define a new UCS in model space you can also define a new UCS in paper space however the UCSs in paper space are only available for 2D manipulation Although you can enter 3D coordinates in paper space 3D viewing commands are not available such as DVIEW PLAN and VPOINT The system can store the last 10 coordinate systems that were created in model space and the last 10 in paper space and you can restore to the desired one using the Previous option of the UCS command Save and Restore UCS Locations by Name You can save named UCS locations each having a different origin and orientation for various construction requirements You can relocate save and recall as many UCS orientations as you require Assign User Coordinate System Orientations to Viewports You can create multiple viewports to display different views of your model For example you can specify top fr
252. e overall or global scale factor applied to all the entities in the drawing To set the current individual linetype scale 1 Choose Format gt Linetype 2 Click the Show Details button 3 In the Current object scale field type the linetype scale that you want to make current 4 Click OK Command line LINETYPE To change the global linetype scale 1 Choose Format gt Linetype 2 Click the Show Details button 3 In the Global Scale factor type the global linetype scale that you want to change 4 Click OK Command line LINETYPE 5 8 Work with Layers JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 5 5 8 1 Overview of Layers Layers in ZWCAD are like the transparent overlays you use in manual drafting You use layers to organize different types of drawing information In ZWCAD each object ina drawing exists on a layer When you draw an object it is created on the current layer You can control the visibility of layers in individual viewports When you turn a layer off objects drawn on that layer are no longer visible and they do not print Although a layer may be invisible you can still select it as the current layer in which case new objects are also invisible until you turn the layer back on Objects on invisible layers can also affect the display and printing of objects on other layers For example entities on invisible layers can hide other objects when you us
253. e point 4 Specify another point on the rotation axis 5 Specify the rotation angle Solids Editing toolbar Specify the face s to rotate A the The resulting object with the face to base point B a second point on position D tapered the rotation axis C and a rotation angle Taper Faces You can taper the selected face at the specified angle around a base line The rotation direction depends on the sequence of specifying the base point Positive angle tapers faces in and negative angle tapers faces out The angle should not be too large in order to the tapered face shrinks into a point before reaching the specified height To taper a solid face 1 Choose Modify gt Solids Editing gt Taper Faces 2 Select the face s to taper and press Enter 3 Specify a base point 4 Specify another point along the axis 5 Specify a taper angle EY Solids Editing toolbar JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 202 MODIFY OBJECTS Specify the face s to taper A a The resulting entity with the face tapered to base point B a second point position D along the taper axis C and a taper angle Color Faces You can assign color to the faces of 3D solids The specified color of faces overwrites the color of the layer on which the faces drawn To color a face 1 Choose Modify gt Solids Editing gt Color Face 2 Select the face s to color and pr
254. e ruled surface selecting objects at different side of the two objects to create crossed ruled surface shown as follows E 1 specified points on result corresponding sides i i 1 specified points on result opposite sides JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 7 To create a ruled surface mesh 1 Choose Draw gt Surfaces gt Ruled Surface 2 Select the first defining object 3 Select the second defining object Surfaces toolbar amp Command line RULESURF Select the first A and second B defining objects The resulting ruled surface mesh TIP To control the density of the mesh change the values for the Number of M Direction Surfaces Choose Tools gt Draft Settings and then click the 3D Settings tab Under Surface Settings change the Number Of M Direction Surfaces value Create Tabulated Surface Creates a polygon mesh defined by a path and a direction vector The path curve defines the surface of the polygon mesh The objects like a line arc circle ellipse or 2D or 3D polyline can be used as outline curves for defining polygons Both lines and open 2D or 3D polylines are used as direction vector Tabulated surface meshes are used as a serial of paralleled polygon on spec ified path you should draw direction vector and origine object before creating a Tabulated Surface object spectied directionvector result specified
255. e selected grip and activate the default grip mode as Stretch Press ENTER to iterate grip mode until Mirror appears in command line Dynamic input box displayed on screen showing the following manipulations Specify B Base point option to relocate the base grip Specify C Copy option to create a copy of the entity being mirrored Specify U Undo option to abort last mirroring Specify X eXit option to exit mirror manipulation Move the pointing device to specify second mirror point the entity will be mirrored along the line connecting the selected grip on objects and the second mirror point or create a copy of the entity after mirroring 8 4 3 Multi Grips Edit Mode It s also enabled to manipulate grip edit mode using multiple grips You can press SHIFT to select multiple grips Once you have selected multiple entities called hot multi grip selection the part of entities among grips will not change Using Multi Grips edit mode is sorted into the following two cases To move rotate scale or mirror entities using multiple grips on them equals to use the last selected grip as base point base grip or new selected base point To stretch entities multi grips are selected depend on the type of entities when you selected single text point insertion point of block reference midpoint of line center of circle and grips on point object as hot grips the entities will be moved rather than stretched Multi Grips
256. e the Hide command to remove hidden lines You can also freeze and thaw layers Objects drawn on frozen layers do not display do not print and do not regenerate When you freeze a layer its objects do not affect the display or printing of other objects For example objects on frozen layers do not hide other objects when you use the Hide command to remove hidden lines In addition you cannot draw on a frozen layer until you thaw it and you cannot make a frozen layer current You cannot freeze the current layer If you attempt to freeze the current layer a dialog box appears prompting you to specify a different layer You also cannot freeze or thaw a viewport layer unless you are working in a Layout tab You can lock or unlock layers The objects on a locked layer are still visible and will print but you cannot edit them Locking a layer prevents you from accidentally modifying objects Each layer has its own color linetype and lineweight For drawings that use named print styles layers can also have their own print style Objects you draw on a particular layer are displayed in the color linetype and lineweight associated with that layer unless you override these settings 5 8 2 Create and Name Layers You can create an unlimited number of layers in every drawing and use those layers for organizing information When you create a new layer it is initially assigned the color white or black depending on your system settings and the linet
257. e the created text style but not the default STANDARD text style Creat new text styles When you apply some settings that the STANDARD does not have to the text you have to create a new text style or change the current text style Before creating a text style you have to specify a name which can be up to 255 characters The name can contain characters underscore hyphen dollar sign and other special characters that are not used by Microsoft Windows or ZWCAD You can also modify the current text style at the Text Style dialog box Some style settings have different effects on single line and multiline text objects For example the Upside Down and Backwards options are not available for multiline text objects You can also rename an existing text style except for the STANDARD Except for the STANDARD text style all text styles can be removed using PRUGE command or deleted from the Text Style dialog box Certain formatting applied to individual characters within multiline text may not be retained The formatting not to be retained includes bold font height and obliquing The formatting that can be retained includes color stack and underscore To create a text style 1 Choose Format gt Text Styles 2 Click New type a new text style name then click OK 3 Under Text Measurements specify the Text Height Width Factor and Oblique Angle 4 Under Text Font select the name style language and Bigfont of the font you want to use 5 Und
258. e the same length with JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 13 that of paper space thus you can still use LTSCALE and CELTSCALE to control length of dashes The following figure shows linetype scale on the left has been adjusted to dashes scaled to paper space regardless of the scale of views The figure on the right matches the scale of linetype with each view PSLTSCALE 1 5 dashes scaled to PSLTSCALE 0 dashes scaled to paper space space where they were created Rotate Views in Layout Viewports You can rotate the entire view within layout viewports using PLAN command to change current UCS But the object to be rotated is the view rather than viewport boundary Using ROTATE command only rotates single objects of the viewport eel O original view rotated wiew 13 1 5 Create Nonrectangular Layout Viewports Use Object and Polygonal options of MVIEW to create irregular viewports Select Object option to convert objects created in paper space to viewports While selecting Polygonal option to draw irregular polylines including arcs and lines which are enabled to either intersect or three vertexes at least the polyline will be closed automatically to form irregular polygonal viewport To define viewport boundaries the area in which selected objects are contained will be calculated to set viewport objects on the corner of the boundary and then clip the viewport acc
259. e to be edited contain attributes you can edit the attributes while editing the references by selecting Display attribute definitions for editing in Refernce Edit dialog box Attributes are invisible but attributes definitions and selected geometric drawing can be edited together The attributes of original references keep unchanged after saving and new attributes definitions only affects the block subsequently inserted into ther drawing JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 286 atches and Realistic Images biga 12 1 Hatches 12 1 1 Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern or gradient fill Filling the specified area with different material so as to distinguish project parts These patterns are both predefined and user defined Entity bhatch includes three kinds of Bhatching using patterns Solid PLINE or DONUT Gradient hatch refers to a kind of hatch pattern among different gradations within one or two colors Which can be used to increase the drawing demonstration effects or use as background To create a hatch you should specify hatch area first which is so called hatch boundary various methods of creating hatch boundaries are provided as well as creating associative hatch for controlling the hatch pattern updated along with the boundary changes If the specified boundary is not a closed area you can set
260. e too large to fit the line Spacing you had specified Precise specifies the exact line spacing for each line Precise style may result the text in lines situated above or below lines with large font characters to overlap the larger characters Create Stacked Characters Stacked text is text or fraction applied to mark tolerance or measure units Before creating stacked text you have to use special characters to indicate the stacked place for the selected text The following contents present the special characters and illustrate how to create stacked text Slash Stacks text vertically and separates them with a horizontal line Pound sign Stacks text diagonally and separates them with a diagonal line Carat Creates a tolerance stack which is stacked vertically as well as not separated by a line hed jelo hello plain text tolerance stack Lived e a5 1 4 4 4 5 diagonal traction vertical fraction You can also use Stack button on the Text Formating toolbar to create stacked text Import Text from External Files You can input text txt contents into the drawing from an external file by selecting Input from file option from the right click menu of the Mtext Editor display the text in the drawing that imported from external file as mtext object Importing text from external files provides users with infinite flexibility while manipulating you can operate from creating text file for standard annotations firstly and then i
261. e wipeout do not display or print Wipeouts are similar to other entities you can copy mirror array erase rotate and scale them and they can be used in both model space and paper space lf you want to print the wipeout entities located in a drawing you must print to a raster capable printer Note that in some cases you may have unexpected results when printing drawings that contain wipeout entities for example if printing on colored paper Drawing wipeouts using polygons and polylines Wipeouts are created using existing polygons closed zero width polylines made up of only line segments or new polylines that you draw while using the Wipeout command To draw a wipeout 1 Choose DRAW gt Wipeout 2 Specify the start point 3 Specify the endpoint of each segment 4 After specifying the last endpoint press Enter Command line WIPEOUT Drawing without wipeout Drawing with wipeout To create a wipeout using an existing polygon or polyline 1 Choose Draw gt Wipeout 2 Choose Polyline 3 Select the closed polyline to use for the wipeout 4 Choose one of the following Yes Creates the wipeout and deletes the polyline used to create the wipeout No Creates the wipeout and keeps the polyline used to create the wipeout Command line WIPEOUT Turning wipeout frames on or off Each wipeout has a frame along its boundary Wipeout frames can be turned on or off for any drawing When wipeout frames are on you can select a
262. e your selections 5 Click OK 6 Choose Close to exit Dimension toolbar E Command line DIMSTYLE 10 6 Table Table is a cell collection composed of rows and columns Tables can be created from table style Meanwhile you also can create table object according to the data in Microsoft Excel spreadsheet JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 262 DIMENSION AND TOLERANCES The existing table can also be edited Editorial content includes To edit the text in table cell insert row column delete row column merged cells modified cell borders and so on You can control the appearance of the new table by modifying the table style Table style includes table direction background text style and any other table characters Table ToolBar Select a table object table toolbar displays Function of the buttons on table toolbar are described in the table below Icon FE Name Insert Row above Insert Row below Delete Row s Insert Column to left Insert Column to right Delete Column s Merge Cells Unmerge Cells Background fil O Cell Borders Function Description Insert a row above the specified row or cell Insert a row below the specified row or cell Delete the current selected row Insert a column into the left side of the specified column or cell Insert a column into the right side of the specified column or cell D
263. ea of the drawing will be hatched hatching the large area without boundaries shown as follows Z il 3 10 4 g 5 a 7 points spectied to define result hatch boundary Selecting objects for hatching JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 290 HATCHES AND REALISTIC IMAGES A hatch boundary can be defined by means of selecting any object for example a circle or rectangle You can assign hatching to a single object or several objects at the same time You can add hatching to an area enclosed by selected objects to form the hatch boundary The hatch is formed within the enclosed area not the objects themselves Once a hatch is created it will be treated as a single object And the object being hatched changes along with the hatch boundary if the hatch you create is associative To select objects for hatching 1 Choose Draw gt Hatch 2 From the Hatch dialog box click the Island detection option and then choose one of the following island Normal Areas separated from the outside of the hatched by an odd number of intersections are hatched Outer Only the outer object and its outer island are considered for hatching Ignore The entire object is considered for hatching inner area will be ignored l A Normal islands A with outer island B and with ignore islands C 3 To keep any new objects that are created for drawing the boundary
264. eader 3 Specify the endpoint of the leader line segment 4 Specify additional leader line segment endpoints 5 After you specify the last endpoint press Enter 6 Type the annotation and press Enter to enter the Next line of annotation text JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 9 7 Press ENTER to complete the command Command line LEADER Duis aqutery Vel eum i 5o Specify the starting point of the Result leader A and the endpoint of the leader line segment B The following picture shows the text is above at the leader You can set the justification at the Text tab on the Modify Dimension Style center 9 1 4 Multileader Multileader is usually composed of four part arrowhead leader leader landing and content Each multileader can contain more than one leader line and each leader line can be composed of one or more segments Leader content can be set to Mtext or block That is a note created by multileader can point to more than one part of the drawing You can create an multileader by Arrowhead First or Content First The Multileader Style Manager is also provided for style managing you can create different styles of multileaders in the same view by setting multileader style Intermediary point Text grip Arrowhead Landing grip set Leader lines Leader landing gap Multileader Toolbar Function of the buttons on multileade
265. ect snap are dependent on your settings in the Drawing Settings dialog box UNITS The following illustration shows the alignment paths displayed as you move your cursor 90 degrees with the polar angle increment set to 30 degrees Polar 20 90 Polar 15260 Polar 12 30 To set polar tracking angles 1 From the Tools menu choose Drafting Settings 2 In the Drafting Settings dialog box on the Polar Tracking tab select Polar Tracking On 3 In the Increment Angle list select the polar tracking angle 4 To set additional tracking angles select Additional Angles Then click New and enter the angle value in the text box 5 Under Polar Angle Measurement specify whether polar tracking increments are based on the UCS or relative to the last object you created 6 Choose OK Specify Polar Distances AutoSnap resiricts cursor movement to increments of a polar distance you specified on the Snap and Grid tab of Draft Settings dialog box For example if you specify a length of 6 units the cursor snaps the length specified to lengths of 0 6 12 18 24 and so on When you move cursor a tooltip displays the nearest PolarSnap increment Only when polar tracking and snap mode are on you can restrict point entry to polar distance To set polar snap distance 1 From the Tools menu choose Drafting Settings 2 In the Drafting Settings dialog box Snap and Grid tab select Snap On 3 In Snap Type amp Style select PolarSnap 4 Under Po
266. ectangular boundary of the drawing area covered by dots when the grid is turned on Also called drawing limits LIMITS grip modes The editing capabilities activated when grips are displayed on an object stretching moving rotating scaling and mirroring grips Small squares that appear on objects you select After selecting the grip you edit the object by dragging it with the pointing device instead of entering commands HLS For hue lightness and saturation A system of defining color by specifying the amount of hue lightness and saturation initial environment JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 360 GLOSSARY The variables and settings for new drawings as defined by the default template drawing such as zwcad dwg or zwcadiso dwg interpolation points Defining points that a B spline passes through island An enclosed area within another enclosed area Islands may be detected as part of the process of creating hatches polylines and regions BHATCH BOUNDARY ISO For International Standards Organization The organization that sets international standards in all fields except electrical and electronics Headquarters are in Geneva Switzerland isometric snap style A drafting option that aligns the cursor with two of three isometric axes and displays grid points making isometric drawings easier to create layer A logical grouping of data that are like
267. ects can be members of more than one group and the group can be nested in other group You can restore a nested group to the original group configuration by ungrouping it The named groups is not available when you insert a drawing as a external reference or a block However it is available if you band and then explode the external reference or explode the block A group containing too much objects can degrade performance of system To create a group 1 On the command line type group 2 Under Create New Group enter the name and description of the group 3 Click Selectable if you want all entites in the group to be selected when you select one entity of the group in the drawing 4 Click Select entities and Create Group 5 Select the objects for the group and then press Enter 6 In the Group dialog box click OK Select Objects in Groups You can type a group name to select a group at the prompt of Select entities If the system variable PICKSTYLE is set to 1 or 3 you can select any objects of the group When you select an object that is a member of more than one groups all the objects from that groups containing the selected object are selected Edit Groups You can add or remove group members and rename groups at the Group dialog box You can also do the operation such as copy mirror and arrange as well as giving description You can remove members of a group from selecting objects on the drawing by clicking the Remove entities from
268. ects dragged with result crossing selection Ortho mode on From the picture above the Door is contained entirely in the selection window so the door can be moved to the specified location And the wall lines are only partially within the selection area as a result the door moves with the wall You can specify the distance the objects to move while the Ortho or Polar Tracking mode is on 8 2 7 Rotate Objects You can rotate the selected objects around a specified point You can specify the rotated angle by specifying a point on the drawing or entering the angle value directly The direction that objects rotate depends on the value you enter is positive or negative The rotated plane and direction of zero angle is determined by the azimuth of UCS Rotate an Object by a Specified Angle You can rotate objects by specifying a base point or an angle To rotate objects 1 Choose Modify gt Rotate 2 Select the objects and then press Enter 3 Specify base point 4 Specify the rotation angle Modify toolbar Command line ROTATE To rotate an object select the object to rotate A and then specify base point B and the rotation angle C Rotate an Object to an Absolute Angle You can also rotate objects by specifying an absolute angle To rotate a selection set in reference to an Absolute Angle 1 Choose Modify gt Rotate 2 Select the objects and then press Enter 3 Specify base point JL Systems Group iog Slottsmoll
269. ects in a drawing you can use Dimension Oblique option to change their angle measured from the X axis of the current UCS to the extension line This option is only applied to the existing dimensions ignoring the dimensions to be created 2501 10 3 2 Create Angular Dimensions Angular dimensions are used to measure the angle between lines or three points You can dimension objects including circles arcs and lines You can also create an angular dimension directly with three specified points By selecting the circle and specifying the angle endpoints you can create the angular dimension to measure the angle between two radii of a circle For other objects you choose the objects and specify the dimension location You can also create a angular dimension by specifying the angle vertex and endpoints When you create the angular dimension you can modify the text contend and alignment before placing the dimension line With the existing angular dimensions you can also create baseline and continued angular dimensions Baseline and continued dimensions should not be over 180 degrees To acquire baseline and continued dimensions that are larger than 180 degrees you have to stretch the position of the extension line of an existing baseline or continued dimension using grid editing Dimension Lines Angular dimension lines are typically represented with arc segments To create an angular dimension for two nonparallel lines the dimension line arc
270. ed all the way to the drawing limits The Zoom Extents tool on the zoom toolbar displays the drawing to its extents making the image fill the display to the greatest possible magnification Zoom extents displays all entities Zoom all displays to drawing limits 4 3 Pan a View Use PAN command or use the window scroll bars to shift the location of your view With the Realtime option of PAN you pan dynamically by moving your pointing device Like panning with a camera PAN does not change the location or magnification of objects on your drawing it changes only the view By right clicking you can display a shortcut menu with additional viewing options You can move the view of a drawing displayed in the current viewport by scrolling panning or rotating the view Doing this changes the portion of the drawing you are viewing without changing the current magnification Scrolling lets you move around in the drawing horizontally and vertically Panning lets you move the drawing in any direction Rotating lets you view your drawing from any angle Using scroll bars To assist you in navigating within a drawing horizontal and vertical scroll bars are JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 4 available in each drawing window The size of the scroll box in relation to the scroll bar indicates the current level of drawing magnification The position of the scroll box in relatio
271. ee dimensions Create three dimensional entities Edit entities in three dimensional space Edit three dimensional solids Display hidden line and shaded views of three dimensional entities ZWCAD supports three types of 3D modeling wireframe surface and solid Each type has its own creation and editing techniques Wire frame models which consist of lines and curves that define the edges of a three dimensional entity You can create a wire frame model by drawing lines arcs polylines and other two dimensional entities anywhere in three dimensional space Wire frame models have no surfaces they always appear as outlines Because you must individually draw and position each entity that makes up a wire frame model creating one can be exacting and time consuming Surface models which consist of both edges and the surfaces between those edges You can create a surface model by applying elevation and thickness to twodimensional planar entities or by using specific three dimensional entity creation commands Surface models consist of individual planes forming a faceted polygonal mesh 3D solids which are three dimensional ACIS entities that consist of faces and edges 3D solids appear to have volume and are easier to work with than wireframe and surface models ZWCAD supports viewing and limited editing of 3D solids including moving rotating and scaling JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl
272. eed is not available in the dropdown list Click Edit lineweights button to modify the existing lineweights To modify print style tables 1 Choose File gt Plot 2 In the Plot dialog box click the print style table you want to modify and the click Modify 3 Click the General tab on Print Style Table Editor and then do any of the following Enter a new table description Select Apply Global Scale Factor to Non ISO Linetypes to apply the scale factor to non ISO linetypes used for any print style in the current print style table Enter a scale factor to apply to non ISO linetypes used for any print style in the current print style table 4 Click the Properties tab and then do any of the following Make changes to a color dependent print style by selecting it in the Print Styles list then make color linetype or lineweight changes for the print style Your changes are saved automatically for the selected print style Make changes to a named print style by selecting it in the Print Styles list then make color linetype or lineweight changes for the print style Your changes are saved automatically for the selected print style Add a new print style by clicking Add Style Enter a new name and then click OK Select the options for the print style Available for named print styles only Delete a print style by selecting it in the Print Styles list Click Delete Style Available for named print styles only 5 Click OK ir Standard tool
273. efine table options will not be inserted together with the layout Use PURGE command to clear the undesired define table options To save a layout as a drawing template 1 Type ayout and then press Enter 2 On the command line type Save 3 Type the name of the layout that you want to save and then press Enter 4 Specify the file name and location for the template and then click Save After you save a layout as a template you can use the template when you create new drawings You can also import the template s layouts into another drawing Create and Use Named Page Setups Once you have set plot device plot style table and relevant page setup in the plot dialog you can save the page as named page setup which is usually used for updating current setting of Plot dialog box Applying different page setups to the same layout may obtain specific plot result For example you can create named page setups listed below to control scale factor and drawing size Page setup name Description NoScaling Plot at scale 1 1 E size sheet Scale 1 to 2 Plot at scale 1 2 C size sheet JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 13 Draft Plot to the draft quality plotter Final Plot to the high quality plotter Fit to Paper Fit to Paper A size sheet Page setup is saved together with the drawing file for the convenience of plotting without setting the page each time If you want to pl
274. eft side or right side of a fixed region of ZWCAD window at this time the size of window can be adjusted in only one direction Locks the position of toolbars and docked windows For aligned toolbars and docked floating windows you can lock their position Locked toolbars or windows can still be opened or closed and items can be added and deleted but can not be moved If need to unlock temporarily you can press down CTRL Displaying commands on a shortcut menu Shortcut menus provide quick access to specific commands A shortcut menu displays when you right click an object toolbar status bar the Model tab name or a Layout tab name The selections presented in the shortcut menu depend on what you clicked When you right click a toolbar the program displays a shortcut menu that lets you toggle the command bar status bar and various toolbars on and off If you select one or more JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 18 THE USER INTERFACE objects and then right click the program displays a shortcut menu from which you can choose a command to modify the selected objects To display a short cut menu from which you can choose an object snap press and hold down the Shift key and then right click anywhere within the drawing window Using the command bar The command bar is a dockable window in which you type ZWCAD commands and view prompts and other program messages To
275. egment length and you can continue sketching JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 7 sketch lines Create Sketches To sketch use the pointing device like a pen clicking to put the pen down on the screen to draw and clicking again to lift it up and stop drawing You set the minimum length or increment of the segments Before sketching check the CELTYPE system variable to make sure the current linetype is BYLAYER If you use a linetype with dots or dashes and set the sketch line segment shorter than the spaces or dashes you won t see the spaces or dashes To create a freehand sketch 1 On the command line enter sketch 2 At the length of segments prompt enter the minimum line segment length 3 Click the start point to put the pen down When you move the pointing device ZWCAD draws temporary freehand line segments of the length you specified Sketch doesn t accept coordinate input During the command freehand lines are displayed in a different color 4 Click the endpoint to lift the pen up so that you can move the cursor around the drawing area without drawing Click a new start point to resume drawing from the new cursor position 5 Enter W at any time to write into the drawing the line you re drawing and those already drawn If the pen is down you can continue drawing after writing If the pen is up click to resume drawing The freehand line
276. egments and make them taper gradually from one width to another Zero 0 width produces a thin line Widths greater than zero produce wide lines which are filled if Fill mode is on and outlined if Fill mode is off The Halfwidth option sets width by specifying the distance from the center of the wide polyline to an outside edge varying width Uniform width If you chose Width option prompts in command line require you to enter starting width and ending width While entering different value results in a varying width from the start point to its end Both the start point and endpoint are located at the center of Wide polyline 7 1 6 Create Polylines from the Boundaries of Objects You can create a polyline from the boundaries of overlapping objects that form a closed area A polyline created using the boundary method is a separate object distinct from the objects used to create it You can edit it using the same methods used to edit other polylines To expedite the boundary selection process in large or complex drawings you can specify a group of boundary candidates called a boundary set You create this set by selecting the objects you want to use define the boundary JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 7 internal point selected boundary With the Boundary command you can designate a specific area of a drawing for operations such as hatching and dimensioni
277. elete the current selected column Merge the specified multi cell into one large cell There are three kinds for merge cells Merge All Merge the specified multi cell into one cell Merge by Row Merge the specified multi cell into several cells by removing the vertical gridlines and leaving all the horizontal gridlines Merge by Column Merge the specified multi cell into several cells by removing the horizontal gridlines and leaving all the vertical gridlines Separates the previously merged table cells Specify the table cell s background color Set border options for the selected table cell in Cell Borders Properties dialog box Ji Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 10 os si Alignment hd Locking 7 Data Format Daa xy Call Styles Edit and Modify Table Edit Column amp Row Operating Steps 1 Select one cell in table Specify alignment of the cell contents To lock or unlock the table cell Content and table cell style if locked the table cell content and table cell style will not editable Set the table cell style Select Custom Table Cell Format from the Drop down menu to call Table Cell Format dialog box Set the table cell style 2 Click Insert Above on the toolbar and insert a row above the selected cell You can also click Insert Below to insert a row below the cell click Insert Left to insert a column on le
278. end Generally you place an arrowhead at the first point An annotation created as dimension text is placed immediately adjacent to the last point Create a Leader Line You can use LEADER or QLEADER to create a leader and control the appearance The color of a leader is controlled by the color of the current dimension line The scale is controlled by the global dimension scale specified on the current dimension style The appearance of a leader is control by the setting of the first arrowhead on the current dimension style Add Text to a Leader There are two methods to add text to a leader Types text on the command line Using multiline text editor creates multiline text When creating text you can assign the style to an individual character and attach the copies of the current annotation to the leader When the value of variable system DIMGAP is negative the system creates a box next to the text which the distance between them is determined by the value of DIMGAP The text is placed automatically at the endpoint of a leader at the specified value which is stored in the Offset from dim line on the Text tab of Modify Dimension Style dialog box If the dimension is tolerance the future control frame is placed at the endpoint of a leader as well A block is inserted at the specified location with the specified scale value To create a leader and an annotation 1 Choose Dimensions gt Leader 2 Specify the starting point of the l
279. ension entities to move Press SHIFT while selecting grips on entities the selected grips will be highlighted Release SHIFT and click on one of the selected grips to use it as base grip Press ENTER to activate the default grip mode as Stretch Iterate grip mode until Move appears in command line Dynamic input box displayed on screen showing the following manipulations Specify B Base point option to locate the base point for moving Specify C Copy option to create a copy of the entity being moved Specify U Undo option to abort last moving Specify X eXit option to exit move manipulation Specify target location for moving directly Move the pointing device to specify target location the selected grips on entities will be moved at a specified displacement towards the direction pointing from the base grip to the target location Multi Grips Rotate Mode Rotate entities with multiple grips mode use the last grip base grip or reselected base point as base point Rotate Lines Polylines and Dimensions Using Multiple Grips Select line polyline and dimension entities to rotate Press SHIFT while selecting grips on entities the selected grips will be highlighted Release SHIFT and click on one of the selected grips to use it as base grip Press ENTER to activate the default grip mode as Stretch lterate grip mode until Rotate appears in command line Dynamic input box displayed on screen showing the following m
280. ent drawing you can unload the undesired images so as to raise the capability of your computer Once the raster image is unloaded from the drawing it ll be displayed as image boundary disabled of plotting And the links of the image does not change after unloaded If too much images attached to the drawing cause memory lacking in process of opening the drawing system automatically unload part of image files Once unloaded you can reload the images already unloaded from the drawing If you close the unloaded drawing after saving it this drawing file is only available by reloading it next time you open the drawing To unload and reload a raster image JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 12 1 Choose Insert gt Image Manage 2 Select the file you want to unload or reload 3 Do one of the following To unload the image so only its outer edge displays click Unload To reload the image so its contents display and print click Reload Insert toolbar Command line IMAGE Improve the Display Speed of Raster Images The display quality of images may affect its properties directly the higher the quality the longer it displayed Any changes to the image display speed will be updated immediately rather than redraw the drawing System plots the drawing at its high quality You can adjust the display speed by setting the raster image quality The image quality is sorted i
281. enter position to place the origin of dimension for replacing center point of circle or arc within radius dimension DIMJOGGED command is useful for creating dimensions in case that the center of circle or arc to be dimensioned is located outside the layout and can t be displayed in its actual position either You can set the angle of jogged radius from Other Items tab either in Create New Dimension Style dialog box or Modify Dimension Style dialog box For a jogged radius dimension having been created you can modify it s jog and center position by means of grip editing Properties palette and executing STRETCH command To create a jogged radius dimension 1 Choose Dimension gt Jogged 2 Select a circle or an arc 3 Select center position as the dimension origin 4 Specify a point to position the jog symbol Dimenison toolbar Command line DIMJOGGED 10 3 4 Create Diameter Dimensions You can create diameter dimensions for circles or arcs to measure their diameters Creating diameter dimensions resembles creating radial dimensions You can create various diameter dimensions based on the location and size of circles or arc and the settings of the dimension style Either drawing a center mark or line is controlled by the dimension style If the dimension line is created inside a circle or arc the center mark or line is not drawn The system variable DIMCEN controls whether the center mark or line is displayed To c
282. entire selection set Control the highlight of selected objects You can specify whether to display selected entities highlighted which makes the selection set easier to see By default the highlighting feature is turned on Setting system variable HIGHLIGHT to O turns off the highlighting feature which can improve the computer s performance The operation does not affect grips Objects selection methods When you choose a command that requires you to select entities when you re deleting or changing entity properties for example you can use any of the following selection methods by choosing them in the command line prompt or entering them in the command bar Select all entities ALL Selects all entities in the current drawing Add to set A Adds one or more entities to the selection set Remove from set R Removes one or more entities from the selection set Previous selection P Selects entities included in the previous selection set JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 Last entity in drawing L Selects the entity most recently added to the drawing Window W Selects entities contained entirely within a rectangular selection window Crossing window C Selects entities contained within or crossing the boundary of a rectangular selection window Outside window O Selects entities falling completely outside a rectangular selection window Window polygon W
283. er you can use polar tracking angles instead on the Polar Tracking tab in the Draft Settings dialog box You can also use system variable TRACKPATH to control the display of polar and object snap tracking alignment paths Tips for Using Object Snap Tracking With AutoTrack is on you may try the following techniques When you set Perpendicular Endpoint and Midpoint object snap and turn on object snap tracking mode you can easily draw to point perpendicular to the end or midpoint of an object Object snap tracking works in conjunction with temporary tracking points At a point prompt enter tt and specify a temporary tracking point A small is displayed at the point When you move the cursor the tracking alignment paths are displayed relative to the temporary point To delete this point move the cursor back over the After acquiring a point you can specify a point at precise distances along alignment paths from the acquired point You can use the Automatic and Shift to acquire options set on the Drafting tab of the Options dialog box to manage point acquisition By default point acquisition is set to Automatic When working in close quarters you can press SHIFT to temporarily avoid acquiring a point 5 6 Use Orthogonal Locking Ortho Mode You can restrict cursor movement to the current horizontal and vertical axes so that you can draw at right angles or orthogonally For example with the default 0 degree Orientation
284. er Text Generation select the check boxes you want to indicate the direction for printed text to appear 6 Click Apply and then click OK Text toolbar A Command line STYLE Assign Text Fonts Each character set is consisted of text characters which shape is defined by fonts In addition to TureYype font you can use compiled SHX font in ZWCAD One font can be used for multiple text styles as long as you make other settings different The following illustration shows the same font used by different text styles that use different settings JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 220 NOTES AND LABELS TARY ely nell You can specify the desired font from the Text Font field to the current or a new created text font at the Text Style dialog box Use TrueType Fonts TrueType fonts always appear filled in the drawing By default the system plot the filled in fonts which is controlled by the system variable TEXTFILL Use Unicode and Big Fonts ZWCAD supports the Unicode character encoding standard A Unicode font contains 65 535 characters and shapes for many languages You can enter characters that are not available from the keyboard through escape sequence The escape sequence is of U nnnn where nnnn represents the Unicode hexadecimal value for the character All of SHX shape fonts are Unicode fonts ZWCAD also supports the big font in order to accommodate alphabet text
285. erPt 0 To 2 As Double Dim OutRad As Double Dim InRad As Double CenterPt 0 10 CenterPt 1 10 CenterPt 2 0 OutRad 15 InRad 10 Dim pts O To 3 As Double pts 0 CenterPt 0 InRad Abs OutRad InRad 2 pts 1 CenterPt 1 ots 2 CenterPt 0 InRad Abs OutRad InRad 2 ots 3 CenterPt 1 Dim PolyObj As ZwcadLWPolyline Set PolyObj ThisDocument ModelSpace AddLightWeightPolyline pts PolyObj Closed True JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 15 Fori 0OTo1 PolyObj SetBulge i 1 PolyObj SetWidth i Abs OutRad InRad Abs OutRad InRad Next i PolyObj Update ThisDocument Regen End Sub Remarks See VBA Develop and Migrate Guide and VBA Reference in Developer s help to view the VBA functions as well as relevant tutorials provided in ZWCAD platform it s recommended to reference specific instructions from Help Developer s help 15 3 SDS SDS is an acronym for Solutions Development System a C C language interface compatible with the ADS AutoCAD Development System interface found in other CAD systems SDS provides hooks into ZWCAD allowing you to create custom applications Remarks User can reference SDS Programming Language Reference in Developer s help in which SDS functions as well as instructions for SDS function are provided it s recommended to referen
286. erenced by other drawings xrefs when you create isometric dimensions in 3D isometric views To prevent the dimensions in one layout viewport from being displayed in other layout viewports its recommended you to create a dimensioning layer for each layout viewport that is frozen in all other layout viewports Dimension in layouts You can create dimensions in paper space by selecting model Space objects or by specifying object snap locations on model space objects The dimensions created in a paper space layout do not need additional scaling there is no need to change the default value of DIMLFAC and DIMSCALE 10 3 Create Dimensions You can create dimensions by Selecting the entity to dimension and specifying the dimension line location Specifying the extension line origins and the dimension line location When you create dimensions by selecting an entity the program automatically places the extension line origins at the appropriate definition points based on the type of entity you select For example the definition points are located at the endpoints of arcs lines and JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 240 DIMENSION AND TOLERANCES polyline segments When you create dimensions by specifying the extension line origins the points you specify determine the definition points To establish these points precisely use entity snaps 10 3 1 Create Linear Dimens
287. ers that have been turned off or to the blank portions of dashed lines When Object Snaps is turned on a marker and a tooltip are displayed when you move the cursor over an object snap location on an object Setting object snaps a JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk COORDINATES AND COORDINATE SYSTEM You can set object snaps using any of the following methods Choose Tools gt Draft Settings gt Object Snap then click one of the object snap tools On the Entity Snaps toolbar click one of the object snap tools On the command line type an object snap command On the status bar right click ESNAP choose settings Press and hold down the Shift key while right clicking anywhere within the drawing window to display the object snap shortcut menu and then choose the object snap you want to set Object Snap settings lf you need to use one or more object snaps repeatedly you can turn on running object snaps on the Grid and Snap tab of Draft Settings dialog box The object snap mode keeps on unless you turn it off For example you can use an object snap to draw a line to the center of a circle If several object snaps on the system chooses automatically the most suitable object snap If there are two possible object snaps at the selection area the system choose the one that is closer to the center of target box If you turn several object snaps on you need to check w
288. es in this guide assumes the program s default settings Angles increase counterclockwise and decrease clockwise Thus an angle of JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 6 315 degrees is the same as 45 degrees 6 1 2 Using three dimensional coordinates Specifying coordinates in three dimensional space is similar to working in two dimensions except that you also use the z axis to locate coordinates Three dimensional coordinates are represented in the format x y z 2 3 6 Using the right hand rule To visualize how ZWCAD works with three dimensional space use a technique known as the right hand rule Hold up your right hand in a loose fist with your palm facing you Extend your thumb in the direction of the positive x axis and your index finger upward in the direction of the positive y axis Then extend your middle finger straight toward you in the direction of the z axis These three fingers are now pointing in the positive x y and z directions respectively You can also use the right hand rule to determine the positive rotation direction Point your thumb in the positive direction of the axis about which you want to rotate and then curl the rest of your fingers toward your palm These fingers are curling in the positive rotation direction The right hand rule helps you determine the positive direction of the x y and z axes and the positive rotation directi
289. ess Enter 3 Specify a color Solids Editing toolbar Specify the face s to color A The resulting entity with the face colored Copy Faces You can copy faces of 3D solids to the specified location The selected faces are seen as an independent region or solid object After creating copies you can perform one of the following methods Base point You must to specify two points on the drawing The first one is a base point the other one determines the location of the copy Vector You need to specify a point to determine the location of the copy The base point is the original point 0 0 0 JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 To copy a solid face 1 Choose Modify gt Solids Editing gt Copy Faces 2 Select the face s to copy and press Enter 3 Specify a base point 4 Specify an end point Solids Editing toolbar if Specify the face s to copy A the base The resulting entity with the face copied point B and the end point C 8 6 4 Modify Edges of 3D Solids You can copy edges of 3D solids to become an independent object or change its color Copy Edges Copying edges of 3D solids is similar with copying faces of 3D solids All edges are copied as the independent lines arcs ellipses or spline objects However the properties keep the same as the current layer After you specifying the location of
290. ess the objects partly or entirely that are located behind other objects using Hide The system generates wireframe representations including hidden lines when you use VPOINT DVIEW or VIEW command to create objects in 3D view You can use HIDE command to remove the hidden lines to verify the current placement of these surfaces When you view or plot wireframes complex drawings usually appear too cluttered to convey accurate information Hiding background objects that in reality would be obscured by objects in the front background simplifies the display of the drawing and clarifies the design Shown as the following picture before HIDE after HIDE Hiding background lines makes the display much clearer but you cannot modify JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 4 hidden line or render views It may take a long time to calculate and obscure hidden lines if the drawing is complex However you can speed up the process in the several ways For example you can avoid drawing details that will not be visible at the scale at which you are displaying or plotting the drawing You can also exclude objects from the hiding process by zooming into a part of the drawing Remove hidden lines on one or more selected objects to improve performance When the system variable DISPSILH is set to 1 HIDE command displays only the silhouette lines of the objects It does not display the insi
291. esult 8 6 Modify 3D Solids You can edit three dimensional solids in several unique ways including chamfer fillet section and slice You can also modify individual faces and edges of solids as well as imprint separate shell and check solids You can edit three dimensional ACIS solids including boxes cones cylinders dishes domes spheres torus and wedges 8 6 1 Fillet and Chamfer You can chamfer or fillet a three dimensional solid much like you chamfer or fillet a JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 196 MODIFY OBJECTS twodimensional object Create fillers You can create fillets for the specified edges of 3D objects At first you need to specify the fillet radius and then choose one method to create fillets If you choose Edge the system creates fillets for the two selected edges If you select three or more edges which were around a vertex the system creates a spheral vertex if the three fillets have the same radius After specifying an arc radius the system creates a sequence of fillets for the tangential sequence of edges when you use Loop option and select an edge In 3D space as the selected objects are coplanar and the extrusion direction is not parallel with the Z axis you can create a fillet If the objects are on the same plane there are two kind of extrusion direction shown as follows lf the objects are on the same plane with the same
292. ettings control how your coordinate offset and distance entries are interpreted and how coordinates and distances are displayed The input format of three dimension coordinates is the same as the input format of the two dimension coordinates scientific decimal engineering architectural and fractional notation The unit format for creating and listing objects measuring distance and displaying coordinate locations is different from the dimension units setting used in creating dimension values With ZWCAD you typically draw at full size 1 1 scale and then set a scale factor when you print or plot your drawing Before you begin drawing however you need to determine the relationship between drawing units and real world units For example you can decide whether one linear drawing unit represents an inch a foot a meter or a mile In addition you can specify the way the program measures angles For both linear and angular units you can also set the degree of display precision such as the number of decimal places or smallest denominator used when displaying fractions The precision settings affect only the display of distances angles and coordinates ZWCAD always stores distances angles and coordinates using floating point accuracy Open drawing units dialog Choose Format gt Units Command line UNITS Convert Drawing Units When you create a new drawing in one system of measurement imperial or metric and then change to the other
293. example freeze DIMENSIONS layer of all new viewports to limit displaying the dimensions To create viewports with dimensions you can change default settings for the current viewport However changing default settings of new viewport may not affect current viewport Freeze or Thaw Layers Automatically in New Layout Viewports User can create new layers frozen in all of the existing layout viewports by clicking Freeze in all viewports option in layer property manager Like wise cancel the Freeze in all viewports option to thaw layers in all viewports You can also thaw layers by your decision with this feature you can create new layers displayed in single viewports Modify Layout Viewports Once layout viewports are created in paper space you can set the viewport as current in which you can edit model objects Any changes to the layout viewports reflected to model space directly and all other viewports of the modified objects will be displayed Change the layout viewport scale Specify proportion in the Standard proportion option on Properties tab to determine proportion of each viewport relative to paper space That is to scale each viewport precisely Scaling or extension for layout viewport boundaries will not change the scale of views in viewports While working on layouts the scale factor represents the ratio of actual size of model and the layout size The ratio generated dividing the model space unit from drawing space unit For example a
294. extrusion direction normal to that plane the fillet arc is on that plane and has the same extrusion direction For objects on the same plane with opposite or different extrusion directions the fillet arc is located on that object plane with an extrusion direction normal to the object plane and inclined towards the positive Z direction of the current UCS For example we assume two arcs A and B are on the same plane in 3D space but have opposite extrusion directions 0 0 65 0 86 and 0 0 65 0 86 relative to the current UCS The fillet arc adopts the extrusion direction 0 0 65 0 86 To fillet a solid 1 Choose Modify gt Fillet 2 Select the edge of the solid to fillet 3 Specify the fillet radius 4 Select additional edges to fillet and press Enter to fillet Modify toolbar Command line FILLET Create chamfer Using CHAMFER creates chamfers for the adjacent planes While creating fillets the system prompts you to specify distance for the first and second object The first object is the base plane and the second one is other plane After specifying the chamfer distance you have to select edges to fillet You can select all edges of the base plane through selecting a edge using Loop option Get more details from the CHAMFER command To chamfer a solid 1 Choose Modify gt Chamfer 2 Select the edge of the base surface to chamfer 3 Do one of the following To select a different surface type n and press Enter To use t
295. f identify DXF files you can share the drawing by saving drawing as DXF file User can export files as DXF format using Save or Save As command select DXF file format from the Tools button of the Export dialog box when saving the drawing as DXF JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 14 format DXF files are also saved as ASCII or binary format Specify precise decimal digits as you saving drawing as DXF file controls floting precision up to 16 digits for DXF files You can also click Select Object option to save some objects as DMF file BMP As bitmap file format BMP is a kind of raster image format The object displayed on screen together with colored viewport and objects in rendered viewport will be displayed in raster images as well Export the entire drawing or partly export the drawing to device independent raster images using EXPORT command DWG DWG is standard drawing file format generally supported by CAD software DWT You can export drawings as DWT template file using Save or Save As command EMF EMF is fortified Windows relay file SVG SVG is upgradable vector graphics To export a drawing to a BMP EMF WMF or SVG file 1 Choose File gt Export 2 In the Export Drawing As File dialog box under Save As Type choose the file format 3 Specify the name of the file you want to create 4 Click Save 5 If the selection prompt box displays choose
296. file for use in other drawings using the Layer States Manager The layer states of xref cannot be exported JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 70 COORDINATES AND COORDINATE SYSTEM Restore Layer Settings You can not only restore the saved settings but also edit rename or delete named settings Using Layer States Manager you can import named layer states that were previously export to LAS files Whatever layer states come from the drawing or LAS files only saved settings can be restored and the unspecific layer settings remains the original settings 5 9 Work with Colors An entity s color determines how it is displayed and if you are using a color printer how it prints Entities are created in the current color specified for the drawing Layers can also control the color of entities When you open a new drawing entities are created in the color BYLAYER which adopts the color of the current layer Initially layer O is both the only layer and the current layer Its default color is white so your entities appear as white For entities and layers in ZWCAD there are three different types of colors Index colors True colors Color books colors You can choose colors by selecting them from the Select Color dialog box In the command bar or in some dialog boxes you specify a color either by name or by number All objects are created with the current color wh
297. files consisted of thousands of ASCII characters When you use SYTLE command to specify fonts you can specify two fonts separated by a comma The first one is common font and the second is big font The specification shown as follows specify font and big font on the command line Enter this To specify this font name big font name Both normal fonts and Big Fonts font name Only a normal font Big Font unchanged big font name Only a Big Font normal font unchanged font name Only a normal font Big Font if any removed ENTER null response No change You should not enter a long file name consisted of commas The comma is interpreted as a separator Replace Font If the font to be contained in the drawing can t be obtained from current system ZWCAD process it by replacing these fonts with another specified one Specify fonts to replace If the font to be contained in the drawing can t be found in current system ZWCAD replaces these fonts with another specified font automatically Otherwise system uses simplex shx font to override those unknown fonts instead To modify the replace fonts by system default you can modify the system variable FONTALT which is applied for specifying new font file name However the FONTALT value will be mapped to another font if big font is used currently Default font file for this system variable is txt shx and bigfont shx Edit Font Mapping File Font mapping file is
298. find and correct errors Though ZWCAD can recover a damaged drawing file it is not sure that the recovery drawing is the same exactly as the original one You had better create a backup file if the drawing is important On the Open and Save tap of Options dialog box you can specify the backup file are created when you save drawings and set the proper interval time for saving Then a backup copy file with a bak extension is created when you save the named drawing once again After that a backup file is always updated while you executing the command SAVE or SAVEAS lf ZWCAD exits unexpectedly it attempts to rename the current backup file in order to avoid covering the original one You can recover a drawing file by saving a bak file to a dwg file Files can become damaged for many reasons For example if you are working ona drawing during a power outage a system crash or a hardware failure your drawing file may become damaged ZWCAD allows you to open and check damaged files to attempt file recovery Recovering a file attempts to open one of the following file types Standard drawing files with a dwg extension JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 26 CREATE AND SAVE A DRAWING Drawing Exchange Format files with a dxf file extension Design Web Format files with a dwf file extension Drawing templates with a dwt file extension You can also audit any open fi
299. floor plan you can draw the layout of light fixtures on one layer and the location of plumbing lines on another By selectively turning layers on and off you can print the electrical engineering drawings and the plumbing drawings from the same drawing file For even more convenience you can control the visibility of layers within individual viewports so that layers that display in one viewport are invisible in other viewports in the same drawing When you turn a layer off objects drawn on that layer are no longer visible When you turn the layer back on the objects on that layer are redisplayed To turn layers on or off 1 Choose Format gt Layer 2 Clicks icon under On tab in the layer list 3 Clicks OK button Properties toolbar Command line LAYER Freeze or thaw layers You can also freeze layers to improve the performance of operations such as zooming and panning or producing hidden lines or shaded images When a layer is frozen objects drawn on that layer are no longer visible To freeze or thaw layers 1 Choose Format gt Layer 2 Clicks icon under Freeze in all VP tab in the layer list 3 Clicks OK button Properties toolbar Command line LAYER Locking and unlocking layers Locking a layer makes it easy to refer to information contained on the layer but prevents you from accidentally modifying its objects When a layer is locked but visible and thawed its objects remain visible but you cannot edit t
300. for creating plotter configuration using relevant information that are imported as this wizard required Layouts Layout displays the results on a plotted page You can create as many layouts as you need Each layout is saved on its own layout tab and can be associated with a different page setup All the elements to be displayed on a plotted page such as title blocks and notes are drawn in paper space in a layout The objects in the drawing are created in model space To view these objects in the layout you should create layout viewports Page Setups Specify page settings for the layout you create through Page Setup and Plot Setup dialog box controls whether to display layout tab or Model tab Page setup can be applied to other layouts once it s saved with a given name Plot Styles A plot style includes properties such as lineweight color hatch pattern which controls how an object or layer is plotted The Plot Style Manager shows all the plot style tables available in ZWCAD There are two plot style types color dependent and named Use only one type of plot Style table for plotting a drawing each time For color dependent plot style tables an object s color determines how it is plotted With an extension of ctb these plot style table files are disabled of assigning color dependent plot styles directly to objects Instead to control how an object is plotted you should change its color For example all objects assigned the color re
301. frame the system opens the multiline text editor which is comprised of a text frame and the Text Formating toolbar You can type text in the text frame and change the style from the Text Formating toolbar The text style can control the style of characters such as default fronts line spacing aligned way and color STANDARD is the default text style You can change the value of text objects in the Properties panel that includes the Justify Direction and so on You can also assign the underline color or other fonts to the current text to overlap the default style Stacked characters such as fractions and tolerance special characters and Unicode characters used for TrueType fonts can be create in the text frame At the same time you can also control the appearance of text object and create a list by specifying the tap and characters to retract To create multiline text 1 Choose Draw gt Text gt Multiline Line Text 2 Select the first corner of the text area 3 Select the second corner of the text area 4 In the Multiline Text window type the text you want To create paragraphs press Enter and continue typing 5 On the toolbar make format changes as follows To change the font of the selected text select a font from the list To change the height of the selected text enter a new value in the Height box To format text in a TrueType font with boldface or italics or to create underlined text for any font click the correspo
302. from isometric options SW southwest Isometric SE southeast Isometric NE northeast Isometric and NW northwest Isometric To understand how the isometric views work imagine you are looking down at the top of a box If you move toward the lower left corner of the box you are viewing the box from the SW Isometric View If you move toward the upper left corner of the box you are viewing it from NW Isometric View Draw 2D Isometric Views With Isometric Snap you can create 2D objects that appear to be 3D solids By setting Isometric Snap on the Draft Settings dialog box and turning on Snap and Grid you can easily align objects along one of three isometric planes However although the isometric drawing looks like 3D it is actually a 2D representation Therefore you cannot extract distance and areas display objects from different viewports or delete hidden lines automatically Set Isometric Grid and Snap By aligning along three major axes isometric drawing simulates a 3D drawing from specified viewpoint JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 4 When the snap angle is set to 0 the axes of the isometric plane are 30 degrees 90 degrees and 150 degrees With Isometric Snap on you can work on any of three isometric planes each with a pair of associated axes Left The left isometric plane defined by a pair of 90 and 150 degrees axes The snap and grips al
303. ft side click Insert Right to insert column to the right side Before Merge and Unmerge Cells Operating Steps 1 Select one cell in table 2 Hold down the SHIFT key and select another cell to be merged 3 Click Merge cells on the toolbar and select the way you want to merge the cells Methods are Merge All combined Merge by Column and Merge by Row Different Merged cells according different merge ways 264 JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk DIMENSION AND TOLERANCES Before After Change the appearance of cell borders Operating Steps 1 Select one cell in the table 2 Click Cell Borders button on the toolbar to call Cell Borders Properties dialog 3 Inthe cell frame dialog box set the cell borders width line type color double line and the width of the double line 4 Click OK button to finish setting Before Edit data format and alignment Operating Steps 1 Select one cell in the table 2 Click Alignment on table toolbar to select alignment Alignment includes upper left upper upper right left middle middle right lower left middle bottom right and so on Before Lock and unlock cell editing Operating Steps JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 10 1 Select one cell in the table 2 Click Lock button on the toolbar and select the unlock or
304. ftware and hardware to install and run ZWCAD Operating system Microsoft Windows 2003 Microsoft Windows XP Microsoft Windows Vista Microsoft Windows 7 Processor Pentium III 800 Mhz or advanced JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 1 RAM 512 MB recommended Video 1024 x 768 VGA with True Color minimum Hard disk 700 MB Pointing device Mouse trackball or other device DVD ROM Any speed for installation only 1 2 2 Installing ZWCAD A setup program guides you through the ZWCAD installation process The program transfers files to a folder that it creates on your hard disk The program also creates a menu item on the Start menu To install ZWCAD from a compact disc 1 Insert the ZWCAD compact disc into your CD ROM drive 2 Double click the installation file of your desired software on the CD page 3 Follow the instructions of the installation prompts choose from Standard Edition and Professional Edition to determine which one to install NOTE If you did not receive an ZWCAD compact disc for example if you downloaded the program from the Internet follow the instructions that came with the program 10 JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk You can work with the ZWCAD window and its elements in a variety of ways For example you can display and rearrange the toolbars display t
305. fy size of the paper used for plotting including which portion of a drawing to print and the origin of the print area Choose whether to print and scale lineweights Choose whether to implement print style tables to control colors pen widths line types and lineweights Set Paper Size The paper size here refers to the size of the drawing needs to be set before plotting regardless of which working space you select You can assign the paper type from pull down list of the Paper text box The available paper types provided in the pull down list are decided by current configuration If you want to setup paper size you should configure plotters first all the available plotters are both system plotters of Windows configured and non system driven You can specify a printer or plotter to be used when printing any drawing You can print your drawing on any printer or plotter that is compatible with Windows including raster printers To select a printer or plotter 1 Choose File gt Plot 2 From the Printer Name list select a printer or plotter and then click OK Standard toolbar Command line PLOT Default paper size used for creating new layouts through editing PC5 files associative to plotters can be assigned to the paper With this technique you can assign different paper size for Windows and ZWCAD separately If you set a system variable PAPERUPDATE to 1 prompts display if the selected plotter doesn t support the paper size So th
306. fying endcaps By default you can add no more than 16 elements to a Multiline Style Use Existing Multiline Styles When you start drawing a multiline you can use the default style which has two elements or specify a style you created previously The default style is the multiline style last used or the STANDARD style if MLINE hasn t been used You can also change the justification and scale of the multiline before you draw it Justification determines whether the multiline is drawn below or above the cursor or with its origin centered on the cursor The default is below top justification Scale controls the overall width of the multiline using the current units lf you draw a multiline with scale of 2 then the width is twice of that defined by the multiline style If the scale is set to minus then draw the multiline in order of reversal offset line the multi line with the largest offset is drawn at the bottom in the way of left to right drawing And the multi line will be turned into single line once the scale is set to 0 If you are changing the multiline scale you might need to make equivalent changes to JL Systems Group ne Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CREATE OBJECTS linetype scale to prevent dots or dashes from being disproportionately sized Multiline scale does not affect linetype scale To draw a multi line 1 Choose Draw gt Multiline 2 Specify the start point 3 Spe
307. g OLE objects into other applications use Windows copyclip viewer to preview OLE object 14 2 3 Export OLE Objects from Drawings Export ZWCAD drawings into other applications that are supportive to OLE objects and then embed the objects of the drawing into other documents Select objects in ZWCAD drawing and hold CTRL C or use other copy commands to copy selected objects paste or selective paste the copies using copy commands of other applications to embed them from the ZWCAD into other documents Embedding places a copy of the selected objects in the destination document The object in the original drawing will not update when you edit the OLE object from within the destination document in a ZWCAD drawing Dragging ZWCAD drawings into other programs lf the other program in which you want to include ZWCAD drawings is compatible with Activex an alternative to pasting drawings with menu commands is to drag drawing file icons from Windows Explorer into the other document Dragging and dropping drawings does not use the Clipboard so data on the Clipboard is not affected When you drag an ZWCAD drawing file from Windows Explorer you link or embed the entire drawing in the other document When you drag the file the cursor changes in response to the action you take TIP Before you drag a drawing position the Windows Explorer window and the other program s window so you can see the file icon and the document in which you want to drop it To
308. g box from which you can select the desired file You can also open a drawing by dragging a drawing into anywhere outside the drawing area However if you drag a drawing into the drawing area of an open drawing the new drawing is inserted into the open drawing as a block reference instead of opening it You can also double click drawing to launch ZWCAD program to open it If ZWCAD is running the drawing opens in the current session Change the default drawing folder Each time you launch ZWCAD the path you specified to open a latest drawing is displayed in each standard file selection dialog box You can also specify a default path to ZWCAD by changing default drawing folder Find a drawing file Clicking Tools button from the Open Drawing dialog box displays Search dialog box from which you can search drawing through name location and date filters You can preview the selected drawing in the Open Drawing dialog box When the system variable RASTERPREVIEW is on a preview image with BMP format is generated and saved with the drawing Set the search path The Files tab of Options dialog box is used by ZWCAD to search drawing support files The support files includes text fonts drawings linetypes and hatch patterns The system variable MYDOCUMENTSPREFIX is designed to store the location of My Documents folder for the current user You can also specify the location of temporary files on the Files tab of the Option dialog box Temp
309. g box displayed through entering a tilde at the first prompt 2 4 Dynamic input Dynamic input box is a floating window which appears near the cross cursor in the implementation of any drawing command it provides a convenient method for users to input command prompt dynamically instead of using command window When the DYN mode is turned on a floating window will appear near the cross cursor displaying command line prompt and changing along with the cursor moves Dynamic input box displays the identical contents as the command line shows synchronously whereas unavailable if DYN mode is off Dynamic input box facilitates users to draw pictures freely and efficiently which is comparatively more intuitionist than using command window to display prompts when executing a drawing command Dynamic input box can not replace command window you can press F12 to hide command window to increase drawing area but it is sometimes necessary when implementing certain commands Status of Dynamic input Clicks on the DYN button on status bar to control its status When Dynamic input mode is turned on the command line prompt will be displayed in the Dynamic input box synchronously while the Dynamic input mode is turned off the toolbar box displays current polar coordinate of cross cursor DYN ON Turns on the DYN mode on states bar the prompt box near the cross cursor will dynamically display command line prompt users can
310. g menus and the command line axis tripod Icon with X Y and Z coordinates that is used to visualize the viewpoint view direction of a drawing without displaying the drawing VPOINT back face The opposite side of a front face Back faces are not visible in a rendered image baseline An imaginary line on which text characters appear to rest Individual characters can have JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 356 GLOSSARY descenders that drop below the baseline baseline dimension Multiple dimensions measured from the same baseline Also called parallel dimensions base point 1 In the context of editing grips the grip that changes to a solid color when selected to specify the focus of the subsequent editing operation 2 A point for relative distance and angle when copying moving and rotating objects 3 The insertion base point of the current drawing BASE 4 The insertion base point for a block definition BLOCK Bezier curve A polynomial curve defined by a set of control points representing an equation of an order one less than the number of points being considered A Bezier curve is a special case of a B spline curve bitmap The digital representation of an image having bits referenced to pixels In color graphics a different value represents each red green and blue component of a pixel blips Temporary screen markers displayed in the drawing area w
311. g the origin A a point on the positive x axis B anda point in the positive y direction C UCS toolbar ke Command line UCS 6 2 3 Defining and naming user coordinate systems A drawing can contain as many coordinate systems as you want and can be named appropriate names so you can remember how they are used in your drawing for recalling them later NOTE Coordinate system names created or renamed in ZWCAD can have up to 31 characters and cannot include spaces ZWCAD will however display longer coordinatesystem names and names containing spaces JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 6 Define new user coordinate systems 1 Choose Tools gt NEW UCS 2 Choose which type for creating UCS 3 Create UCS depending on the prompts UCS toolbar kL Command line UCS To change a user coordinate system name in the current drawing 1 Choose Tools gt Named UCS 2 Right click the desired UCS name and select Rename 3 Type a new name 4 Click OK button UCS toolbar Command line DDUCS 6 2 4 Setting the current user coordinate system When you draw new objects they are created in relation to the current coordinate system Set the current UCS 1 Choose Tools gt Named UCS 2 Select the desired UCS and press Set Current button 3 Click OK button UCS toolbar Command line DDUCS 6 2 5 Use UCS Presets ZWCAD lets you select a preset UCS The six planes
312. g to this text can t be found Chinese system will take Song typeface as default while other language systems take current font style as default If the corresponding font file exists but not display system reads the specified font in system configured file zwcad alt If the replacing font is corrupted or useless in some cases the fonts will not be replaced Set Text Height Text height is the size of characters which is measured in drawing unit With the same height setting the displaying height of TrueType font is usually lower than the one of SHX font When the font is not of TrueType font the value represents the size of the uppercase JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 222 NOTES AND LABELS letters When the text height is set to 0 in the text style the system prompts you to type a height value while creating single line text each time So you can set text height to 0 in the text style in order to specify a new height before creating text For TrueType fonts the value of text height represents the height of a capital letter plus an ascent area The ascent is reserved for accent marks and other marks used in non English languages The relative portion of text height assigned to capital letters and ascent characters is determined by the font designer at the time the font is designed consequently it varies from font to font When you apply a text height to all
313. ged However the new value for color is stored in the system variable DIMCLRE The extension lines of the dimension you create will apply the new color The dimension style overrides can be saved as the current dimension style Dimension style includes some common dimension characteristics that are suited to be saved permanently and some are applied on an individual basis that can be applied more effectively as overrides For example a single type of arrowhead is often used in a drawing so it is suited to be saved as part of the dimension style However suppression of extension lines often applies in individual cases only and is more suited to a dimension style override The overrides apply to the dimension you are creating and all subsequent dimensions that are created with it until you reverse it or set another dimension style to current 10 4 2 Making dimensions oblique Extension lines are normally created at a perpendicular angle to the dimension line You can change the angle of the extension lines however so that they tilt relative to the dimension line To make oblique extension lines 1 Choose Dimensions gt Oblique 2 Select the linear dimension and then press Enter 3 Type the obliquing angle and then press Enter Dimension toolbar Command line DIMEDIT Select the dimension to be made oblique A Result and then type the obliquing angle TIP To align the oblique angle if you don t know the exact measurement
314. ght into a drawing by an external reference DIESEL For Direct Interpretively Evaluated String Expression Language A macro language for altering the status line with the MODEMACRO system variable and for customizing menu items dimension line arc An arc usually with arrows at each end spanning the angle formed by the extension lines of an angle being measured The dimension text near this arc sometimes divides it into two arcs dimension style A named group of dimension settings that determines the appearance of the dimension and simplifies the setting of dimension system variables DIMSTYLE dimension text JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 358 GLOSSARY The measurement value of dimensioned objects dimension variables A set of numeric values text strings and settings that control dimensioning features DIMSTYLE direct distance entry A method to specify a second point by first moving the cursor to indicate direction and then entering a distance drawing area The area in which your drawings are displayed and modified The size of the drawing area varies depending on the size of the window and on how many toolbars and other elements are displayed drawing extents The smallest rectangle that contains all objects in a drawing positioned on the screen to display the largest possible view of all objects ZOOM drawing limits The user defined rectangular
315. gle 1 Choose Tools gt Inquiry gt Distance 2 Specify the first point 3 Specify the second point Inquiry toolbar Command line DIST JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 5 Use the Distance command to calculate the distance A between two points B and the angle in the xy plane D the angle from the xy plane and the delta x E delta y F and delta z distances between the two points TIP To use specific points on selected objects use object snaps to select the precise points on the objects 5 12 3 Displaying information about your drawing You can display a variety of information about a drawing and the objects it contains including Information in the drawing database about selected objects The current drawing status The time spent working on the drawing This information is displayed in the Prompt History window and in the command bar Displaying information about objects You can display information about the selected objects The information varies depending on the type of objects you select All of the listings display the following information Object type Layer Color Linetype The location of the object its xyz coordinates relative to the current user coordinate system UCS The current space model space on the Model tab or paper space on a Layout tab The size of the object the infor
316. gment between two vertices Change the width of the polyline segment between two vertices To move a polyline vertex 1 Choose Modify gt Object gt Polyline 2 Select the polyline 3 On the command line type Edit verticest 4 On the command line type next Repeat until the x reaches the vertex you want to move 5 On the command line type move 6 Specify the new location for the vertex 7 On the command line type another option or type exit to complete the command 8 On the command line type another option or press Enter to complete the command Modifyll toolbar Command line PEDIT Select the polyline A move the current vertex Result marker to the vertex you want to move B and then specify the new vertex location C To taper the width of an individual polyline segment 1 Choose Modify gt Object gt Polyline 2 Select the polyline 3 On the command line type Edit verticest 4 On the command line type next Repeat until the x reaches the first vertex of the segment you want to taper 5 On the command line type width 6 Specify the starting width 7 Specify the ending width 8 On the command line type another option or type exit to complete the command 9 On the command line type another option or press Enter to complete the command JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 Modifyll toolbar Command line PEDIT
317. gs for the layout such as the scale of the drawing print area print style tables and more 5 Print or plot your drawing You can right click on Layout tab and select New to create new layout and also import layout from template Options on Shortcut menu are listed as follows New Creates new layouts Delete Removes specified layouts Rename Renames a layout Copy and Move Creates copies of the selected layout and rearrange the layouts on layout tab From Template Imports layout from template file Work with Model Space and Paper Space Model space is generally used for designing drawings creating and editing drawings Preparations for plotting is usually working on paper space for the drawings on layouts is close to the plotting effects When you start a drawing session your initial working area is called model space Model space is an area in which you create two dimensional and three dimensional objects based on either the World Coordinate System WCS or a user coordinate system UCS You view and work in model space while using the Model tab Your view of this area is a single viewport that fills the screen You can create additional views on the Model tab called viewports which can show the same or different two dimensional or three dimensional views all of which are displayed in a tiled manner You can work in only one of these viewports at a time on the Model tab and you can print only the current viewport ZWCAD provi
318. h or millimeter to equal 2 drawing units Select Custom and then under User Defined Scale type the ratio of printed units of measure inches or millimeters to drawing units 4 To specify the printed units of measure click Inches or Millimeters 5 Select Save Changes to Layout and then click Apply to Layout cr Standard toolbar Command line PLOT Scale the Drawing to Fit the Page To plot the view at the largest possible size that fits the paper The height and width of the drawing will be adjusted according to the paper size JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 13 Any changes to the ratio of plotted units drawing size plotters plot origin plot orientation and plot area will be reflected to plot scale Set Options for Plotted Objects The following options show plot patterns with instructions on how to plot objects Plot Object Lineweights Specifies that lineweights assigned to objects and layers are plotted Plot with Plot Styles Plots a drawing with specified plot styles Plots lineweights automatically once selecting this option automatically If you do not select this option objects are plotted with their assigned properties and not with the plot style overrides Hidden Plot Suppresses the plotting of objects that are located behind other objects regardless of how it s displayed on screen Save Changes to Layout All the changes you make in the Plot
319. hat you specify the next vertex number is displayed and you are prompted for the coordinates of the vertex Specify the coordinates and then press Enter Continue to specify the coordinates for each numbered vertex 3 To finish specifying vertex coordinates press Enter 4 Specify the vertex numbers that define the first face You specify the face by entering the vertex numbers that were defined when you specified coordinates in step 2 Each face can be composed of three or more numbered vertices 5 To finish defining the first face press Enter 6 Specify the next face by entering its vertex numbers 7 To complete the command press Enter Command line PFACE TIP To make an edge invisible tyoe the vertex number as a negative value Create Ruled Surface RULESURF creates a polygon mesh representing the ruled surface between two curves The entities you select define the edges of the ruled surface The entities include the point line spline circle arc or polyline If the first entity is a closed one the other one must be closed two or a point If the first entity is a point the other one should be a closed or open entity There is only one point as a boundary curve on a ruled surface 50 curves defined result If you select a closed polylines the ruled surface begins at the last vertex and proceeds backward along the polyline segments If you select open curves selecting objects at the same side of the two objects to creat
320. hatch select the Retain Boundaries check box Existing objects are always retained 4 In the Boundaries click Add Select objects 5 In the drawing click the objects to be hatched individually and then press Enter when done 6 In the Hatch dialog box click OK Draw toolbar E Command line BHATCH Select an area for hatching 1 Choose Draw gt Hatch 2 From the Hatch dialog box click the Island detection option and then choose one of the following island Normal Areas separated from the outside of the hatched by an odd number of intersections are hatched Outer Only the outer object and its outer island are considered for hatching Ignore The entire object is considered for hatching inner area will be ignored JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 12 l Normal islands A with outer island B and with ignore islands C 3 To keep any new objects that are created for drawing the boundary hatch select the Retain Boundaries check box Existing objects are always retained 4 In the Boundaries click Add Pick points 5 In the drawing click inside the closed perimeter of a boundary not on the boundary itself If desired continue clicking inside additional closed perimeters 6 To complete the selection press Enter 7 In the Hatch dialog box click OK Draw toolbar E Command line BHATCH 12 1 3 Choose And Define Hatch Patterns User
321. he DEFAULT lineweight until you group them into a block The entities then inherit the block s lineweight setting when you insert the block into a drawing If you choose a lineweight that is less than 025 millimeter it displays as one pixel when you create your drawing When you print your drawing it prints at the thinnest lineweight that is available for your printer You cannot assign lineweights to planes points TrueType fonts or raster images 5 10 2 Display Lineweights JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 5 Display lineweights in both of model space and layer space Lineweights are displayed differently in paper space layout than model space Lineweights are useful for graphical representations of different objects and information Display Lineweights in Model Space In model space a 0 value lineweight is displayed as a pixel and other lineweights are display with a pixel width proportional to their real unit value In model space lineweight display does not change with the zoom factor A lineweight value that is represented by a width of several pixels is always displayed using the same number of pixels Unless you use LWEIGHT command to open Lineweight Settings dialog box and change the display scale the lineweight display scale keeps unchanged In addition the lineweight display scale does not affect the lineweight plotting value Lineweight that are
322. he command bar and enable the status bar The toolbars and command bar can also be floated anywhere on the screen or docked to the edges of the main ZWCAD window You can customize the menu bar at the top of the window You can customize the toolbars changing the appearance and arrangement of tools and adding your own commands and macros Your drawings are displayed in the drawing window The user coordinate system UCS icon indicates the orientation of the drawing in two dimensional space default setting Click a tab to switch between the drawing of your model and a printed layout You can type commands in the command bar To reposition the command bar drag it to another location on your screen You can move and dock the toolbars to any location on your screen Specialty editor You can modify the value you wanted in each column The status bar displays information such as the current cursor coordinates and mode settings 2 1 MENUS and Shortcut Menus 2 1 1 MENUS You can use any of the option on the Menus from the menu bar at the top of the ZWCAD drawing area Choose one of the following methods to use a menu On the menu bar click a menu name to display a list of options To select a menu option either click the option you want or use the DOWN ARROW to move down the list and then press ENTER Press ALT and press the key for the underlined letter in the menu name then press the underlined letter in the option name F
323. he current surface press Enter 4 Specify the distance on first entity 5 Specify the distance on second entity 6 Do one of the following JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 Specify the edges to chamfer To select all edges around the base surface type and press Enter Modify toolbar a Command line CHAMFER 8 6 2 Section and Slice You can section or slice a three dimensional solid region or body Section You can create a region using the intersection of solid objects and a plane with the SECTION command After selecting objects the system creates a region on the current layer and inserts them into the location of the section Methods to define a section specifies three points to define a sectioning plane Align the sectioning plane with a circle ellipse arc 2D spline or 2D polyline object Specifies a point lied on the sectioning plane and a point lied on the normal of the defined section Align the sectioning plane with the plane of the current view Specifies a point to determine the location of the sectioning plane on the XY YZ or ZX plane and aligns the sectioning plane with the XY YZ or ZX plane of the current UCS To section an object 1 Choose Draw gt Solids gt Section 2 Select the objects to cross section 3 Do one of the following Specify three points to define the cross section plane The first point defines the origin w
324. he dragging Holding down CTRL while dragging creates a copy of the information without affecting the original document as you do copying and pasting in the same way Control Objects Quality Default quality level of the OLE objects is determined by system variable OLEQUALITY To illustrate plotting effects the quality here is divided into five grades line quality text quality graphics quality photo quality and high photo quality In which line quality is the lowest grade plots the drawing in the shortest way and occupies the least memory While high photo quality plots the drawing in a longer way and occupies more memory JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 14 Limits for Inserting OLE Objects ZWCAD set some limits when linking or embedding the OLE objects All these inherent limits are used for designing OLE objects OLE objects are not displayed or plotted on xrefs or block references Modifications made for plotting rotation are not reflected on OLE objects when using Microsoft Windows system plotter Change plot orientation in Windows Plotting system configuration dialog box ZWCAD limits the size of soreadsheet that is imported as OLE object If import too large a spreadsheet you can reduce the column width and row height and reduce font size or partly paste the spreadsheet so as to divide the OLE objects into several objects in smaller size Before importin
325. he new viewport names will be added to a list ranked by viewports Grips on layouts will be displayed once selected which are used for changing the display proportion of geometry objects created in model space within the viewports Each viewport can be scaled like other objects using SCALE command which is only affective to the size of the viewport rather than the scale of the views To adjust the proportion of views within viewports you can scale the view by modifying scaling factor And also specify proportion in the Standard proportion option on Properties tab Customize option is also available for changing plot scale of viewport objects Change the Properties of Layout Viewports Like common objects layout viewports are characterized by object properties such as layer color linetype linetype scale and lineweight Which are all displayed and changed on properties tab Viewports are created on the current layer so as to control the visibility of the boundaries User can freeze or set plot configurations for layers in Layer Property Manager to avoid plotting the viewport The visibility of the boundary is nonassociative to the viewport if they are located in different layers JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 314 LAYOUT PLOT AND PUBLISH DRAWINGS as pr ii To modify layout viewport properties Make sure you are on a layout tab in paper space Double click the borde
326. he print styles after assigning them they will not JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 330 LAYOUT PLOT AND PUBLISH DRAWINGS match when you print your drawing Turning off print style tables When you turn off print style tables objects print according to their own properties However all of the print style information is saved so you can easily turn on print styles again Actual print style table files are not deleted and for drawings that use named print style tables objects and layers retain their assigned print styles To turn off print style tables 1 If necessary click the desired Layout tab or click the Model tab 2 Choose File gt Plot 3 Under Print Style Table select None 4 Select Save Changes to Layout and then click Apply to Layout Standard toolbar Command line PLOT 13 2 4 Plot Files to Other Formats Plots files of various formats including DXF and Windows entity files you can output drawings in any image formats with unique plotter driver In such cases non system plotter driver will be configured as output file format Users are capable of controlling customized properties of each non system plotter driver in plotter configure editor You can also obtain specific help for each driver from the Help topic in plotter configuration editor Plot to Raster File Formats Several raster file formats including Windows BMP CALS TIFF PNG TGA PC
327. he size of views in drawing area and change the views as well Click on the Aerial view window to pan and zoom the drawing press ENTER directly or right click to finish the operation To Zoom a view in Aerial View window Enter DSVIEWER in command line and then press ENTER Double click on the view frame in Aerial View window until an arrows display in the view Drag to the right to zoom out the view while drag to the left to Zoom in Right click or press ENTER directly to end the manipulation Command line DSVIEWER To pan a view in Aerial View window Enter DSVIEWER in command line and then press ENTER Click on the Aerial View window a X mark appears in the wide outline frame Drag the view frame arbitrary by way of moving the mouse Right click or press ENTER to finish the pan manipulation Command line DSVIEWER Change the view displayed in Aerial View window Aerial View window provides three buttons on the toolbar for changing the scaling proportion of images inside the Aerial View window Click on Zoom In button to magnifies the drawing in the Aerial View window to double size of the current viewport centered on the current view box Click on Zoom Out button to decreases the drawing to half of its original size centered on the current view box Click on Global button to mark current view with a wide frame and display the entire drawing Zooming the views within the Aerial View will not affect the scaling factor of the im
328. hem If you lock the current layer you can still add new objects to it You can also change the linetype and color associated JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 66 COORDINATES AND COORDINATE SYSTEM with a locked layer Unlocking a layer restores full editing capabilities To lock or unlock layers 1 Choose Format gt Layer 2 Clicks icon under Lock tab in the layer list 3 Clicks OK button Properties toolbar z Command line LAYER Controlling layer printing Controlling layer printing is another way you can specify which objects print in your drawing By controlling layer printing you can turn off unnecessary information during printing For example if you are drawing a floor plan you can draw the layout of light fixtures on one layer and the location of plumbing lines on another By selectively turning layers on and off when you print you can print the electrical engineering drawings and the plumbing drawings from the same drawing file By changing layer printing you can put the same drawing to multiple uses When you turn off printing for a layer objects drawn on that layer are still visible but they do not print If you turn off a layer s visibility objects drawn on that layer do not display or print Controlling layer printing can be especially helpful if you want layer visibility on but do not want to print objects on that layer To turn layer pr
329. hen the command names has been entered or responseded to prompts Repeat and Cancel Commands If you want to repeat a command that you have just used press ENTER or SPACEBAR To cancel a command in progress press ESC To repeat the command you just used Do one of the following Press the spacebar Press Enter Click the right mouse button in the drawing Nesting a command lf you are working in the command bar you can use another command from within a command called nesting To use a command inside an active command type an apostrophe before you type the command such as circle line or pyramid You can nest commands indefinitely in ZWCAD Many menu and toolbar macros work this way by default for example select color reference grid Zoom and snap When you have finished with the nested commana the original command resumes For example you turn on the object snap while you are drawing a circle thus you can setup Object snap mode before continuing drawing Command circle 2Point 3Point Ttr tan tan radius Arc Multiple amp lt Center of circle amp gt osnap Setup object snap mode as Center in Draft Settings dialog and then close the dialog to go on performing CIRCLE command 2Point 3Point Ttr tan tan radius Arc Multiple amp lt Center of circle amp gt Enter System Variables on the Command Line System variables are available for controlling how certain commands work For example GRIDMODE is used to c
330. hen you specify a point or select objects BLIPMODE block A generic term for one or more objects that are combined to create a single object Commonly used for either block definition or block reference BLOCK block definition The name base point and set of objects that are combined and stored in the symbol table of a drawing block reference A compound object that is inserted in a drawing and displays the data stored in a block definition Also called instance INSERT B spline curve A blended piecewise polynomial curve passing near a given set of control points SPLINE BYBLOCK A special object property used to specify that the object inherits the color or linetype of any block containing it BYLAYER A special object property used to specify that the object inherits the color or linetype associated with its layer clipping planes The boundaries that define or clip the field of view DVIEW color map A table defining the intensity of red green and blue RGB for each displayed color command line A text area reserved for keyboard input prompts and messages construction plane A plane on which planar geometry is constructed The XY plane of the current UCS JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 16 represents the construction plane continued dimension A type of linear dimension that uses the second extension line origin of a selected dimension
331. hes you should check hatch settings and adjust scale factor or the dash length The hatch entity density limit is set in MaxHatch in registry with default value of 10000 It can be modified by setting MaxHatch system registry variable using setenv MaxHatch n in which n is a number between 100 and 10000000 Edit Hatch Boundaries Hatch boundaries is capable of copy move and stretch as well as other objects but for large amount of object combinations the geometric drawings for editing hatches may cause unpredictable results It s suggest to abort hatch if necessary and remove the hatched blocks to generate new ones Create Custom Hatch Patterns You can define angle space of current hatch by selecting User Define type from the Style option Type and pattern in Hatch dialog box so as to create customized pattern to hatch selected objects 12 1 2 Define Hatch Boundaries To create a hatch you should define hatch boundaries first by means of selecting objects to be hatched or picking a point inside the desired object A hatch boundary can be any combination of objects such as lines arcs circles and polylines that forms an enclosed area To raise the speed of hatching a small area of a complex drawing you can define a set of objects in the drawing HATCH does not analyze objects that are not included in the boundary set Island is a concept representative to the closed area inside the hatched object You can hatch the isl
332. hich one is in effect when you specify a point If several object snaps are eligible at a given location press the TAB key to cycle through the possibilities before you specify the point Object Snap Restrictions With the object snap on you can snap objects only visible on the screen including objects on locked layers layout viewport boundaries and polyline segments You cannot snap to objects that are not visible including objects that are not displayed objects on turned off or frozen layers or the blank portions of dashed lines The object snap in available only when you are prompted to specify a point There isn t any information about object snap displayed if you try to use an object snap at the Command prompt AutoSnap Tools The automatic snap tool is a visual aid tool for snapping that help you see and use object snaps more efficiently When any object snap is on the system displays a marker and a tooltip when you move your cursor on over a snap point AutoSnap turns on automatically when an object snap is on By default AutoSnap mark tooltip and magnet are on You can change the settings of AutoSnap on the Options dialog box AutoSnap consists of the following snap tools Marker The object snap location is displayed when the cursor moves over or near an object Marker shape is determined by the snap it is marking Tooltip Indicates which part of the object you are snapping to in a flag at the cursor location Magnet At
333. hile the second point defines the x axis and the third point defines the y axis Type o and press Enter to select an object that defines the cross sectional plane Specify an axis by typing Z and pressing Enter Solids toolbar Command line SECTION Slice You can use SLICE command to slice a solid with a plane and retain the specify part or the entire solid The sliced solids retain the layer and color s properties of the original ones To slice a solid you have to define a cutting plane then select which part to retain Methods to define a cutting plane Specifies three points to define a cutting plane Align the cutting plane with a circle ellipse arc 2D spline or 2D polyline object Specifies a point lied on the cutting plane and a point lied on the normal of the defined section Align the cutting plane with the plane of the current view Specifies a point to determine the location of the cutting plane on the XY YZ or ZX plane and aligns the cutting plane with the XY YZ or ZX plane of the current UCS To slice a solid JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 198 MODIFY OBJECTS 1 Choose Draw gt Solids gt Slice 2 Select the objects to slice 3 Do one of the following Specify three points to define the cross section plane The first point defines the origin while the second point defines the x axis and the third point defines the y axis Type o and p
334. hole torus 5 Specify the radius or diameter of the body of the torus 6 Specify the number of longitudinal sections that are perpendicular to the xy plane 7 Specify the number of latitudinal sections that are parallel to the xy plane Surfaces toolbar Gp Command line Al_ TORUS Wedges You can create three dimensional wedges consisting of five surface planes The base of the wedge is always parallel with the xy plane of the current UCS with the sloped face opposite the first corner The height is always parallel with the z axis You position the wedge by specifying either a corner or the center of the wedge You determine the size of the wedge by either specifying a second corner and the height defining the wedge based on a cube having a given length or specifying the length width and height 1 To create a wedge 1 Choose Draw gt Solids gt Wedge 2 Specify the first corner of the base 3 Specify the opposite corner of the base 4 Specify the height Solids toolbar b Command line WEDGE First corner of the base A the opposite corner of the base B and the height C To create a wedge as a three dimensional surface 1 Choose Draw gt Surfaces gt 3D Surface 2 On the command line type wedge 3 Specify the first corner of the base 4 Specify the opposite corner of the base 5 Specify the height JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 7 Surf
335. hould distinguish the external references and blocks An xref can be attached to various drawing simultaneously In the same way you can attach multiple xrefs to the same drawing using full path or relative path that are partly defined Even without saving path You should notice that xref must be object created in model space when inserting xrefs you can specify the insertion scale position and rotation angle When you attach an external reference its layers linetypes text styles and other elements are not added to the current drawing Rather these elements are also linked from the referenced file There are two ways you can attach an external reference An attachment is an inserted drawing that contains a link to the original file Attachments can themselves contain other nested reference files When you attach an external reference any nested references contained in the file also appear in the current drawing An overlay is also an inserted drawing that contains a link to the original file Overlays allow you to lay a drawing on top of another drawing similar to the way you work manually with transparencies When a drawing that contains overlaid external references is itself attached or overlaid as an external reference in another drawing the overlays do not appear as part of the external reference Use overlaying when you want to see reference geometry in a drawing but you do not need to include that geometry in drawings that will be u
336. hown as follows T forced internal line To format dimensions 1 Choose Dimension gt Dimension Style 2 In the Dimension Style Manager select the style you wish to change and choose Modify 3 Click Fit tab 4 Under Fit options and Text Placement select an option 5 Click OK 6 Choose Close to exit JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 10 Dimension toolbar nha Command line DIMSTYLE NOTE You can also specify how dimension text and arrows are arranged using the DIMATFIT system variable You can specify how dimension text is moved using the DIMTMOVE system variable Fit Diameter Dimension Text You can create various diameter dimensions based on text placement fit options and the selection of Always draw dim lines between ext lines option on the Fit tab Shown as follows Fld default horzontal user defined horizontal text and arrows inside placementtext placementdimension wih inside horizontal outside circle line and arrows option selected center mark no center mark no forced interior line forced interior line Control the Location of Dimension Text ZWCAD provides three justification settings horizontal aligned with dimension line and ISO standard You can also specify other location for the text Most of settings are interdependent mg 7j aM ae text centered above text centered text lett justitied the horizontal option horizontal
337. ht mouse button while simultaneously pressing and holding Ctrl to pan in real time To pan using a mouse with a wheel Press and hold the wheel and then move the mouse in the direction you want to pan The MBUTTONPAN system variable controls this feature Use Aerial View Window to Pan and Zoom Drawings With the Aerial view function it s allowed to display the entire drawing using a window Opened in current drawing the current drawing is displayed as a wide frame mark you can quickly change the views in current viewport via this window Aerial view window is quite useful when displaying a large drawing within a small window and perform pan and zoom operations quickly In the process of drawing you can directly pan and zoom the view in the aerial view window if the window is open without affecting you while doing other operations You can also specify new views for current drawing while panning and zooming within aerial view window Meanwhile you don t have to input relevant command or choose from menu options in ZWCAD platform JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 36 CONTROL THE DRAWING VIEW 4 4 Use Aerial View window to pan and zoom drawings A wide rectangular frame will be displayed in Aerial View window which is used for displaying view boundaries of current viewport also called view frame Through panning and zooming the view frame you can increase or decrease t
338. ialog box click the options for creating a new file 3 Under Object Type choose ZWCAD Drawing and then click OK 4 Create the ZWCAD drawing 5 Choose File gt Exit in ZWCAD 6 To edit the ZWCAD drawing from within the document double click the drawing TIP You can also embed an existing ZWCAD drawing from within another document To embed selected ZWCAD entities 1 In ZWCAD select the entities you want to embed 2 Choose Edit gt Copy or press Ctrl C 3 Open the document in which you want to embed the entities 4 Choose Edit gt Paste or the equivalent command To embed an entire ZWCAD drawing JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 14 1 Open the document in which you want to embed the drawing 2 Choose Insert gt OLE Object 3 Click Create From File 4 Click Browse and then choose the file you want to embed 5 Click Insert and then click OK Linking drawings When you link an ZWCAD drawing to another document the other document contains only a reference to the ZWCAD drawing file rather than the actual drawing You link data ina saved ZWCAD file so that the other program can find the data and display it Linking works well when you want to include the same ZWCAD data in more than one document When you update the data you need update it in only one location The versions that are linked to other documents reflect the changes automatically Linking
339. ibutes You can use the Block Attribute Manager to modify attributes in block definitions For example you can modify the following items Attributes of blocks can be displayed after modification Text properties that define how attribute text is displayed in the drawing Properties that define the layer that the attribute is on and the attribute line s color weight JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 11 and type By default attribute changes you make are applied to all existing block references in the current drawing If constant attributes or nested attribute blocks are affected by your changes use REGEN to update the display of those blocks in the drawing area Redefine Block Attributes When you modify the block definitions system prompts to select objects that are included in block definition you can attach the attributes to the block by adding the desired attribute to selection set Once the attributes of block definition have been modified the inserted block reference may be affected by the following descriptions Constant attributes with fixed value are lost and replaced by any new constant attributes Variable attributes remain unchanged even if no attributes are included in the new block definition New attributes do not appear in the existing block references To edit an attribute attached to a block 1 On the command line type daatte 2 Select the block
340. ich is assigned in the Color input box on the Properties tab With the Color control or the Select Color dialog box you can also set the current color Objects are created with the color assigned to the current layer If the current color is set to BYLAYER If the current color is not expected to be the color assigned to the current layer you can specify another color instead lf the current color is set to BYBLOCK objects are created using color 7 white or black until these objects are grouped into a block Once the block is inserted into a drawing it uses current color settings instead 5 9 1 Using index colors There are 255 standard index colors and two additional color properties that are often referred to as colors BYLAYER and BYBLOCKk You can use seven of the 255 standard index colors by name red yellow green cyan blue magenta and white Numbers eight and nine are not named Each index color has a unique number from 1 to 255 The two additional color properties are BYLAYER and BYBLOCK These color properties cause an entity to adopt the color either of the layer or of the block in which it is a member BYLAYER is color number 256 and BYBLOCK is color number 0 In all commands for which you would use a color you can indicate BYLAYER and BYBLOCK as well as by numbers 256 and 0 respectively To select an index color 1 Click Select Color in the desired dialog box such as Layers Properties or Multiline Text The Color dial
341. idpoint and center of an arc Examples of grip locations After you select one or more objects you can choose an object modification command such as Copy or Move from the Modify menu or toolbar You can also click the right mouse button to display a shortcut menu containing the object modification commands appropriate for the selected objects and then choose the command from the menu Select a Command First After typing a command the cursor becomes a pickbox and prompts you to select objects There are several methods for selecting objects select objects using mouse or other pointing device Click on the drawing area and drags the cursor to define a square selection area Entering interrogation displays all selection methods from which you can specify the desired one Use multiple methods together For example to select most of objects on the drawing you can select all objects and then remove the undesired ones When you choose an entity modification tool or command the program prompts you to select entities Type and press ENTER you can choose a selection method You can select individual entities or use other techniques such as selection windows to select multiple entities When you select objects you add them to the selection set After you select at least one object you can remove objects from the selection set To finish adding objects to the selection set press Enter Most object modification commands then act on the
342. idth with gradient size To apply a uniform width to an entire polyline 1 Choose Modify gt Object gt Polyline 2 Select the polyline 3 On the command line type width 4 Specify the new polyline width 5 On the command line type another option or press Enter to complete the command Modifyll toolbar y Command line PEDIT To apply tapering width to a polyline 1 Choose Modify gt Object gt Polyline 2 Select the polyline 3 On the command line type taper 4 Specify the starting width 5 Specify the ending width 6 On the command line type another option or press Enter to complete the command Modifyll toolbar Command line PEDIT Edit Vertices You can use the Edit Vertices option to modify individual polyline vertices When you select this option the program switches into a special vertex editing mode and JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 184 MODIFY OBJECTS places an x on the first vertex The x indicates the vertex you are editing The Next and Previous options move the x to the next or previous vertex You can edit only one vertex at a time When editing vertices you can modify the polyline in the following ways Convert a polyline segment into a curve by specifying a new tangent angle Break a polyline into two separate polylines Insert a new vertex after the current vertex Move the current vertex Straighten the polyline se
343. ify B Base point option to relocate the base grip for scaling Specify C Copy option to create a copy of the entity being scaled Specify U Undo option to abort last scaling Specify X eXit option to exit scale manipulation Specify R Reference option to assign reference scale factor For example input scale factor as 5 to scale the entity to five times that of its original size Then dynamic input box displays on the screen in which you are prompt to enter new length if input 3 the entity will be scaled at the factor 3 5 Specify scale factor for grips directly Move the pointing device to specify target grips the entity will be scaled based on the selected grips with the factor you specified or create a copy of the entity after scaling JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 To scale using grips select the object A Result click a grip B and scale the object by dragging the grip to its new location C Grip Mirror Mode With grip mirror mode you can create mirrored copies of selected entities along temporary mirror line If you press ENTER or SPACE key after selecting grips all the grip modes are displayed choose Mirror and then command line prompts as follows Specify second point or Base point Copy Undo exit Create Mirrored Copies Using Grips Select entities to mirror Click on grips to highlight th
344. iginal objects type Y Modify toolbar ls Command line MIRROR To mirror an object select it A and then specify the Result first point B and second point C of the mirror line Mirror in 3D You can create a mirror image of selected objects in three dimensional space You mirror the objects about a mirror plane that you define by either specifying three points selecting an existing two dimensional planar object aligning the plane parallel with the xy yz or xz plane of the current UCS or aligning the plane with the current view You can delete or retain the original objects To mirror an object about a three dimensional plane 1 Choose Modify gt 3D Operation gt Mirror 3D 2 Select the objects and then press Enter 3 In the command line prompt choose 3 Points or press Enter to select the default 4 Specify the first point on the mirror plane 5 Specify the second and third points on the plane JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 6 In the command line prompt choose one of the following Yes Delete Objects to delete the original objects No Keep Objects to retain the original objects Command line MIRROR3D Select the object to mirror A and then specify The resulting mirrored object the first point B second point C and third point D defining the mirror plane 8 2 4 Offset an Object You can use the offset feature to copy
345. ign along the 90 and 150 degree axes Top The top isometric plane defined by a pair of 30 and 150 degrees axes The snap and grips align along the 30 and 150 degrees axes Right The right isometric plane defined by a pair of 90 and 30 degrees axes The snap and grips align along the 90 and 30 degrees axes g0 degrees 30 degrees 150 degrees In addition to using ISOPLANE command to switch isometric planes you can also use shortcut key F5 or CTRL E specifying one of the three isometric planes results in Ortho and crosshairs to be aligned along the corresponding isometric axes For example when Ortho is on the points you specified align along the simulated plane you are working on Therefore you can draw the top plane first and switch to the left plane to draw another side and then switch to the right plane to complete the drawing top plane left plane right plane Draw Isometric Circles You can create an isometric circle on the current isometric plane using Ellipse Isocircle The Isocircle option is available only when the Isometric Snap is on 4 7 4 Define a 3D View with Coordinate Values or Angles You can define a viewing direction by typing the coordinate values of a point or two rotation angles angle from the XY plane and angle from the X axis The specified point indicates your position in 3D space when you view the model while looking toward the origin 0 0 0 The viewpoint coordinate values are relative to the
346. ility to a certain extent Select files to pack Starts Create Transmittal dialog box which provides two tabs for viewing and selecting files to be packed Files Tree Displays drawing files in a tree structure together with their associative files xrefs fonts raster images You can expand or collapse these structure to display or hide the included dependent files By default drawing files and dependent files are included in the transmittal package automatically Unless you deselect it by clicking at the check mark in front of each file Files Table Displays drawing files in forms of a list together with their associative files xrefs fonts raster images In which the detail information of each file such as file name saving path type version size and date are listed Transmittal package includes all these files automatically You can deselect it by clicking at the check mark in front of each file in order to control the included contents of each transmittal package JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 346 SHARE DATA BETWEEN DRAWINGS AND APPLICATIONS Once you have performed eTransmit function for a drawing file the common file types you can automatically add to the transmittal package are dwg root drawing file and all of its attached xrefs Various image file types raster image files that attach to root drawing or xref externally fmp font mapping files User
347. in selected grip color and then right click to select from manipulations menu lf you press ENTER or SPACE key after selecting grips all the grip modes display from which you can choose to perform one of the grip editing manipulation Grip Stretch Mode Stretch mode is default mode for grip editing Once you have selected entities click the grips on entities to display command line prompt as follows Specify stretch point or Base point Copy Undo exit Under the prompt you can specify new position on the drawing area where the grip is expected to be stretched You should notice that when stretching grips on the selected grips such as single text point insertion point of block reference midpoint of line center of circle and grips on point object the whole entity will be moved without changing the size and shape of grips The type of entities determines whether the grips are capable of being stretched For example to stretch a corner of a rectangle select the corner grips to stretch a line select the endpoint grips Not all of the objects are enabled grip stretching Stretch Entities using Grip Stretch 1 Select entities to stretch 2 Click on grips of the entity to highlight the selected grip and activate the grip mode as Stretch 3 Dynamic input box displayed on screen showing the following manipulations Specify B Base point option to locate the grip Specify C Copy option to create a copy of the entity being stretched
348. ines extend beyond the dimension line Start offset is the distance between the extension line origin and the start of the extension line also called extension origin offset Shown as follows extension origin offset extension line obligue extension line The first extension line lies on the side where you specified the first extension line origin If you create a dimension for a line you do not specify the extension line origin Because the endpoint of the line closet to the specified point becomes the origin of the first extension line Generally the extension lines are perpendicular to the dimension line However if there is not space you can make them oblique shown as the figure above You can control settings affecting dimension lines extension lines and center marks Any changes you make affect the current dimension style The image tile on the right side of the Dimension Settings dialog box shows the appearance of the dimensions based on the current dimension style settings A Extend beyond dim lines B Baseline spacing C Offset from origin To set the color for dimension lines 1 Choose Dimensions gt Dimension Style 2 In the Dimension Style Manager select the style you wish to change and choose Modify 3 Click the Lines and Arrows tab 4 Make your selections under the Dimension Lines 5 Click OK 6 Choose Close to exit JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www
349. ines that were drawn on the layer 0 its color is yellow too You can also specify a new value to overwrite the layer s value For example yellow is assigned to the layer O and the value of lines is set to blue the color of lines is blue You can use the following methods to display or modify the object properties View or modify properties in the Properties Panel View or modify layer controls on the Layer Properties Manager dialog box might change Color Linetype Lineweight at the Properties toolbar as well Use command LIST to view the information on the text window Use command ID to display the coordinate of the specified point Properties panel The Properties panel shows all properties of the specified object You can change them in this panel When selecting multiple objects the Properties panel shows the command properties of the selected objects If none of the object is selected the Properties panel displays the general properties of the current layer View properties as well as the UCS information By default double click an object opens Properties panel if the Properties panel is hidden This operation is not available when the objects are block hatch pattern text multiline external reference or gradient fill Change the Properties of Objects You can change the layer thickness linetype color and linetype scale of one or more entities Depending on the type of entity or entities you select you can also change other
350. ing You can also save the symbol as a separate drawing for use in other drawings JL Systems Group 6 Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk INTRODUCTION AND INSTALLATION You can draw a symbol one time save it as a block and then insert multiple copies of that symbol anywhere in your drawing In addition you can reuse entire drawings and insert individual drawings into other drawings You can also use an external reference which acts as a pointer to another drawing rather than a copy of the entire drawing Using an external reference has an added advantage when you update the externally referenced drawing each drawing that references it can be automatically updated Making changes To make changes to a paper drawing you erase and then redraw With ZWCAD you use commands to modify entities in the drawing You can move rotate stretch or change the scale of entities When you want to remove an entity you can delete it with a single click of the mouse If you make a mistake while creating or modifying your drawing you can easily reverse your actions OD Q o O JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 1 You can easily change an entity using commands such as move rotate stretch and scale instead of redrawing the entity 1 1 3 Working with other data and programs Traditional paper drawings serve only
351. ing you don t need to set the scale until you print it For example when you draw a mechanical part 40 inches in length with ZWCAD you actually draw it as 40 inches rather than applying a scale factor as you draw When you print your drawing you can assign the scale at which the drawing is to print Scale however does affect the way a few elements such as text arrows or linetypes print or plot in your drawing For these you can make adjustments when you first set up your drawing so that they print or plot at the correct size For example when you draw text you need to determine the text size so that when you print it later at a particular scale the text height is correct After you determine the eventual scale of your finished drawing you can calculate the scale factor for the drawing as a ratio of one drawing unit to the actual scale unit represented by each drawing unit For example if you plan to print your drawing at 1 8 1 0 your scale factor ratio is 1 96 1 8 12 is the same as 1 96 If you want your printed scale to be 1 inch 100 feet your scale factor ratio is 1 1200 The following table shows some standard architectural and engineering scale ratios and equivalent text heights required to create text that measures 1 8 inch high when you print the drawing at the specified scale Standard scale ratios and equivalent text heights Scale Scale factor Text height 1 16 1 0 192 24 1 8 1 0 96
352. ing may also contain an unlimited number of additional linetypes You can load more linetypes into the program from a linetype library file 5 7 1 Load and use Linetypes A linetype is a repeating pattern of dashes dots and blank spaces displayed in a line or a curve Loads linetype from a drawing to be reused when needed Work with Linetypes You can assign linetypes to objects by layer or by specifying the linetype explicitly Besides choosing linetype you can specify its scale to control the size of dashes and spaces and create your own custom linetypes Note You should not confuse these linetypes with the hardware linetypes provided by some plotters Both linetypes of dashes produce the similar effects However if you use both linetypes at the same time the results can be unpredictable Load Linetypes ZWCAD includes the linetype definition files zwcad lin and zwcadiso lin Zwcad lin is used in the imperial system and zwcadiso ini is used in the metric system If you select zZwcadiso ini you can use ISO pen width option when you plot If you want to know what linetypes are already available you can display a list of linetypes that are loaded in the drawing or stored in an LIN linetype definition file Both linetype definition files contain several complex linetypes You can remove unreferenced linetype information with PURGE or by deleting the linetype from the Linetype Manager BYBLOCK BYLAYER and CONTINUOUS linetypes
353. ing of the edges between polygon faces snap angle The angle that the snap grid is rotated snap grid The invisible grid that locks the pointer into alignment with the grid points according to the Spacing set by Snap Snap grid does not necessarily correspond to the visible grid which is controlled separately by GRID SNAP Snap mode A mode for locking a pointing device into alignment with an invisible rectangular grid When Snap mode is on the screen crosshairs and all input coordinates are snapped to JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 16 the nearest point on the grid The snap resolution defines the spacing of this grid SNAP snap resolution The spacing between points of the snap grid specular reflection The light in a narrow cone where the angle of the incoming beam equals the angle of the reflected beam STB file For plot style table file Contains plot styles and their characteristics system variable A name that ZWCAD recognizes as a mode size or limit Read only system variables such as DWGNAME cannot be modified directly by the user template drawing A drawing file with preestablished settings for new drawings such as zwcad dwt and zwcadiso dwt however any drawing can be used as a template temporary files Data files created during an ZWCAD session ZWCAD deletes the files by the time you end the session If the session ends abnormally s
354. ing the following manipulations Specify B Base point option to locate the grip Specify C Copy option to create a copy of the entity being moved Specify U Undo option to abort last moving Specify X eXit option to exit move manipulation Specify target location for grips directly Move the pointing device to specify target location the selected grip on objects will be moved towards the orientation and displacement along the connecting line of the selected grip and the target point or create a copy of the entity after moving Grip Rotate Mode With grip rotate mode you can rotate selected entities around the base point or rotate by the angle specified for rotating either lf you press ENTER or SPACE key after selecting grips on entities choose Rotate from the grip editing mode and then command line prompts as follows Specify rotation angle or Base point Copy Undo Reference exit Rotate Entities Using Grips Select entities to rotate JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 190 MODIFY OBJECTS Click on grip of the entity to highlight the selected grip and activate the grip mode as Stretch Press ENTER to iterate grip mode until Rotate appears in command line Dynamic input box displayed on screen showing the following manipulations Specify B Base point option to select base point for rotating Specify C Copy option to cre
355. inserted into the drawing The properties of objects in the block can t be changed until redefined For this choice it is recommended that you set the color linetype and lineweight properties individually for each object in the block definition which are different from BYBLOCK or BYLAYER color linetype and lineweight settings when creating these objects Objects in the block inherit color linetype and lineweight properties that assigned to the current layer only For this choice before you create objects to be included in the block definition set the current layer to 0 and set the current color linetype and lineweight to BYLAYER Objects inherit color linetype and lineweight properties that have been definitely set that is the properties you have set to override the color linetype or lineweight assigned to the current layer If undefinately specify layer properties for the objects then use properties of the current layer For this choice before you create objects to be included in the block definition set the current color or linetype to BYBLOCK 11 1 5 Modify a Block Definition You can redefine all instances of a block within the current drawing To redefine a block that was created in the current drawing you create a new block using the same name You can update all the blocks in the current drawing by redefining the block If the block was inserted from a separate drawing file that was subsequently updated reinsert that b
356. int B using spherical coordinates you specify its length C in this case 10 2500 units the angle in the xy plane D in this case 45 degrees and the angle from the xy plane E in this case 35 degrees Entering cylindrical coordinates When working in three dimensional space you can also use cylindrical coordinates to specify a three dimensional point You specify a point by entering its distance from either the origin absolute distance or the last point relative distance its angle in the xy plane and its zcoordinate value In cylindrical format you separate the distance and angle with the open angle bracket lt and separate the angle and z value with a comma You can enter the coordinate values using the following format X lt angle from X axis Z For example to draw a line from the last point to a point 7 4750 units away at an angle of 27 degrees from the x axis in the xy plane and 3 units up in the z direction start the Line command and then respond to the prompts as follows Start of line select point A Angle Length lt End point gt 7 4750 lt 27 3 When you draw a line from a start point A to an endpoint B using cylindrical coordinates you specify its length C in this case 7 4750 the angle in the xy plane D in this case 27 degrees and the distance in the z direction E in this case 3 units 6 1 3 Use Coordinate Filters Point filters provide a method of locating a point in a drawing relative to
357. inting on or off 1 Choose Format gt Layer 2 Clicks icon under Plot tab in the layer list 3 Clicks OK button Properties toolbar z Command line LAYER Setting the layer color Each layer in a drawing is assigned a color ZWCAD uses the BYLAYER color as the default color setting for object creation so that new objects are drawn in the color of the layer on which they are inserted To change the layer color 1 Choose Format gt Layer 2 Clicks icon under Color tab in the layer list to open Select Color dialog box from which you can specify the desired color In the Select Color dialog box select a color on one of the following tabs Index Color Click BYBLOCK BYLAYER or one of the 255 index colors You can also type the color number in the Index box True Color Click a basic color click a color in the color palette enter the Hue Saturation and Luminance HSL values or enter the Red Green Blue RGB JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 5 values There are more than 16 million true colors from which you can choose Color Books Select a color book from the list then click a color You can select Show Only Color Book Colors Used in Drawing to limit the selection to only those color book colors that are used in the current drawing 3 Clicks OK button Properties toolbar Command line LAYER NOTE You can also assign
358. ion line indicates the direction and extent of a dimension For linear dimensions it displays as a line for angular dimensions it displays as an arc segment Arrowhead usually displayed at both end of the dimension line You can specify various sizes and shapes for arrowheads or tick marks Extension line extends from the object to the dimension line in order to define dimension ranges Center mark a small crossing tag that marks the center of a circle or arc Centerline a crossing dashed line that marks the center of a circle or arc 10 2 Use Dimension Styles 10 2 1 Overview of Dimension Styles Dimensions that you insert are created using the current dimension style You can create save restore and delete named dimension styles DIMSTYLE command is available when you want to display information about the current dimension style and all of the named dimension styles Dimension styles provide a way for you to change various settings that control the appearance of dimensions You can then save those settings for reuse If there isn t any JL Systems Group 228 Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk DIMENSION AND TOLERANCES predefined dimension style before you start drawing dimensions the program uses the Standard dimension style which stores the default dimension variable settings You can get Modify Dimension Style dialog started through clicking Modify button on Dimension
359. ions Linear dimensions annotate linear distances or lengths and can be oriented horizontally vertically or aligned parallel to an existing entity or to the selected extension origin points After you create a linear dimension you can add a baseline dimension or a continued dimension A linear baseline dimension inserts an additional dimension from a common first extension line origin of a previous linear dimension A linear continued dimension continues a linear dimension from the second extension line of a previous linear dimension TIP To select precise ordinate points use entity snaps Create Horizontal and Vertical Dimensions As you create linear dimensions the system automatically applies a horizontal or vertical dimension depending on the specified extension line origins or the location where you select an object However you can create a dimension by specifying it be horizontal or vertical In the following illustration by default a horizontal dimension is created unless you specify a vertical one T horizontal dimension wertical dimension created by default specified To create a horizontal or vertical dimension 1 Choose Dimensions gt Linear 2 Press Enter and then select the entity to dimension Or you can insert the dimension by specifying the first and second extension line origins 3 Specify the dimension line location Dimension toolbar Command line DIMLINEAR Create Aligned Dimensions In the aligned dimen
360. ition to specifying base point or displacement point on the drawing you can also type coordinate value on the command line The Vector option is also used to define a new position To move entities 1 Choose Modify gt Move 2 Select the objects and then press Enter 3 Specify the base point 4 Specify the displacement point Modify toolbar Command line MOVE To move an object select it A and then specify the Result base point B and the displacement point C You can also move objects using grips To move an object through dragging its grips select the object to get its grips highlighted and then click the desired grip and drag it toa new position The grip you select depends on the type of object you re moving For example to move a line object select the midpoint grip To move a curved object such as an arc circle or ellipse select the center point grip Not all objects can be moved using grips To move an object using grips 1 Select the object 2 Click a grip to select it 3 Drag the object to where you want to relocate it 4 Click to release When all endpoints of selected objects are within a selection window the STRETCH command is equivalent with the MOVE command The Ortho or Polar Tracking can help you move objects along to the exact direction JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 IE IO E Lp objects selected with obj
361. jects The following example displays the Morrrial Outer You can also remove any islands from the hatch area JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 12 s intenal point boundaries detected islands to remove re sult Define Hatch Boundaries in Large Drawings Generally boundaries are defined by analyzing all the closed objects It s time consuming to define boundaries through analyzing all the visible or partly visible objects when encounter complex drawings In such cases you can save time hatching a small area ina complex drawing by defining a set of objects in the drawing to be used in determining the hatch boundary Boundaries are also available for applying different hatch patterns to islands in different area of the drawing To avoid selecting the undesired hatch area its required to enlarge the drawing Once selected Existing set in Boundary set option on Other options tab the objects used for defining boundaries will be highlighted area for hatching Create Unbounded Hatches You can define a hatch boundary composed by multiple points manipulated from the draW_boundary option of HATCH or BHATCH command System inquires for whether to retain boundaries when finish hatching if choose not to retain boundaries then create hatch pattern without boundaries For example to define a boundary through specifying points only a small part of the large ar
362. jects must be entirely contained in the window selection area when you use Window Selection However if the noncontinuous dash linetype is only partially visible in the viewport and all of the visible vectors of the linetype are inside of the selection window the entire object is selected To create a Window 1 Click to select a point in the drawing 2 Click to the right of the first point to select a second point in the drawing JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 148 MODIFY OBJECTS Window by selecting the first A and Resulting selection second B points To create a Crossing Window 1 Click to select a point in the drawing 2 Click to the left of the first point to select a second point in the drawing Crossing Window by selecting the first A and Resulting selection second B points In addition to a rectangular window you can define a selection window using other shapes such as a polygon circle or fence a multisegmented line that selects objects it crosses Specify an Irregularly Shaped Selection Area You can select entities with an irregularly shaped area defined by the specified points Under the prompt of SELECT command you can select entities entirely enclosed by the selection area with the WPolygon or the entities enclosed or crossed by the selection area with the CPolygon Window poh gor result To select objects using Window Polygon
363. jl systems dk 246 DIMENSION AND TOLERANCES To dimension the angle subtended Result by an arc Select the arc A and then specify the dimension arc location B 10 3 3 Create Radial Dimensions You can create radial dimensions for circles or arcs to measure their radial The radial dimension is a radial dimension line with an arrowhead that points to a circle or arc To display centerlines or a center mark set the system variable DIMCEN to nonzero lf the Text Placement in the dimension style is set to Over the Dimension Line with a leader then the dimension is applied along with a leader line Both center marks and lines apply only to radius and diameter dimensions They are created only when you place the dimension outside the circle or arc The size of the centerline is the distance of the centerline segment that extends outside the circle or arc shown as the following illustration centerline size cernterlines To create a radial dimension 1 Choose Dimensions gt Radius 2 Select the arc or circle 3 Specify the dimension line location Dimension toolbar Command line DIMRADIUS Select the circle A and then specify the Results JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 10 dimension line location B Jogged Dimension Jogged dimension is namely jogged radius dimension which is also called scaled radius dimension User can specify c
364. k Select to specify the drawing limits by selecting points in the drawing Command line LIMITS 5 3 Grid and Grid Snap The grid is a rectangular pattern comprised of dots that extends over the area you specify as the grid limits Displaying grids and using grids snap improve the performance of regenerating Using the grid is like placing a sheet of coordinate paper under a drawing The grid is not plotted If you scale drawing you may need to adjust grid spacing to be more appropriate for the new magnification When you turn Snap mode on the cursor adheres or snaps to the invisible grids Therefore you can specify precise points with the arrow keys or mouse or other pointing device Grid and snap settings are effective tools to use in your drawing to ensure accuracy Although many users find it convenient to match grid points to snap settings they are independent of each other and should not be confused Grid points are for visual reference only they do not affect your drawing and they do not print Snap points are by themselves not visible however when set they constrain the creation of new entities In addition the cursor can be restricted to move orthogonally only or guides can display on the screen automatically at specified polar angle increments JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 5 Change Grid and Snap Spacing You can turn Grid and Snap on and off an
365. kable window in which you type ZWCAD commands and view prompts and other program messages To display the command bar choose View gt Display gt Command Bar You can move the command bar by dragging it When the command bar is floating you can drag the top or bottom of the window to change the number of lines of text it displays You can dock the command bar at the top or bottom of the drawing 2 3 1 Enter Commands or System variables JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 2 Type a command or system variable by using the keyboard System variables are such parameters that are available for controlling how certain commands work Enter Commands on the Command Line Type the full command name on the command line and press ENTER or SPACEBAR or right click your pointing device to start the command Some commands also have abbreviated names Abbreviated command names are called command aliases To define your own command aliases you can customize from Aliases tab on the Customize dialog through performing CUSTOMIZE command Specify Command Options Once you have entered commands on the command line ZWCAD displays either a set of options or a dialog box To choose a different option enter the one of the options in the brackets either uppercase or lowercase letters is OK Execute Commands To execute commands press SPACEBAR or ENTER or right click your pointing device w
366. king adds only a reference to a file the data does not significantly increase the file size of the ZWCAD drawing However links require some maintenance If you move any of the linked files you need to update the links In addition if you want to transport linked data you must include all linked files You can update a linked object automatically every time you open the drawing or you can do so only when you specify Anytime a link is updated changes made to the object in its Original file also appear in the ZWCAD drawing and the changes also appear in the original file if they were made through ZWCAD Insert an OLE object together with links to update its displaying in drawings through JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 14 changing source objects For example you may be required to insert a time table into an automatic update drawing When inserting OLE objects you can display the object as icon thus you can activate applications which are supportive to this object by double clicking this icon To create a linked object from within ZWCAD 1 Choose Insert gt OLE object 2 In the Insert Object dialog box click Create From File 3 Specify the file by doing one of the following Type a path and file name in the File box Click Browse to select the file using a file dialog box 4 Select the Link check box 5 Select Display As Icon if you want that progra
367. l and index color 8 bit per pixel true color 24 or 32 bit per pixel Tiled TIFF images can be saved by image scanners But you must limit the pixel within the range 64 x 64 to 512 x 512 when tiling images You can get programs that support other tiled file formats from third party program developer Suppress Highlighting When Selecting Images JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 302 HATCHES AND REALISTIC IMAGES Generally the image will be highlighted once selected Set the Highlight raster image frame only option in Display tab on Options dialog box to turn on or off the highlight mode for the specified raster image Besides system variable IMAGEHLT is also available for controlling the highlight mode of the image frame Set the IMAGEHLT to 0 only highlight the frame of the raster image You should turn off highlight mode for the whole drawing so as to improve the capabilities of your computer Change the Temporary Swap File Location of Raster Images Temporary swap file is useful when you want to reduce the memory space that image file occupies Windows Temp folder is the default saving path provided by system you can also specify new Temp file search path in Files tab on Options dialog box JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk Plot and Publish os Drawings 13 1 Create Multipl
368. l space displayed on paper space by creating multiple viewports And you can create dimensions as well as other geometric objects in layouts Each viewport are capable of displaying objects in model space in specified proportion System provides two layouts by default called layout 1 and layout 2 You can create as many layouts as you want with various page setup and size for each layout If you are working with a template file default layout configuration may be different When you create a drawing you do most of your work on the Model tab Each drawing that you create can contain numerous layouts that simulate the paper on which you will print a copy of the drawing Each of these layouts is created on a Layout tab You can prepare a separate layout for each way you want to print your drawing The layout allows you to organize different views to control which portion of your drawing prints and at what scale JL Systems Group di Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk LAYOUT PLOT AND PUBLISH DRAWINGS Use these general steps to prepare your drawing for printing multiple layouts 1 On the Model tab create your drawing 2 Create a new layout You can use an existing Layout1 or Layout2 tab or you can create a new Layout tab 3 Create at least one layout viewport on the Layout tab Use each viewport to help control which portion of the drawing prints and at what scale 4 Specify additional settin
369. l space that starts at a point and extends to infinity Because rays extend to infinity they are not calculated as part of the drawing extents The default method for drawing a ray is to select the start point of the ray and then specify its direction You can draw a ray in any of the following ways Horizontal draws the ray parallel to the x axis of the current user coordinate system UCS Vertical draws the ray parallel to the y axis of the current UCS Angle draws the ray parallel to a specified angle Bisect draws the ray perpendicular to an existing object Parallel draws the ray parallel to an existing object To draw a ray 1 Choose Draw gt Ray 2 Specify the start point 3 Specify the direction 4 To complete the command press Enter Command line RAY Start point A and direction B 7 1 3 Construction Lines An construction line is a line through a given point oriented at a specified angle in threedimensional space and extending to infinity in both directions Because construction lines extend to infinity they are not calculated as part of the drawing extents The default method for drawing an construction line is to select a point along the line and then specify the direction of the line You can draw an construction line in any of the following ways Horizontal draws the construction line parallel to the x axis of the current UCS Vertical draws the construction line parallel to the y axis of the current UCS
370. l systems dk 178 MODIFY OBJECTS J two lines before twolinesfilleted two lines filleted fillet with radius with zero radius Trim and Extend Filleted Objects While performing fillet you can select Trim option to decide whether the selected edges are extended to the endpoints of fillet arcs By default all objects except of circles ellipses closed polylines and splines are trimmed or extended when performing filleting When system variable TRIMMODE is set to 1 FILLET trims the intersecting lines to the endpoint of the fillet arc If the lines does not get intersecting system extends or trims them to get intersecting two lines filleted with two lines filleted with Trim ortion set No Trim option set Specify the Location of the Fillet When the objects to fillet are a line and an arc or acircle there are several potential fillets and system creates the fillet with the endpoint of arc at the nearest the selected point The location of fillets depends on the place of the objects you specify As shown in the following picture Select objects A and B Results after filleting Fillet Line and Polyline Combinations lf the objects to fillet are a line and a polyline the line or its extension must be intersecting with one of the polyline segments With Trim option on the filleted objects join with the JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 filleted arc to
371. lane After you specify the first two corners the plane is displayed as you specify the remaining corners The program prompts you for the third point and then the fourth point JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 294 HATCHES AND REALISTIC IMAGES To draw a quadrilateral plane 1 Choose Draw gt Surfaces gt 2D Solid 2 Specify the first point 3 Specify the second point 4 Specify the third point 5 Specify the fourth point 6 To complete the command press Enter Draw toolbar F Command line SOLID After you select the first two points A and B the sequence in which you select the third C and fourth D points determines the shape of the resulting quadrilateral plane The command line provides additional options for drawing planes For example you can draw rectangular square or triangular planes To draw a rectangular plane 1 Choose Draw gt Surfaces gt 2D Solid 2 On the command line type r 3 Specify the first point 4 Specify the opposite corner 5 Specify the rotation angle 6 To complete the command specify the opposite corner to draw another rectangle or press Enter F Draw toolbar Command line SOLID Opposite corners A and B and rotation angle C Resulting plane 12 2 Work with Raster Images 12 2 1 Attach Scale and Detach Raster Images Raster images consist of a rectangular grid of small squares or dots known a
372. lar Spacing enter the polar distance 5 Choose the Polar Tracking tab and select Polar Tracking On 6 Select the angle from the Increment Angle list You can specify your own angles by choosing Additional Angles and then New 7 Choose OK Object Snap Tracking You must set an object snap and turn the object snap model on before you can track from an existing object s snap point Object snap tracking can track along alignment paths that are based on object snap points and display tooltips at the acquired points After you acquire a point horizontal vertical JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 5 and polar alignment paths relative to the point are displayed when the cursor moves over their drawing path For example you can specify a point along a path that is based on an object endpoint or midpoint or an intersection between objects In the following picture the Endpoint object snap is on You create a line by clicking its start point 1 move the cursor over another line s endpoint 2 to acquire it and then move the cursor along the horizontal alignment path to locate the endpoint you want for the line you are drawing alignment path pe f 3 AN Z start point r acquired point endpoint By default the object snap tracking is set to Orthogonal Alignment paths and tooltips are displayed at 0 90 180 and 270 degrees from acquired object points Howev
373. layer it acquired its linetype from the new layer If the linetype of an object is set to BYLAYER when you change the linetype assigned to a layer the objects on that layer which are assigned the BYLAYER linetype are updated automatically Specify a linetype for an object to override the linetype of the layer You can specify different linetypes for each object If you want to specify a different linetype to override the layer determined linetype of an object change an existing object s linetype from BYLAER to a specific linetype such as DASHED If you want to set a linetype for a subsequently created object you can change the current linetyoe BYLAYER to a specific one in the Linetype control on the Properties toolbar 5 7 3 Control Linetype Scale You can set global or individual scales for objects to control the display of linetypes By default the global and individual linetype scales are set to 1 0 The smaller the scale the more repetitions of the pattern are produced per drawing unit For example if the scale is set to 0 2 five repetitions of the pattern in the linetype definition are displayed for each drawing unit lf short segments are too short to display one full linetype pattern it is displayed as continuous When the lines are too short to display even one dash sequence you need to specify a smaller linetype scale Otherwise the linetype is displayed as continuous shown as the following illustration L 5 JL Systems
374. le to check it for errors You specify whether you want ZWCAD to fix any errors that are found automatically ZWCAD fixes as many errors as possible and any errors that cannot be fixed are reported as Ignored in the Prompt History window To open a damaged file 1 Choose File gt Drawing Utilities gt Recover 2 In Files of Type choose the type of file you want to recover 3 Choose the directory containing the damaged file 4 Choose the damaged file you want to recover 5 Click Open Command line RECOVER To check errors for a drawing file 1 With the drawing open that you want to check choose File gt Drawing Utilities gt Audit 2 Input Y or N to determine whether to recover the errors that are automatically found by ZWCAD and then press Enter Command line AUDIT Drawing Recovery Once terminated by hardware problems power failure or software problems the application is capable of backup the opened drawing file At the next startup the program starts Drawing Recovery manager in which all of the auto backup drawing files that have been closed accidentally will be displayed You can open the file of your demand by double clicking at the Backup File list on the Drawing Recovery if there is any damage to the file system attempts to recover the drawing in process of backup When program or system stopped by accident the drawing files need to recover are sorted into the following types Recovered drawing file s
375. lied to the size an inch a millimeter a meter and draw objects at a 1 1 scale For example if you select the measurement unit as millimeters then every unit in your drawing represents a millimeter When you plot the drawing you either specify a precise scale or fit the image to the paper Plotting is usually working under precise proportion The plot scale set here represents the ratio of plot unit and actual unit used for drawing models Set a Specific Scale The plot scale together with plot unit and drawing unit must be specified before plotting For example if you select the paper size to mm entering 1 under mm and 10 under Units blank produces a plotted drawing with each plotted unit represents 10 actual millimeters The following figure shows an instance of plotting objects at three different scales 3 aX plotted at plotted at plotted at 1 1 U 5 1 1 5 1 To automatically scale the drawing for printing 1 If necessary click the desired Layout tab or the Model tab 2 Choose File gt Plot 3 To scale the drawing to fit on one printed page in Print Scale click Fit to paper 4 Select Save Changes to Layout and then click Apply to Layout Standard toolbar Command line PLOT To specify the scale factor yourself 1 If necessary click the desired Layout tab or the Model tab 2 Choose File gt Plot 3 In Print Scale do one of the following Select a predefined scale For example choose 1 2 if you want 1 printed unit inc
376. line 3 Specify the second point of the spline 4 Specify as many more points as you want 5 When you have finished on the command line type close 6 To complete the command specify the tangent point Draw toolbar i Command line SPLINE The start point and endpoint A of a closed spline 7 2 5 Dounts Donuts are solid filled circles or rings created as closed wide polylines You can draw a donut using several ways The default method is to specify the inside and outside diameters of the donut and then specify its center You can then create multiple copies of the same donut by specifying different center points until you press Enter to complete the command Similar to the way of drawing circle donuts are closed polylines with certain width with or without fill The system variable FILLMODE controls whether to fill the donut or not If system variable FILLMODE is set to 1 to create filled dobuts if system variable FILLMODE is set to 0 to create donuts without filling To create a donut you specify its inside and outside diameters and its center You can continue creating multiple copies with the same diameter by specifying different center JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 7 points To create solid filled circles just assign the same value for the inside radius and outside radius donut solid filled circle filled ring To draw a donut
377. lock mode Locking methods includes Content Locked Format Locked and Content and Format Locked Content can not be locked after the content format lock will not be edited on the Format Cells And the lock on the content or format need to unlock before you can edit Insert Field Operating Steps 1 Click the table in one cell 2 Click the table toolbar Insert Field button 3 Inthe Field dialog box select the field types and field format click OK button complete the fields inserted Create and Modify Table Styles Operating Steps 1 Click on the toolbar form the cell style drop down list select Manage Cell Styles Manage Cell Styles dialog box displays 2 Click the snap style dialog box New button Create New Cell Style dialog box displays 3 Specify a name for the new cell style and select an existing style to default the new style Create Continue to go on creating the cell style Table Toolbar ER Command Line TABLE JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 266 m Pn ocks Attribute and Xrefs 11 1 Create and Insert Blocks Usually blocks are several objects combined into one that you can insert into a drawing and manipulate as a single object A block can consist of visible objects such as lines arcs and circles as well as visible or invisible data called attributes Blocks are stored as part of the drawing file
378. lock references can be modified individually Colors linetypes lineweights and print styles assigned BYBLOCK may be different after exploding an entity because they will adopt the default color linetype lineweight and print style until inserted into another block Explode Polylines JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 You can explode polylines into simple line segments and arc segments which neglects the width of a polyline The exploded lines and arcs are placed along to the center line of the polyline To be taken as a polyline object the donut would be changed into two arcs that form a circle with width as 0 after exploding Explode Dimensions and Hatches You can explode a dimension or a hatch into individual objects such as lines texts points and 2D solids all associativity is lost after exploding Explode Block References You can explode a block reference into individual objects if a block to be exploded contains attributes the attribute values are lost and leaving attribute definition If you explode a block that contains polyline objects you have to explode the polyline separately To explode a block 1 Choose Modify gt Explode 2 Select the block 3 Press Enter Modify toolbar Ls Command line EXPLOD Explode External References You can not explode external references or the dependent blocks as they are linked or attached to another
379. lock to update all other instances in the current drawing There are two methods of redefining block definitions you can choose to modify block definition in current drawing or in original drawing Modify the block definition in the current drawing Modify the block definition in the source drawing and insert it into the current drawing again Modify a Block Definition in the Current Drawing To modify a block definition already inserted into the drawing you should first create a new block definition with a new name to replace the existing block definition and all the references to that block in the drawing are immediately updated to reflect the new definition To save time you can insert and explode an instance of the original block and then use the resulting objects while creating the new block definition To redefine a block in the current drawing 1 Choose Draw gt Block gt Make 2 Type the name of the block you want to redefine and then click OK JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 11 3 Specify the insertion point for the block 4 Select the objects for the block and then press Enter 5 Click OK 6 In the dialog box of The block already exists Do you want to redefine it click YES t Draw toolbar Command line BLOCK The block is immediately redefined and all instances of the block in the drawing are updated TIP To restore the origin
380. lottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 328 LAYOUT PLOT AND PUBLISH DRAWINGS plot style options While the True color plot styles should be synchronized with the same color setting for the plotter configurations However system take the latest color index as substitute color once the plotter is unable to update configuration to True color Convert to Grayscale In case that the plotter supports grayscale system converts the object s colors to grayscale when you select Convert to Grayscale Light colors such as yellow are plotted with light gray values Dark colors are plotted with dark gray values If you set the Grayscale off system uses the RGB values for the entity s colors The grayscale is available for the entity color or a plot style color Use Screening A color intensity setting determines the amount of ink ZWCAD places on the paper while plotting Using valid values from 0 to 100 If set the value to 0 the color will be reduced to white While assigning it to 100 the color will be displayed at its full intensity Screening is effective only if the plotter is configured to plot colors or grayscale with dithering enabled as well Assign and Display Lineweights Use Object Lineweight is the default setting for plot style lineweight All the lineweight samples together with values are provided in the lineweight dropdown list You can also modify an existing lineweight if the one you n
381. lt by entering a distance or selecting two points A and B select the object to copy C and specify on which side to place the copy D To make a offset copy passing through a point 1 Choose Modify gt offset 2 On the command line type through Through Point 3 Select the object to copy 4 Specify the point for the object to pass through 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 or press Enter to complete the command Modify toolbar ai Command line OFFSET To make a parallel copy passing through a point select the object to copy A and then specify the through point B 8 2 5 Create an Array of Objects You can create copies of objects that array in rectangular or polar pattern JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 For rectangular arrays you can specify the number of rows and columns as well as the interval for polar arrays you can specify the number of copies of the objects and determine whether the copies are rotated distance between columns A A AAALA i WEEN POMS object selected result Create Rectangular Arrays You should specify the number of rows and columns offset distance and angle before you create rectangular arrays To create a rectangular array 1 Choose Modify gt Array 2 In the array dialog box click Rectangular Array 3 Click the select objects button select entities to array in your drawing 4 In the array dialog box s
382. ly three points method is JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 7 available for creating circles with three tangent points In the illustrations below the red circle is the one being drawn and points 1 and 2 select the objects to which it is tangent e radius of new radius of new radius of new circle 1 cirtle 2 circles a To draw a circle tangent to existing objects 1 Choose Draw gt Circle gt Tan Tan Radius 2 Select the first tangent point on the object to be tangent with the circle 3 Select the second tangent point on the object to be tangent with the circle 4 Specify the radius of the circle Draw toolbar Command line CIRCLE Radius of circle A and tangent lines B and C 7 2 3 Ellipses and Ellipse arcs Drawing ellipses The default method for drawing an ellipse is to specify the endpoints of one axis of the elliose and then specify a distance representing half the length of the second axis The endpoints of the first axis determine the orientation of the ellipse The longer axis of the ellipse is called the major axis and the shorter one is the minor axis The order in which you define the axes does not matter The program determines the major and minor axes based on their relative lengths You can draw ellipses using any of the following methods Center Axis End To draw an ellipse by specifying the axis and endpoints 1 Choose Dra
383. ly and above the dimension selected Vertically line Align Dimension Text Whether the text is inside or outside the extension line it has no effect on the justification of dimension text You can choose whether the text is align with the dimension lines or remains horizontal The following figures show the combination of these two options The default justification is horizontal wile m r text inside extension text aligned with lines oriented dimension line horizontally To align dimension text with the dimension line 1 Choose Dimension gt Dimension Style 2 In the Dimension Style Manager select the style you wish to change and choose Modify JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 234 DIMENSION AND TOLERANCES 3 Click the Text tab 4 Make your selections 5 Click OK 6 Choose Close to exit Dimension toolbar a Command line DIMSTYLE Control the Location of Dimension Text You can place dimension text vertically or horizontally and give the offset the text from the first extension line Position Dimension Text Vertically The vertical text placement is the position of the text relative to the dimension You can place text above below or centered within the dimension line or use the JIS dimensions Above places dimension text above the dimension line Outside places dimension text on the side far from the point you specify for the dimension line Cen
384. m s icon to appear in the drawing instead of the data 6 Click OK Command line INSETOBJ Update Links Display the links contained in current drawing in the Links dialog performed from OLELINKS command With this command you can setup methods to update links for each settings used for linking information either automatic or manual By default the OLE links created in ZWCAD drawing are automatic update Reconnect Links Source refers to the position where the linked documents are located Once the position of document is changed or renamed the link source must be changed as well When replacing information or objects with links contained the link source should be changed also Break Links Select Break links option in Links dialog box OLE objects in ZWCAD drawing will not be removed rather than its links Thus the OLE object never updates when changing its source To link a file to an ZWCAD drawing 1 Save the original file Because a link consists of a reference to the original file you must save the file before you can link to it 2 In the original file select the data you want in the ZWCAD drawing 3 Choose that program s command to place data on the Clipboard Usually you choose Edit gt Copy 4 Display the ZWCAD drawing to which you want to link the file 5 In ZWCAD choose Edit gt Paste Special 6 In the Paste Special dialog box select Paste Link 7 Click OK Embed OLE Objects in Drawings Embed an object into
385. mation are displayed in this tap Custom Specifies the custom file properties 3 2 2 Work with Multiple Open Drawings You can open multiple drawings at one time There are several methods for switching a drawing to another Acting the drawing by clicking it Uses shortcut keys of CTRL 6 or CTRL TAB This option is not available while ZWCAD is running other command You can change the display styles to Cascade Title Vertically or Title Horizontally from the Window menu You can also use Arrange Icons to align icons if there are several minimum drawings You can quickly reference other drawings to copy and paste between drawings You can also use Match command to copy properties from objects in one drawing to objects in another drawing Object snaps the Copy with Basepoint COPYBASE command and the Paste to Original Coordinates PASTEORIG command is used to ensure accurate placement especially when copying objects from one drawing to another 3 2 3 Recover a Damaged File You can recover some or all of data by reverting to a backup file or using commands to find and correct errors if a drawing file is damaged A drawing file may be damaged by a hardware failure power outage and system crash You can minimize loss by saving files frequently ZWCAD can recover a slightly damaged drawing file while opening it lf a drawing is damaged you can use RECOVER command to check and attempt to open it Then uses AUDIT command to
386. mation varies depending on the object type To display information about an object 1 Choose Tools gt Inquiry gt List 2 Select one or more objects 3 Press Enter Inquiry toolbar iz Command line LIST TIP 7o return to the drawing window press F2 Displaying the drawing status You can display information about the current status of a drawing including Drawing name Limits JL Systems Group ea Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk COORDINATES AND COORDINATE SYSTEM Insertion base point Snap and grid settings Current layer color and linetype Current settings for various modes fill grid orthogonal snap blips and so on To display the drawing status Choose Tools gt Inquiry gt Status Command line STATUS Tracking time spent working on a drawing You can display information about the amount of time you have spent working on a drawing including The date and time the drawing was created The date and time the drawing was most recently saved The total amount of time spent working on the drawing The time spent working on the drawing during the current editing session You can turn the elapsed time timer on and off or reset it to zero To display the timer information 1 Choose Tools gt Inquiry gt Time 2 You can do following commands Type onto turn the elapsed timer on Type offto turn the elapsed timer off Type display to
387. me from the Shape option 5 Click Label option to input label in the text box JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 10 6 Click Inspection rate option to input a value in the text box 7 Click OK Dimension toolbar Command line DIMINSPECT To remove an inspection dimension 1 Choose Dimension gt Inspection 2 On the Inspection dimension dialog box click Select S dimensions button 3 Close Inspection dimension dialog box temporarily to switch to drawing area select dimensions to remove dimension inspection press ENTER when finished selecting and turn back to dialog box 4 Click Remove E inspection button 5 Click OK Dimension toolbar Command line DIMINSPECT 10 4 6 Adjust Dimension Space Once you have created multiple paralleled linear dimensions or angular dimensions you can adjust the soace among these paralleled lines with an equal value either default or specified Various methods are available for creating paralleled linear dimensions and angular dimensions Either using DIMLINEAR and DIMANGULAR to create dimension one at a time or executing DIMBASELINE and DIMCONTINUE to place other linear dimensions or angular dimensions according to the linear dimension or angular dimension previously created When using DIMBASELINE for creating baseline dimensions the space between each dimensions is the identical which is controlled by system vari
388. mensional model from a different orientation To set a new viewing direction 1 Choose View gt 3D Views gt Viewpoint Presets 2 Click the preset button 3 Click the preset view you want to use Command line SETVPOINT You can set the current viewing direction to the plan view of the current user coordinate JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 42 CONTROL THE DRAWING VIEW system UCS a previously saved UCS or the World Coordinate System WCS To dynamically set a view direction 1 Choose View 3D Views Viewpoint Presets 2 Click the appropriate tools to dynamically change the viewpoint 3 To complete the command click OK Command line DDVPOINT You can dynamically rotate the viewpoint within the xy plane and relative to the xy plane and you can pan and zoom the drawing As you change the viewpoint settings the drawing display automatically updates To display a plan view of the current drawing 1 Choose View gt 3D Views gt Plan View 2 It concludes three plan views Current UCS World UCS Choose one what you want Command line PLAN 4 7 3 Isometric Choose Preset 3D Views You can define perspective views of a model to create realistic effects Select predefined standard orthographic and isometric views by name or description These views represent commonly used options Top Bottom Front Left Right and Back In addition you can set views
389. mittal dialog box as you need when next time you create transmittal package System default transmittal setup is named as STANDARD for which you can change its default settings but unable to perform rename or delete operation Choose Transmittal Options You can specify the following transmittal setups when creating transmittal package which greatly facilitate using the etransmit function Specify transmittal package type to be created as ZIP file self extracting EXE file and folder a specified folder position where the drawing will be packaged or copied Choose options among Use organized folder structure Place all files in one folder Keep files and folders as Is to organize folder structure of transmitted files in logical structure Add password protection for transmittal package of ZIP file and self extracted EXE Select Include fonts option to get all the font files associative to transmittal package TTF and SHX which facilitate receiver to view the drawing file Send the transmittal package and transmittal report in form of e mail attachment to relevant users It should be noticed that regardless of file structure included in the created transmittal package absolute path of dependent files that are relative to the drawing file will be converted to relative path or not include path so that you can easily find them while opening or editing drawing files Create transmittal package in specified folder JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31
390. mmand line VPORTS JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 4 You can divide a drawing window into two windows arranged vertically A or horizontally B three windows arranged left C right D above E below F vertically G or horizontally H or four tiled windows I To join two views 1 Choose View gt Viewports gt Join 2 Click anywhere inside the window you want to keep 3 Click anywhere inside the adjacent window you want to join to the first window Command line VPORTS To name and save a window configuration 1 Choose View gt Viewports gt Save Viewports 2 Type a configuration name and then press Enter The name can be up to 31 characters in length and can contain letters numbers the dollar sign hyphen and underscore _ Command line VPORTS To restore a named window configuration 1 Type vports and press ENTER 2 On the command line type restore 3 Type the name of the window configuration you want to restore 4 5 2 Working with multiple drawings With the multiple document interface MDI feature you can open more than one drawing inside of ZWCAD Because you can open and work on several drawings at one time you can copy cut or paste an entity from one drawing to another Each drawing appears in a drawing window which has the following advantages JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige
391. mputer data communications The code assigns meaning to 128 numbers using seven bits per character with the eighth bit used for parity checking Nonstandard versions of ASCII assign meaning to 255 numbers aspect ratio Ratio of display width to height associative hatch Hatching that conforms to its bounding objects such that modifying the bounding objects automatically adjusts the hatch BHATCH attenuation The diminishing of light intensity over distance attribute definition An object that is included in a block definition to store alphanumeric data Attribute values can be predefined or specified when the block is inserted Attribute data can be extracted from a drawing and inserted into external files ATTDEF attribute extraction file An ASCII text file to which extracted attribute data is written The contents and format are determined by the attribute extraction template file attribute extraction template file An ASCII text file that determines which attributes are extracted and how they are formatted when written to an attribute extraction file attribute prompt The text string displayed when you insert a block with an attribute whose value is undefined attribute tag A text string associated with an attribute that identifies a particular attribute during extraction from the drawing database attribute value The alphanumeric information associated with an attribute tag ZWCAD window The drawing area its surroundin
392. n from Objects lf an entity is no longer needed in a selection set you can deselect it to remove it from the selection set To remove an entity from the selection set 1 Press Shift and then select the entity again NOTE Pressing Shift while selecting entities using a crossing window removes all entities from the specified selection set To remove all entities from the selection set 1 Press Escape Prevent Objects from Being Selected You can prevent objects from being selected by locking layer Because locking layer means that you can do any operations except for editing objects on this layer You can set the locked layer as the current layer and add objects as well as using requiring command such as LIST and Objects Snap You can control whether you select objects first or tyoe a command first whether the selected objects is highlighted how to define the selection area how to create a selection set Select Objects First You can select objects first and then choose how to modify them As you select each object it is highlighted with small squares called grips which appear at strategic points on the object The locations of the grips depend on the type of object selected For example grips JL Systems Group 146 Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk MODIFY OBJECTS appear at the endpoints and midpoint of a line at the quadrant points and center point of a circle and at the endpoints m
393. n list beside the Undo button will be unavailable at this time you can only undo the subsequent manipulations unless you perform the UNDO command again and select the End set option Erase Objects You can also use OOPS command to restore the deleted objects except for the objects deleted by PRUGE command You can use OOPS to remove the selected block objects after performing BLOCK or WBLOCK Cancel a Command You can click ESC to exit during performing command JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk O es and kabels ME 9 1 Create Text 9 1 1 Single Line Text You can use TEXT command to create a single or multiline text Each line text is an independent object which can be modified Before typing text you can specify the text style and the way to align at the prompt of creating text The text style is applied to both of a single and multiline text objects The justification way determined which part of text justify with an insert point Characters created by MTEXT can be applied with independent text styles but single line text cannot do that Press ENTER if you have typed some characters and then the command line prompts to input characters for the next row of text While creating single line text you are also enabled to extend or compress certain single line text object in specified space to meet with your need by means of selecting Align or Fit option from the TEX
394. n style As you create dimensions the system applies the default current dimension style to the dimensions The created dimension remains this style unless you apply a new dimension style to it or set up dimension style overrides You can also modify the current dimension style and apply it to existing dimensions lf a dimension style is changed the dimension associated with that dimension style updates automatically Override a Dimension Style Overriding a dimension style changes a dimensioning system variable without changing the current dimension You can define dimension style overrides for the following situations For individual dimensions you may want to modify some properties of dimensions such as suppressing a dimension s extension lines or modifying text and arrowhead placement so that they do not overlap drawing geometry without creating a new dimension style Set up overrides to the current dimension style As you have create a dimension style JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 10 override all dimensions that are created in this dimension style include the overrides until you delete overrides save the overrides to a new style or make another style current For example you can change the extension lines color on the Lines and Arrows tab by clicking the Override button in the Dimension Style Manager and keep the current dimension style unchan
395. n to the scroll bar indicates the location of the center of the drawing in relation to the extents of the drawing the smallest rectangle containing all the entities in the drawing To turn scroll bars on or off Do one of the following Choose View gt Display gt Scroll Bars Choose Tools gt Options gt Display tab and select Display Scroll Bars in drawing window Command line SCROLLBAR Using the Pan command You can move the drawing in any direction using the pan command Panning shifts or slides the view of the drawing horizontally vertically or diagonally The magnification of the drawing remains the same as does its orientation in space The only change is the portion of the drawing displayed To pan you can use any of the following methods For precise panning specify two points defining the magnitude and direction of the pan The first point or base point indicates the starting point of the pan The second point indicates the amount of pan displacement relative to the first point To pan in real time press Cirl Hold and drag right mouse button or use the Pan Realtime tool on the standard toolbar lf you have a mouse with a wheel press and hold the wheel and then move the mouse To pan in real time 1 Choose View gt Zoom gt Realtime 2 Move the cursor in the direction you want to pan 3 To stop panning press Enter or right click the mouse to choose edit Standard toolbar Command line PAN TIP Hold down the rig
396. nd and select xref to attached to the current drawing Select xref drawing to insert into the drawing from DesignCenter and right click the drawing to select Attach as xref Viewing the list of external references You can view a list of the external references that are linked to the current drawing two different ways using the Xref Manager List View displays the external references in a list which allows you to sort the list of references by name status size type date or saved path Tree View displays a hierarchical representation of the external references and the relationships between them The tree view shows the level of nesting relationships of the attached external references To view a list of external references 1 Choose Insert gt Xref Manager 2 Click List View or Tree View Insert toolbar Command line XREF Visibility Color and Linetype You can control visibility color linetype and other properties by setting the layer on which the xref locates You can also assign these changes as temporary or permanant If the system variable VISRETAIN is set to 0 layer table stores in the xref has superiority modifications based on layer made for xref of the current drawing are only JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 276 BLOCKS ATTRIBUTE AND XREFS available for current command These changes will not saved along with the drawing When restart
397. nd line DIMSTYLE To select a dimension style 1 Choose Dimensions gt Dimension Style 2 Select a dimension style from the styles list Dimension toolbar he Command line DIMSTYLE To rename a dimension style 1 Choose Dimensions gt Dimension Style 2 In the Styles list of Dimension Style Manager dialog box do one of the following Double click the required style Right click at the required style name then choose rename 3 Type the new name 4 Click Close to exit JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 10 Dimension toolbar nh Command line DIMSTYLE To delete a named dimension style 1 Choose Dimensions gt Dimension Style 2 In the Styles list of Dimension Style Manager dialog box right click at the required style name and then choose delete 3 Click Close to close Dimension toolbar nh Command line DIMSTYLE To display information about the current style 1 Choose Dimensions gt Dimension Style 2 In the Dimension Style Manager dialog box click Compare 3 In the Compare Dimension Style dialog box choose the same dimension style from the Compare and With pulldown list all properties for specified dimension style will be displayed 4 If you want to know the different information between two styles choose one style in Compare box and choose the other in the With box you will see difference in the following tab 5 Click Close to close
398. nd modify wipeouts You may JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 144 CREATE OBJECTS want to turn off wipeout frames when it s time to print To turn wipeout frames on or off 1 Choose Draw gt Wipeout 2 Choose Frames 3 Choose On or Off Command line WIPEOUT Wipeout frames turned on Wipeout frames turned off JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 8 1 Select Objects You can create a selection set that consists of one or more objects before you modify them Use any of the following methods to create a selection set Choose a command or tool first and then select objects Select objects first and then choose a command or tool most objects Select objects by pointing and then use grips to modify them 8 1 1 Select Objects Individually You can select one or more objects under the prompt of Select entities on the command line The selected highlights on the screen and could be removed from the selection set Select objects with pickbox You can select objects using mouse or other pointing device The mouse or other pointing device is represented of square pickbox on the drawing area When selecting object the cursor square pickbox should be in the position of an object but not inside it The size of pickbox can be changed on the Selection tab of Options dialog box Remove Selectio
399. nding button on the toolbar SHX fonts do not support boldface or italics To apply color to selected text choose a color from the Color list Click Other colors to display the Select Color dialog box 6 To save your changes and exit the Multiline Text Editor use one of the following methods Click OK on the toolbar Press Cirl Enter Text toolbar A Command line MTEXT TIP You can paste text from the Clipboard into the Multiline Text Editor Justify Multiline Text When you create multiline text you can set the text alignment by specifying the attachment point location in relation to the multiline text boundary and the direction in JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 212 NOTES AND LABELS which text flows within the boundary You can set the multiline text alignment either in the command line prompt displayed after you specify the first corner of the multiline text boundary or from the Multiline Text Editor You can specify the attachment point at the top left top center top right middle left middle center middle right bottom left bottom center or bottom right The multiline text can flow left to right right to left top to bottom or bottom to top The system provides nine justifications shown as the following illustrations Co BHO Feo beh Fl an mn e er eer Peis Et Ee Rei say ae efter ee tea a EA apne ee wage Bees eae ays een x ay Rae eee r nay aes
400. ndpoint of the tangent arc Draw toolbar Command line ARC Endpoint A 7 2 2 Circles The default method for drawing a circle is to specify a center point and radius You can draw circles using any of the following methods JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 114 CREATE OBJECTS Center Radius Center Diameter Two points Three points Tangent Tangent Radius Tangent Tangent Tangent 24 radius radius E d IAN on j e A Yy i center a j argent aE object center radius two points three points targent defining defining targent radius diameter Circumference To draw a circle by specifying its center and radius 1 Choose Draw gt Circle gt Center Radius 2 Specify the center point 3 Specify the radius of the circle Draw toolbar Command line CIRCLE Center point A and radius B To convert an arc to a circle 1 On the command line enter circle gt a 2 Select the arc you want to convert to a circle Select an arc A to convert to a circle Draw a Circle Tangent to Other Objects The tangent point is a point where an object touches another object without intersecting it To create a circle that is tangent to other objects select the objects and then specify the radius of the circle You can also turn on the Object Snap mode to set the snap point as Tangent thus you can create circles that are tangent with other objects easi
401. ndpoints A patch is a bicubic surface one curve extends in the M direction and the other in the N direction interpolated between the four adjoining edges You can select the edges in any order The first edge you select determines the M direction of the mesh 4 four edges selected result To create an edge defined Coons surface patch mesh 1 Choose Draw gt Surfaces gt Edge Surface 2 Select the first edge 3 Select the second third and fourth edges Surface toolbar a Command line EDGESURF JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 130 CREATE OBJECTS Select the objects to be used as the four The resulting Coons surface patch mesh edges A B C and D TIP To control the density of the mesh change the values for the Number of M Direction Surfaces Choose Tools gt Draft Settings and then click the 3D Settings tab Under Surface Settings change the Number Of M Direction Surfaces 7 3 4 Create 3D Solids Creates 3D solids in drawings A solid object represents the entire volume of an object Complex solid shapes are also easier to construct and edit than wireframes and meshes You can use the following methods to create solids Combines one of the basic solid shapes such as box cone cylinder sohere torus and wedge or by extruding a 2D object along a path or revolving a 2D object about an axis Once you have created a solid in this manner you can crea
402. ne poine spline Co w A23 block circle text When you perform quadrant grips on circles the distance is measured from the center point but not the selected grip For example in Stretch mode you can select a quadrant grip to stretch a circle and then specify a distance at the prompt of New circle radius The distance is measured from the center point but not the selected quadrant If you select the center point the circle moves When a 2D solid is not lie on the current UCS the object is stretched on the plane that the object is created but not on the plane of the current UCS The system variable GRIPOBUJLIMIT is used to control the number of grips displayed on the selected object The value of GRIPOBJLIMIT is not available when you add an object to the current selection set Control Grips in Blocks The system variable GRIPBLOCK is used to control whether the inserted block displays a single grip or all of grips JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 188 MODIFY OBJECTS insertion point grips within blocks grips within turned off blocks turned on 8 4 2 Grip Edit Mode One type of edit mode called grip mode is to perform manipulations such as stretch move rotate scale or mirror by dragging grips on entities Stretch is the default grip edit mode select the grips to edit when you want to stretch the selected entity the grip is displayed
403. ne text editor right clicking mouse and selects Find and Replace to replace the selected characters The content of text is replaced but the properties of the text remains Change Text with a Leader You can change the size of a leader by stretching or scaling it Stretch changes the distance between the endpoint and the annotation Scale only updates the scale of the selected objects For example when scaling a leader the location of the annotation keeps unchanged A leader can be used as the boundary for trimming or extending but not be trimmed or extended 9 3 Work with Text Styles The text style is applied to the text objects You can use text style to control the text font size angle direction and other features By default the current text style is STANDARD you have to make other text style current when you want to applied them The STANDARD text style has the following default properties Setting Default Description Style name STANDARD Name with up to 255 characters File associated with a font character style Big Font None Special shape definition file used for a non ASCII character set such as Kanji Height o Character height JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 9 Width factor 1 Expansion or compression of the characters You can modify the current text style or create a new text style directly You can also delet
404. new object use the Format gt Lineweight to change the current lineweight For an existing object select the object right click for the shortcut menu and choose Properties You can then modify the object s lineweight in the Properties tab Setting a layer s print style If your drawing uses named print style tables you can specify a print style for each layer Named print style tables contain print styles that you set up to control what objects look like when they print without actually changing the objects in the drawing lf your drawing uses color dependent print style tables you cannot specify a print style for a layer These types of print style tables automatically determine printing requirements by the color assigned to a layer or an object In drawings that use named print style tables the default print style is Normal for all new layers If desired you can assign a print style using Layer Properties Manager Changing the print style assigned to a layer changes the print style of all objects drawn on that layer with the BYLAYER print style When you create new objects it s a good idea to assign the BYLAYER print style to any objects that you draw on that layer unless you want to override the layer print style ZWCAD uses the BYLAYER print style as the default print style setting when you create objects To change the print style assigned to one or more layers only in a drawing that uses named print style tables 1 Choose Fo
405. ng You create a boundary polyline by selecting an area inside a closed loop The area you select can be bounded by a single closed object or by multiple objects that intersect In cases where objects intersect ZWCAD interprets the boundary as the closed loop closest to the point specifying the area In the following figure for example the area point selected in the rectangle results in a boundary consisting of the closed loop nearest the point selection as opposed to the closed loop formed by the rectangle itself Selected point A Resulting boundary B To make boundaries more specific you can create a boundary set A boundary set specifies which objects are considered in determining the boundary path This can make creating the boundary polyline faster if you are working with a complex drawing In the following figure the circle and triangle are the selected objects If you select an area anywhere inside the circle or the triangle the result is a polyline that bounds the shaded area Selected objects A and B Point specified in the selected area C which results in a new boundary around the shaded area To draw a boundary polyline JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 106 CREATE OBJECTS 1 Choose Draw gt Boundary 2 Specify the objects that you want made available for the boundary polyline by doing one of the following All objects Select All Visible
406. ngs you can modify on Leader Format in Modify Multileader Style dialog JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 9 Multileader toolbar Command line MLEADER 9 2 Change Text All of text objects can be moved rotated deleted and copied just as like other objects You can change the properties at the Properties panel You can also modify the contents of existing text and create a mirror image The system variable MIRRTEXT controls whether the text is reversed or not when you mirror object Change single line text You have two methods to modify single line text To modify only the content of text use DDEDIT command To change text style location size and content use PROPERTIES command to open Properties panel from which you can make the relevant settings To edit text 1 Type ddedit and then press Enter 2 Select the text entity 3 In the Text Editor field edit the text and then click OK Text toolbar Ai Command line DDEDIT To change text properties 1 Select a single line text object 2 Right click the selected object and click Properties on the shortcut menu 3 In the Properties palette enter any new text in the Text Contents and then change formatting and other properties as needed Standard toolbar Command line PROPERTIES You can also move scale or rotate text through grips as like other objects The grip of a single line text is di
407. nsert these text into the drawing as mtext objects for subsequent editing and resetting its formats Text imported from external files TXT and other uses current text style Additionally the external files imported into the Mtext Editor retain its source document style for text height retain the original setting for line break and enter symbol To Import Text file 1 Select Draw gt Text gt Multiline Text 2 Specify two corners of multiline text frame separately which define the width of mtext object 3 Right click on mtext editor select Input From File 4 Select the desired text file from the Open dialog box and then click Open The text JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 214 NOTES AND LABELS contents of the text file will be inserted into the position where the cursor stays within the mtext editor 5 Modify text content to be inserted on your demand 6 Click OK on the mtext editor to save the modification and exit the editor Text Toolbar A Command line MTEXT lf you drag an external file into the drawing directly it will be displayed as OLE object Additionally if you use clipboard to copy text from other applications and paste it into current drawing directly the text will be displayed as OLE objects 9 1 3 Leaders Leaders is a line or spline with arrowhead at one end and annotations Mtext blocks as well as tolerance at the other
408. nserting into other drawings 11 1 3 Insert Blocks You can insert blocks and other drawings into the current drawing When you insert a block it is treated as a single object When you insert a drawing it is added to the current drawing as a block You can then insert multiple instances of the block without reloading the original drawing file If you change the original drawing file those changes have no effect on the current drawing unless you redefine the block by reinserting the changed drawing You can also insert blocks from another drawing into the current drawing Both drawings must be open at the same time to do this When you insert a block or drawing you must specify the insertion point scale and rotation angle The block s insertion point is the reference point specified when you created the block When you insert a drawing as a block the program takes the specified insertion point as the block insertion point You can change the insertion point however by first opening the original drawing and redefining the block You can specify the scale of a block reference using different X Y and Z values S OS 2 default value scale 0 5 A stale 1 rotation angle 45 Y scale 1 Y stale 0 5 JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 11 To insert a block 1 Choose Insert gt Block 2 In the Insert Block dialog box under Insert area check the Block Name option
409. nsion is available for measuring the arc length of arc or polyline arc segment ZWCAD creates arc length dimension by specifying extension line position JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 250 DIMENSION AND TOLERANCES directly after selecting arc by default And use an arc symbol as arc length dimension logo which is differing from linear dimension and angular dimension Arc symbol of arc length dimension displays both in front of the dimension text and above it which is adjustable from Other Items tab either in Create New Dimension Style dialog box or Modify Dimension Style dialog box 0 99 ra TE a Additionally orthogonal or radial extension line is available for arc length dimension only the included angle of the arc segment selected for creating arc length dimension is smaller than 90 degree can display it s orthogonal extension line To create an arc length dimension 1 Choose Dimension gt Arc Length 2 Select an arc or polyline arc segment 3 Specify a point to position the arc length dimension Dimension toolbar Si Command line DIMARC 10 4 Modify Existing Dimensions 10 4 1 Modify Dimension Style You can modify all of properties of the existing dimension objects in a drawing using dimension styles You can also create a dimension style override to temporarily change a dimensioning system variable without changing the current dimensio
410. nsmittal files Click OK If the transmittal package is password protected system prompt for entering the JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 348 SHARE DATA BETWEEN DRAWINGS AND APPLICATIONS password Click OK to close each dialog box JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk Ompile and Work with Customize applications s A i i i h r i a d y a j pat i x LISP is an interpretive programming language which provides simple mechanism for adding commands to ZWCAD Although LISP varies in different platform generally it s connected to ZWCAD through IPC interprocess communication as the following figure shows Distribution Processing Fig Relation amoong LISP SDS and ZWCAD Similar to LISP application a SDS application accomplishes its function by means of uploading LISP and calling with series of external functions and connects to LISP through IPC 15 1 LISP LISP is a full featured interpretive programming language full name List Processor which is list processing language It is a sort of independent programming language embedded for ZWCAD customization LISP greatly extends most of the available commands and functions of ZWCAD LISP is similar to AutoLISP so that you can use the majority of applications written with AutoLISP in ZWCAD A LISP command stands for a fun
411. nto high and draft levels If the quality is set to draft the image will be displayed with some granular materials however with faster display speed lf the attached raster image uses true color 24 or 32 bit each pixel you can adjust relevant options in Display tab on Options dialog box so as to improve the image quality system takes a long time to redraw the drawing when it displayed at high quality To improve the capability it s suggested to reduce the color number set at the display option In purpose of improve the redraw speed you can hide the undesired images in current drawing operations through Show image option on the Properties palette The hidden image will be neither displayed on the screen nor plotted only displayed as a boundary To hide an image you may ignore the UCS of current viewport To change the quality of all images in a drawing 1 Choose Modify gt Object gt Image gt Quality 2 Do one of the following Type high to use high quality images Type draftto use draft quality images which require smaller amounts of system resources Reference toolbar Command line IMAGEQUALITY Use Tiled Images Tiled image is a series of small parts of large images Loading tiled images is faster than loading those untiled images due to the tiled images redraws its modified parts to save time in loading images ZWCAD supports TIFF for tiled image file format which is also available for bitonal gray 1 bit per pixe
412. o 1 the default the original object is deleted once you convert an object to a revision cloud You can set the minimum and maximum default values for the arc lengths of a revision cloud You should notice that the maximum arc length can t be more than 3 times as big as the minimum arc length REVCLOUD stores the last used arc length as a multiple of the DIMSCALE system variable to provide consistency among drawings with different scale factors Make sure that the entire area to be outlined with REVCLOUD before using the command REVCLOUD can t be transparent used and real time panning and zooming 7 6 Create Break Lines Creates a polyline and inserts the breakline symbol Options are provided to control the relative size and appearance of the breakline symbol and an extension of the polyline beyond the selected start and end points To use your own block for the breakline symbol make sure that the block contains two point objects on the Defpoints layer Those point objects determine the placement of the symbol and how the line will be broken JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 7 Note current settings of DIMSCALE are capable of controlling the terminal size of break line flexibly 7 7 Create Wipeouts Wipeouts are unique entities that can help you hide areas of your drawing They display with the current background color so the details behind th
413. o be within specified range Dimension inspection can be added to any type of dimension objects which is composed by a frame and internal text You can specify the shape of inspection frame as round angular or none An inspection dimension contains utmost three kinds of information field inspection tag dimension value and inspection rate Using a perpendicular line to divide the dimension information among each field a 3 25 100 In which inspection tag used for mark the text of dimension inspection is located at the left side within the inspection frame Dimension value here is the value before adding dimension inspection which is located at the central part of the inspection dimension including tolerance text and measurement value Inspection rate which is expressed by percentage is located at the right side within the inspection frame indicates required frequency of the part being created After adding dimension inspection user can modify current value of inspection dimension through Geometry option of Properties palette including frame shape tag and inspection rate To create an inspection dimension 1 Choose Dimension gt Inspection 2 On the Inspection dimension dialog box click Select S dimensions button 3 Close Inspection dimension dialog box temporarily to switch to drawing area select dimensions to add dimension inspection press ENTER when finished selecting and turn back to dialog box 4 Select shape for fra
414. o extend As a result the objects is extending instead of trimming Trim and Extend Wide Polylines System processes the center line if the object is 2D wide polyline If the polyline is pyramid the width of cutting edge keeps unchanged after trimming When you extend a wide polyline its centerline intersects the boundary edge Because the end of the polyline is always cut at a 90 degree angle part of the polyline may extend past the boundary edge A tapered polyline continues to taper until it intersects the boundary edge If this would result in a negative polyline width the ending width changes to 0 A tapered polyline A continues to taper until Result it intersects the boundary edge B The ends of wide polylines are always square Trimming a wide polyline at an angle leads to portions of the end to extend beyond the cutting edge Trimming a spline fit polyline deletes curve fit information and converts spline fit segments to ordinary polyline segments Trim or Extend in 3D You can trim or extend objects even the objects are in the different planes in 3D space The system variable PROJMODE and EDGEMODE control the following project models XY plane of the Current UCS Current view plane 3D realty space not projection Attentively when you trim or extend objects 3D space the objects to cut or extend must be intersected with the boundary of 3D boundary The objects to trim or extend may not concluding exactly if they do no
415. of lower quality To change the fade of the image geometric lines will be clearly viewed and add watermark effects when plotting the image If you attach a bitonal image into the drawing you can t set the lightness contrast and fade Bitonal images are displayed as background color of current screen and plotted as white Modify Color and Transparency for Bitonal Raster Images Bitonal raster Image contain a foreground color and a background color so that the current color settings determine the foreground color of the bitonal image as attached into the drawing Although the lightness contrast and fade are not adjustable for bitonal images you can modify the foreground color of the image and control its transparency from the Properties palette NOTE Bitonal images and their boundaries are always the same color View Raster Image Information The raster images already attached to the drawing are displayed in list or tree view in Image manager You can click Details button to view the relevant information of the raster image List View System defaults to use List view for displaying the name status load unload or not found size type last save date and time as well as saving path of the image file Click on the column title to rank the images If the original file of the inserted image is missing the image status is displayed as Not found Images that are unloaded or not found in the image manager will not be displayed in
416. og box opens 2 Click the Index Color tab JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 5 3 Click the color of your choice or type the color number in the Current box 4 Click OK 5 9 2 Using true colors There are more than 16 million true colors from which you can choose True colors are defined using 24 bit color Even with so many colors available you can quickly choose a color from the display of basic colors or by clicking the color palette Alternatively if you know the values used to define the desired color you can enter the Hue Saturation and Luminance HSL values or you can enter the Red Green Blue RGB values To select a true color 1 Click Select Color in the desired dialog box such as Layers Properties or Multiline Text The Color dialog box opens 2 Click the True Color tab 3 Select one of the following two color models HSL color model RGB color model 4 Specify the desired color 5 Click OK button 5 9 3 Using color books ZWCAD uses color books to store collections of colors For example you can store a unique color scheme for a client in a color book and then use colors only from that color book for the client s drawings You may have a color book given to you by a client developed by a third party or you can create your own Each color book has an acb extension and is saved in Extensible Markup Language XML format By defa
417. ogether with the xrefs If the xref attached to the drawing contain nested clipped xrefs these xrefs will be displayed as it was after clipping The nested xref is also clipped if superior xref has been clipped Turning clipping boundaries on and off The clipping boundaries can be controlled whether to display or not through system variable XCLIPFRAME If set this system variable to 1 the clipping boundary can be selected and plotted as a part of the object When a clipping boundary is turned off the boundary does not display and the entire external reference is visible provided that the geometry is on a layer that is on and thawed However deleting a clipping boundary is permanent To turn clipping boundaries on and off 1 Choose Modify gt Clip gt Xref 2 Select the desired external references 3 Press Enter 4 To turn off clipping boundaries choose Off To turn on existing clipping bound aries choose On 5 Press Enter J Reference toolbar Command line XCLIP TIP When the XCLIPFRAME system variable is on set to 1 you can select and print the clipping boundary frame Clipping Boundary Options When clipping boundaries you can specify a rectanglar window or use polyline to define clipping boundary through New boundary option If the selected clipping boundary is rectanglar window only xrefs within the rectanglar window are displayed The clipping boundary is parallel to current UCS and the clipping boundary will b
418. olyline If two objects to chamfer on the same layer the chamfer line lies on the layer as the object does otherwise the chamfer line lies on the current layer which controls the properties of the line The mUltiple option can help you chamfer multiple objects at one time original objects chamfer distance charmer distance zero nonzero Chamfer by Specifying Distances The chamfer distance is the amount each entity is trimmed or extended to meet the chamfer line or to intersect the other If both chamfer distances are 0 chamfering trims or extends the two entities until they intersect instead of creating a chamfer line The default setting for the first distance is the last one you have specified and the second distance is the same as the first one However you can reset the desired chamfer distance To chamfer two objects using the distance distance method 1 Choose Modify gt Chamfer 2 On the command line type s 3 In the Drawing Settings dialog box click the Entity Modification tab 4 Under Chamfer Distances And Angles click Distance Distance 5 Under Chamfer Distances And Angles specify the first and second chamfer distances 6 Click OK JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 7 Select the first object 8 Select the second object Modify toolbar Command line CHAMFER Select the first A and The chamfer is drawn based on the first second
419. ommand and multiline styles to edit multilines or their elements Add and Delete Multiline Vertices You can use MLEDIT to add or delete vertices for a multiline As shown in the illustration SN Vertex in multiline multiline with to delete vertex deleted Edit Multiline Intersections You can control the way two multilines intersect using MLEDIT The ways include cross and T shape that can be closed open or merged JL L E ES g closed cross merged cross open t Edit Multiline Styles You can use MLSTYLE to add multiline style or set multilines from the existing multiline style such as the number of elements color linetype lineweight and the offset of each element You can also edit the end caps and background fill The element and multiline properties of the STANDARD multiline style are not allowed to modify The current multiline style already used in the drawing is not allowed to modify too You should edit multiline style before using it If you create a new style without saving the previous one the properties of the previous one are lost To maintain the properties you have better to save each multiline style to an MLN file before creating a new one 8 4 Use Grips to Edit Objects Grips are small squares displayed at the strategic points on objects while you selecting objects As you select each entity it is highlighted with small squares called grips which appear at strategic points on the entity The locations of th
420. on Entering x y z coordinates When working in three dimensions you can specify x y z coordinates as absolute distances in relation to the origin the 0 0 0 coordinate point at which the three axes intersect or as relative coordinates based on the last point selected For example to specify the coordinate 3 4 2 just specify a point 3 units along the positive x axis 4 units along the positive y axis and 2 units along the positive z axis Entering spherical coordinates When working in three dimensional space you can use spherical coordinates to specify a three dimensional point by entering its distance from either the origin absolute distance or the last point relative distance along with its angle in the xy plane and its angle up from the xy plane In spherical format you separate each angle with the open angle bracket lt You can enter the coordinate values using the following format X lt angle from X axis lt angle from XY plane Thus to draw a line from the origin to a point 10 2500 drawing units away at an angle of JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 88 COORDINATES AND COORDINATE SYSTEM 45 degrees from the x axis and 35 degrees from the xy plane start the Line command and then respond to the prompts as follows Start of line 0 0 0 Angle Length lt End point gt 10 2500 lt 45 lt 35 When you draw a line from a start point A to an endpo
421. on by specifying inner points of closed area to form a boundary with existing objects If the objects are intersected with each other ZWCAD takes the closed area nearest to the selected pointsas boundary Meanwhile a combined region is created through union subtract or intersect among several areas When using union subtract or intersect for complex regions you can fill the area and analyse its area as well The following region objects show combined areas of union subtract or intersect orderly Objects combined using UNION 1O selected regions result Objects combined using SUBTRACT selected regions result a composite region Objects combined using INTERSECT 142 JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CREATE OBJECTS selected intersecting result regions To create a region 1 Choose Draw gt Region 2 Select the objects to create the region 3 Press Enter The command bar displays a message that describes how many regions were created Draw toolbar i Command line REGION 7 5 Create Revision Clouds REVCLOUD creates a polyline of sequential arcs to form a cloud shaped object Revision Cloud help mark your drawings by highlighting some important parts when review or redline drawings You can create a revision cloud from scratch or you can convert objects such as a circle ellipse polyline or spline to a revision cloud If DELOBJ is set t
422. one 3 Specify the radius or diameter 4 Specify the height Solids toolbar Command line CONE Center of the base A the radius of the base B and the height C To create a cone as a three dimensional surface 1 Choose Draw gt Surfaces gt 3D Surface 2 On the command line type cone 3 Specify the center of the base of the cone 4 Specify the radius or diameter 5 Specify the height A 7 4 Surfaces toolbar Command line Al CONE Create a Solid Cylinder You can create cylinders defined by a circular base The base of a cylinder is always parallel with the xy plane of the current UCS the height of a cylinder is always parallel with the z axis You position a cylinder by specifying the center of the base You determine the size of a cylinder by specifying either the radius or diameter of the base and the height 2 JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 7 You can draw a circle and then use EXTRUDE to create a solid cylinder To construct a cylinder with special detail such as grooves along its sides you can create a 2D profile of its base with a closed PLINE and then use EXTRUDE to define its height along the Z axis To create a cylinder 1 Choose Draw gt Solids gt Cone 2 Specify the center of the base of the cylinder 3 Specify the radius or diameter 4 Specify the height Solids toolbar U Command line CYLINDER Center of
423. only limit the concentration of ink for convenience of distinguish objects after plotting To specify the screening value you should specify the plot style first and then define the screening value in plot style editor The value can be assigned from 0 to 100 if you specify the value to 100 screening will not take effect that is to plot the drawing without screening While using screening value as 0 to plot the object without ink namely make the objects invisible Turn Layout Viewports On or Off The new layout viewport is under status On by default until you select turn off The more objects in model space the more layout viewports can be created Thus generating contents of each viewport may affect system capacity User can control the status of JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 13 viewport in Properties tab to save space by turning off some viewports or limiting active viewports The following figure shows the results with two viewports turned off all viewports on two viewports off Once the viewport is turned off you can copy the viewport without regen each viewport and the closed viewport will not be plotted To hide the viewport boundary which you are working on you can create a specific layer for viewports and then close or freeze the layer To turn layout viewports on or off 1 Click the desired Layout tab 2 Type mview and then press Enter 3 Type ono
424. ons but the original image file will not be influenced Unlike detaching an image file removing the image directly from the drawing retains the image in Image manager Only can detaching the image remove the links of the image that connecting the drawing 12 2 2 Modify and manage Raster Images Controls the properties such as displaying and clipping boundary of raster images You can view and manipulate attached raster image and change its saving path in Image Manager Show and Hide Raster Image Boundaries Controls whether to display image boundary in current view using IMAGEFRAME JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 12 command Raster image can be displayed without frame Usually users select image entity by clicking image frame Setting IMAGEFRAME to Off prevents you from accidentally selecting an image Once hide the image frame the image can t be selected by SELECT command keep the clipped image displayed within specified frame All the attached images update as soon as the visibility of raster image frame is set to display or hide To turn image frames on or off for all images 1 Choose Modify gt Object gt Image gt Frame 2 Do one of the following to toggle frames off and on Type on to display and print frames for all images in a drawing Type off to hide all frames on the screen and during printing Reference toolbar Command line IMAGEFR
425. ont right side and isometric views for viewports You can also define a different UCS for each view to facilitate modifying objects in different views When you make a viewport current you can use the same UCS you used the last time that the viewport was current The system variable UCSVP controls the UCS in each viewport When UCSVP is on ina viewport the system saves the viewport with the UCS last used in that viewport and restores the UCS as the viewport is made current again When UCSVP is set to Oina viewport its UCS is coincident with the UCS in the current viewport For example you can set up three viewports a top view front view and isometric view If UCSVP is set to 0 in the isometric viewport the Top UCS can be applied to both the top viewport and the isometric viewport When the top viewport is made current the isometric viewport s UCS reflects the UCS top viewport Likewise if you make the front viewport current the isometric viewport s UCS is switched to match that of the front viewport The following figure indicates the instance illustrated above In which the drawing 1 reflects isometric viewport of top left or top viewports in current UCS JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 6 top viewport is current UCS P 0 UCS icon reflects j UGS of current viewport The second figure shows the change that occurs when the lower left or front viewport is
426. ontrol the status ON or OFF for SNAP GRID or ORTHO mode Sometimes you use a system variable in order to change a setting System variable can be used to display the current status as well JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 14 THE USER INTERFACE While using another command you can examine or change a system variable s setting transparently however new values may not take effect until the interrupted command ends 2 3 2 Edit Within the Command Window Navigate and Edit Within the Command Window The standard keys below are provided for navigating and editting text in the command window to correct or repeat commands e UP DOWN LEFT ARROW and RIGHT ARROW INS DEL PAGE UP PAGE DOWN HOME END BACKSPACE Use UP ARROW DOWN ARROW and ENTER you can repeat any command used in the current session by cycling through the commands in the command window By default pressing CTRL C copies highlighted text to the Clipboard Pressing CTRL V pastes text from the Clipboard to the text window or the command window If you right click on the command window or text window ZWCAD displays a shortcut menu from which you can copy selected text or the entire command history paste text and access the Options dialog box of the Command window In general a command line with two or three lines of previous prompts is given to several commands called the command history which
427. ool Palette For example you can create a line by clicking the line tool JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 20 THE USER INTERFACE When you click an arrow next to a tool all other tools that have the similar properties are displayed The objects that are created using a tool on a tool flyout have the same properties as the objects you created from the original tool You can create a block tool by dragging a block out of an exterior file to the current tool palette performed from the Design Center The items to be added to a tool palette are called Tool By clicking the block tool you can insert the block into your current drawing ZWCAD supports using existing entities as tools via adding the entity to the tool palettes You can firstly select the entity to be used as tool from the drawing area select Copy from right click menu and then right click on anyone of the palettes or current palette select Paste option thus a tool is created Currently supported entities are arc defined attributes circle ellipse line 2D and 3D polyline mline mtext point 3Dmesh ray region 2Dsolid spline curve text tolerance trace construction line wipeout and so on Once you have added geometric entities circle line polyline etc to a tool palette by way of copy and paste a new tool list with flyout will be automatically generated on the palettes For example a triangle will be di
428. or example to open a new drawing press ALT and press F to open the File menu then press N for New You can create a new menu with the path you specified for example a customized menu in the Options dialog box Files tab 2 1 2 Shortcut Menus Shortcut menus provide quick access to specific commands A shortcut menu displays when you right click an object toolbar status bar the Model tab name or a Layout tab name The selections presented in the shortcut menu depend on what you clicked When you right click a toolbar the program displays a shortcut menu that lets you toggle the command bar status bar and various toolbars on and off If you select one or more JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 2 objects and then right click the program displays a shortcut menu from which you can choose a command to modify the selected objects To quickly access the relevant commands currently performed you can right click on different area on the drawing window to display different shortcut menu with the shortcut menu you can speed up the access lf you have entered commands or system variables right click on the command line to perform the command or system variable automatically without displaying the shortcut menu To display a short cut menu from which you can choose an object snap and track press and hold down the Shift key and then right click anywhere within th
429. or removing jog symbol for linear dimensions showing a dimension value differs from it s factual measured dimension value Generally the value displayed here is greater than the actual measurement value Jogged line is composed by two paralleled lines and a connecting line with 40 degree between them As for the height of jogged line user can set it from Other Items tab either in Create New Dimension Style dialog box or Modify Dimension Style dialog box After adding jog symbol to the linear dimension the jog is default to be placed at the center point between first extension line and dimension text or center point based on the dimension text To relocate jog symbol you can adjust the position of dimension text or specify new position to locate jog after reselecting dimension To add a jog to linear dimension 1 Choose Dimension gt Jogged Linear 2 Select a linear dimension 3 Specify a point on the dimension line to determine the jog symbol or press ENTER JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 254 DIMENSION AND TOLERANCES directly to position the jog symbol in default place Dimension a W Command line DIMJOGLINE A 2 08 10 4 5 Dimension Inspection You can add or remove dimension inspection for existing dimensions For transmitting the frequency of inspecting the part being dimensioned the dimension value and parts tolerance are ensured t
430. or scaling Specify C Copy option to create a copy of the entity being scaled Specify U Undo option to abort last scaling Specify X eXit option to exit scale manipulation Specify R Reference option to assign reference scale factor For example input scale factor as 5 to scale the entity to 5 times of its original size Then dynamic input box displays on the screen in which you are prompt to enter new length if input 3 the entity will be scaled with the factor 3 5 Specify scale factor for grips directly Move the pointing device to specify target grips the entity will be scaled based on the selected grips with the factor you specified or create a copy of the entity after scaling Multi Grips Mirror Mode Mirror entities and create their copies with multiple grips mode use the last grip base grip or reselected base point as base point Mirror Lines Polylines and Dimensions Using Multiple Grips Select line polyline and dimension entities to mirror Press SHIFT while selecting grips on entities the selected grips will be highlighted Release SHIFT and click on one of the selected grips to use it as base grip Press ENTER to activate the default grip mode as Stretch Iterate grip mode until Mirror appears in command line Dynamic input box displayed on screen showing the following manipulations Specify B Base point option to relocate the base grip Specify C Copy option to create a co
431. orary files are created on the specified path and then deleted when you exit ZWCAD program The default temporary folder is specified to the location that Microsoft Windows uses You should specify another location for temporary files when you run ZWCAD in a write protected director for example if you work on a network or open files on a CD The director must not be write protected and can provide enough disk space for the temporary files Add identifying information to drawings You can find the specified drawings more easily by adding keywords or other information to them in the Drawing Properties dialog box opened from the File menu The drawing properties such as title author subject keyword or other important information can help identify drawings more easily You can also assign hyperlink addresses director paths and multiple custom properties to your drawings The Drawing Properties dialog box contains the following drawing information General It contains the drawing type location size and other information These information are stored by the operation system and can be read only You can change these values only through Windows Explorer JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 3 Summary This tap contains the drawing properties such as author title and subject Statistics The drawing size created date and latest modified date and other infor
432. ording to the specified objects JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 318 LAYOUT PLOT AND PUBLISH DRAWINGS LO omen io Ol geometrical objects existing viewport result in model space Polygonal option is used for creating irregular viewports according to specified points With the same command prompts as creating polyline Redefine Viewport Boundary Boundaries of viewports can be redefined by VPCLIP command Once selected the viewport to be clipped you can specify existing objects as new boundary or specify new boundary point You should notice that the boundary is neither displayed nor clipped if the layer on which the boundary of non rectangular viewport locates If you close the boundary layer rather than freeze it the viewport will be clipped Edit Non rectangular Viewports Using Grips Like other geometrical objects grips that are used to change the shape of non rectangular viewports will be display once selected with which you can edit the viewport as other objects Such as move rotate scale and so on To define viewport boundaries the area in which selected objects are contained will be calculated to set viewport objects on the corner of the boundary Some geometric drawings may not be displayed entirely for different shape of the boundaies Co Sr Ss A 2 SN viewport boundary geometrical objects intmodel space viewport edited using grips
433. ot styles are defined in plot style tables and apply to objects only when the plot style table is attached to a layout or viewport procedural materials Materials that generate a 3D pattern in two or more colors and apply it to an object These include marble granite and wood Also called template materials prompt A message on the command line that asks for information or requests action such as specifying a point redraw To quickly refresh or clean up blip marks in the current viewport without updating the drawing s database REDRAW reference A definition known as an external reference or block reference that is used and stored in the drawing XREF reflection color The color of a highlight on shiny material Also called specular color reflection mapping Creates the effect of a scene reflected on the surface of a shiny object regenerate To update a drawing s screen display by recomputing the screen coordinates from the database REGEN relative coordinates Coordinates specified in relation to previous coordinates JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 364 GLOSSARY return button The button on a pointing device used to accept an entry For example on a two button mouse it is the right button RGB For red green and blue A system of defining colors by specifying percentages of red green and blue rubber band line A line that stretches dynami
434. ot the same layout for several times or specify output options for multiple layouts you can use named page settings Managing layouts in a drawing You can rename layouts delete layouts and view a list of all layouts available in a drawing You can also change the order in which the Layout tabs appear the Model tab is always stationary lf you want to rename delete or reorder a layout when the Layout tabs are hidden you can type layout to make your changes or choose Screen Menu gt Tabs to display the tabs To rename a layout 1 Right click the Layout tab to rename 2 Type a new name for the layout 3 Click OK The name can be up to 255 characters in length and can contain letters numbers the dollar sign hyphen and underscore _ or any combination To delete a layout 1 Right click the Layout tab to delete 2 Click OK to confirm the deletion NOTE You cannot delete the Model tab or the last remaining Layout tab To delete all geometry from the Model tab or a Layout tab first select all geometry and then use the Erase command To view a list of all layouts 1 Type ayout and then press Enter 2 On the command line type to list all layouts 3 Type sor press Enter to scroll through the layouts 13 1 4 Create and Modify Layout Viewports When you begin working in a drawing on the Model tab it consists of a single view of your model You may have created additional views by dividing the drawing space into multiple
435. ou can t set the relative path in locak disk or network server driver The relative path for xref original files are assigned as follows Look in the root folder of the host drawing s drive path From the folder of the host drawing follow the specified path path From the root folder follow the specified path path From the folder of the host drawing follow the specified path path From the folder of the host drawing move up one folder level and follow the specified path path From the folder of the host drawing move up two folder levels and follow the specified path lf you have changed the path that include the xref drawings such as moving the file or save it to a different path or disk then all the relative paths of the xref must be changed individually so as to adapt to the new position of its parasitifer No Path Specifies the path type of inserting xref as No path the xref will not save the path information if you want to search the original file of xref you can search through the following ways search for the current folder of original drawing Search for the DWG file search path defined in File tab in Options dialog box Search for the start folder assigned by shortcut of Windows applications No Path is useful when users want to move their drawings to another or an unkown folder hibrearchy To change the path for a single external reference 1 Choose Insert gt Xref Manager 2 Select the external referen
436. parameters or variables of the function is second item Create a LISP program Steps to write application using LISP 1 Open a text edited window such as NOTEBOOK 2 Write code in the text edited window 3 Saves the new code file with the desired path and file name from File Save As menu option extension name as 1st 4 Verify the code input The following properties are contained in LISP functions 1 The codes are displayed in indent mode as other program languages do but take no effects on performing programs 2 Newline is used to facilitate understanding and reading and place multi row codes in one line which does not effect performing the program 3 All LISP statements are contained in the brackets which always appear in pairs 4 If multiple brackets pairs are contained in a statement execute from the interior bracket 5 Text in codes appears behind the semicolon is a kind of annotation Any text with semicolon in front will be ignored by programs All LISP functions return value to the other function that invoke them By default the value is calculated by the last expression Generally the function princ without character string parameter follows the function that its name precede with a prefix c This function is aimed at exiting program without returning any value Load and Run LISP Program LISP program is available only after loading while how to apply a LISP program relies on the program itself if functions are create
437. pecify the rows and columns offset distance and angle of offset 5 Click OK OO Modify toolbar H8 Command line ARRAY To create a rectangular array select the object to copy A type the number of rows and columns and then specify the distance between each row B and column C Create Polar Arrays You can specify a center or base point to copy the selected objects to create a polar array The polar array is drawn clockwise or counterclockwise depending on whether you type a positive or negative value The radius is determined by the distance between the specified center point and a reference or base point on the last selected object To create a polar array 1 Choose Modify gt Array 2 In the array tab click Polar Array 3 Click the select objects button select entities to array in your drawing 4 In the array tab choose method and values you desired JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 158 MODIFY OBJECTS 5 Click OK OO Modify toolbar UU Command line ARRAY To create a polar array select the object to copy A specify the center point of the array B and then specify the number of items to array the angle the array is to fill and whether to rotate the items Array in 3D 3DARRY command is designed to create 3D arrays in the 3D space The arrays include both rectangular and polar array Besides specifying the number of rows X direction an
438. placing the copy you can perform one of the following methods Base point You must to specify two points on the drawing The first one is a base point the other one determines the location of the copy Vector You need to specify a point to determine the location of the copy The base point is the original point 0 0 0 To copy an edge 1 Choose Modify gt Solids Editing gt Copy Edge 2 Select the edge s to copy and press Enter 3 Specify a base point 4 Specify an end point ia Solids Editing toolbar JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 204 MODIFY OBJECTS Specify the edge s to copy A the The resulting entity with the edge base point B and the end copied point C Color Edges You can assign color to the edges of 3D solids The specified color of edges overwrites the color of the layer on which the edges drawn To color an edge 1 Choose Modify gt Solids Editing gt Color Edges 2 Select the edge s to color and press Enter 3 Specify a color Solids Editing toolbar gC 8 6 5 Imprint Separate Shell Check and Clean 3D Solids You can change the appearance of 3D objects separate or create shells at the specified thickness for 3D objects by imprinting separating or shelling You can remove redundant edges points imprinted and unused objects through cleaning them You can also check to see the selected objects are the available 3
439. printed using their default properties To assign print style tables 1 If necessary click the desired Layout tab or click the Model tab 2 Choose File gt Plot 3 Click the Plot style table tab From the pull down list select a print style table in the one of the following JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 13 None Applies no print style table Objects print according to their own properties icad Uses the default print style table and its color assignments Monochrome Prints all colors as black 4 Select Save Changes to Layout and then click Apply to Layout Standard toolbar Command line PLOT NOTE When your drawing was first created it was set up to use either color dependent or named print style tables Manage Plot Style Tables Color dependent CTB and named STB plot style tables are stored in the Plot Styles folder by default This folder is also known as the Plot Style Manager Plot Style Manager is available to add delete rename copy and edit plot style tables Creating new print style tables ZWCAD offers several print style tables to help you get started If you want to customize your print output further you can create your own print style table You can customize plot exporting pattern by import printer configuration file PCP file To create new print style tables 1 Choose File gt Print Styles Manager 2 Double click C
440. properties of named objects local defined To bind an existing external reference to a drawing JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 282 BLOCKS ATTRIBUTE AND XREFS 1 Choose Insert gt Xref Manager 2 Select the external reference to bind 3 Click Bind 4 Choose one of the following Bind Binds the external reference and creates a unique name for each named object such as a layer or block that is located in the external reference For example a layer named Electric in the external reference will be named Xref O Electric in the current drawing If the current drawing already has a layer or block with the same name the name is changed incrementally for example Xref 1 Electric Insert Binds the external reference but does not change the names of any named objects in the external reference For example a layer named Electric in the external reference will have the same name Electric in the current drawing If the current drawing has a layer or block with the same name the named object in the external reference takes on the properties of the named object in the current drawing 5 Click OK Insert toolbar Command line XREF Detach External References To detach the xref from the drwing the selected xrefs will be removed from the xref list Meanwhile relative xref in current drawing will be removed as well This can be also applied to xrefs directly attached to
441. put Left click to toggle on or off To change the items that display on the status bar 1 Right click an empty area of the status bar 2 Select an item to add or remove it To change the setting of an item on the status bar Right click the status bar item you want to change and then select the desired setting To display or hide the status bar Choose View gt Display gt Status Bar Command line STATBAR Using prompt boxes JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 2 ZWCAD commands often provide several options These options appear in the status bar or command bar and also in a prompt box called a context men initially displayed in the upper right corner of the screen You can move the prompt box by dragging it future prompt boxes will appear where you last placed it The options appear as menu selections Choose the appropriate option by selecting it in the prompt box To close a prompt box click the Close box CIRCLE angent Tangent Radius urn are into circle ultiple eircles amc el Command options appear in a prompt box The prompt box is closed by default To turn on the display of prompt boxes choose Tools gt Options click the Display tab and then click the Display screen menu check box to clear it 2 5 2 Save and Restore Profiles Creating profiles for different users or projects and sharing profiles by importing and exporting p
442. py of the entity being mirrored Specify U Undo option to abort last mirroring Specify X eXit option to exit mirror manipulation JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 194 MODIFY OBJECTS Move the pointing device to specify second mirror point the entity will be mirrored along the line connecting the selected grip on objects and the second mirror point or create a copy of the entity after mirroring 8 5 Modifying the properties of entities Overview of Object Properties You can display information about the selected entities The information varies depending on the type of entities you select All of the listings display the following information Entity type Layer Color Linetype The location of the entity its xyz coordinates relative to the current user coordinate system UCS The size of the entity the information varies depending on the entity type The layer color linetype are the common properties that most of objects possess There are a few properties that some individual objects possess such as radius and area of a circle length and angle of a line Most of properties can be applied to an object by layer or applied to an object directly If value BYLAYER is set to the property value the object has the same value as the layer on which it is drawn For example if you set Yellow to the layer O and assign value BYLAYER to the l
443. r polyline with unify width PostScript restricts system settings as proximate lines combination with end seal and mitre DWF Export ZWCAD drawings as Web DWF formats As a two dimension vector file DWF publish ZWCAD drawings on Web or Intranet network DWF file supports realtime panning or scaling and controls how the layers and named views are displayed SAT Exports solids region ACIS entities as SAT format using ACISOUT command Additionally trimmed ShapeManager objects of the NURBS face region and 3D solids are also exported as SAT file To export an ACIS file 1 Choose File gt Export 2 Select the ACIS entities you want to save 3 Specify the name of the file you want to create 4 Click Save Command line EXPORT 14 2 4 Work with Proxy Objects When the Runtime Extension application that created the custom object is not available to JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 14 ZWCAD or other host applications a proxy object is used as a substitute for a custom object Later the custom object replaces the proxy object if the application is available to ZWCAD As compared to corresponding custom objects Proxy objects are endowed with significantly reduced capabilities The extent to which proxy objects can be edited is determined by the parent Runtime Extension application For example to determine whether to erase and move an object or change object
444. r of the viewport whose scale you want to modify In the Properties palette select Standard Scale and then select a new scale from the list The scale you choose is applied to the viewport NOTE You can select only layout viewports for modification If you click a viewport on the Model tab it makes that viewport active not available for modification Lock the Scale of Layout Viewports Some proportions maybe required for displaying details of different hierarchy when creating viewports If you want to scale the viewport once you have set the viewport scale the scaling factor changes along with the viewport scales You can lock the scale factor before scaling to retain the viewport proportion Locks the scale set in the selected viewport You can modify the geometric drawings in current viewport without changing the viewport scale once the scale is locked While unlock viewport scale again will disable many commands used for viewing such as VPOINT DVIEW PLAN and VIEW Control Visibility in Layout Viewports Various methods are available for controlling whether to display or hide the layout viewport All these methods help limiting the regen and highlight different elements of the drawing having been set the Visibility Screen Objects in Layout Viewports Screening means plotting with little ink The screening objects will be displayed diminish on paper and screen Whereas the screening value may not affect the color properties of the objects
445. r off 4 Select the edge of the layout viewport to turn on or off and then press Enter Manage Layer Visibility in a Layout You can control the visibility of the layer in each layout viewport and apply the default visibility settings to new viewports and layers Freeze Specified Layers in a Layout Viewport Freeze or thaw layers on current layout viewports without affecting others The frozen layers are invisible either reloaded or plotted You can freeze the layer to control how the objects are displayed For example dimensions can be displayed in specific viewport as the figure shows below only the viewport with terrain drawing is frozen iy m pets Once frozen the layer in the viewport is invisible With the layer thawing its visibility can be restored User can control the frozen status of layers by clicking Freeze in current viewport option in layer property manager Freeze or Thaw Layers Automatically in New Layout Viewports Freeze the layer containing those objects that are not expected to display or plot in paper space For example freeze the layer on which viewports are created if layout viewport boundaries are not expected to display JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 316 LAYOUT PLOT AND PUBLISH DRAWINGS Freeze or Thaw Layers Automatically in New Layout Viewports The new created layout viewport is also acceptable for layer visibility settings For
446. r toolbar are described in the table below JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 216 NOTES AND LABELS Icon Name Function Description ie Myltileader Creates a multileader object fee Add Leader Adds leaders to the selected multileader object Ja Remove Leader Removes the leader from the multileader object Open Multileader Style Manager dialog box in Multileader Style io y which you create modify or delet multileader style Create multileader Enter MLEADER command according to prompt to create multileaders on any location in the drawing Steps for creating multileader with MText 1 Select Dimension Multileader 2 Specify leader arrowhead s location 3 Specify leader landing s location 4 Enter multitext in text box as a leader content click OK button to complete the multileader creating Steps for creating multileader with Block 1 Select Dimension Multileader 2 Enter O option and set the multileader content type to block then exit 3 Specify leader arrowhead s location 4 Specify the location of the multileader to finish drawing Multileader style The leader type of the multileader can set to spline or straight TET TEXT Line Spline The content of the multileader can set to MText or Block TEAT Multiline Text leader Landing Leader Landing Leader 1 nader Block More details of multileader style setti
447. rawing file DWT refers to template drawing file and DWF refers to network design format The additional SAT and WMF file should be imported by relevant command Import DXF Files As a drawing exchange file DXF file contains text file of drawing information which is also an expression of ASCII or binary system of drawing file Mainly used for sharing drawing data among applications Select DXF file from the file type dropdown list to import this file into applications when performing Open function in ZWCAD You can import it into other drawing file and explode It JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 342 SHARE DATA BETWEEN DRAWINGS AND APPLICATIONS To import a DXF DWF or DWT file 1 Choose File gt Open 2 Choose the folder that contains the drawing 3 In Files of Type choose the type of drawing you want to import 4 Choose the file you want to open 5 Click Open Stardard Toolbar W Command line OPEN Import ACIS SAT Files You can import geometry objects stored in SAT ASCII files using ACISIN or IMPORT commands SAT ASCII files stores entities as solids region or ACIS ZWCAD converts the model to a body object or to solids and regions if the body is a true solid or a true region After the conversion ZWCAD creates new objects using its ShapeManager modeler and performs 3D operations and solids editing To import an ACIS file 1 Choose Insert gt ACIS fil
448. rawings Search Path Files tab Sets the search path ZWCAD uses to find drawing support files such as text fonts drawings linetypes and hatch patterns Interface color Skins and Themes tab Sets ZWCAD window skins and display themes Controlling size and position of each toolbar or window After starting ZWCAD you can fix or adjust position and size of each toolbar or window by dragging Software interface includes column order window Properties option board Quick Calculator window Design Center window and so on Controlling position of toolbar Toolbars can be floating or fixed The floating toolbar locates in arbitrary location of the drawing area of ZWCAD window can be dragged to its new location adjust its size or fixed Fixed toolbar attaches to any of the edges in drawing area once the toolbar is fixed its size can t be adjusted You can remove the fixed toolbar by dragging it to a new fixing position Controlling size and position of other windows When dragging command window Properties option board Quick Calculator window buoys displayed in corners and center position of drawing area if not select buoys but dragging the selected window to arbitrary position of drawing area the window will be on floating state users can adjust size of the window based on the actual needs If Click on the one of the buoys in the process of dragging the location of the window will be fixed to the top bottom and l
449. rdinate systems ccceseseeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 93 6 2 4 Setting the current user coordinate syste ssania a 94 6 2 5 Ue UCS PRESCIS setae ae E eeceemaene 94 6 2 6 Control the User Coordinate System ccccccccccccceeeceesssseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 94 Create OD OCS scssisssisssicescicccssstsscscnctiaccsssececesestcecesesss LOU Takes Draw Lineal OD CCS icin nection asin cade e EE E cds cess A 100 7 1 1 ET E EE AEE Y AAY fa A EIA E EEE E E EE E ANA 100 TA WA TAY Geran ei cet E ence I E E TE Mia EE E E E OT 101 7 1 3 Construction LINS rennan aa O E E E 101 7 1 4 Miultiple Line OD CCtS oeni a 102 7 1 5 FORNT DE iea e e E E EE E EE 103 7 1 6 Create Polylines from the Boundaries of Objects cccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 105 TA A POR Y CONS aeren a a an 107 7 1 8 Rectan leS iann es deals waters wa daenacacdnd sumed auouinansdens 108 7 1 9 PODE ies daria Oe pada tented dawta a E E E S 108 TALOS WMA CCS e a nate tierce sas a a a bailscaenss 109 Tlie FECT ATIG SKELCHSS io octesed seta acoesinatenneacouten a a E 109 72 Draw Curved ODI SCS a 111 Male e Y a a sa hen a a a ic aahoatias 111 Tadd Si E l entree acon SER A EEE EAA Pvt Ue S AE E ey renee cer 114 7 2 3 Ellipses and Ellipse ares vstscaseaxssievcanescasnesesonstatsiacuesicaasbateurvambealeniceatweeanes 116 7 2 4 SO POITINS Bein nie tetera clea the ceien Sica Siete ead baacdbat a aaleadtcesedwireissantntmicae leans cesbuaanidatean ets 117 FaF
450. reate a Print Style Table 3 Complete the setup wizard On the last wizard page you can click Print Style Table Editor to set up the print styles for the table Standard toolbar Command line PLOT Change Plot Style Settings Double clicking a CTB or STB file in the Plotter Manager to open the Plot Style Table Editor The Plot Style Table Editor displays the plot styles contained in the specified plot style table The General tab lists general information about the table The Properties tab provides options for modifying colors or relevant properties of plot styles lf you are using a color dependent plot style table the color dependent properties e g color grayscale screening lineweight are available from the right side of the dialog box While all these plot style properties e g color grayscale screening lineweight are changed for each plot style from the Properties when using a named plot style table In a named plot style table the NORMAL plot style represents an object s default properties no plot style applied The NORMAL style can t be modified or deleted by your self Colors The plot style color default to Use Entity Color With this setting the object retains its layer or individually set color The color overrides the object s color at plot time if you assign a plot style color for this plot style System provides 255 Color Index ACI colors a true color or a color book color in the JL Systems Group S
451. reate a diametral dimension 1 Choose Dimensions gt Diameter 2 Select the arc or circle 3 Specify the dimension line location F Dimension toolbar 2 Command line DIMDIAMETER JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 248 DIMENSION AND TOLERANCES Select the circle A and then specify the Result dimension line location B 10 3 5 Create Ordinate Dimensions Ordinate dimensions are used to measure the perpendicular distance from an origin point called the datum to a feature such as a hole in a part Ordinate dimensions are comprised of a leader line with an X or Y value These dimensions are called datum dimensions X or Y value is calculated in the current UCS and leaders are drawn along the orthographic direction at the current UCS The dimension values are the absolute values By maintaining accurate offsets of the features from the datum these dimensions can prevent escalating errors 471 00 ordinate dimensions X ordinate dimensions show the distance of a feature from the datum along the X axis And Y ordinate dimensions show the distance along the Y axis The system determines whether the dimension is X or Y ordinate dimension depending on the point you specify If the distance is greater for the Y value the system creates an X ordinate dimension Otherwise the system creates a Y ordinate dimension Y ordinate Ordinate
452. redisplay the timer information Type reset to reset the elapsed timer to zero 3 Press Enter to exit the command Command line TIME 5 13 Specify Intervals on Objects You can divide a line arc circle polyline ellipse or spline into a number of equal segments or mark off intervals of a specific length along an object Note that divide is not the same as break For example you may want to place station point markers every 50 feet along the centerline of a roadway or divide the plan view of a window into three equal width sections of glass placing a mullion at each division point To specify measurements and divisions use these commands For the length of the segments use the Measure command For the number of equal length segments use the Divide command You can measure or divide arcs circles lines polylines ellipses and splines With either command you can identify the segments by placing either a block or point object at the end of each interval If you use points you can snap to the ends of intervals using the point object snap The appearance of the point objects is determined by the current point display type which you control in the Point Style dialog box of Format menu To use a block as the marker the block must already be defined in the current drawing You can further indicate whether to rotate the block to align perpendicularly to the object you are measuring or dividing JL Systems Group Slottsmollan
453. relative to the drawing screen so that points retain their visual size as you use the Zoom command to change the magnification of the drawing To change the size and appearance of point objects 1 Choose Format gt Point Style 2 Under Point Style select the style you want 3 Under Point Size select the point size or choose one of the options 4 Click OK Command line DDPTYPE When you regenerate the drawing all point objects change to reflect the new size and appearance settings 7 1 10 Traces Creating traces using TRACE command The endpoints of a trace is on the center line and are always cut square TRACE automatically calculates the correct bevels for connection to adjacent segments Traces appear solid filled if Fill mode is on When Fill mode is off only the outline of a trace is displayed 7 1 11 Freehand Sketches A freehand sketch consists of many straight line segments created either as individual line objects or as a polyline Before you begin creating a freehand sketch you must set the length or increment of each segment The smaller the segments the more accurate your sketch but segments that are too small can greatly increase the file size After you specify the length of the sketch segments the crosshairs change to a Pencil tool Your freehand sketch is not added to the drawing until you write the sketch into your drawing This means that you temporarily save the segment that you ve drawn and the s
454. rence 1 Choose Insert gt Xref Manager 2 Select the external reference to open 3 Click Open Insert toolbar Command line XREF Under the expedite network operations users can update xrefs by reloading regardless of any changes happen to the original file of xrefs But the variance path for the original file may cause the xrefs updating failed you must specify actual saving path for the xrefs OCAQ OAO OMAKO OSKO Q2 Q xref attached edited xref file xref Updated Notification of Changed Xrefs After the xrefs having been attached to the drawing system automatically check whether the original drawing file are modified in certain intervals since it loaded or reloaded the last time The xref icon located at the right lower corner of the status bar appears an exclamatory mark once the xref file has been modified and needs to reload You can click this icon to open xref Manager to reload the changed xrefs Xref notification behavior is controlled by the XREFNOTIFY system variable JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 278 BLOCKS ATTRIBUTE AND XREFS r A reference file has and may need reloading By default modified xrefs will be checked every five minutes You can change the time intervals by setting the XNOTIFYTIME system registry variable using setenv XNOTIFYTIME n where n is a number of minutes between 1 and 10080 seven days Note that X
455. ress Enter to select an object that defines the cross sectional plane Specify an axis by typing Z and pressing Enter 4 Specify which side to retain or type b to retain both sides Solids toolbar a Command line SLICE 8 6 3 Modify Faces of 3D Solids You can modify faces of 3D solids through extruding moving rotating offsetting tapering delete copying or changing the color of the selected faces Extrude Faces You can extrude one or more faces of 3D solids at the specified height and path Negative value extrudes faces along to the positive normal positive value extrudes faces along to the negative normal After specifying the height the system prompts you to specify the angle of taper for extrusion If you specify the angular value is greater than 0 the plane tapers in from the base object if the value is negative the face tapers out By default the value is of 0 which extrudes the face perpendicular The extrusion stops when the tapered face shrinks into a point If you select Path option the selected face extrudes at the specified line or curve objects The objects that can be specified as a extrusion path contains line circle arc ellipse ellipse arc polyline and spline These objects should not be coplanar with the object nor should have areas of high curvature Generally one of endpoints of the selected extrusion path should lie on the center of the face to extrude if not the system will do it To extrude a solid
456. rim an object 1 Choose Modify gt Trim 2 Select one or more cutting edges and then press Enter 3 Select the object to trim 4 Select another object to trim or press Enter to complete the command Modify toolbar as JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 168 MODIFY OBJECTS Command line TRIM To trim objects select the cutting edge A and then select Result the objects to trim B Holding down SHIFT while selecting objects system extends object to the nearest boundary instead of trimming selecting object In this example you clean up the intersection of two walls smoothly by trimming Oo a cutting edges object to trim result selected with a selected crossing selection Using variable selection methods while trimming several objects can help you select edges or objects more easily In the following example the cutting edges are selected using crossing selection on eee Sd edges selected wih objectstotrimselected result crossing selection To trim several objects using the fence selection method 1 Choose Modify gt Trim 2 Select one or more cutting edges and then press Enter 3 On the command line type fence 4 Specify the first point of the fence 5 Specify the second point of the fence 6 Specify the next fence point or press Enter to complete the command Modify toolbar Ze Command line TRIM JL Systems G
457. rmat gt Layer 2 Clicks the name of Plot Style in the layer list to open Plot Style Table dialog box from which you can specify the desired plot style 3 Clicks OK button Properties toolbar Command line LAYER 5 8 4 Filter and Sort the List of Layers Limits the display of layer name listed in the Layer Properties Manager ang sorts the PY Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 5 name or by properties such as color and visibility You can use a layer filter limits the display of layer names in the Layer Properties Manager The following properties can be included in the filter definition Whether layers are set to be plotted Layer names colors linetypes lineweights and plot styles Whether layers are locked or unlocked Whether layers are turned on or off Whether layers are frozen or thawed in the current viewport or all viewports When seiting filter conditions you can also use wild card characters to filter names by name For example typing nare displays layer name preceded with nare just click Add button if the filter name has been specified You can also use invert filter to display layer names that do not be included filter definition For example if all the site plan information of a drawing is contained in multiple layers which include the word lite as part of the layer name you should first define the filter by way of specifying filter name and inputting lite
458. rns you can define simple patterns by changing angle and space of pattern lines based on current linetype This is so called User define Specifying a hatch pattern A hatch pattern consists of a repeating pattern of lines dashes and dots You can select a hatch pattern from a set of predefined patterns or you can define a pattern of your own The hatch pattern you used most recenily is the default pattern the next time you add hatching The program supplies predefined standard hatch patterns which are stored in the CAD pat and ICAD SO pat hatch pattern library files NOTE The ICAD pat hatch pattern library files are ANSI American National Standards Institute compliant patterns the ICADISO pat hatch pattern library files are ISO International Standards Organization compliant To specify a predefined hatch pattern 1 Choose Draw gt Hatch 2 From the Hatch dialog box click the Style Options tab 3 Under the Hatch Type and pattern in the Type list click Predefined With Predefined you can apply a scale factor to make the pattern larger or smaller than the default size 4 For Scale enter the scale factor as a percentage of the default 5 For Angle enter the angle of the pattern in degrees 1 360 The default angle is clockwise you can change the angle of any hatch pattern by entering a numerical value 6 For ISO Pen Width enter the pen width This option is only available if you select existing ISO hatch pattern
459. rofile files are enabled in ZWCAD By default your current options are stored in a profile named Default The current profile name as well as the current drawing name are displayed in the Options dialog box in ZWCAD ZWCAD siores the profile information in the system registry and saves it as a text file an ARG file ZWCAD also organizes essential data and maintains changes in the registry as required lf you make changes to your current profile during an ZWCAD session and you want to save those changes in the ARG file you must export the profile When you export the profile with the current profile name ZWCAD updates the ARG file with the new settings You can re import the profile into ZWCAD to update your profile settings 2 6 Tool Palettes Tool Palettes provide an efficient tool that is used to organize share and place command block as well as other tools With Tool Palettes you can organize blocks and commands in a window in order to use them efficiently You can configure tool palettes with the shortcut menus by right clicking the mouse on the different areas of the Tool Palettes window For example with the shortcut menu you can add rename or remove tool palettes as well as copying a tool on the current tool palette to another palette The objects that are created using a tool from the Tool Palettes have the same properties as the objects you create from the menu or toolbar To run a command click the desired tool on the T
460. rogram restricts the drawing of entities to the current isometric plane TIP To toggle between isometric planes press F5 To turn the Isometric Snap And Grid option on 1 Choose Tools gt Drafting Settings 2 Click the Snap and Grid tab 3 In snap t ype amp style tab select the Isometric Snap check box 4 Under Isometric Crosshairs click the option for the isometric plane you want Top Left or Right 5 Click OK Isometric planes left A ight B top C 5 4 Use Object Snaps Object snaps enable you to quickly select exact geometric points on existing entities without having to know the exact coordinates of those points With object snaps you can select the endpoint of a line or arc the center point of a circle the intersection of any two entities or any other geometrically significant position You can also use object snaps to draw entities that are tangent or perpendicular to an existing entity You can use object snaps whenever the program prompts you to specify a point for example if you are drawing a line or other object To turn on the ESNAP mode any of the following ways is available Execute from Tools Draft Settings menu option toggle to Object Snap page and tick the Object Snap On checkbox Press F3 Right click on the ESNAP button on Status bar choose On When using object snaps the program recognizes only visible objects or visible portions of objects You cannot snap to objects on lay
461. roup Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 Select the boundary edge A and then specify the first Result point B and second point C of the fence You can trim objects to the nearest point of other objects Selecting objects and clicking objects to trim system specifies the nearest objects as the cutting edges The following picture shows that the crossing boundary is smooth after trimming a an S7 cutting edges selected objects to trim result with crossing selection selected Extend Objects You can extend objects so that they end at a boundary defined by other objects You can also extend objects to the point at which they would intersect an implied boundary edge When extending objects you first select the boundary edges and then specify the objects to extend by way of selecting them one by one or using the fence selection method You can extend arcs lines two dimensional polylines and rays Arcs circles ellipses lines splines polylines rays infinite lines and viewports on a Layout tab can act as boundary edges In this example you extend the lines precisely to a circle which is the boundary edge boundary selected objectsto extend selected result To extend an object 1 Choose Modify gt Extend 2 Select one or more objects as boundary edges and then press Enter 3 Select the object to extend 4 Select another object to extend or press Enter to
462. s 4 Press Enter 5 Press Enter to create a new clipping boundary 6 If prompted press Enter to delete any existing boundaries 7 Choose Select Polyline 8 Select the polyline to use as clipping boundary Reference toolbar Command line XCLIP Clip Depth The front and back clipping planes for xrefs can be set before clipping the xref To specify a clip depth the xref must contain a clipping boundary The clip depth is always calculated normal to the clipping boundary When setting clip depth you are prompted to specify a front and back point or distance relative to the clipped plane Regardless of the current UCS the clip depth is only available at the direction parallel to the clipping boundary JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 11 existing drawings another similar drawing is referenced result a partial of the reference reserved Deleting a clipping boundary If you no longer need a clipping boundary for an external reference you can delete it To delete a clipping boundary 1 Choose Modify gt Clip gt Xref 2 Select the desired external references 3 Press Enter 4 Choose Delete and then press Enter 5 Click the clipped portion of the external reference The previously hidden portion of the referenced drawing displays Reference toolbar Command line XCLIP Binding an xref to a drawing External references are not part of
463. s x Ax By C y Dx Ey F In which x geographical X coordinate corresponding to pixel y geographical Y coordinate corresponding to pixel x pixel coordinate Colume number y pixel coordinate Line number A Pixel resolution at X direction D B rotation system E Pixel resolution at Y direction C X coordinate of pixel center at left upper corner of grid map F Y coordinate of pixel center at left upper corner of grid map Click Using Positioning file option you can specify insertion point of tif iamge and its scale using twf file Find button is available as soon as you check the Using Positioning file option and click on this button you can select proper TFW file Scale Raster Images To attach a raster image to current drawing you can specify scale factor in the Image dialog box otherwise to attach it by its original size The raster image will be scaled by the specified factor the scale factor is used without unit by default lf the attached image contains resolution information for defining DPI the specified scale factor will be united with measure to scale attached raster image If resolution information is not included then the original width of the image will be taken as unit for the scale factor when attaching the image Detach Raster Images Raster images can be detached if it no longer needs to use in the drawing a specified image detached from the drawing together with its multiple copies links and definiti
464. s are the same as the one applied to all text created in your drawing Supply User Text to Dimensions Besides of the prefixes and suffixes specified for primary and alternate units you can provide your own text Because the prefix suffix and user supplied text can be treated as a single text string they can be used to represent tolerance stacks and the changes can be applied to font text size and other characteristics using the text editor The separator symbol X is used to separate user text above and below the dimension line Text prior to this symbol is aligned with and below the dimension line Text following this symbol is aligned with and below the dimension line For example if you select Text while creating dimensions and then input user text lt gt ZWCAD X WELCOME thus the user text is separated above and below the dimension line In which lt gt stands for main units X separates the text by a dimension line 10 2 4 Control Dimension Values Set the display format of dimension values JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 236 DIMENSION AND TOLERANCES Dimension Units You can determine the appearance and format of the primary and alternate dimension units The preview frame on the upper right corner of the Modify Dimension Style dialog box shows the appearance of the dimensions based on the current dimension style settings On the Primary Units
465. s creaectoncia sean chuintnamean tance E E A 73 SOL Overview Of Line were ts aids eane ee a 73 JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk Sel sDisplay Time wel onsen teen eek aera dene o ia aacehandadee enesskane naman 73 5 10 3 Change the Lineweight of an ODJeCt 0 ccccccccccccceeeseseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 74 5 11 Control the Display of Overlapped Objects 0 0 0 0 cccccccccccccccecceeeessseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 75 5 12 Extract or Calculate Geometric Information from Objects ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 77 Stele MS alCU IANS ALCAG a E E T1 5 12 2 Calculating distances and angles cccccssssecccccccecccceesesesseeseeecceeseseeeeeqaas 79 5 12 3 Displaying information about your drawing cccccccssssssseeseseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaas 80 5 13 Specify Mieryals On OD ECan ire cias a iets aang eect ve ie eines 81 Coordinates And Coordinate System cccsscccsssses OD 6 1 Coordina S aa T E EE asap asaan aa saadauaaastannauaei aaa 85 6 1 1 EMT 2D Coordin S eee O E O E 85 6 1 2 Using three dimensional coordinates eessssssssesseseoeeesssssssssssssseeeerrrresssssss 88 6 1 3 Use Coordinite FICE sorcis aR 89 6 2 Contol the User Coordinate S yster ner E E R NEATE 91 6 2 1 Coordinate S ystee aee a a a E a E 91 6 2 2 Control the User Coordinate System in 3D ccsssseseesseeeeececeeeeeeeeenaas 92 6 2 3 Defining and naming user coo
466. s getting the first point If two points are within the frame the curve will be extended to the nearest intersection among the two end points and then get the wrapped curve with the same theory as treating the first point You should pay attention to the following matters when operating wrap processing It s both enabled wrap processing no matter in model space or in layout space As JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 manipulating trim and extend operations in different soace while performing TRIM and EXTEND command Wrap processing is incapable of snapping entities even if the ESNAP is on during the wrapping procedure the ESNAP will be off temporarily and turn back to On state as soon as the wrap processing finished Changes for UCS take no effect on wrap processing Supports UNDO partially that is to input u or ctrl z to cancel the last manipulation but not exit the command 8 2 14 Create Breaks You can break arcs circles ellipses lines polylines rays and infinite lines When breaking entities you must specify two points for the break By default the point you use to select the entity becomes the first break point however you can use the First break point option to select a break point different from the one that selects the entity l 2 first break point second break point result To break an object 1 Choose Modify gt Break 2 Select
467. s in the following ways Make presentations by showing snapshots of your drawings Reference a snapshot of a drawing while working on a different drawing Present a number of snapshots as a slide show by using scripts When you view a snapshot it temporarily replaces the current drawing When you refresh the display of the current drawing by redrawing panning Zooming minimizing maximizing or tiling the snapshot image disappears and you are returned to the current drawing A snapshot does not include any invisible entities on layers To create a snapshot 1 Choose Tools gt Make Snapshot 2 In the Create Snapshot dialog box specify the name of the snapshot file you want to create 3 From the Files Of Types list choose either emf wmf or sld 4 Click Save Command line MSLIDE The current drawing remains on the screen and the snapshot is saved to the directory that you specify To view a snapshot 1 Choose Tools gt View Snapshot 2 In the View Snapshot dialog box specify the name of the snapshot file you want to view 3 Click Open ZWCAD displays the snapshot in the current drawing window Command line VSLIDE You can view previously saved snapshots and you can also view snapshots created using other CAD software 14 2 Link and Embed Data You can include data from other programs in ZWCAD drawings by using either embedding or linking The method you choose depends on the type of object or file you wan
468. s of a model with equal intensity Ambient light has no single source or direction and does not diminish in intensity over distance angular dimension A dimension that measures angles or arc segments and consists of text extension lines and leaders DIMANGULAR angular unit The unit of measurement for an angle Angular units can be measured in decimal degrees degrees minutes seconds grads and radians annotations Text dimensions tolerances symbols or notes ANSI For American National Standards Institute Coordinator of voluntary standards development for both private and public sectors in the United States Standards pertain to programming languages Electronic Data Interchange EDI telecommunications and the physical properties of diskettes cartridges and magnetic tapes anti aliasing A method that reduces aliasing by shading the pixels adjacent to the main pixels that define a line or boundary approximation points Point locations that a B spline must pass near within a fit tolerance JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 16 array Multiple copies of selected objects in a rectangular or polar radial pattern ARRAY arrowhead A terminator such as an arrowhead slash or dot at the end of a dimension line showing where a dimension begins and ends ASCII For American Standard Code for Information Interchange A common numeric code used in co
469. s off of the surfaces Point lights can also have a size or diameter to them so that they cast soft shadows Distant light A Distant light represents a light from a large distance away from the surfaces in the drawing e g the sun All of the light rays are essentially parallel to each other so the shadows cast by the light have sharp edges To apply materials backgrounds and lighting Choose View gt Render and then choose Materials Background or Light On the Render toolbar click the Materials tool Background or Lights tool Type materials backgrounds or lighting and then press Enter 4 7 9 Printing a rendered image You cannot print a rendered image directly to a printer Instead you must first save the drawing to a different format either a bitmap bmp JPEG jpg TIFF tif TrueVision TGA tga or Portable Network Graphic png After you save a rendered image you can print it from another graphics program Once you have generated a rendered image that you would like to save you can use the Save Last Image button in the Render Settings dialog box to save the image to a file Images can be saved in BMP JPEG TIFF TGA or PNG format The saved image will be in 24 bit full color format at the same resolution as rendered on the screen You also save the render image by click the Render in the Render to File tap from the Render Settings d JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35
470. s on an arc Start point center point endpoint Start point center point included angle Start point center point chord length Start point endpoint included angle Start point endpoint starting direction Start point endpoint radius Center point start point endpoint Center point start point included angle Center point start point chord length As a tangent continuation of the previous arc or line Draw Arcs by Specifying Three Points You can draw an arc by specifying three points which are separately the start point of the arc a point anywhere on the arc and the endpoint of the arc In the following example the start point of the arc snaps to the endpoint of a line The second point of the arc snaps to the middle circle in the illustration draw an are by specifying three points To draw an arc by specifying three points 1 Choose Draw gt Arc gt 3 Points 2 Specify the start point 3 Specify a second point 4 Specify the endpoint Draw toolbar w Command line ARC JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 7 Start point A second point B and endpoint C Draw Arcs by Specifying Start Center End Under command line prompts for drawing arc draw an arc by specifying center start point and end point 3k E statii centerf2 endi certertlys starti2j endid To draw an arc by specifying its start point center point and endpoint 1 Choose
471. s pixels JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 12 As consists of multiple rectangular grids raster images can be copied moved or clipped as well as an normal object in the drawing You can change the position and size of the image by dragging its grips You can also adjust the contrast transparency image quality and image frame visibility as well from the menu option Modify Object Image Image file formats ZWCAD supports most of the frequently used file formats such as computer graphics document management engineering mapping and geographic information systems GIS and image file of bitonal 8 bit gray 8 bit color or 24 bit color Once you have inserted an image with transparent pixel the drawing behind the transparent pixel will be displayed when you turn on the image transparency If you insert a bitonal image the background color pixel is processed by transparency either gray or color images is assigned to support transparent pixels Additionally when inserting raster images the file format depend on the content of the file rather than the extension name The following table display all the image file formats supported by ZWCAD Type Description and versions File extension BMP Windows and OS 2 bitmap format omp eee Joint Photographics Expert Group jpg or joeg JPEG PCX Picture PC Paintbrush Picture CX PNG Portable Network Graphic png T
472. s the Current button to make the layer current 3 Clicks OK button Properties toolbar z Command line LAYER Remove Layers You can remove unused layers from your drawing with PURGE or by deleting the layer from the Layer Properties Manager 5 8 3 Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties Everything in a drawing is associated with a layer in the course of creating a drawing you can modify what you draw by renaming layer name modifying the properties of a layer color and linetype or placing objects from one layer to another JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 5 If you create an object on a wrong layer you can reassign it to another layer Unless the linetype color or other properties of the object has been specified explicitly the object acquires the properties of the new layer You can change layer properties in the layer control on the Layers toolbar or in the Layer Properties Manager Click the icons to change settings However layer names and colors can be changed only in the Layer Properties Manager Controlling layer visibility A layer can be visible or invisible Objects on invisible layers are not displayed and do not print By controlling layer visibility you can turn off unnecessary information such as construction lines or notes By changing layer visibility you can put the same drawing to multiple uses For example if you are drawing a
473. s the object and a scale factor that is smaller than 1 shrinks the object i Go object selected object scaled by result factor of 0 5 You can also scale objects by comparing the basic scale and new scale The objects become larger if the new scale is large than the basic scale The dimension will be scale along with the object to scale To scale a selection set by a scale factor 1 Choose Modify gt Scale 2 Select the objects and then press Enter 3 Specify the base point 4 Specify the scale factor Modify toolbar E Command line SCALE To scale an object by a scale factor select the object A Result and then specify the base point B and the scale factor You can also scale some objects using grips To scale an object you select the object and then click a grip You then change the size of the object by moving the grip The grip you select depends on the type of object you re modifying For example to scale a circle select a quadrant point grip To scale an object using grips 1 Select the object 2 Click a grip to select it 3 Drag the grip 4 Click to release JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 To scale using grips select the object A click a grip B and Result scale the object by dragging the grip to its new location C 8 2 10 Lengthen Objects You can change the length of entities or the included angle of arcs
474. save a drawing file but can reduce the size of drawing files It is recommend you perform a full save before transmitting or archiving a drawing 3 4 Error Report An error report module will intercept any unhandled exception generated by ZWCAD build a complete debug report and optionally send a crash report Sending error report may help assess the stability of ZWCAD software while working in user environment and improve the quality of our product When errors are encountered in the procedure of some programs a dialog box pops up for the user to record the cause of the error and send error report automatically created by the software to the assigned email address so as to help us diagnose the cause of the error and improve our software Once the software encounters exceptional shutdown a folder named BugReport will be automatically generated under the catalog C Documents and Settings User Account Application Data CrashReport in which all of the compressed packages generated for the exceptional situations are contained with TXT DMP as well as error drawing files included in each package Here TXT and DMP files share the same name with the compressed package automatically generated Describe Error Contents When errors occur in the program a dialog box prompts ZWCAD EXE has encountered a problem and needs to close we are sorry for the inconveniences for the user to input descriptions of the problem in the text window showing Des
475. sed by others nested external references To attach an external reference 1 Choose Insert gt Xref Manager 2 Click Attach 3 Specify the drawing file to attach as an external reference and then click Open 4 In Reference Type choose how you want to insert the drawing Attachment inserts a copy of the drawing and includes any other drawings that are exter nally referenced within the referenced drawing Overlay lays a copy of a drawing over your original drawing it does not include any nested external references from the externally referenced drawing JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 11 5 Make any additional selections 6 Click OK 7 lf you marked Specify On Screen for any items follow the prompts to attach the external reference z Insert toolbar Command line XREF Notification of Attached Xrefs After inserting external references into the drawing a xref icon displays at the lower right corner of status bar on ZWCAD application window Click this icon shown below to display External Reference manager i a anage refs If the original drawing to which the xref links has been changed and needs to reload an exclamation mark appears on the xref icon Attach External References You can use the following methods to attach xrefs into a drawing Attach xrefs to current drawing using XATTACH command Starts xref manager using XREF comma
476. select or deselect files having been added into the transmittal package by clicking at the check box in front of the file or manually select files you want to include in the transmittal package by clicking at the Add File button on Files Tree or Files Table The common file types that are not automatically added to a transmittal package are shx Compiled shape files used for text styles or complex linetypes ttf True Type font files used for text styles All these files generally contain information about the object in initially formatted drawings or some specific information of applications run with the product the receiver can still normally view the transmitted drawing in spite of lacking these files Include notes in transmittal package Report file is automatically generated while generating transmittal package and saved in the transmittal package together with the files list of the transmittal package as well Meanwhile this report includes dependent files associative to the drawing file Such as xrefs fonts as well as instructions about how to process these files so as to enable using for included drawing files The information that user input in the Enter notes to include with this transmittal are also included in the report file Select Transmittal Setups Once created a transmittal package you can create new or modify existing transmittal setup and save it so that you select it properly from the transmittal setup list on Create trans
477. selected objects and align them offset to the Original objects at a specified distance You can make offset objects using arcs circles ellipses elliptical arcs lines two dimensional polylines rays and infinite lines Making offset copies of curved objects creates larger or smaller curves depending on which side of the original object you place the copy For example placing a offset copy of a circle outside the circle creates a larger concentric circle positioning the copy inside the circle creates a smaller concentric circle You can perform TRIM or EXTEND command while the OFFSET command is active The result is as follows offset trim and extend the offset lines result lf the objects to offset are 2D polyline or spline the system trims them automatically when the specified distance is larger than can otherwise be accommodated Displaying as follows JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 156 MODIFY OBJECTS Or offset automatic trim To make a offset copy by specifying the distance 1 Choose Modify gt offset 2 Specify the distance by selecting two points or by entering a distance 3 Select the object to copy 4 Specify on which side of the object to place the parallel copy 5 Select another object to copy or press Enter to complete the command Modify toolbar ely Command line OFFSET To make a parallel copy specify the distance between copies Resu
478. sions You can use point filters when you work in three dimensional space to locate points in two dimensions and then specify the z coordinate as the elevation above the xy plane For example to begin drawing a line from a point with a z coordinate 3 units above the center of a circle insert the circle and then start the Line command and respond to the prompts as follows ENTER to use last point Follow lt Start of line gt xy Select XY of cen of select a point on the circle Still need Z of 3 locates the starting point 3 units above the center of the circle Length of line specify the length of the line JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 90 COORDINATES AND COORDINATE SYSTEM You can use point filters to draw a line by first selecting a point in the xy plane A specifying the z coordinate B and then specifying the length of the line C 6 2 Control the User Coordinate System 6 2 1 Coordinate System Many commands in ZWCAD require that you specify points as you draw or modify entities You can do so by selecting points with the mouse or by typing coordinate values in the command bar The program locates points in a drawing using a Cartesian coordinate system Understanding how coordinate systems work The Cartesian coordinate system uses three perpendicular axes x y and z to specify points in three dimensional space Every location in a dra
479. sions the dimension line is parallel to the line passing through the extension line origins The aligned dimension is also parallel to the objects you specify The following figure shows two examples of aligned dimension Select the object 1 and then specify the location of the aligned dimension The system creates the extension lines automatically JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 10 1 3 20 OV To create an aligned dimension 1 Choose Dimensions gt Aligned 2 Press Enter and then select the entity to dimension Or you can insert the dimension by specifying the first and second extension line origins 3 Specify the dimension line location Dimension toolbar ra Command line DIMALIGNED To insert an aligned dimension by selecting the Result entity select the entity A to dimension and then select the dimension line location B To insert an aligned dimension by selecting Result the extension line origins select the first extension origin A select the second extension origin B and then specify the dimension line location C Create Baseline and Continued Dimensions Both baseline and continued dimensions are multiple linear dimensions Baseline dimensions are measured from the dame baseline and continued dimensions are placed end to end Before creating either baseline or continued dimension you have to create a linear
480. splayed at the lower left corner of the baseline and the alignment point As shown in the following picture 7 a a pene grips for rightjustified line text VA C JL anren point grips for middle justified line text Different grips generate different effect even though with the same command Change Multiline Text You can change the properties of multiline text at the Properties panel To edit multiline text 1 Type ddedit and then press Enter JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 218 NOTES AND LABELS 2 Select the multiline text 3 Edit the text in the Multiline Text Editor 4 Click OK Text toolbar Al Command line DDEDIT To change multiline text properties 1 Select a multiline text object 2 Right click the selected object and click Properties on the shortcut menu 3 In the Properties palette enter any new text and change formatting and other settings as needed Cc aw Standard toolbar Command line PROPERTIES Double clicking mouse opens multiline text editor from which you can modify the content and format of text Change Text Location You can move or change the line width through grips as well Generally the location of grips is displayed at the four grips of the text in some cases at the justification point You can also replace the text by entering the coordinate at the Properties panel Find and Replace Text Within the multili
481. splayed on the new geometric entity icon click this triangle to flyout tool list containing lines construction line polyline and circle etc The changes made to the Tool Palettes are saved as a configuration file automatically which are still available when you launch ZWCAD again JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 3 1 Create a new drawing When the system variables FILEDIA and STARTUP are set to 1 typing NEW opens Startup dialog box from which you can use Default Setting Template or Wizard to create a new drawing When the FILEDIA and STARTUP are set to 1 and 0 separately typing NEW opens Open Template dialog box from which you can select the desired one or use the default template by clicking arrowhead button next to Open button Typing QNEW creates a new drawing with a default template No dialog box is displayed with this command You can change the search path of template files from the FILE tab in the Options dialog box 3 1 1 Start a Drawing from Scratch You can select either imperial or metric units for the new drawing if you choose Start from Scratch The setting you select determines default values which is used for many system variables controlling text dimensions grid snap and the default linetype and hatch pattern file Imperial A new drawing with the imperial measurement system The drawing uses internal default values and the default boundar
482. stad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk Control the Drawing VIeEWS ccscccccssssccssssccssssees OL 4 1 Redrawing and regenerating a CrawiNg ccccssssseeccccceeceeaaeeeeesssesseeeeceeeeeeeeeaaaas 31 4 2 Masnify a ViEW ZOON casita aediaasGeia Pataca aataens eisai ae noe tees aus a aeatesee 31 4 3 Pai Vile W E E E S EE E E 35 4 4 Use Aerial View window to pan and zoom drawings eeeeessssssssssssseeeerressssssss 37 4 5 Display Multiple Views in Model Space ccccsccccccccceceseeeesessesseeeeceeeeeeseeeaqaas 37 4 5 1 Set Model Space Vie WPOLUS irran a ites ea catns atichns ea edna anbeds 38 4 5 2 Working with multiple drawings ccccccccccccccccecccesseseeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeaaeaaeeeeesees 40 4 6 S aveand Restore VIEWS rednie natenn ENAR NENEN ENES TE EE 41 4 7 SPET D VIC Wx ooccseccsactncatcacanesint E RAN 42 4 7 1 View a Parallel Projection ToD ea A N 42 4 7 2 Sete The Vie Wile dire CLLON ss s cainsesasarscncanctacpeatageseaasisersiacsasisiaeewaaiaeasaeets 42 4 7 3 ISOMU E ooh lah haan Roasted nee E tees as 43 4 7 4 Define a 3D View with Coordinate Values or Angles ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 44 4 7 5 Change a 3D View Dynamically o 20 cet ia a a E E 45 4 7 6 ide Lines or shade 31D OD Cis eraren a a E E 45 4 7 7 Creating rendered IMAGES wasasidesesaurdocectarannsansddaderaarseusaachssssadriaetbsonsadsasarneuteads 46 4 7 8 Creatine Custom rendered ima tes
483. starts from wherever the cursor is when you click 6 Press Enter to complete the sketch and write all lines into the drawing Erasing freehand sketch lines You can erase temporary freehand sketch lines that have not yet been written into the drawing by choosing the Delete On option in the command prompt The pencil changes to an Eraser tool In Erase mode wherever the cursor intersects the freehand line everything from the intersection to the end of the line is erased Once you record freehand lines you can t edit them or erase them with the Erase option of SKETCH Use the ERASE command if you have finished sketching To erase freehand sketch lines 1 While running the sketch command with the pen up or down enter D If the pen was down it moves up 2 Move the cursor to the end of the line you drew last and then move it back as far along the line as you want to erase 3 To end the erasure and return to the sketch Command prompt enter D If you want to change the current viewport while sketching make sure the pen is up all lines were JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 110 CREATE OBJECTS written into the drawing 7 2 Draw Curved Objects 7 2 1 Arcs An arc is a portion of a circle The default method for drawing an arc is to specify three points the start point a second point and the endpoint You can draw arcs using any of the following methods Three point
484. stems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 11 1 2 Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks 00 cccccssssseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaas 268 ELS sert BICS inii aa NEE E tossna eee ees 269 11 1 4 Control the Color and Linetype Properties in Blocks ceceeceeeeeennees 270 Lbs Moditya Block DemninOn mais Gin hse iian aceite aaa tees 214 11 2 Denne and Use Block AH DUES ricsi E a AA 22 11 3 Reference Other Drawing Files Xref s cccccccceccccccececseeeeseesseeeeceeceeeeeeeeeaaas 274 bol AtMaCneE xternal REI CNCES secures E rate dacuteah teaches eaten EO AO 275 IL32 Nestand Overlay External References screen eins actelasidaideds 277 11 3 3 Update Attached External Reference 0 cccccccccccccccseeseseseseeeeceeeeeeeeeaaaas 278 11 34 Edit External Rererences sssrin nnie a T A 279 IESS dd Extermal References 1m PCC sais ciscc ceases A AET 284 12 Hatches and Realistic mages cssccccsssscsssses 297 12 1 Hai NCS es chese an dala a ea ete Seana eoeettaat 287 2 11 Overview of Hatch Patterns and Pill sixes siccc secsss curna EERE 287 122 Define Hath Boundanes wcacniacimia snare Ada 288 12 03 Choose And Define Hatch Patterns esien nae cides 292 A SOLD asec tote sense dde evan dee taton A E 294 12 2 Work With Raster Mages cnc A 295 12 2 1 Attach Scale and Detach Raster Ima beser 295 12 2 2 Modify and manage Raster Mages ccccc
485. sured relative to the overall size of the drawing or in relation to the current display When you change the magnification factor the portion of the drawing located at the center of the current viewport remains centered on the screen To change the magnification of the view relative to the overall size of the drawing type a number representing the magnification scale factor For example if you type a scale factor of 2 the drawing appears at twice its original size If you type a magnification factor of 5 the drawing appears at half its original size You can also change the magnification of the drawing relative to its current magnification by adding an x after the magnification scale factor For example if you type a scale factor of 2x the drawing changes to twice its current size If you type a magnification factor of 5x the drawing changes to half its current size To zoom to a specific scale relative to the current display 1 Do one of the following On the Zoom toolbar click the Zoom Scale Type zoom and then press Enter 2 Type the scale factor followed by an x such as 2x 3 Press Enter x Zoom toolbar Command line ZOOM Combining zooming and panning With the Center option you can scale objects and specify a new view center You can specify the scale factor relative to paper space unit or to the current view The following figure shows the results of center scaling the drawing of ratio 1 1 and 2 1 separately JL
486. systems dk INTRODUCTION AND INSTALLATION As you draw you can use commands such as Pan and Zoom to work on different part of the drawing and to magnify the display of the drawing to view small details These commands have no effect on the actual size of the entities in your drawing they affect only the way the drawing is displayed on your screen Only when you print or plot your drawing do you need to set the scale so that the printed drawing fits within a specific paper size Using tools In manual drafting you use tools such as pencils rulers T squares templates erasers and so on When you create a drawing in ZWCAD you use a mouse instead of a pencil and you use the mouse to select other tools commands you select from a menu or a toolbar You use some tools to create basic entities such as lines circles and arcs and other tools to modify existing entities for example to copy or move them or to change properties such as color and linetype Organizing information In traditional drafting you often separate elements such as walls dimensions structural steel members and electrical plans onto separate translucent overlays When you want to print the working drawings you can create several different drawings by combining different overlays When you create a drawing in ZWCAD you use layers to organize elements in a similar manner However the layers feature in CAD offers numerous advantages over physical transparencies
487. t Spelling 2 Select one or more text entities 3 In the Check Spelling dialog box click Change Dictionaries 4 To add a custom word type a word in Custom Dictionary Words then click Add JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 9 5 To delete a custom word select a word in Custom Dictionary Words then click Delete 6 Click OK Text toolbar Command line SPELL JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 226 mm ensions and Tolerances 10 1 Overview of Dimensioning You can create five basic types of dimensions linear angular radial diametral and ordinate You can create dimensions for existing entities by selecting them or you can create dimensions by selecting points within a drawing For example you can create a linear dimension either by selecting the entity to be dimensioned or by specifying the first and second extension line origins Dimensions indicate the measurement values of objects e g length or width distance or angles among objects or the distance between feature point and the specified origin You can create dimensions that can be horizontal vertical aligned rotated coordinate baseline or continued horizontal linear angular vertical linear aliqned 9 baseline continued When you create a dimension the program draws it on the current la
488. t between the two points yer ona T evo my aid x Text aligned between two points Text fit between two points expands or maintains a constant height width compresses to fit ratio To specify the line text alignment 1 Choose Draw gt Text gt Single Line Text 2 On the command line type J Justify and press ENTER 3 Type an alignment option For example enter br to align text at its bottom center corner 4 Type the text and then press Enter at the end of each new line 5 To complete the command press Enter again Text toolbar IA Command line TEXT 9 1 2 Multiline Text Multiline text consists of one or more lines of text or paragraphs that fit within a boundary width that you specify Each multiline text entity you create is treated as a single entity JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 9 regardless of the number of individual paragraphs or lines of text it contains When you create multiline text you first determine the paragraph s boundary width by specifying the opposite corners of a rectangle The multiline text automatically wraps so that it fits within this rectangle The first corner of the rectangle determines the default attachment point of the multiline text You can change the location of the attachment point in reference to the rectangle and you can determine the direction in which text flows within the rectangle After defining the text
489. t intersect with each other when you work at the XY plane of the current UCS JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk eZ MODIFY OBJECTS 8 2 13 Wrap Processing Selecting objects by means of a rectangular frame to trim or extend the objects inside the rectangular frame this procedure is also called wrap processing Unlike performing TRIM and EXTEND commands you don t have to indicate whether to extend or stretch while executing WRAP command system responds to it automatically and do the corresponding operation Objects that are enabled to be processed by WRAP command are lines 2D or 3D polylines construction lines rays arcs circles ellipse spline polyline wide polyline as well as splines etc But only under such circumstances that curve objects intersect with each other can wrap operates except for the self intersection of complex entities Nearly all of the entities are enabled wrapping as boundary objects including blocks and xrefs Once you have selected objects using a rectangular frame ZWCAD processes the objects based on their types For lines construction lines rays arcs circles ellipse spline polyline you can both extend and trim these entities But no processing operation implemented in case that no intersection on the selected objects or only one object is selected within the rectangular frame For wide polylines and 2D or 3D polylines
490. t layouts you can create your own or your can create a new layout from another template dwt file drawing dwg file or drawing interchange dxf file Each drawing can contain up to 255 layouts To create a new layout using the Layout or Layout2 tab 1 Right click the Layout or Layout2 tab select NEW 2 Set up at least one layout viewport 3 If desired rename the layout To create a new layout using a new Layout tab 1 Choose Insert gt Layout gt New Layout 2 Type a unique name for your layout and then press Enter The name can be up to 255 characters in length and can contain letters numbers the dollar sign hyphen and underscore _ or any combination 3 Set up at least one layout viewport Layout toolbar Command line LAYOUT Create Layout from Template Right click on the Layout tab to select From template option to import DWG or DWT file directly using information of existing template to create new layouts Template layout instances are provides for designing new layouts including viewport objects Objects of paper space and page setup of existing template are used by new layouts Thus layout objects will be displayed in paper space as well as viewport objects JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 310 LAYOUT PLOT AND PUBLISH DRAWINGS User can retain existing objects imported from template and also delete objects Any object from mo
491. t may be shorter than the interval you specify aan object selected blocks at measured intervals To measure intervals along an object and mark them using point objects 1 Choose Draw gt Point gt Measure 2 Select the object 3 Specify the segment length and then press Enter Command line MEASURE When you select the object by Blocks or point objects pointing intervals are B are placed along the measured from the end object at the specified closest to the point at which interval you select the object A JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 6 To measure intervals along an object and mark them using blocks 1 Choose Draw gt Point gt Measure 2 Select the object 3 On the command line type block 4 Type the name of the block you want to insert as the marker 5 Enter y to align the blocks with the measured object Enter n to use a rotation angle of 0 degrees 6 Specify the segment length and then press Enter Command line MEASURE JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 84 an inates And Coordinate 6 1 Coordinates When a command prompts you for a point you can specify a point in a drawing using mouse or other pointing device or you can enter a coordinate value on the command prompt Coordinate values include 2D coordinate and 3D coordinate values You can type
492. t style settings for plotting other than the settings created for objects You can close these substitute settings on demand JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 326 LAYOUT PLOT AND PUBLISH DRAWINGS Choose a Type of Plot Style Table A plot style table is a collection of plot styles assigned to a layout or the Model tab There are two types of plot style tables color dependent plot style tables and named plot style tables Color dependent plot style tables CTB Color dependent plot style table determines plotting characteristics such as lineweight using an object s color This plot style plots objects with the same color in the same style For example every blue object in a drawing is plotted the same way While color dependent plot style table is provided for editing rather than adding or deleting plot styles There are 256 plot styles in a color dependent plot style table one for each color Once a color dependent plot style table is assigned to the drawing you cannot assign a plot style to individual objects or layers Instead to assign plot style properties to an object you should change the color of the object or layer You can assign color dependent plot style tables to layouts You can use several predefined color dependent plot style tables edit existing plot style tables or create your own Color dependent plot style tables are stored in the Plot Styles folder
493. t to include in your ZWCAD drawing and what you want to do with it after it is there JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 14 14 2 1 Overview of Object Linking and Embedding The Object Linking can be used for merging data from different applications into a document For example you can create ZWCAD drawing with a Microsoft WORD document included and also create a Adobe PageMaker layout containing ZWCAD drawings To use OLE ensure your system supports OLE server and container applications Source applications which are called server mainly used for creating embedded or linked OLE objects Target applications are container used for accepting OLE objects ZWCAD uses OLE as server and container applications Even if ZWCAD objects such as circle or blocks are always taken as OLE objects they can be varied in meaning Link and embed information by inserting a document into another meanwhile edit objects in container applications using links and embed OLE objects However varied in storing information the relationship between linking and embedding is similar to that of inserting blocks and creating xrefs in ZWCAD drawing Embed Objects The embedded OLE objects come from copies of other documents when embedding objects into files the embedded objects have no relations with the original document they are not updated by changing the current drawing You can execute from
494. tangle The selected image is clipped so that only the interior of the rectangle is visible Reference toolbar Command line IMAGECLIP To clip an image in the shape of a polygon 1 Choose Modify gt Clip gt Image 2 Select the edge of the image you want to clip 3 If prompted type new to create a new clipping boundary 4 Choose Polygon 5 Select the points for the polygon and then press Enter when the polygon is complete The selected image is clipped so only the interior of the polygon is visible Reference toolbar Command line IMAGECLIP To turn clipping on or off for an image 1 Choose Modify gt Clip gt Image 2 Select the edge of the image for which you want to turn clipping on or off 3 Type onor off Reference toolbar Command line IMAGECLIP To remove clipping from an image 1 Choose Modify gt Clip gt Image 2 Select the edge of the image for which you want to remove clipping 3 Type delete JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 12 Reference toolbar nR Command line IMAGECLIP Change Raster Image Brightness Contrast and Fade Use IMAGEADJUST to adjust displaying result and lightness contrast and fade that are related to the display and plot effect when plotting drawings IMAGEADJUST does not affect the original raster image as well as other instances of the image You can set lightness and contrast to better preview images
495. tch an object using grips JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 8 1 Select the object 2 Click a grip to activate it 3 Drag the grip 4 Click to release To stretch an object using grips select Result the object A select a grip B and drag the grip to its new location C 8 2 12 Trim or Extend Objects You can connect edges of objects through trimming or extending When trimming or extending objects you have to specify cutting edges or boundary to extend then you can select objects to cut or extend Pressing ENTER at the prompt of selecting entities all entities are the possible boundaries which calls hidden selection lf you want to select blocks as cutting edges you can only use the single selection Crossing Fence and Select All options Trim Objects You can clip or trim objects so they end at one or more implied cutting edges defined by other objects You can also trim objects to the point at which they would intersect an implied cutting edge When trimming objects you first select the cutting edges and then specify the objects to trim selecting them either one at a time or using the fence selection method You can trim arcs circles lines unclosed polylines and rays In which arcs circles lines polylines rays infinite lines and viewports on a Layout tab can act as cutting edges select all objects to trim selected result To t
496. te more complex shapes by combining solids You can join solids subtract solids from each other or find the common volume overlapping portion of solids Solids can be further modified by filleting chamfering or changing the color of their edges Solids are displayed as wireframes until you hide shade or render them Additionally you can analyze solids for their mass properties volume moments of inertia center of gravity and so on You can break a solid into mesh and wireframe objects using explode command The ISOLINES system variable controls the number of tessellation lines used to visualize curved portions of the wireframe The FACETRES system variable adjusts the smoothness of shaded and hidden line objects Create a Solid Box You can create rectangular boxes or cubes A box consists of six rectangular surface planes The base of the box is always parallel with the xy plane of the current UCS You position the box by specifying either a corner or the center of the box You determine the size of the box by either specifying a second corner and the height defining the box to be a cube and then providing its length or specifying the length width and height The length of the box is mapping to X axis of current UCS and its width maps to Y axis and height maps to Z axis JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 7 2 RECTANG or PLINE command creates a rect
497. tems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 182 MODIFY OBJECTS Modifyll toolbar Command line PEDIT Joined Polyline Segments lf the ends of a line or arc connect or are close to each other you can join them to an open polyline by trimming or extending Modify Properties of Polylines lf the properties of several objects being joined into a polyline are different such as color and linetype the new polyline inherits the properties of the first object that you selected You can also set properties of the new polyline at the Properties panel Additional Editing Options for Polylines You can use PEDIT to edit polylines Close When you close a polyline the program draws a straight polyline segment from the last vertex of the polyline to the first vertex System considers the polyline open unless you Close it using the Close option To close an open polyline 1 Choose Modify gt Object gt Polyline 2 Select the polyline 3 On the command line type close 4 On the command line type another option or press Enter to complete the command Modifyll toolbar Command line PEDIT Closing an open polyline adds a straight Result polyline segment between the first A and last B vertices OPEN If the polylines to be edited is closed you can convert it into an open one by using OPEN option to delete the latest drawn segments of the polyline JOIN You can add an arc line
498. tered places dimension text medially within the dimension line JIS places dimension text according to the Japan industry standard In the ANSI standards centered dimension text splits the dimension line In the ISO standards centered text places above or outside the dimension line In the following illustrations ISO standards allow angular dimension text to display in any of the ways shown Nees TE s ANSI standard text ISO standard text above text aligned with centered within the the dimension line and within the dimension line dimension line The justification and other settings may affect the vertical alignment of text If you select Horizontal Alignment text inside the extension lines and centered within the dimension is placed horizontally as shown in the leftmost figure above Position Dimension Text Horizontally The position of text along the horizon is relation to the extension lines The settings include Centered At Ext Line 1 At Ext Line 2 Over Ext Line1 and Over Ext Line2 The following illustrations show the examples of Center and Over Ext Line 1applying to dimension text K ri 403 79 Horizontal justification horizontal justification vertical justification vertical justification Centered Above JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 10 As you create dimensions the order you specified the extension line origins determines
499. text in the Multiline Text Editor the whole multiline text object is scaled including its width Set Text Obliquing Angle The obliquing angle determines that the text slant forward or backward The obliquing angle ranges from the 85 to 85 Positive value slants forward negative value slants backward As shown the following picture 30 deg rotation 0 deg rotation NS 30 deg rotation A oy tk 30 deg rotation avy ae 30 deg Fotation Cy A Set Horizontal or Vertical Text Orientation The text directions include horizon and vertical Only if the associated font supports dual orientation you can create the vertical text Each sequent text line is drawn to the right of the preceding line Generally the rotation angle for vertical text is 270 degrees You cannot create vertical text when the font is TureYype a T Womb oe OF 1 fe Al fa Vertical text To specify a line text style 1 Choose Draw gt Text gt Single Line Text 2 On the command line type s Style and press ENTER 3 Type the name of a previously defined text style and then press Enter To display a list of available text styles tyoe a question mark and then press Enter JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 9 4 Specify the text insertion point 5 Specify the text height 6 Specify the rotation angle 7 Type the text line and then press Enter 8 To complete the comman
500. th this method you can create blocks as soon as possible You can use several methods to create blocks Combine objects to create a block definition in your current drawing Create a drawing file and later insert it as a block in other drawings Objects drawn on several layers with various colors linetypes and lineweight properties can be combined into a block Once a block is inserted into the drawing the block reference preserves information about the original layer color and linetype properties of the objects that are contained in the block although it is always displayed on the current layer Whether to retain their original properties or inherit their properties such as color linetype or lineweight settings from the current layer for objects is controllable To remove unused block definitions from a drawing use PURGE command When defining blocks you should define the block name objects to be contained in the block the coordinate values of the base point to be used for inserting the block and any associated attribute data JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 11 The block definition in the illustration comprises a name four lines and a base point at the intersection of the two diagonal lines GD is objects in block definition drawing area created trom selected objects The illustration shows a typical sequence for creating a block definition
501. th using Cut command the objects on the clipboard can be pasted to a document or drawing as a OLE object See more from the PASTECLIP and PASTESPEC command The links is not available after executing Cut command To cut objects to the Clipboard 1 Select the objects you want to cut 2 Choose Edit gt Cut Standard toolbar A Command line CUTCLIP Copy Objects You can copy the objects on the clipboard into the document created by other application The copied objects can keep the height resolution as they are copied with the vector format These objects store on the clipboard with the WMF Windows Metafile Format format The copies keep unchanged at the other application even if the original drawing has changed To copy objects to the Clipboard 1 Select the objects you want to copy 2 Choose Edit gt Copy Standard toolbar o Command line COPYCLIP Anything that you can copy to the Clipboard can be pasted into a drawing The format in which the program adds the Clipboard contents to the drawing depends on the type of information in the Clipboard For example if you copy ZWCAD drawing entities to the Clipboard the program pastes them into the drawing as ZWCAD entities If you copy items to the Clipboard from other programs they are pasted into the current drawing as embedded ActiveX objects Paste Objects The system used all available formats to store information when you copy objects into the clipboard The format that stores the
502. than the FullRender command but the image is displayed more quickly The Render command does not include shadow effects transparency or reflections all of which are included with the Full Render command Full Render The FullRender command starts the rendering process and generates a rendered image of the current drawing The FullRender command generates the highest quality image and generally includes shadow effects transparency and reflections Full rendering can create a base on which your model is displayed if you don t already have one so it does not appear suspended in space A background is also automatically added to the image A background such as a cloudy sky or an imported raster graphic such as a stone wall can also be added behind the image making it even more realistic Rays from these imaginary light sources are traced as they reflect off and through the surfaces of the model a process called ray tracing Ray tracing determines where JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 46 CONTROL THE DRAWING VIEW shadows fall and how reflections on shiny materials such as metal and glass appear You can modify the reflective properties of the materials that make up your model to control how the light rays reflect off its surfaces To create a quickly rendered image use any of these methods Choose View gt Render gt Render On the Render toolbar click the Render tool
503. the drawing layer table will be reloaded and changes are still remained in current drawing If the system variable VISRETAIN is set to 1 modifications based on layer made for xref of the current drawing has superiority Layer settings will be saved in layer table of current drawing And in accordance with current tasks Xref Clipping Boundaries You can control whether to display clipping boundary of xref through setting system variable XCLIPFRAME 11 3 2 Nest and Overlay External References Xrefs can be nested in another xref and attached to current drawing Xrefs that are multiple nested can be attached into the drawing In the process of attaching you can select insertion position scaling factor and rotation angle for xrefs As the following illustration shows master dwg contains a dwg and b dwg And drawing a dwg contains c dwg Thus In master dwg c dwg is a nested xref b dwg Specify the type of xref including attach and overlay Using overlay to exclude any nested xrefs rather than overlay xrefs This type is typically used for sharing data in network In Xrefs that are attached in overlay type you can viewed relative methods directly between the drawing and other grouping drawings In the following illustration attach master dwg to multiple drawings as xref Users who are working with a dwg need to view and use objects drawn on b dwg without but not reference the drawing b dwg because it would then appear twice in master dwg
504. the entity selection method and then create the selection set 6 When you have finished selecting entities press Enter Command line EXPORT PDF The EXPORT command is available for exporting the drawing as a PDF file PDF files allow you to distribute your drawing to others for viewing in Adobe Acrobat Reader which is free software that users can download PDF files can also be viewed reviewed and edited in Adobe Acrobat To export a drawing to a PDF file 1 Choose File gt Export 2 In Save As Type choose Portable Document Format pdf 3 Specify the name of the file you want to create 4 Click Save 5 Choose the entity selection method and then create a selection set that contains the entities you want to export 6 When you have finished selecting entities press Enter Command line EXPORT EPS EPS format is housed PostScripe file a drawing file can be exported as EPS file using EXPORT command JL Systems Group j Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk SHARE DATA BETWEEN DRAWINGS AND APPLICATIONS PostScript file formats are most available for desktop publishing applications With plotting capability of high resolution this file format is suited for raster images such as GIF PCX and TIFF Once you have converted the drawing into PostScript format you can use PostScript font To export files as EPS from layout tab you should execute from File Plot to start Plotting
505. the every entity the breaks will automatically add to every intersecting object When the dimension or the intersecting object is modified the dimension breaks will be updated automatically Adding dimension break by picking two point You can specify the dimension break s size and location by picking two point on dimension or extension line The dimension breaks will not be updated when modifying the dimension or intersecting object If the dimension or intersecting object modified the manual dimension breaks should re created after remove it from the dimension or intersecting object The size of the break added by picking two point do not depend on the dimension scale or annotation ratio value Setup Break size Operating steps 1 Select Format gt Dimension Style from the main menu to call Dimension Style Manager dialog 2 Click Modify button to open Modify Dimension Style dialog box then click Other Items tab 3 You can modify the value of Break size itemin Dimension break module 10 5 Add Geometric Tolerances Geometric tolerances in a drawing show acceptable deviations of form profile location orientation and runout of a feature You can create geometric tolerances with or without leaders depending on you use the LEADER or the TOLERANCE command Each feature control frame consists of at least two compartments The first compartment contains a geometric tolerance symbol that indicates the geometric ch
506. the last operation by pressing Undo button on the Standard toolbar or entering U on the command line Some commands contain the Undo option so you can enter u to reverse to the last operation without exiting the command For example when creating a line or polyline you can enter u to undo the latest drawn line segment Undo Several Actions at Once UNDO command help aborting multiple operations at a time When using UNDO command system groups a number of operations assigned within Begin set and End set so that you can cancel all the steps as a group object at a time Use Mark and Back to mark to enable users to cancel all the later operations since the marked step If you use Back to mark or Number of steps to undo option the drawing will be redrawn if necessary This may happen to the end of UNDO command and the frequency of redrawing can be different based on the option you select for example enter UNDO 3 to redraw once while enter U command three times to redraw three times Reverse the Effect of Undo You can use REDO to reverse the effects of previous UNDO or U command This command is equivalent with the REDO button on the standard toolbar Undo or Redo Actions Using Undo or Redo button The Undo or Redo button on Standard toolbar are displayed in gray if there isn t any operations to undo or redo at this moment this function is unavailable The Undo button is available as soon as you have operated a certain commands click left part of
507. the list file for fonts and their corresponding replace fonts If the specified fonts can t be found in current system you can obtain from a font mapping file to JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 9 replace them with specified fonts Sometimes to ensure partial specific fonts or enable fonts conversion in current drawing you can create font mapping file with any text editor With these font mapping files you can stipulate and manage fonts uniformly or use them directly when off line printing If encountering font objects created by other fonts you can specify replace fonts to apply in platform through font mapping It s also available for users to set a font mapping file to convert each font to corresponding font for example when editing drawings the SHX which is easy drawing can be used for replacing other fonts in the drawing and subsequently switched to more complex fonts when printing Font mapping file is a type of common ASCII text file with an extension name as fmp containing text file name without extensions or path in each line the font file name with extension ttf behind the font file is replace font the two file names are separated by a semicolon System uses zwcad fmp used for ZWCAD only as default font mapping file Any ASCII text editor is available for changing text for replacing specified fonts from the font mapping file For exampl
508. the number of longitudinal sections that are perpendicular to the xy plane 6 Specify the number of latitudinal sections that are parallel to the xy plane Surfaces toolbar Command line Al SPHERE Dishes You can create a three dimensional dish The latitude lines of a dish are always parallel with the xy plane of the current UCS the central axis is always parallel with the z axis You position a dish by specifying its center point You determine the size of a dish by specifying either its radius or its diameter To create a dish as a three dimensional surface 1 Choose Draw gt Surfaces gt 3D Surface 2 On the command line type dish 3 Specify the center and radius or diameter as described previously Surfaces toolbar a Command line Al_ DISH Domes You can create a three dimensional dome The latitude lines of adome are always parallel with the xy plane of the current UCS the central axis is always parallel with the z axis You position a dome by specifying its center point You determine the size of a dome by specifying either its radius or its diameter JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 7 To create a dome as a three dimensional surface 1 Choose Draw gt Surfaces gt 3D Surface 2 On the command line type dome 3 Specify the center and radius or diameter as described previously Surfaces toolbar amp Command line Al DOME Torus You can create
509. the object 3 Specify the second break point Modify toolbar L Command line BREAK Select the object A and then specify the Result second break point B To select an object and then specify the two break points 1 Choose Modify gt Break 2 Select the object 3 On the command line type first break point 4 Specify the first break point 5 Specify the second break point Modify toolbar L JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 174 MODIFY OBJECTS Command line BREAK Select the object A and then specify the first B and Result second C break points TIP To break an object in two without removing a portion of the object specify the same point for the first and second break points by typing the at sign and pressingEnter instead of specifying the second break point 8 2 15 Create Chamfers You can connect two nonparallel objects by extending or trimming them and then joining them with a line to create a beveled edge You can chamfer lines polylines rays and infinite lines When creating a chamfer you can specify how far to trim the objects back from their intersection distance distance method or you can specify the length of the chamfer and the angle it forms along the first object distance angle method When chamfering a polyline you can chamfer multiple segments between two selected polyline segments or you can chamfer the entire p
510. the order they are created To change the draw order use DRAWORDER command Note changing draw order is available only within the same space 5 12 Extract or Calculate Geometric Information from Objects Information about objects in your drawing are allowed to inquire by means of performing inquiry and calculation commands you can also make useful calculations such as area and circumference calculation 5 12 1 Calculating areas You can calculate the area and perimeter of a polygon based on a series of points you specify or enclose with a circle or closed polyline You can also determine the area of several combined objects and add or subtract the area of one or more objects from a total combined area Calculating areas defined by points You can find the area and perimeter of any closed region by specifying a series of points The program calculates the area and perimeter of the space that is enclosed by an imaginary polygon consisting of straight line segments connecting each point To calculate the area defined by points you specify 1 Choose Tools gt Inquiry gt Area 2 Specify the first point JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 5 3 Specify the second point 4 Continue specifying points in sequence to define the perimeter of the area you want to measure 5 To complete the calculation press Enter The area and perimeter of the region you defined are
511. ties If you remove some objects from the working set these objects will be added into current drawing lf you discard the changes the working set removed as well and return the block references to the original state When editing references in place if objects excluded from the working set are removed and you discard the changes to the xref the objects having been removed can t be restored If you have saved the changes for the xref you can get back the reference file and discard the changes use UNDO command If objects in current drawing inherit properties defined in xref these objects will be displayed in new properties called binding properties Additionally you can specify how the xref names are displayed through system variable BINDTYPE If the BINDTYPE si set to 0 the xref names will be added a prefix if the BINDTYPE si set to 1 keep the xref names unchanged It should be noticed that you can t edit or change the referenced drawings when editing in place which are only readable Edit Xrefs and Blocks with Nesting OLE or Attributes Edit in place set limits for those nested xrefs in current drawing When you editing nested xrefs references together with their nested references are displayed in Reference Edit dialog box you can also change all the nested references But changes are available for one reference at a time OLE objects included in reference you are editing can be displayed but not edited If the block referenc
512. ting geometry In the current session if multiple viewports are active you can assign a different UCS to each viewport If the system variable UCSVP is on you can save a UCS along witha viewport and automatically restoring the UCS each time when you make the viewport current When the system variable UCSVP is on each UCS may have a different origin and orientation dependent on the construction Define the UCS Location You can define a UCS in several ways Specify a new origin new XY plane or new Z axis Align the new UCS with an existing object Align the new UCS with the current viewing direction Rotate the current UCS around any of its axes Apply a new Z depth to an existing UCS Apply a UCS by selecting a face Use UCS Presets On the Orthographic UCS tab of the UCS dialog box the system lists several preset coordinate system from which you can choose the desired one After specifying a UCS you can control whether choosing a preset option shifts the UCS relative to the current UCS orientation or relative to the default WCS If you use the Restore World or Previous option of the UCS command the settings you made are not available Change the Default Elevation JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 96 COORDINATES AND COORDINATE SYSTEM The ELEV command is used to specify an elevation and thickness of extrusion for a new object You can define a drawing plan
513. tion immediately saves the entire drawing to a separate drawing file Objects This option saves those objects you select to a separate drawing file When prompted specify the insertion point for the block select the objects for the block 3 In destination tab type the name of the drawing file you want to create and choose the saved path NOTE When saving the entire drawing as a separate drawing file the program assigns the 0 0 0 coordinate as the insertion base point You can change the base point by opening the drawing and redefining the block Change the Base Point of Drawings to Be Used as Blocks When inserting a drawing file into another drawing as a block by default system uses the origin 0 0 0 of WCS as the base insertion point To specify different insertion point you can use BASE command Next time you insert the same block system uses the new insertion point by default Update Changes in the Original Drawing Once the drawing file has been inserted into another drawing as a block the original drawing changes as well But the block having been inserted will not change If the block happens to change along with the original drawing you should attach it as external reference but not as a block Use Paper Space Objects in Blocks Objects created in paper space are not contained in the block when it is being inserted into the drawing You can convert the objects in paper space as block or save as an individual drawing file before i
514. ton to use a pointing device to specify opposite corners of the area to be plotted and then return to the Plot dialog box Set the Plot Scale for a Layout When you specify a scale to output your drawing you can choose from a list of real world scales enter your own scale or choose Fit to Paper to scale the drawing to fit onto the selected paper size Usually the objects in model space are displayed at the scale set in layout viewports To plot the objects in model space with the scale specified in layouts you assign the scale to 1 1 Set the Lineweight Scale for a Layout Even if plot scale of layouts is assigned it s enabled to scale the lineweight at a certain scale Scaling the lineweight is nothing to do with the plot scale when plotting drawings which is mainly used for the lines included in the objects to be plotted In most cases you choose to plot layouts with default plotting scale of 1 1 However to plot the layout scaled by paper size A on another paper size E you should scale lineweights to fit the new plot scale Copy and Move Layouts You can right click on the Layout tab to select Copy and Move option on the Copy and Move dialog box select the target moving position and the place to put the copy of the layout click Create a copy to copy the selected layout otherwise only moves the layout JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 13 position You should notice
515. tracts and locks the cursor onto the nearest detected snap points Provides a visual that is similar to snapping to a grid Aperture box Surrounds the crosshairs and defines an area within which when you move the cursor system evaluates objects for object snaps You can determine the JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 5 aperture box is displayed or not and the aperture box size can be changed too To change the size of the object snap target box 1 Choose Tools gt Options gt Drafting 2 Under Aperture Size slide to adjust the desired size 3 Click OK 5 5 Use Polar Tracking and Object Snap Tracking Auto tracking includes polar tracking and object snap tracking You can turn them on and off by repressing POLAR and OTRACK button on the Status Bar When the polar tracking mode is on the cursor moves along the specified angle When the object snap tracking is on the cursor moves along an alignment path based on the snap point Polar Tracking When polar tracking is turned on guides display on the screen automatically at the polar angle increment that you specify For example if you draw a line with polar tracking turned on with angle increment set as 65 degrees the rubber banding line displays at 65 degree increments Polar tracking and orthogonal locking cannot be used at the same time turning one option on turns the other option off To enable pol
516. tup Wizard From this option you can specify units of measurement precision of displayed units and grid limits based on template ZWCADiso dwt To begin a new drawing using a wizard 1 On the File menu click New 2 In the Startup dialog box click Use a Wizard 3 Click Quick Setup or Advanced Setup 4 Complete the wizard pages using the Next and Back buttons to move forward and backward 5 On the last page click Finish Standard toolbar i Command line NEW 3 1 3 Use a Template File to Start a Drawing Drawing template files contain standard settings and have a dwt file extension There are two methods provided for creating a new drawing when the system variable FILEDIA is setto 1 When the STARTUP is set to 1 typing NEW opens Startup dialog box from which you can select the desired template to create a new drawing When the STARTUP is setto 1 typing NEW opens Open Template dialog box from which you can select the desired template to create a new drawing The changes made to a new drawing based on an existing template file do not affect the template file Create a Drawing Template File When you need to create several drawings with the default settings you can save time by creating a template file designed to create the same drawing files so that you does not need to specify default settings each time you start Conventions and settings commonly stored in template files include Unit type and precision Titl
517. ty of the inserted OLE objects Insert OLE objects to the drawing on current layer Turn off the layer or freeze it to disable displaying OLE objects in the layer To embed an object from an existing file within ZWCAD 1 Choose Insert gt OLE object 2 In the Insert Object dialog box click Create From File 3 Specify the file by doing one of the following Type a path and file name in the File box Click Browse to select a file 4 Select Display As Icon if you want that program s icon to appear in the drawing instead of the data 5 Click OK Command line INSETOBJ To create a new embedded object from within ZWCAD 1 Choose Insert gt OLE object 2 In the Insert Object dialog box click Create New 3 From the Object Type list select the type of object you want to create and then click OK The program for creating that object opens within ZWCAD 4 Create the object in the other program 5 Choose File gt Exit to close the program Command line INSETOBJ Link OLE Objects in Drawings lf another program supports ActiveX you can link its data to ZWCAD drawings Use linking when you want to include the same data in many files When you update the data all links to other files reflect the changes When you link data from another program the ZWCAD drawing stores only a reference to the location of the file in which you created the data You link data from a saved file so ZWCAD can find the data and display it Because lin
518. tyle tables which are files located on your computer disk or server you can reuse them to help eliminate the need to reconfigure your print settings each time you print a drawing You can save print styles in a named file for each of your clients You can even share the file with coworkers or store the files on a network to ensure that everyone in your office uses the same standards Understanding print style tables A print style table is a collection of print styles that allows you to change the appearance of your printed drawing without modifying the actual objects in your drawing Each print style table is saved in a file that can be located on your computer disk or server A drawing can use one type of print style table at a time There are two types of print style tables Color dependent print style tables CTB contain a collection of print styles based on each of the 255 index colors available in a drawing True colors and color books are not applicable to colordependent print style tables Named print style tables STB contain a collection of print styles that you define They can vary regardless of color With color independent print style tables you cannot assign print styles to individual objects or layers To use these print styles you assign a specific color to an entity or layer When you specify a color dependent print style table at printing time the entity colors and layer colors map to color based print styles in the print
519. u can view a parallel projection of 3D models at any location in model space To determine the angle or viewpoint you can Select a preset 3D view from the View toolbar Type angles or coordinate that represent the viewing location in 3D Modify a view of the current UCS the WCS or a saved UCS Change the 3D view dynamically using pointing device Set front and back clipping planes to limit the objects that is displayed Viewing 3D model is available only in model space If you are working in paper space the 3D viewing commands such as VPOINT DVIEW and PLAN cannot be used to define paper space views The view in paper space is always a plane view The plane view is a view that you look toward the origin 0 0 0 from a point at the positive Z axis This method results in a view of the XY plane You can restore the view and coordinate system that is the default for most ZWCAD drawings by setting the UCS orientation to World and then setting 3D vies to Plan View 4 7 2 Setting the viewing direction You view three dimensional drawings by setting the viewing direction The viewing direction establishes the viewing position the Cartesian coordinate corresponding to the viewpoint looking back at the origin point the 0 0 0 coordinate When you view a drawing from the default viewpoint 0 0 1 you see a plan view of the drawing You can change the viewing direction to look at the drawing from a different vantage point or to work on a three di
520. uch as during a power outage temporary files might be left on the disk text style A named saved collection of settings that determines the appearance of text characters for example stretched compressed oblique mirrored or set in a vertical column texture map The projection of an image such as a tile pattern onto an object such as a chair thaw A setting that displays previously frozen layers LAYER thickness The distance certain objects are extruded to give them a 3D appearance PROPERTIES CHPROP ELEV THICKNESS TILEMODE A system variable that controls whether viewports can be created as movable resizable objects layout viewports or as nonoverlapping display elements that appear side by side model viewports toolbar Part of the ZWCAD interface containing icons that represent commands tracking A way to locate a point relative to other points on the drawing transparent command A command started while another is in progress Precede transparent commands with an apostrophe UCS icon An icon that indicates the orientation of the UCS axes UCSICON user coordinate system UCS A user defined coordinate system that defines the orientation of the X Y and Z axes in JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 366 GLOSSARY 3D space The UCS determines the default placement of geometry in a drawing vector A mathematical object with precise
521. ue set to default 0 to default 25 to default 1 Suppress Zeros in Dimensions Control how to deal with leading and trailing zero in the numeric portion of dimension text lf you suppress leading zero in decimal dimensions 0 700 becomes 700 if you Suppress trailing zero 0 7000 becomes 0 7 If you suppress both leading and trailing zeros 0 7000 becomes 7 and 0 0000 becomes 0 The following paragraph shows the effect of selecting zero feet and zero inches using architectural units style If feet are included with a fractional inch the number of inches is JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 238 DIMENSION AND TOLERANCES always indicated as zero and ignores any option you select So the dimension 4 3 4 becomes 4 0 3 4 Option Effect Examples No options Includes zero feet and zero 0 0 1 2 0 6 1 0 1 0 3 4 selected inches Suppresses zero inches 0 Inches selected 0 0 1 2 0 6 1 1 0 3 4 includes zero feet Aeaetsaleciad Suppresses zero feet includes 4 2 6 1 0 1 0 3 4 zero inches 0 Feet and Suppresses zero feet and zero 4 2 g 4 1 0 3 4 O Inches selected inches Display Lateral Tolerances Lateral tolerance represents a value that the amount a measured distance can vary You can control the degree of accuracy needed for a future by specifying tolerances in manufacturing A feature is some aspect of a part such as a line axis point or
522. ult color books are stored in the Support folder under ZWCAD installation directory To create a color book 1 Start an XML editor program 2 Create a new XML file using the format below as a guide lt colorBook gt lt bookName gt Color book sample lt bookName gt lt colorPage gt lt pageColor gt lt RGB8 gt lt red gt 0 lt red gt lt green gt 0 lt green gt lt blue gt 0 lt blue gt lt RGB8 gt lt pageColor gt lt colorEntry gt lt colorName gt Orange lt colorName gt lt RGB8 gt lt red gt 255 lt red gt lt green gt 128 lt green gt lt blue gt 0 lt blue gt lt RGB8 gt lt colorEntry gt lt colorEntry gt lt colorName gt Light Green lt colorName gt lt RGB8 gt lt red gt 128 lt red gt lt green gt 192 lt green gt lt blue gt 128 lt blue gt lt RGB8 gt lt colorEntry gt JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 12 COORDINATES AND COORDINATE SYSTEM lt colorEntry gt lt colorName gt Gray lt colorName gt lt RGB8 gt lt red gt 128 lt red gt lt green gt 128 lt green gt lt blue gt 128 lt blue gt lt RGB8 gt lt colorEntry gt lt colorPage gt lt colorBook gt NOTE Your color book can contain an unlimited number of colors using the lt colorEntry gt and lt colorEntry gt tags 3 Save the color book in XML format and with an acb extension To load a color book 1 Save the color book in the folder where ZWCAD searches for
523. umber of alternate units per current unit of measurement The default fault value for imperial units is 25 4 which represents that each inch is equivalent of 25 4 millimeter The default value for metric units is 0 0394 which represents that each millimeter is equivalent of 0 0394 inch The precision for alternate units determines the number of decimal places JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 10 For example for imperial units if you specify the default value of 25 4 to the alternate scale setting and 0 00 to the alternate precision the dimension is shown as the following figure L369 4412 43953 11164 To create an alternate dimension 1 Choose Dimension gt Dimension Style 2 In the Dimension Style Manager select the style you wish to change and choose Modify 3 Click the Alternate Units tab 4 Click the Display Alternate Units check box 5 Make your selections 6 Click OK 7 Choose Close to exit Dimension toolbar ne Command line DIMSTYLE Round Off Dimension Values Except of angle dimensions all other dimension values can be rounded off For example if you specify a round off value of 0 75 all distance are rounded to the nearest 0 75 unit The number of decimal places is determined by the precision set for primary and alternate units and lateral tolerance values TEA 50 Sod oo round off value set round off value set round off val
524. use the endpoint of previous line segment as the start point of next arc segment You can specify angle center direction and radius of circle for drawing arcs and specify a center point and an endpoint as well To draw a line segment followed by an arc polyline segment 1 Choose DRAW gt Polyline 2 Specify the start point 3 Specify the endpoint 4 In the command prompt choose Arc 5 Specify the endpoint of the arc segment 6 To complete the command Press ENTER Draw toolbar Command line PLINE JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 104 CREATE OBJECTS Polyline start point A line endpoint are start point B and are endpoint C You can edit entire polylines and individual segments using the Edit Polyline tool on the Modify II toolbar You can convert polylines into arc and line entities using the Explode tool on the Modify toolbar Create Closed Polylines When creating polylines with PLINE command the Close option is only available if no less than two line or arc segments are drawn A closed polyline object is drawn if you connect the start point of the polyline to endpoint of the last line or arc segment with a line or arc Create Wide Polylines You can draw polylines of various widths by using the Width and Halfwidth options The Width and Halfwidth options set the width of the next polyline segments you draw You can set the width of individual s
525. w gt Ellipse gt Axis End 2 Specify the first endpoint 3 Specify the second endpoint 4 Drag the pointing device away from the midpoint and click to specify a distance for half the length of the second axis JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 116 CREATE OBJECTS Draw toolbar Command line ELLIPSE First axis endpoint A second axis endpoint B and half length of other axis C Drawing elliptical arcs An elliptical arc is a portion of an ellipse The default method for drawing an elliptical arc is to specify the endpoints of one axis of the ellipse and then specify a distance representing half the length of the second axis Then you specify the start and end angles for the arc measured from the center of the ellipse in relation to its major axis To draw an elliptical arc by specifying the axis endpoints 1 Choose Draw gt Ellipse gt Arc 2 Specify the first endpoint 3 Specify the second endpoint 4 Specify the half length of the other axis 5 Specify the start angle of the arc 6 Specify the end angle Draw toolbar Command line ELLIPSE NOTE ZWCAD draws elliptical arcs in the direction you specify Go to Format gt Drawing Units under angle tab the default setting is counterclockwise First axis endpoint A second axis endpoint B half length of other axis C start angle of arc D and end angle E 7 2 4 Splines Splin
526. w in each layout viewport Turn off the layer containing the layout viewports Plot your layout 13 1 2 Viewing drawings in paper space and model space When you work in paper space on a Layout tab you can still view your drawing in model space First you need to create a layout viewport in paper space this allows you to view your model space objects from paper space Within a layout viewport you can modify the model space objects but it is often more convenient to modify these objects on the Model tab Zooming or panning the drawing in model space or paper space affects the entire drawing unless you use multiple windows or viewports To view a drawing in model space on the Model tab Do one of the following Click the Model tab Click the Model Paper Space toggle in the status bar and then choose Model To view a drawing in paper space on a Layout tab Do one of the following Click one of the Layout tabs Type layout and then press Enter In the prompt box choose Set Type a name for the layout you want to make current and then press Enter Click the Model Paper Space toggle in the status bar For example Click Model or M Tab Name in the status bar to switch to paper space While using a Layout tab type pspace and then press Enter While using a Model tab click the layout viewport JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 13 The first time
527. which extension line is first For angular dimensions the order is defined around the counterclockwise In the following figures the first extension line origin is 1 and the second one is 2 1 rr 7 2 a er rs 1 are text horizontal and text horizontal at text horizontal at second centered along first extension line extension line dimension line If the place text manually when dimensioning option on the Fit tab of the Modify Dimension Style dialog box is chosen as you create dimensions you can place the dimension anywhere inside or outside the extension lines along the dimension line This option is useful when the space between the extension lines is limited Control the Appearance of Dimension Text Dimension text could be comprised of user supplied text prefixes and suffixes provided by the dimension style and generated measurements For example you can add a radium symbol as a prefix to a measurement or add an abbreviation for a unit beyond the text such as cm You can also set the text style and formats of color height for the dimension text Control the Text Style in Dimensions You can set the text style for dimension text on the Text tab of the Modify Dimension Style dialog box You can also specify a dimension text color and a height irrelevant to the height value set by current text style Choose the draw frame around text creates a frame when you create dimension text The text styles applied to dimension
528. wing can be represented as a point relative to a 0 0 0 coordinate point referred to as the origin To draw a twodimensional entity you specify horizontal coordinate positions along the x axis and vertical coordinate positions along the y axis Thus every point on a plane can be represented as a coordinate pair composed of an x coordinate and a y coordinate Positive coordinates are located above and to the right of the origin negative coordinates are located to the left and below the origin The three perpendicular axes of the Cartesian coordinate system When you work in two dimensions you need enter only the x and y coordinates the program assumes that the z axis value is always the current elevation When you work in three dimensions however you must also specify the z axis value When you look at a plan view of your drawing a view from above looking down the z axis extends straight JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 6 up out of the screen at a 90 degree angle to the xy plane Positive coordinates are located above the xy plane and negative coordinates are below the plane All ZWCAD drawings use a fixed coordinate system called the World Coordinate System WCS and every point in a drawing has a specific x y z coordinate in the WCS You can also define arbitrary coordinate systems located anywhere in three dimensional space These are called user coordinate s
529. with extensions named as ctb Note that assigning the color dependent plot style table to a layout is only available when the drawing has been set to use color dependent plot style tables Named plot style tables STB Named plot style tables contain user defined plot styles This plot style plots objects based on the plot style assigned to the object rather than the color The named plot style tables can be assigned to objects or layouts as assigning other properties Named plot styles can be assigned to objects or layers with the same way as any other properties Assign Plot Style Tables to Layouts Controls the plotting style for objects in layouts using different plot styles assigned to each layout The specified plot style tables affect both model space and paper space objects lf you specified named plot style for a drawing each object in the drawing either is assigned a plot style directly or inherits a plot style from its layer lf a xref has been inserted into your current drawing all defined plot style tables will be inserted as well You can assign print style tables globally for all layouts including the Model tab or individually for the Model tab or a Layout tab Assigning a print style table to an individual layout allows you to further customize the layouts you use to print a drawing However assigning different named print style tables to various layouts may result in mismatched print style names In this case objects are
530. xt window do one of the following to get the text field that you want Highlight text using your mouse Press Ctrl Shift arrow keys to highlight text 2 Right click and choose whether to copy or paste TIP You can also copy the entire command history by choosing Copy History 2 3 3 Switch between Dialog Boxes and the Command line Some functions are both provided similarly though the command line and from a dialog box In many cases you can enter a hyphen in front of the command to suppress the dialog box and display prompts on the command line instead For example entering linetype on the command line displays the linetype Manager Entering linetype on the command line displays the equivalent command line options There may be tiny differences between the options in the dialog box and those available on the command line The system variables below affect the display of dialog boxes as well ATTDIA controls whether INSERT uses a dialog box for attribute value entry EXPERT controls whether certain warning dialog boxes are displayed FILEDIA controls the display of dialog boxes used with commands that read and write files For example if FILEDIA is set to 1 OPEN displays the PRED EAMG 6 Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 16 THE USER INTERFACE As dialog box If FILEDIA is set to 0 OPEN displays prompts on the command line Even when you set FILEDIA to 0 you can get a file dialo
531. y profiles control surface and line Most of editing commands can change feature control frames and these feature control frames can be snapped to with the object snap You can also use grips to edit geometric tolerances Unlike dimensions and leaders geometric objects are not associated with geometric objects primary and secondary datum reference letters tolerance value geometric characteristic S mbol in this case posion optional diameter symbol material conditions of tolerance material conditions of datums Material Conditions The second compartment displays tolerance values Depending on control type you can add a diameter symbol prior to the tolerance value and specify a material condition symbol behind this value You can apply material conditions to features that can vary in size shown as follows JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 10 e At maximum material condition symbol M also known as MMC a feature contains the maximum amount of material stated in the limits At MMC a hole has minimum diameter whereas a shaft has maximum diameter Atleast material condition symbol L also Known as LMC a feature contains the minimum amount of material stated in the limits At LMC a hole has maximum diameter whereas a shaft has minimum diameter Regardless of feature size symbol S also known as RFS means a feature can
532. y is 12 x 9 inches Metric A new drawing with the metric measurement system The drawing uses internal default values and the default boundary is 429 x 297 millimeters When you start ZWCAD there are three options for choosing to draw You can start from scratch using default settings you can start from a template file with a preset environment or you can use a wizard to step you through the process in each case you can choose the conventions and defaults you want to use Start a Drawing from Scratch You can start from scratch to create a new drawing quickly by using settings from a default drawing template file To start a drawing from scratch with the Startup dialog box 1 On the File menu click New 2 In the Startup dialog box click Start from Scratch 3 Under Default Settings click either Imperial or Metric Standard toolbar O Command line NEW 3 1 2 Use a Setup Wizard JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 22 CREATE AND SAVE A DRAWING From the Startup dialog box you can select Use a Wizard tab to create a new drawing by the wizard There are two wizard options illuminated as follows Advanced Setup Wizard From this option you can set units of measurement precision of displayed units and grid limits Also specify angle settings such as units of measurement style precision direction and orientation based on template ZWCADiso dwt Quick Se
533. yer s lineweight Each layer uses a default lineweight Lineweights determine the thickness of objects both on the screen and when printed All new layers are assigned the DEFAULT lineweight which is 25 millimeters or 01 inches lf you want a different lineweight assigned to a layer you can easily change it using Layer Properties Manager For example you may want different lineweights on each layer of your drawing to show separate elements such as walls dimensions structural steel and electrical plans Changing the lineweight assigned to a layer changes the lineweight of all objects drawn on that layer with the BYLAYER lineweight JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 68 COORDINATES AND COORDINATE SYSTEM When you create new objects it s a good idea to assign the BYLAYER lineweight to any objects that you draw on that layer unless you want to override the layer lineweight ZWCAD uses the BYLAYER lineweight as the default lineweight setting when you create objects To change the lineweight assigned to one or more layers 1 Choose Format gt Layer 2 Clicks the Lineweight name in the layer list to open Lineweight dialog box from which you can specify the desired Lineweight 3 Clicks OK button Properties toolbar Command line LAYER NOTE You can also assign a specific lineweight to an object which overrides the layer s lineweight setting When you create a
534. yer using the current dimension style Each dimension has an associated dimension style which controls the appearance of the dimension such as the types of arrowheads text style and colors of various components You can modify existing dimension styles by changing any of the dimension variable settings and the new dimension style is visible soon after you confirm the modification You can use the QDIM command to create or edit a series of nonassociative dimensions Parts of a Dimension Dimensions have several distinct elements dimension text dimension lines arrowheads and extension lines JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk CHAPTER 10 dimension line m dimension text arrowhead extension line Dimensions can also contain other optional components A leader is a line leading from a feature of the drawing to an annotation Leaders begin with an arrowhead and you can use them to place a dimension away from the dimension line or to add notes When you create a radial dimension you can add a center mark which is a small cross that marks the center of a circle or an arc or you can add centerlines which are crossing lines that extend out from the center of a circle or an arc Duis autem Leader Center mark Ceniterlines Dimension text a character string that usually indicates the measurement value includes prefixes suffixes and tolerances etc Dimens
535. yoe CONTINUOUS By default a new layer is also visible After you create and name a layer you can change its color linetype visibility and other properties L a JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk COORDINATES AND COORDINATE SYSTEM Layers can have alphanumeric names up to 255 characters long In many cases the layer names you choose are dictated by corporate industry or client standards The Layer Properties Manager sorts layers alphabetically by name To create a new layer 1 Choose Format gt Layer 2 Clicks New button 3 Type a name for the new layer 4 Clicks OK button Properties toolbar Command line LAYER To change a layer name in the current drawing 1 Choose Format gt Layer 2 From the Layer Properties Manager dialog box clicks the name of layer you want to change 3 Types a new name and clicks OK button Properties toolbar aa Command line LAYER NOTE You cannot rename the 0 layer Setting the current layer When you start a drawing objects are created in the current layer By default the layer 0 is set to the current layer but you can also create a new one and make it current Either frozen or xref dependent layer cannot be set to the current layer Any subsequent objects you create are associated with the current layer and use its color and linetype To make a layer current 1 Choose Format gt Layer 2 Selects the layer and click
536. your ZWCAD drawing when you want to keep all the data you work with in one file or if you want to transfer the file to other computers You can embed data from programs that support object linking and embedding JL Systems Group Slottsmollan 302 31 Halmstad Sverige Tel 46 35 7777030 www jl systems dk 338 SHARE DATA BETWEEN DRAWINGS AND APPLICATIONS When you embed data from another program ZWCAD becomes the container for that data The object embedded in the ZWCAD drawing becomes part of the ZWCAD file When you edit the data you open its program from within the ZWCAD drawing Any changes you make to the embedded data exist only in the ZWCAD drawing so it is not necessary to keep that data in a separate file If the data does exist in a separate file the original file does not change when you modify the embedded object in ZWCAD Also changes to the original file do not affect the embedded object in the ZWCAD drawing To embed another program s object into an ZWCAD drawing 1 Open the file that contains the data you want 2 In the file select the data you want to embed in the ZWCAD drawing 3 Choose that program s command to place data on the Clipboard Usually you choose Edit gt Copy 4 In the ZWCAD window display the drawing in which you want to embed the object 5 Choose Edit gt Paste or click the Paste tool on the Standard toolbar The data on the Clipboard is pasted into the drawing as an embedded object The
537. youts pan To shift the view of a drawing without changing magnification PAN paper space One of two primary spaces in which ZWCAD objects reside Paper space is used for creating a finished layout for printing or plotting as opposed to doing drafting or design work You design your paper space viewports using a layout tab Model space is used for creating the drawing You design your model using the Model tab PSPACE PCP file Partial plotter configuration file Plot settings that are stored in a PCP file include pen assignments plotting units paper size plot rotation plot origin scale factor and pen optimization level perspective view Objects in 3D seen by an observer positioned at the viewpoint looking at the view center Objects appear smaller when the distance from the observer at the view point to the view center increases Although a perspective view appears realistic it does not preserve the shapes of objects Parallel lines seemingly converge in the view so measurements cannot be made to scale from perspective views When you are looking at a viewport with a perspective view the UCS icon has a different appearance photorealistic rendering Rendering that resembles a photograph pick button The button on a pointing device that is used to select objects or specify points on the screen For example on a two button mouse it is the left button planar projection Mapping of objects or images onto a plane plan view
538. ystems and can be located anywhere in the WCS and oriented in any direction You can create as many user coordinate systems as you want saving or redefining them to help you construct three dimensional entities By defining a UCS within the WCS you can simplify the creation of most three dimensional entities into combinations of two dimensional entities To help you keep your bearings in the current coordinate system the program displays a coordinate system icon When you begin a new drawing you are automatically in the WCS indicated by the letter Win the icon When you display a drawing in plan view you see the coordinate system icon from the top with the z axis directed straight toward you When you display a three dimensional drawing in a view other than plan view the coordinate system icon changes to reflect your new viewpoint TIP The visible portions of the axes are the positive directions y Y Z WCS icon Plan UCS icon 3D View WCS icon Understanding how coordinates are displayed The current position of the cursor is displayed as x y z coordinates in the status bar and by default updates dynamically as you move the cursor You can toggle the coordinate display to static mode by pressing F6 so that it updates only when you select a point in the drawing 6 2 2 Control the User Coordinate System in 3D When working in three dimensional space you can define a UCS with its own 0 0 0 origin and orientation separate from the
539. zero in lateral tolerance is the same as suppressing zero in the primary and alternate units 10 2 5 Set the Scale for Dimensions Set the scale for dimensions Setting dimension scale depends on the method you use to lay out and plot drawings Dimension scale has effects on the size of dimension geometry relative to the objects in the drawing In addition to text height and arrowhead size dimension scale affects offsets in dimension as well such as the extension line origin offset When you create dimensions it s recommended to set the size and offset to values that represent their actual plotted size However the tolerances measured lengths coordinates and angles cannot be applied to the overall scale factor The method you lay out your drawing determines how to set the dimension scale The method of creating dimensions in a drawing layout is shown as follows Dimension in model space for plotting in model space If you want to create dimensions that are scaled correctly for plotting you have to set the system variable DIMSCALE to the inverse of the desired plot scale For example if the plot scale is 1 4 you have to set DIMSCALE to 4 Dimension in model space for plotting in paper space If you want to create dimensions that are scaled automatically for display in a paper space layout you have to set the DIMSCALE to 0 This method is useful when you encounter the following situations the dimensions in a drawing need to be ref

User's Guide - JL Systems Group

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents